Gadhvai sir Engginearing English. pmd. proof-1 Dt. 11-11 ...gadhaviscurrentaffairsmagazine.com/RecruitmentsPDF/GPSC ENGIN… · E:\Manish\Gadhavi Sir\Gadhvai sir Engginearing English

$Page 1: Gadhvai sir Engginearing English. pmd. proof-1 Dt. 11-11 ...gadhaviscurrentaffairsmagazine.com/RecruitmentsPDF/GPSC ENGIN… · E:\Manish\Gadhavi Sir\Gadhvai sir Engginearing English$
1

E:\Manish\Gadhavi Sir\Gadhvai sir Engginearing English. pmd. proof-1 Dt. 11-11-13 1

ENGGINEARING ENGLISH

1. Ability of a material to resist deformation due tostress is called(a) toughness (b) stiffness(c) plasticity (d) hardness

2. Etching solution used for medium and high carbonsteel, pearlitic steel and cast iron, is(a) nital-2% HNO3 in ethyl alcohol(b) picral - 5% picric acid and ethyl alcohol(c) 1% hydrofluoric acid in water(d) 50% NH2 OH and 50% water

3. Ability of a material to undergo large permanentdeformations in tension, is called(a) toughness (b) stiffness(c) plasticity (d) hardness

4. Ability of a material to resist penetration by anothermaterial, is called(a) stiffness (b) ductility(c) hardness (d) plasticity

5. Property of material due to which it breaks withlittle permanent distortion is called(a) brittleness (b) ductility(c) malleability (d) fatigue

6. In material subjected to fluctuating or repeatedstress, fracture takes place under a stress whosemaximum value is less than the tensile strength ofthe material. This phenomenon is called(a) fatigue (b) creep(c) malleability (d) resilience

7. Hardness can be defined as resistance to(a) wear (b) local penetration(c) scratching (d) all of these

8. Ivlachinability of metals depends upon(a) tensile strength(b) toughness(c) hardness(d) both (a) and (b)

9. Toughness of a material, means its(a) strength (b) fatigue resistance(c) machinability (d) softening

10. Ability of a material to undergo large permanentdeformation in compression, is called(a) ductility (b) malleability

(c) brittleness (d) hardness11. Silicon when added to copper increases its

(a) machinability(b) brittleness(c) electrical conductivity(d) hardness and strength

12. Metals which can be easily drawn into wire is(a) tin (b) copper(c) lead (d) zinc

13. Amount of external energy required to deform anelastic body is called(a) elastic energy (b) plastic energy(c) strain energy (d) none of these

14. A metal which is ductile in tension can becomebrittle(a) in the presence of notches(b) under hydrostatic compression(c) in the presence of embrittlement agents such

as hydrogen(d) all of these

15. Raw material for all iron and steel products is(a) cast iron (b) wrought iron(c) pig iron (d) steel

16. Pig iron is produced from the iron ore(a) magnesite (b) limonite(c) hematite (d) pyrite

17 Metal becomes soft and have a coarse grainedcrystalline structure due to presence of(a) free carbon (b) sulphur(c) silicon (d) none of these

18. Charge of the blast furnace calcined ore (8 parts),lime stone (1 part) and coke(a) 1 part (b) 4 parts(c) 8 parts (d) 10 parts

19. Cast iron is a(a) ductile material(b) malleable material(c) brittle material(d) none of these

2


20. Cupola is used to manufacture(a) pig iron (b) cast iron

(c) mild steel (d) none of these21. Tensile strength of cast iron varies in the range of

(a) 440-500 MPa (b) 500-600 MPa (c) 500-840 MPa (d) 650-1000 MPa22. Properties of cast iron are regulated by

(a) percentage of carbon present(b) control of amount, type, size and

distribution of various carbon formations(c) heat treatment(d) all of these

23. Compressive strength of cast iron as compared totensile strength is(a) more (b) less(c) same (d) none of these

24. Limestone is added in blast furnace to flux(a) silicon oxide (b) carbon(c) sulphur (d) all of these

25. The presence of sulphur in cast iron(a) makes the iron soft and easily machinable(b) reduces the ability of iron to retain carbon

in chemical combination(c) increases hardness and brittleness(d) all of these

26. Presence of sulphur in pig iron makes it(a) hard and brittle(b) machinable(c) malleable(d) casting unsound

27. Chilling heat teatmeant and alloy adding to cast irongenerally(a) increases machinability(b) decreases machinability(c) increases carbon percentage(d) decreases carbon percentage

28. Cast iron produced from white cast iron by annealingprocess is(a) chilled cast iron(b) grey cast iron(c) malleable cast iron(d) nodular cast iron

29. Cast iron produced by adding elements like nickel,chromium, copper and molybdenum to the moltencast iron is(a) chilled cast iron(b) grey cast iron(c) malleable cast iron(d) nodular cast iron

30. Grey cast iron has(a) brittleness(b) low ductility(c) low compressive strength(d) all of these

31. If carbon present in cast iron is partly free andpartly in combined state, it is called(a) white cast iron(b) grey cast iron(c) molten cast iron(d) none of these

32. The basic ingredient of cemented carbide is(a) aluminium oxide(b) vanadium(c) ceramics(d) tungsten oxide

33. Wrought iron(a) is ductile(b) can be easily forged or welded(c) cannot resist sudden and excessive shocks(d) all of these

34. Wrought iron is(a) not used for castings(b) easily hardened(c) used for castings(d) melts at 150°C

35. Percentage of carbon in low carbon steels is(a) 0.1 to 0.15% (b) 0.15 to 0.8%(c) 0.8 to 1.5% (d) more than 1.5%

36. Carbon steels is(a) produced by adding carbon in steel(b) an alloy of iron and carbon with varying

quantities of phosphorus and sulphur(c) purer than the cast iron

3


(d) none of these37. Carbon steel castings are

(a) easily weldable (b) tough and ductile(c) brittle (d) all of these

38. To raise yield point of low carbon steel(a) silicon is added(b) carbon is added(c) phosphorus is added(d) sulphur is added

39. An alloy steel contains(a) more than 0.5% Mn and 0.5% Si(b) less than 0.5% Mn and 0.5% Si(c) more than 0.5% Mn and 0.5% Si(d) less than 0.35% Mn and 0.5% Si

40. Steel which destroy by burning is called(a) alloy steel (b) carbon steel(c) silicon steel (d) killed steel

41. Steel which contain elements for the purpose ofmodifying the mechanical properties of plain carbonsteels is called(a) alloy steel (b) invar(c) stainless steel (d) high speed steel

42. Invar has coefficient of expansion(a) nearly one (b) nearly zero(c) 0.5 (d) none of these

43. Shock resistance steel should have(a) low hardening(b) low wear resistance(c) high wear resistance(d) toughness

44. Chrome steel is widely used for(a) connecting rod(b) motor car crank shaft(c) cutting tools(d) all of these

45. Tensile strength of steel is improved by adding(a) nickel (b) chromium(c) silicon (d) lead

46. Vanadium when added to steel, it(a) increases tensile strength(b) decreases tensile strength(c) decreases compressive strength

(d) none of these47. Percentage of tungsten in high speed steel is

(a) maximum (b) minimum(c) average (d) not is present

48. Cutting tools are manufactured by(a) nickel steel (b) silicon steel(c) chrome steel (d) high speed steel

49. High speed steel should have(a) wear resistance(b) hardness(c) toughness(d) both (a) and (b)

50. 18-4-1 high speed steel contains(a) 18% carbon(b) 4% carbon(c) 1% carbon(d) 0.7% carbon

51. Grain size increases as temperature goes aboveA2 line. When steel is cooled toward the A3 line,these grains in size(a) will increase(b) will decrease if cooled fast(c) will increase if cooled fast(d) none of these

52. Eutectoid composition of carbon steel at roomtemperature is called(a) pearlite (b) ferrite(c) cementite (d) martensite

53. Steel containing 18% chromium and 8% nickel iscalled(a) martensitic stainless steel(b) ferritic stainless steel(c) austenitic stainless steel(d) none of these

54. 18/8 steel consists of(a) 18% nickel and 18% chromium(b) 8% nickel and 18% chromium(c) 18% nickel and 8% chromium(d) 8% nickel and 8% chromium

55. Steel having combination of 6.67% carbon and93.33% iron, is called(a) cementite (b) pearlite

4


(c) martensite (d) austenite56. Pearlite or eutectoid steel have carbon content

(a) below 0.80% (b) 0.8%(c) 1.5% (d) 2%

57. Line A3 on iron-carbon diagram indicates(a) the beginning of transition from austenite

to ferrite(b) completion of austenite transition to ferrite

and pearlite(c) limit of carbon solubility in austenite(d) all of these

58. Steel with carbon above 0.8% is called(a) Eutectoid steel(b) Hyper-tectoid steel(c) Hypo-tectoid steel(d) Austenite

59. Iron carbon alloy containing 1.7 to 4.3% carbon iscalled(a) Eutectoid cast iron(b) Hyper-eutectic cast iron(c) Hypo-eutectic cast iron(d) None of these

60. Iron-carbon alloy containing carbon more than 4.3%,is called(a) eutectic cast iron(b) hyper-eutectic cast iron(c) hypo-eutectic cast iron(d) none of these

61. If steel is quenched in water, the structure obtainedis called(a) pearlite (b) sorbite(c) martensite (d) troosite

62. If steel is cooled in still air, the structure obtainedis called(a) pearlite (b) sorbite(c) toorsite (d) martensite

63. Recrystallisation temperature is one at which(a) crystal start growing in size(b) change of allotropic form takes place(c) new spherical crystals first begin to form

the old deformed ones when a strainedmetal is heated

(d) crystals again begin to appear64. Recrystallisation temperature depends upon

(a) type and purity of metal(b) grain size(c) annealing time(d) all of these

65. Purpose of heat treatment is to(a) improve mechanical and electrical properties(b) increase resistance to wear, heat and corrosion(c) remove gases(d) change the chemical composition(e) all of these

66. Heat treatment process is(a) hardening by quenching(b) normalising(c) annealing(d) tempering(e) all of these

67. Process of heating iron base alloys to approximately40°C above the critical temperature range followedby cooling to below that range in still air at ordinarytemperature is called(a) normalising(b) annealing(c) tempering(d) spheroidising

68. Normalising of steel is done to(a) refine grain structure(b) remove dislocations caused in the internal

structure due to hot working(c) remove strains caused by cold working(d) all of these

69. Heat treatment process used for castings is(a) normalising (b) annealing(c) tempering (d) hardening

70. To relieve internal stresses previously set up inthe metal and to increase machinability of steel,process used is(a) normalising(b) full annealing(c) process annealing(d) hardening

5


71. The hypo-ceutectoid steel is heated from 30°C to50°C above the upper critical temperature and thencooled suddenly in a suitable cooling medium suchas brine water or oil, in the process(a) normalising (b) annealing(c) tempering (d) hardening

72. Case hardening process is(a) carburising (b) cyaniding(c) nitriding (d) all of these

73. Carburising is done on steel with carbonpercentage(a) 0.15% (b) 0.7%(c) 1.5% (d) 2%

74. Nitriding is a process for(a) normalising (b)annealing(c) case hardening (d) tempering

75. Process of reheating the hardened steel to sometemperature below theoretical range, followed byany rate of cooling is called(a) normalising (b) annealing(c) tempering (d) spheroidising

76. Head treatment process used to soften hardenedsteel is(a) normalising (b) annealing(c) tempering (d) spheroidising

77. Heat treatment process usually applied to highcarbon tool steel which are difficult to machine is(a) normalising (b) annealing(c) tempering (d) spheroidising

78. The process in which steel is heated at about C,where the structure consists of entirely austenite,then it is cooled suddenly at a temperature of about250°C to 525°C is called(a) normalising (b) annealing(c) hardening (d) austempering

79. Sorbite is obtained by(a) annealing of steel(b) quenching steel during transformation(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

80. Age hardening generally applied to(a) cast iron

(b) high alloy steel(c) alloys of aluminium, magnesium, nickel

etc.(d) alloys of chromium, silicon etc.

81. Line A on iron-carbon diagram indicates(a) the beginning of transition from austenite to

ferrite(b) completion of austenite transition to ferrite


82. Constituents of Hayness stellite, havingsuperformance than HSS are(a) tungsten, chromium and vanadium(b) tungsten, chromium and cobalt(c) tungsten, molybdneum and cobalt(d) cobalt, nickel and aluminium

83. A reversible changes in an atomic structure of themetal with a corresponding change in the propertiesof steel, is called(a) allotropic(b) polytropic(c) critical point(d) none of these

84. Steel can be hardened only if it is heated above the(a) lowest critical temperature(b) middle critical temperature(c) highest critical temperature(d) none of these

85. When a steel containing more than 0.8% carbonis cooled slowly below the lower critical point, itcontains(a) ferrite mainly(b) pearlite mainly(c) ferrite and pearlite(d) pearlite and cementite

86. The lower critical temperature for steel(a) varies according to carbon content in it(b) is constant(c) depends on the rate of heating(d) none of these

6


87. Temperature at which the change starts on heatingthe steel, is called(a) lower critical temperature(b) upper critical temperature(c) point of recalescence(d) none of these

88. Steel containing 0.8% carbon has(a) no critical point(b) one critical point(c) two critical points(d) three critical points

89. Gamma iron exists in the temperature range of(a) 300°C to 600°C(b) 600°C to 900°C(c) 900°C to 1400°C(d) 1400°C to 1530°C

90. Alpha (a) iron(a) has body centred atomic arrangement(b) is commonly known as ferrite(c) is magnetic (d) all of these

91. In iron-carbon diagram the abcissae is(a) carbon percentage(b) temperature(c) time(d) none of these

92. Referring iron-carbon diagram, iron-carbon alloyscontaining carbon upto 1.7% are termed as(a) steel (b) cast iron(c) wrought iron (d) pig iron

93. Air burning out silicon and manganese during theoperation of a bessemer converter, is indicated by(a) white flames (b) brown smoke(c) red flame (d) none of these

94. Furnace is lined with silica bricks in(a) acidic bessemer process(b) basic bessemer process(c) duplex process(d) L-D process

95. The steel making process used at Tata steel andIron works, Jamshedpur is(a) acidic bessemer process

(b) basic bessemer process(c) duplex process(d) L-D process

96. The steel making process, which is a combinationof acidic bessemer and basic open hearth process,is called(a) duplex process (b) L-D process(c) electric process (d) none of these

97. Steel produced by bessemer process as comparedto that produced by L-D process is(a) better (b) inferior(c) same (d) none of these

98. When the atoms are arranged haphazard in amaterial, it is called(a) amorphous material(b) mesomorphous material(c) crystalline material(d) none of these

99. When the atoms are arranged in definite and orderlymanner in a material, it is called(a) amorphous material(b) mesomorphous material(c) crystalline structure(d) none of these

100. Mesomorphous material is(a) mica (b) glass(c) brass (d) silver

101. The unit cells(a) contain the smallest number of atoms which

when taken together have all the propertiesof the crystals of the particular metal

(b) have the same orientation and their similarfaces are parallel

(c) are the smallest parallelopiped which couldbe transposed in three corodinate directionsto build up the space lattice

(d) all of these102. In a unit cell of face centered cubic space lattice,

the total number of atoms is(a) 6 (b) 9(c) 14 (d) 24

103. If a unit cell of structure having fourteen atoms

7


out of which eight atom are located at the cornersof the cube and six atoms at the centres of sixfaces of the cube, then the structure is called(a) body centered cubic space lattice(b) face centered cubic space lattice(c) close packed hexagonal space lattice(d) none of these

104. A space lattice found in gamma-iron is(a) body centered cubic space lattice(b) face centered cubic space lattice(c) close packed hexagonal space lattice(d) none of these

105. Face centered cubic space lattice is found in(a) a-iron, chromium, tungsten and molybdenum(b) g-iron, aluminium, copper, lead, silver and

nickel(c) zinc, cobalt, cadmium, antimony and bismath(d) none of these

106. Most ductile lattice is(a) body centered cubic space lattice(b) face centered cubic space lattice(c) close packed hexagonal space lattice(d) none of these

107. Micro-structure of a material is generally examinedby(a) naked eye(b) microscope(c) X-ray and electron diffraction(d) optical microscope

108. Electronic structure of a material is generallyexamined by(a) naked eye(b) microscope(c) X-ray and electron diffraction(d) spectroscope techniques

109. If a low carbon steel is heated upto lower criticaltemperature(a) the average grain size will be minimum(b) the average grain size will be maximum(c) the grain size does not change(d) the grain size increases rapidly

110. Quenching of steel from the upper critical pointresults in a(a) fine grained structure(b) coarse grained structure(c) crystal structure(d) none of these

111. Coarse grained steels are(a) very tough (b) less tough(c) denser (d) tighter

112. Copper-zinc alloy is(a) brass (b) bronze(c) lead (d) zinc

113. German silver contains(a) 60% copper and 40% zinc(b) 50% copper and 40% zinc(c) 60.45% copper, 35.2% zinc and 4.35%

nickel(d) 70% copper and 30% zinc

114. Solder is an alloy of(a) copper and tin(b) lead and tin(c) lead and copper(d) aluminium and copper

115. Muntz metal contains(a) 60% copper and 40% zinc(b) 50% copper and 50% zinc(c) 70% copper and 30% zinc(d) 80% copper and 20% zinc

116. Gun metal contains(a) 60% copper and 40% zinc(b) 88% copper 10% tin and 2% zinc(c) 70% copper and 30% zinc(d) none of these

117. Permalloy is(a) an alloy similar to carbides(b) a non ferrous alloy containing nickel

copper and chromium(c) a nickel and iron alloy having high

permeability(d) none of these

118. Monel metal contains

8


(a) 68% nickel, 29% copper and 3% otherconstituents

(b) 70% nickel, 30% chromium(c) 80% nickel, 14% chromium, 6% iron(d) none of these

119. Constantan alloy consists of(a) copper and nickel(b) copper and aluminium(c) nickel and molybdenum(d) nickel and aluminium

120. Nichrome is an alloy containing(a) nickel and chromium(b) nickel, chromium and silver(c) nickel, chromium and copper(d) nickel, chromium and iron

121. Beryllium bronze contains(a) 97.25% copper and 2.75% beryllium(b) 90% copper and 10% beryllium(c) 80% copper and 20% beryllium(d) none of the above

122. Beryllium bronze has(a) high yield point (b) high fatigue(c) low fatigue limit (d) both (a) and (b)

123. The deradation of plastics is accelerated by(a) high ambients(b) dampness(c) corrosive atmosphere(d) ultraviolet radiation

124. Aluminium alloy commonly used for utensils is(a) duralumin (b) y-alloy(c) babbit alloy (d) hindalium

125. Manganese bronze has(a) high resistance to corrosion(b) good wearing qualities and high elasticity(c) good cold working property(d) all of these

126. Case hardening is the only method suitable forhardening(a) high alloy steel (b) high carbon steel(c) low-carbon steel (d) high speed steel

127. Bearing alloy preferred for light loads bearing is(a) phosphorus bronze

(b) white metal(c) monel metal(d) brass

128. Alloys of copper with lead increases(a) hardness(b) machinability(c) weldability(d) strength and ductility

129. Alloying aluminium with silicon increases its(a) hardness(b) casting ability(c) tensile strength(d) all of these

130. Alloy of copper and nickel increases(a) hardness (b) strength(c) machinability (d) weldability

131. Corrosion resistance of steel is increased by alloyingwith(a) sulphur(b) silicon(c) cobalt and vanadium(d) tungsten

132. Polymers can(a) be vaporised and recycled(b) not be vaporised and recycled(c) be vaporised but cannot be recyeled(d) neither be vaporised but can be recycled

133. Thermosetting plastics are materials which(a) becomes soft on application of heat and can

be moulded again(b) do not become hard with the application of

heat and pressure and no chemical changeoccurs

(c) permanently set with heat and pressureand can not deformed when again subjectto heat

(d) produced on synthesis basic134. Thermo-plastic materials are produced by

(a) die-casting process(b) shell moudlding process(c) cold forming process(d) injection moulding process

9


135. Thermo plastic materials cannot be produced by(a) injection moulding process(b) extrusion process(c) blow moulding process(d) both (a) and (b)

136. Difference between theilno plastic and thermo settingmaterials is of(a) mechanical behaviour(b) thermal behaviour(c) glass transition temperature(d) none of these

137. A material is known as allotropic or polymorphic ifit(a) has a fixed structure under’all conditions(b) exists in several crystal forms at different

temperatures(c) responds to heat treatment(d) has its atoms distributed in a random pattern

138. Which of the following represents the allotropicforms of iron ?(a) alpha iron, beta iron and gamma iron(b) alpha iron and beta iron(c) body centred cubic a-iron and face centred

cubic a-iron(d) alpha iron, gamma iron and delta iron

139. Beryllium is used chiefly as an alloy addition tocopper to produce(a) precipitation-hardenable alloy(b) high-strength alloy(c) none-magnetic and non-sparking alloy(d) all of these

140. Annealing of white cast iron results in the productionof(a) Malleable iron(b) Nodular iron(c) Speroidal iron(d) Grey iron

141. Maximum percentage of carbon in austenite is(a) 0.025% (b) 0.26%(c) 0.8% (d) 2.1%

142. The basic constituents of Hastalloy are(a) aluminium, copper, etc.

(b) nickel, molybdenum etc.(c) nickel, copper, etc.(d) all of these

143. A cold chisel is made of(a) mild steel(b) cast iron(c) H.S.S.(d) high carbon steel

144. Polysters belong to the grop of(a) thermoplastic plastics(b) thermosetting plastics(c) phenolics(d) PVC(e) all of these

145. Hardness of matensite is about(a) RC 65 (b) RC 48(c) RC 57 (d) RC 80

146. Carbon in iron is an example of(a) substitutional solution(b) interstitial solid solution(c) inter metallic compound(d) all of these

147. The machinability of steel is increased by(a) silicon and sulphur(b) phosphorus, lead and sulphur(c) sulphur, graphite and aluminium(d) phosphorus and aluminium

148. Heavy duty leaf and coil springs contain carbon ofthe order of(a) 0.2% (b) 0.5%(c) 0.8% (d) 1.6%

149. Which one of the following metals would work-harden more quickly than the others ?(a) Copper (b) Steel(c) Lead (d) Silver

150. In the cubic crystal system, the interface angles are(a) a = [3 = 90° = y = 120°(b) a = y # 90°(c) a = = y = 90°(d) a = = 90° # y

151. Interface angles, a = 13 = = 90° are in the crystalsystem

10


(a) cubic(b) tetragonal(c) orthogonal(d) all the above

152. Atom at the center of BCC structure is(a) 1 (b) 2(c) 4 (d) 6

153. Corundum contains more than 95%(a) Steel (b) A120 3(c) Sio2 (d) MgO

154. If a refractory contains high content of silica, itmeans refractory is(a) acidic (b) basic(c) neutral (d) brittle

155. Elinvar, and alloy used in precision instruments, hairsprings for watches, etc. contains which of thefollowing element as principal alloying element(a) iron (b) copper(c) zinc (d) nickel

154. White metal contains(a) 63 to 67% nickel and 30% copper(b) 88% copper and 10% tin and rest zinc(c) alloy of tin, lead, cadmium(d) silver and chromium

155. Babbit metal is a(a) lead base alloy(b) tin base alloy(c) both (a) and (b) above(d) none of the above

156. Pearlite is a combination of(a) ferrite and cementite(b) cementite and gamma iron(c) ferrite and austenite(d) ferrite and iron graphite

157. The hardest known material is(a) ceramic (b) high speed steel(c) diamond (d) cemented carbide

158. All of the following comparisons between metalsmetal alloys and ceramics are true except(a) ceramic compounds crystallize more slowly

than metallic compounds

(b) ceramic compounds have higher meltingtemperatures than metallic compounds

(c) metallic compounds are better conductors ofcurrent than ceramic compounds at highertemperatures.

(d) ceremic compounds are able to resistgreater tensile stresses than metalliccompounds at room temperatures.

159. Based on the cohesive energy of an ionic solid,which of the following is not a property of the ionicsolid ?(a) If forms relatively stable and hard crystals(b) It is a poor electric conductor(c) It has a high vaporization temperature(d) None of these

160. Forging iron at temperature below therecystallization temperature will increase thehardeness of iron because(a) internal stresses do not appear in the iron(b) surface defects such as dislocations are

formed(c) surface shrinkage from the forging operation

puts pressure on the interior of the iron(d) the increase in the density will cause pores

and cavities in the metal to disappear.161. The microstructure composition of pearlite for an

Fe3C diagram consists of(a) carbon dissolved in the a iron having a body

centred cubic structure(b) carbon dissoved in y iron having a body-

centred cubic structure(c) a mixture of body-centred a - iron having a

face-centred gamma iron(d) carbon dissolved in body-centred a- iron

and an Fe3C compound of higher carbon162. A high ‘re superconductor has the transition

temperature around(a) 400 K (b) 90K(c) 20K (d) 4 K.

163. The fatigue failure of a material can be avoided by(a) coating the surface(b) shot peening(c) nitriding

11


(d) any of these164. For molybdenum, which has a body-centered cubic

lattice structure, the number of atoms per unit cellis(a) 1 (b) 2(c) 4 (d) 6

165. Alluminium has a higher atomic packing factorthan molybdenum by about 6%. This means that(a) aluminium is heavier than molybdenum(b) ratio of the atoms per unit cell is lower in

aluminium(c) ratio of the number of atoms per unit cell to

size of the cell is roughly equal to both(d) distance between atoms are equal for both.

166. The crystal structure of most of the common metalis(a) hexagonal (b) cubic(c) orthorhombic (d) none of these

167. The electronic configuration of an iron atom is(a) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s23p6 3d6 4s2(b) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s23p6 3d3 4s2(c) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s23p6 3d8 4s2(d) None of these

168. Dislocations in materials are(a) point defect (b) line defect(c) planer defect (d) surface defect

169. Line imperfection in a crystal is called(a) Schottky defect (b) Frenkel defect(c) Edge dislocation (d) Miller defect

170. Gunmetal is an alloy of(a) 80% Cu + 15% Zn + 5% Sn(b) 86% Cu + 9% Zn + 5% Sn(c) 88% Cu + 2% Zn + 10% Sn(d) 70% Cu + 10% Zn + 20% Sn

171. Silicon steel is widely used in(a) cutting tools(b) dies and punches(c) electrical industry(d) chemical industry

172. Which of the following metal has the lowest meltingpoint ?(a) Antimony (b) Tin

(c) Silver (d) Zinc173. Which bond gives the softest bond ?

(a) Silicate bond(b) Shellac bond(c) Vitrified bond(d) All of equal strength

174. The temperature at or above which a ferromagneticmeterial becomes paramgnetic is called(a) Critical temperature(b) Inversion temperature(c) Curie temperature(d) Debye temperature

175. Magnetic permeability is maximum for(a) Diamagnetic (b) Paramagnetic(c) Ferromagnetic (d) None’ of these

176. Out of dia, pars, and ferromagnetism, which of thefollowing is the universal property of all substance?(a) Diamagnetism (b) Paramgnetism(c) Ferromagnetism (d) All of these

177. When the green light is made incident on a metal,photoelectrons are emitted by yellow light, whatwill happen if red light is used ?(a) Less electrons will be emitted(b) More electrons will be emitted(c) No electrons will emit(d) All of these

178. In a transistor region is lightly doped and region isheavily doped.(a) base, emitter (b) collector, base(c) emitter, collector (d) emitter, base

179. Which of the following is not true for metalloids ?(a) The are borderline elements that exhibit both

metallic and non-metallic properties to someextent.

(b) They usually act as electron donors with non-metals and as electron acceptors with metals

(c) Some of these elements are Boron, Siliconand Germanium.

(d) They are good conductors of heat andelectricity

180. Which of the following regions of the spectrumwould be used to determine the structure ofcrystalline solids ?

12


(a) Microwave (b) Infrared(c) Visible (d) X-ray

181. A p-type germanium semiconductor is doped with(a) Selenium (b) Gallium(c) Arsenic (d) Silicon

182. An electrician’s solder is generally an alloy of(a) iron and mercury (b) zinc and copper(c) copper and lead (d) tin and lead

183. A characteristic of the structure of metallic atomsis that(a) they tend to share their electrons with other

atoms(b) their atoms are smaller and more compact

than those of non-metallic elements(c) their outermost orbital of elecdtrons is nearly

complete, and they attract electrons from otheratoms.

(d) the small number of electrons in theiroutermost orbital are weakly held andeasily lost.

184. Which of the following statements is true of thecritical temperature of a pure substance ?(a) The critical temperature is the temperature

above which the liquid phase of a puresubstance can exist.

(b) The critical temperature is thetemperature above which the luquid phaseof a pure substance cannot exist.

(c) The critical temperature is the temperaturebelow which the liquid phase of a puresubstance cannot exist.

(d) The critical temperature is the temperatureat which all three phases can coexist.

185. What are the constituent of Phosphor bronze(a) Nickel, copper and cobalt(b) Copper, zinc and manganese(c) Copper, tin and phosphorous(d) Aluminium, copper and nickel.

186. Which alloy of aluminium is often used for aeroplaneand automobile parts ?(a) Duralumin(b) Magnalium(c) RR-53

(d) Aluminium bronze187. Presence of sulphur in cast iron

(a) promotes formation of graphite(b) reduces fluidity during melting(c) increases strength(d) reduces oxidation

188. Ferromagnetic materials when heated to temperatureabove Curie temperature(a) behave as paramagnetic materials(b) become ferrites(c) tend towards superconductivity(d) become insulators for heat and electricity

189. Which of the following is a copper free alloy ?(a) Brass(b) Phosphor bronze(c) Invar(d) Muntz metal

190. Scintillation is(a) variation of physical dimensions under the

influence of magnetic field(b) deionisation of gases under low pressures(c) production of flashes of light by some

substances when struck by alpha, beta orgamma rays

(d) change in dielectric constant of substanceswith change in humidity

191. German silver contains(a) 12.5 % silver (b) 5% silver(c) 1% silver (d) No silver

192. Which of the following thermocouple is capable ofmeasuring highest temperature ?(a) Iridium — rhodium(b) Platinum — rhodium(c) Chromel — alumel(d) Iron — constantan.

193. Wood is a(a) granular material(b) cellular material(c) homogeneous material(d) amorphous material

194. If a material is a glass, then you know it must(a) contain silica (SiO2).

13


(b) be a ceramic, since all ceramics are glass andglass is a kind of ceramic

(c) have a monoclinic crystal structure.(d) have no long-range crystalline lattice

structure.195. An initially long, straight copper bar is deformed

into the shape of the letter S at room temperature.The bar is then annealed (heated) in a furnace.Then(a) number density of dislocations in the bar

will be reduced, but the shape of the barremains unchanged.

(b) bar will straighten out again, sincedislocations are eliminated by the annealing.

(c) bar will straighten out again, since the numberof dislocation is increased by annealing

(d) nothing changes on an atomic,microstructural, or macroscopic scale in thebar. The bar just gets hot.

196. The Wiedemann-Franz law states that, the ratioof thermal conductivity to electrical conductivity fora material is approximately constant, independentof the material for a fixed temperature. Moreover,as temperature changes, the ratio of thermalconductivity to electrical conductivity for a materialis directly proportional to the temperature of thematerial. Which of the following is true of theWiedemann- Franz law ?I. The Wiedemann-Franz law applies only to

ceramics and plasticsII. The Wiedemann-Franz law applies best to

elemental metals.III. The Wiedemann-Franz law is based on the

free electron theory of metals, in which boththermal energy and electrical charge aretransported primarily by free electrons.

IV. The Wiedemann-Franz law is based on thePauling’s rules for electronegativity, inwhichelectrical conductivity and thermalconductivity of ceramic an plastic materialsare related to the percentage of ionicity ofthe atomic bonds in the structure.

(a) I only (b) II only(c) II and III (d)I, II, III and IV

197. Gold, which has an atomic radius of 0.14 nm,crystallizes in a FCC structure. The latticeparameter of gold is(a) same as the atomic radius.(b) 0.407 nm(c) 0.333 nm(d) 0.576 nm

--------------197. Strength of a material is its ability to resist

(a) deformation due to stress(b) fracture due to high load(c) external forces applied with yielding or

break down(d) none of the above

198. Ability of material to resist fracture due to highimpact load is called(a) toughness (b) stiffness(c) plasticity (d) hardness

199. Property of material due to which they can be drawninto wires, is called(a) elasticity (b) plasticity(c) stiffness (d) ductility

200. Ability of a material to retain the deformationpermanently is called(a) stiffness (b) ductility(c) hardness (d) plasticity

201. Property of material due to which it can be rolledor hammered into thin sheets is called(a) brittleness (b) ductility(c) malleability (d) fatigue

202. Property of material due to which recovery afterunloading is complete but instantaneous, is called(a) elasticity (b) plasticity(c) anelasticity (d) enelasticity

13. If a material sustains steady loads for long periodsof time, the material will continue to deform untilthey may tend to fracture under the same load.This phenomenon is called(a) fatigue (b) creep(c) malleability (d) resilience

15. If a material is heated, its toughness(a) increases (b) decreases(c) remains same (d) none of these

14


17. By hardness, a material can(a) cut another metal(b) be drawn into wires(c) be rolled or hammered into thin sheets(d) resist fracture due to high impact loads

19. With increase in the hardness of material elasticrecovery after deformation(a) increases (b) decreases(c) remains same (d) none of these

21. Ability of a material to exhibit considerable elasticrecovery on release of load, is called(a) toughness (b) stiffness(c) resilience (d) hardness

23. Stress-concentration occurs when a body issubjected to(a) extensive stress(b) non-uniform stress(c) reverse stress(d) fluctuating stress

25. When a body recovers its original dimensions onremoving the load, it is called(a) elastic (b) plastic(c) brittle (d) none of these

27. A metal which is brittle in tension can become ductile(a) in the presence of notches(b) under hydrostatic compression(c) in the presence of embrittlement agents such

as hydrogen(d) all of these

29. First product of the blast furnace in the process ofconverting iron ore into useful metal byreduction, iscalled(a) cast iron (b) wrought iron(c) pig iron (d) steel

31. Blast furnace is used to produce(a) cast iron (b) wrought iron(c) pig iron (d) steel

33. Carbon in the pig iron varies from(a) 4 to 5% (b) 2 to 4%(c) 5 to 8% (d) 5 to 10%

35. In blast furnace Bosh is the(a) portion below its widest cross section

(b) smelting zone(c) hottest part(d) all of these

37. Iron alloy having carbon more than 2% is called(a) cast iron(b) high carbon steel(c) mild steel(d) none of these

39. Diamond’s weight is expressed in terms of carats.One carat is equal to(a) 1 mg (b) 20 mg(c) 200 mg (d) 350 mg

41. Tensile strength of cast iron varies in the range of(a) 440-500 MPa (b) 500-600 MPa (c) 500-840 MPa (d) 650-1000 MPa

43. Property of cast iron is(a) good wear resistance(b) good casting characteristic(c) excellent machinability(d) high compressive strength(e) all of these

45. Elastic limit of cast iron as compared to ultimatebreaking strength is(a) half(b) double(c) approximately same(d) noneof these

47. Visco elastic behaviour is common in(a) rubber(b) plastics(c) crystalline materials(d) non-crystalline organic polymers

49. Silicon steel is widely used in(a) cutting tools(b) connecting rods(c) electrical industry(d) chemical industry

53. Chilled cast iron is produced(a) by quick cooling of molten cast iron(b) by adding magnesium to molten cast iron(c) from white cast iron by annealing(d) none of these

15


55. Chilled cast iron is(a) soft on surface(b) machined freely(c) highly resistance to wear(d) all of these

57. Cast iron produced by adding magnesium to moltencast iron is(a) chilled cast iron(b) grey cast iron(c) malleable cast iron

(d) nodular cast iron59. If carbon present in cast iron is mostly in the free

state, it is called(a) white cast iron(b) grey cast iron(c) molten cast iron(d) none of these

61. If carbon present in cast iron is mostly in thecombined state, it is called(a) white cast iron(b) grey cast iron(c) molten cast iron(d) none of these

63. Material which can withstand maximum shockswithout failure is called(a) white cast iron(b) grey cast iron(c) molten cast iron(d) none of these

65. Grey cast iron as compared to white cast iron is(a) harder (b) softer(c) same (d) none of these

67. Wrought iron is(a) least resistant to corrosion(b) highly resistant to corrosion(c) soft(d) hard

69. Percentage of carbon in carbon steels is(a) 0.1 to 0.8% (b) 0.35 to 0.45%(c) 1.8 to 4.2% (d) 0.1 to 1.5%

71. Percentage of carbon in high carbon steels is(a) 0.1 to 0.15% (b) 0.15 to 0.8%

(c) 0.8 to 1.5% (d) more than 1.5%73. In carbon steel castings, the peicentage of

(a) carbon is below 1.7%(b) carbon is between 1.7 to 2%(c) alloying elements is controlled(d) none of these

75. Hardness of steel depends on(a) amount of carbon present(b) heating temperature before quenching(c) shape and distribution of carbide in iron(d) all of these

77. To make low carbon steel tougher and harder(a) silicon is added(b) carbon is added(c) phosphorus is added(d) sulphur is added

79. Alloy steel as compared carbon steel is more(a) tough(b) strong(c) fatigue resistance(d) all of these

81. As per I.S.I. specification, phosphorus content P32mean(a) is maximum and equal to 32%(b) is minimum and equal to 32%(c) and sulphur contents are maximum and

each equal to 32%(d) is equal to 32%

83. Alloy steel containing 36% nickel is called(a) invar (b) stainless steel(c) high speed steel (d) none of these

85. Shock resistance of steel is increased by adding(a) carbon(b) aluminium(c) nickel chromium(d) cobalt

87. In steel, main alloy causing corrosion resistance is(a) manganese (b) vanadium(c) chromium (d) cobalt

89. Machining properties of steel are improved by adding(a) nickel(b) chromium

16


(c) silicon(d) sulphur, lead and phosphorus

91. Depth hardness of steel is increased by adding(a) nickel (b) chromium(c) silicon (d) lead

93. Corrosion resistance of steel is increased by adding(a) silicon(b) nickel and chromium(c) vanadium and cobalt(d) none of these

95. Tungsten when added to steel, its critical temperature(a) increases (b) decreases(c) remains same (d) none of these

97. In high speed steel, tungsten can be replaced by(a) chromium (b) vanadium(c) molybdenum (d) cobalt

99. Ferrite appears under microscope as(a) dark (b) white(c) light (d) finger prin

101. 18-4-1 high steel contains(a) Vanadium 18%, chromium 4% and tungsten

1%(b) Vanadium 4%, chromium 18% and tungsten

1%(c) Vanadium 1%, chromium 4% and

tungsten 18%(d) Vanadium 18%, chromium 1% and tungsten

4%103. 18-4-1 high speed steel contains maximum

percentage of(a) vanadium (b) chromium(c) tungsten (d) iron

105. Essential gradient of any hardened steel is(a) carbon (b) cementite(c) Martensite (d) pearlite

107. Steel containing 11 to 14% chromium and 0.35%carbon is called(a) martensitic stainless steel(b) ferritic stainless steel(c) austenitic stainless steel(d) none of these

109. Steel containing 15 to 20% nickel and 0.1% carbonis called(a) martensitic stainless steel(b) ferritic stainless steel(c) austenitic stainless steel(d) none of these

111. Steel having combination of 87% ferrite and 13%cementite is called(a) Pearlite (b) Martensite(c) Austenite (d) none of these

113. With increase of percentage of carbon in iron,amount of cementite(a) increases (b) decreases(c) remains same (d) uncertain

115. Steel containing pearlite and ferrite is(a) tough (b) hard(c) soft (d) ductile

117. Steel with carbon below 0.8% is called(a) Eutectoid steel(b) Hyper-tectoid steel(c) Hypo-tectoid steel(d) Austenite

119. Hardness steel depends upon amount of(a) Pearlite (b) Ferrite(c) Cementite (d) Martensite

121. A phase transformation in which all the liquid phasetransforms on cooling to two solid phasessimultaneously, is called(a) Eutectic (b) Hyper-eutectic(c) Hypo-eutectic (d) None of these

123. If steel is slowly cooled in furnace, the structureobtained is called(a) pearlite (b) sorbite(c) martensite (d) troosite

125. If steel is quenched in oil during transformation,the structure obtained is called(a) pearlite (b) sorbite(c) toorsite (d) martensite

127. Process of austempering results in the formationof(a) martensitic structure(b) pearlite structure

17


(c) bainite structure(d) toorsite structure

129. Temperature at which the first tiny new grainappears, is called(a) melting temperature(b) recrystallisation temperature(c) boiling temperature(d) none of these

131. Purpose of heat treatment is to(a) produce hard surface on a ductile interior(b) improve machinability(c) change grain size(d) relieve internal stresses(e) all of these

133. In heat treatment process, to obtain certain desirableproperties(a) heating of metal is done in a solid state(b) cooling of metal is done in a solid state(c) heating or cooling of metal is done in a

solid state(d) none of these

135. Heat treatment(a) is effective only with certain alloys(b) depends upon cooling rate(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

137. By normalising of steel, its(a) ultimate tensile strength increases(b) yield point increases(c) ductility decreases(d) all of these

139. The defect causing slip by which most metals deformplastically is known as(a) strain hardening(b) dislocation(c) fracture(d) none of the above

141. The hypo-eutectoid steel is heated 30°C to 50°Cabove the upper critical temperature and then cooledslowly in the furnace, in(a) normalising(b) full annealing

(c) process annealing(d) hardening

143. Annealing of steel is done to(a) soften the metal(b) improve machinability(c) refine grain structure(d) relieve internal stresses(e) all of these

145. Process of production of articles having a softductile interior and a very hard surface, is called(a) hardening(b) tempering(c) case-hardening(d) annealing

147. Process of inducing carbon to low carbon steel toget a hard surface, is known as(a) carburising (b) cyaniding(c) nitriding (d) flame hardening

149. Process of adding carbon and nitrogen to increasehardness at the surface is called(a) carburising (b) cyaniding(c) nitriding (d) none of these

151. Case hardening is(a) done to get a soft ductile interior with a

very hard surface(b) done to get a hard ductile interior with a

very hard surface(c) followed by tempering(d) none of these

153. Process in which steel is heated in a molten saltbath having temperature 250°C to 500°C above thecritical temperature, then quenched into a moltenbath at sufficient rate between 200°C to 450°C,held there for sufficient time and cooled to roomtemperature, is called(a) normalising (b) annealing(c) tempering (d) spheroidising

155. The process in which the steel is heated slightlyabove the lower critical temperature and then cooledslowly to a temperature of 600°C is called(a) normalising(b) annealing

18


(c) tempering(d) spheroidising

157. Heat treatment process which decreases hardnessand tensile strength but increases machinability is(a) normalising (b) annealing(c) tempering (d) spheroidising

159. Line Aim on iron-carbon diagram indicates(a) the beginning of transition from austenite to

ferrite(b) completion of austenite transition to ferrite


161. Advantage of austempering is(a) more uniform micro structure is obtained(b) warping and distortions are avoided(c) quenching cracks are avoided(d) all of these

163. Age hardening is related to(a) cast iron (b) duralumin(c) stainless steel (d) brass

167. In flame hardening, the flame used is of(a) oil burner(b) gas burner(c) oxy-acetylene(d) none of these

169. Changes occurring at the critical points are called(a) allotropic (b) polytropic(c) critical point (d) structure

171. Critical points for steels(a) may change in number on heating or cooling(b) causes change in physical properties(c) causes change in chemical composition of

steel(d) all of these

173. When a steel containing less than 0.8% carbon iscooled slowly from temperature above or within thecritical range, it contains(a) ferrite mainly(b) pearlite mainly(c) ferrite and pearlite(d) pearlite and cementite

175. When a steel containing less than 0.85% carbonis cooled slowly below the lower critical point, itcontains(a) ferrite mainly(b) pearlite mainly(c) ferrite and pearlite(d) pearlite and cementite

177. The upper critical temperature for steel(a) varies according to carbon content in it(b) is constant(c) depends on the rate of heating(d) none of these

179. Temperature at which the change ends on heatingthe steel, is called(a) lower critical temperature(b) upper critical temperature(c) point of recalescence(d) none of these

181. Lower critical point for all steels is(a) 600°C (b) 723°C(c) 900°C (d) 91400°C

183. Alpha iron exists at(a) below 768°C(b) between 768°C to 900°C(c) between 900°C to 1400°(d) between 1400°C to 1530°C

185. Delta iron exists in the temperature range of(a) 0°C to 768°C (b) 768°C to 900°C(c) 900°C to 1400°C (d) 1400°C to 1530°C

189. Iron-carbon equilibrium diagram(a) correlates the microstructure and

properties of steel and cast iron(b) indicates the phase changes occurring during

heating and cooling(c) is made by plotting carbon percentage along

x-axis and temperature along y-axis(d) all of these

191. Process of reducing the ore with carbon in thepresence of a flux is called(a) quenching(b) smelting(c) shaping

19


(d) none of these193. The silicon and manganese had burnt and carbon

has started oxidising during the operation of abessemer converter, is indicated by(a) white flames (b) brown smoke(c) red flame (d) none of these

195. Furnace is lined with a mixture of tar and burntdolomite bricks in process(a) acidic bessemer(b) basic bessemer(c) duplex(d) L-D

197. The steel making process used at Rourkela steelplant is(a) acidic bessemer process(b) basic bessemer process(c) duplex process(d) L-D process

199. Phosphorus and sulphur in steel making can beremoved by(a) acidic bessemer process(b) basic bessemer process(c) duplex process(d) L-D process

201. Steel may be manufactured by(a) bessemer process(b) duplex process(c) open hearth process(d) all of these

203. When the atoms are arranged regularly in somedirection but not in others, in a material, it is called(a) amorphous material(b) mesomorphous material(c) crystalline structure(d) none of these

207. Structure of common glass is(a) amorphous(b) partially crystalline(c) fully crystalline(d) none of these

209. In a unit cell of body centered cubic space lattice,the total number of atoms is

(a) 6 (b) 9(c) 14 (d) 24

211. If a unit cell of structure having nine atoms outof which one atom is located at the centre of cubeand eight atoms are located at the corners of thecube, then the structure is called(a) body centered cubic space lattice(b) face centered cubic space lattice(c) hexagonal closed packed space lattice(d) none of these

213. A space lattice found in cc-iron is called(a) body centered cubic space lattice(b) face centered cubic space lattice(c) close packed hexagonal space lattice(d) none of these

215. Body centered cubic space lattice is found in(a) X-iron, chromium, tungsten and

molybdenum(b) Y-iron, aluminium, copper, lead, silver and

nickel(c) zinc, cobalt, cadmium, antimony and bismath(d) none of these

217. Close packed hexogonal space lattice is found in(a) a-iron, chromium, tungsten and molybdenum(b) g-iron, aluminium, copper, lead, silver and

nickel(c) zinc, cobalt, cadmium, antimony and

bismath(d) none of these

219. Structure of a material which can be examined bynaked eye is(a) macro-structure(b) micro-structure(c) atomic structure(d) grain structure

221. Crystal structure of material is generally examinedby(a) naked eye(b) microscope(c) optical microscope(d) X-ray and electron diffraction

223. An allotropic material has

20


(a) fixed structure at all temperatures(b) atoms distributed in random pattern(c) different crystal structures at different

temperatures(d) none of these

225. If low carbon steel is heated upto criticaltemperature, the(a) average grain size will be minimum(b) average grain size will be maximum(c) grain size does not change(d) grain size increases rapidly

227. Slow cooling of steel from the upper critical pointresults in a(a) fine grained structure(b) coarse grained structure(c) crystal structure(d) none of these

229. Fine grained steels are(a) brittle (b) ductile(c) tighter (d) all of these

231. Bronze is an alloy of(a) copper and zinc(b) copper and tin(c) copper, tin and zinc(d) none of these

233. German silver contains(a) 1% silver (b) 5% silver(c) 10% silver (d) no silver

235. An example of brass is(a) muntz metal (b) gun metal(c) delta metal (d) none of the above

237. Example of bronze is(a) muntz metal (b) gun metal(c) delta metal (d) none of these

239. In corrosion resistance properties, bronze ascompared to brass is(a) superior (b) inferior(c) same (d) none of these

241. Monel metal consists of(a) nickel, lead and tin(b) nickel and copper(c) nickel, zinc and copper

(d) nickel, zinc and aluminium243. Hast alloy consists of

(a) copper and nickel(b) copper and aluminium(c) molybdenum and nickel(d) nickel and aluminium

245. Inconel is alloy containing(a) nickel, copper and zinc(b) nickel, chromium and iron(c) nickel and chromium(d) nickel, chromium and copper

247. Nichrome contains iron as compared to Inconel is(a) more (b) less(c) same (d) none of these

249. Silicon bronze contains(a) 96% copper, 3% silicon and 1% Mn(b) 96% copper, 1% silicon and 3% Mn(c) 97.25% copper, 1.75% silicon and 1% Mn(d) none of the above

251. Babbit metal is(a) copper base alloy(b) tin base alloy(c) cadmium base alloy(d) none of these

253. Which of the following is used for imitation jwellery?(a) Duralumin(b) Aluminium bronze(c) Gun metal(d) Silicon bronze

255. Phosphorus bronze has(a) high resistance to corrosion(b) good wearing qualities and high elasticity(c) good cold working property(d) all of these

257. Dow metal is an alloy of(a) copper, aluminium and magnesium(b) copper, zinc and molybdenum(c) tin, lead and antimony(d) none of these

259. Low carbon steel can be hardened by(a) hardening

21


(b) heating and quenching in oil(c) heating and quenching in water(d) carburising and cyaniding

261. Bush bearings is(a) aluminium bronze(b) aluminium bronze(c) white metal alloy(d) none of these

263. Alloy of copper with manganse increases(a) hardness (b) machinability(c) weldability (d) tensile strength

265. Alloy of the copper with silicon increases(a) hardness and strength(b) ductility(c) machinability(d) weldability

267. Alloy not containing tin is(a) gun metal(b) phosphorus bronze(c) white metal(d) all of these

269. Magnesium alloys are(a) highly machinable(b) light(c) resistant to corrosion(d) magnetic

271. Plastics are(a) bad conductor of heat and electricity(b) good conductor of heat and electricity(c) good conductor of heat and bad conductor of

electricity(d) bad conductor of heat and good conductor of

electricity273. Thermoplastic materials are those which

(a) becomes soft on application of heat and canbe moulded again

(b) do not become hard with the applicationof heat and pressure and no chemicalchange occurs

(c) permanently set with heat and pressure andcan not deformed when again subject to heat

(d) produced on synthesis basic

275. Thermo setting materials are produced by(a) cast moulding process(b) injection moulding process(c) extrusion process(d) none of these

277. Thermo plastic materials can be produced by(a) blow moulding(b) cast moulding(c) compression moulding(d) calendering

279. Slow plastic deformation of metals under a constantstress is called(a) Creep(b) Fatigue(c) Endurance(d) Plastic deformation

281. Which of the following constituents of steel issoftest and least strong ?(a) austenite(b) pearlite(c) ferrite(d) cementite

283. Materials which are usually most ductile has(a) face centred cubic lattice(b) body centred cubic lattice(c) haxagonal close-packed lattice(d) all of these

285. The percentage of carbon in grey iron castingsusually varies between(a) 0.5 to 1%(b) 1 to 2%(c) 2.5 to 4.5%(d) 5 to 7%

287. ‘Killed steels’ are those steels(a) which are destroyed by burning(b) which after their destruction are recycled to

produce fresh steel(c) which are deoxidised in the ladle with

silicon and aluminium(d) in which carbon is completely burnt(e) which have poor properties due to improper

manufacturing

22


289. Carburized machine components have highendurance limit because carburization(a) intruduces a compressive layer on the

surface(b) raises the yield point of the material(c) produces a better surface finish(d) supresses any stress concentration produced

in the component291. Sheradising is the process in which the objects

(a) are electroplated to obtain wear resistantsurface

(b) are treated before painting(c) are normalised after hardening(d) to be coated are packed in powdered zinc

and heated293. In gas nitriding steel components, which of the

following atomsphere is generally used In the frunace?(a) inert(b) nascent nitrogen(c) liquid nitrogen(d) ammonia

295. Moh’s scale is used in connection with(a) composition of metal(b) hardness of materials(c) wear criterion of metals(d) tensile strength of metals

297. Weld decay is the phenomenon found with(a) cast iron(b) mild steel(c) nonferrous materials(d) stainless steel

299. Dislocation in materials refer to the(a) Point defect(b) Line defect(c) Plane defect(d) Volumetric defect

301. Large forgings, crank shafts, axles normally containcarbon upto(a) 0.05 to 0.20%(b) 0.20 to 0.45%(c) 0.45 to 0.55%

(d) 0.55 to 1.0%303. Taps, dies and drills contain carbon

(a) below 0.5% (b) below 1%(c) above 1% (d) above 2.2%

305. Corrosion resistance of steel is increased byadding(a) Chromium(b) Nickel(c) Aluminium(d) Tungsten

307. Rockwell ‘C’ scale uses minor increment load of10 kg and the major increment load and diamondindenter respectively are(a) 100 kg and 118°(b) 140 kg and 118°(c) 150 kg and 120°(d) 140 kg and 120°

309. Total atoms in Face-centered cubic structure (FCC)unit cell is(a) 2 (b) 4(c) 6 (d) none of these

311. The load and standard steel ball used for Brinellhardness number are(a) 300 kg, 1 mm(b) 300 kg, 5 mm(c) 300 kg, 10 mm(d) 3000 kg, 10 mm

313. Alnico, an alloy used extensively for permanentmagnets, contains iron, nickel, aluminium and cobaltin the ratio(a) 50 : 20 : 20 : 10(b) 40 : 30 : 20 : 10(c) 50 : 20 : 10 : 20(d) 30 : 20 : 30 : 20

315. The alloy used for making a resistance of electricaland heating elements is(a) nichrome (b) invar(c) magnin (d) elinvar

317. Addition of silicon to aluminium results in(a) improvement of casting characteristics(b) improvement of corrosion resistance

23


(c) one of the best known age and precipitationhardening systems

(d) improving machinability319. Which of the following has highest specific strength

of all structural materials ?(a) magnesium alloys(b) titanium alloys(c) chromium alloys(d) magnetic steel alloys

321. Duralumin contains(a) 94% aluminium, 4% copper and 0.5%

Mn, Mg, Si and Fe(b) 92.5% aluminium, 4% copper, 2% nickel and

1.5% Mg(c) 10% aluminium and 90% copper(d) 90% magnesium and 9% aluminium with

some copper323. Sub-zero treatment of steel

(a) is used to reduce the retained sustenite inhardened steel

(b) increases the ability of steel to work in sub-zero atomospheres

(c) is used to suppress martensite transformation(d) is performed after hardening operation to

induce temper-brittleness325. An undersirable side effect of motional inductance

of large conducting specimens is(a) skin effect (b) hysteresis(c) eddy currents (d) dielectric loss.

327. Which one of the following theories is related to thetheory of the thermocouple ?(a) Piezoelectric effect (b) Skin effect(c) Seeback effect (d)Faraday’s Law

329. A certain photoconductive cell is known to have acritical wave-length of 0.5 micrometer. Then theminimum energy required to move an electron fromthe valence band to the conduction band is(a) 0.96 electric volt(b) 0.31 electron volt(c) 0.62 electric volt(d) 2.48 electron volts

131. The viscoelastic behaviour of an amorphous polymerwill change with increasing temperature from its

rigid structure at low temperatures. The polymer’sbehaviour may proceed through the following stages.I. LeatheryII. RubberyIII. ViscousWhat is the consecutive order of the stages it willpass through ?(a) I, III only (b) II, III only(c) II, I, III only (d) I, II, III only

333. The structure which have the highest packing ofatoms are(a) Hexagonal close packed lattice(b) Body central cubic lattice(c) Simple cubic lattice(d) None of these

335. A ductile feature is usually not preceded by(a) large amount of non-recoverable energy

absorption(b) plastic flow(c) deformation(d) noise

337. All of the following ceramic materials are isotropicexcept(a) SiO4

(b) SiO2

(c) Mg SiC)(d) A1203

339. The elastic modulus for an elastomer such as rubberwill increase with increasing temperature above theglass transition temperature due to which of thefollowing reasons ?I. The molecules are in a highly kinked

conformation at higher temperatures.II. The molecules will align themselves in the

direction of any applied stress.III. The molecules will distort the matrix at higher

temperatures.(a) II only (b) I and III only(c) III only (d) I only

341. The nature of atomic bond found in diamond is(a) ionic (b) covaloent(c) metallic (d) none of these

24


343. The Miller indices of the diagonal plane of a cubeare(a) 110 (b) 111(c) 100 (d) 000

345. Semiconductors have electrical conductivities of theorder (ohm-cm-1)(a) 10-15 (b) 104(c) 104 (d) 1010

347. Resistivity of electrical conductors is most affectedby(a) temperature (b) pressure(c) composition (d) all of the above

349. Which of the following expression states Gibb’sphase rule (where the notations have their usualmeaning)?(a) F = C — P + 1 (b) F = C — P + 2(c) F = C — P + 3 (d) F = C — P + 4

351. Sillicon steel used for electrical purpose has siliconpercentage of(a) 0.5% (b) 2.5%(c) 3.4% (d) 12.5%

353. Which of the following chemical is added to givethe blue colour to the glass ?(a) Cobalt oxide(b) Manganese dioxide(c) Tin oxide(d) Calcium phosphate

355. Electrical resistances are made from(a) Elinvar (b) Duralumin(c) Constantan (d) Monel metal

357. Amorphous material is(a) Glass (b) Silver(c) Lead (d) Zinc

359. A diffused resistor in an IC(a) is formed along with the fabrication of

transistors(b) can be fabricated with ease for any resistance

value(c) is fabricated before transistor diffusion(d) is fabricated after transistor diffusion.

361. Ferromagnetics owe their properties to(a) filled inner sub-shells

(b) vacant inner sub-shells(c) partially filled inner sub-shells(d) all the sub-shells equally filled

363. The relative permeability of a dimagnetic materialis(a) zero (b) equal to unity(c) less than unity (d) more than unity

365. The area encased by a hysteresis loop is a measureof(a) retentivity(b) susceptibility(c) permeability(d) energy loss per cycle.

367. If frequency of light falling on a metal plate isdoubled, the kinetic energy of emitted electrons willbecome(a) exactly double(b) slightly more than double(c) slightly less than double(d) four times

369. A semiconductor is damaged by a strong currentbecause of(a) excess of electrons(b) decrease in electrons(c) lack of free electrons(d) none of these

371. The excitations of outer electrons in atoms andmolecules is associated with which of the followingbands of radiation ?(a) X- rays (b) Gamma rays(c) Ultra violet (d) Infrared.

373. Many types of semiconducting materials exist,including silicon and germanium. Which of thefollowing statements below are true?I. A p-type (positive) semiconductor is formed

when silicon or germanium is doped with agroup III element.

II. Doping actually reduces the conductivity ofa silicon or germanium crystal.

III. If doping of silicon and germanium producesnonbonded electrons, Si and Ge, can thereferred to as n-type conductors.

(a) I only (b) II only

25


(c) III only (d) None of these375. Glass is an example of an amorphous solid which

can be characterised as a(a) malleable solid(b) crystal-like structure(c) good conductor(d) very viscous fluid

377. The tunnel effects refers to(a) the migration of conducting electrons in a

magnetic field.(b) the use of lasers in surveying(c) the ability of electrons to exist on both sides

of a large energy barrier(d) the existence of cathode rays in a vacuum.

379. Which of the following elements most readily showthe photoelectric effect ?(a) Noble gases(b) Alkali metals(c) Halogen elements(d) Transition metals

381. Which of the following is a correct statement ?(a) Beta-rays are same as cathode rays.(b) Gamma-rays are high energy neutrons.(c) Alpha particles are singly ionised helium

atoms.(d) Protons and neutrons have exactly the same

mass.383. Silicon steel is widely used in

(a) cutting tools(b) dies and punches(c) electrical industry(d) 1-.emical industry

385. Which of the following is closst to the purest formof iron ?(a) Low carbon steel(b) Cast iron(c) Wrought iron(d) Mild steel

387. In steel as the percentage of carbon increases whichof the following decreases ?(a) Ultimate strength(b) Hardness

(c) Ductility(d) Percentage of pearlite

389. Which of the following is harder than diamond ?(a) Tantalum carbide(b) Alumina ceramics(c) Polycrystalline glass(d) None of these

391. Bakelite is a(a) acrylate(b) silicon varnish(c) thermoplastic synthetic resin(d) phenol formaldehyde resin

393. Piezoelectric is(a) material which becomes polarised when

stressed(b) a material which changes dimensions due to

applied field.(c) a material that has properties midway between

materials(d) a material in which magnetising force reduces

when current flowing is increased395. Metal with hexagonal close packed structure is

(a) Silver(b) Iron(c) Magnesium(d) Aluminium

397. Which of the following alloy has equal percentageof constituents ?(a) Constantan(b) Duralumin(c) Gunmetal(d) White metal

399. Ferrites are(a) Ferro — magnetic (b) Ferri — magnetic(c) Para — magnetic (d) Anti — magnetic

401. Polythene is(a) a polymer of ethylene(b) a vulcanised rubber(c) impregnated cotton(d) cellulose derivative

403. Thermoseting plastics have in general(a) molecular chains that slip past one

26


(b) be a ceramic, since all ceramics are glass andglass is a kind of ceramic

(c) have a monoclinic crystal structure.(d) have no long-range crystalline lattice

structure.405. For a medium carbon steel, having a 0.50% carbon

content, slow cooling of austenite will cause austeniteto transform to carbide and ferrite. Rapid quenchingof austenite can result in(a) formation of martensite, which produces

a very hard and brittle steel.(b) retention of austenite, at room temperature,

which a vary ductile and tough steel.(c) formation of large carbide particles near the

grain boundaries in the steel, which makesthe steel brittle but very tough.

(d) retention of austenite, even at roomtemperature, which gives a very brittle andhard steel.

407. If one assumes ideally spherical atoms making upthe crystal structure, then atomic packing factor(APF) for BCC and FCC unit cells(a) depends on the size of the unit cells.(b) depends on the radius of the atoms that make

up the unit cell.(c) is a constant for FCC and BCC unit cells

(0.74 for FCC unit cells, and 0.68 for BCCunit cells).

(d) both (a) and (b)409. The fracture surface energy of a brittle glassy

polymer can be several orders of magnitude greaterthan that for glassy sillica. The reason for the veryhigh fracture surface energy observed for brittlepolymeters is that(a) covalent bonding in the polymer chains is

quite high, thus it takes considerable energyto break the polymer chains during fracture

(b) polymers crosslink extensively as stress isapplied, producing a three dimensionalnetwork structure that is very resistant tofracture.

(c) applied stress tends to fragment the longpolymer chains into shorter molecular

segments which fracture less readily than thelong polymer chains molecules.

(d) during fracture small fibre-like bundlesof aligned polymer chains (called a craze)bridge the crack face. The energy requiredto from, stretch, and break the craze fibrilscontributes to the high fracture surfaceenergy that is observed.

--------------

SUPERVISER-1054

1 The number system with radix 2 is known as.(a) Binary (b) Decimal(c) Octal (d) Hexadecimal

2 A group of four bits is known as(a) bit (b) byte(c) nibble (d) word

3 The knowledge of binary number system is requiredfor the designers of computer and other digitalsystems because(a) It is easy to learn binary number system(b) It is easy to learn Boolean algebra(c) It is easy to use binary codes(d) The devices used in these systems

operates in binary4 The ones complement of the binary number

10001011 is(a) 01110100 (b) 11111111(c) 01110101 (d) 11111110

5 The twos complement of the number 100101000 is.(a) 011010110 (b) 111111111(c) 011010111 (d) None

6. The ones complement of ones complement of thegiven binary, number is(a) same binary number(b) zero(c) non-zero(d) none]

7 The twos complement of the twos complement ofthe given binary number 1011001 is

27


(a) 1011000 (b) 1010110(c) 1011001 (d) 0100111

8 The base or radix a Hexadecimal number systemis(a) 2 (b) 8(c) 16 (d) 15

9 The ntxnber systeuXnvith base or radix 8 is knownas(a) binary (b) decimal(c) octal (d) hexadecimal

10 The decimal equivalent of the binary number 101101is(a) 48 (b) 45(c) 57 (d) 75

11 The decimal equivalent of the binary number1001.0101 is(a) 9.125 (b) 9.6125(c) 9.3125 (d) 9.6215

12 The binary equivalent of decimal number 255 is(a) 11111110 (b) 11111101(c) 11111111 (d) none

13 Identify the binary number represented by thedecimal number 10.625(a) 1010.011 (b) 1010.101(c) 1010.110 (d) none

14 The binary equivalent of the decimal number 0.6875is(a) 0.1010 (b) 0.1011(c) 0.1101 (d) 0.0110

15 The octal equivalent of the decimal number 375 is(a) 560 (b) 567(c) 565 (d) none

16 The octal equivalent of the decimal number 27.125is(a) 33.23 (b) 33.28(c) 33.1 (d) 33.01

18. The heradecimal equivalent of the decimal number375 is

(a) 177 (b) 17A(c) 1A0 (d) none

19 The decimal equivalent of the hexadecimal number“BEED” is

(a) 47877 (b) 48877(c) 48777 (d) none

20 Encode the decimal number 327.8.7 in BCD code(a) 0011 0010 0111. 1000 1001(b) 0011 0010 0110.1001 1000(c) 0011 0010 0111.1100 1010(d) none

21 The decimal equivalent of the hexadecimal number3A.2F is(a) 58.1835 (b) 58.1385(c) 58.23 (d) none

22 The decimal number 13 is represented in naturalBCD as(a) 1101 (b) 0001 0011(c) 0000 1101 (d) none

23 The binary equivalent of the hexadecimal numberA0B5 is(a) 1010 0001 1011 0101(b) 1010 0000 1010 0101(c) 1010 0000 1011 0101(d) none

24 The octal equivalent of the binary number 11,01011-1 is(a) 656 (b) 327(c) 653 (d) D7

25 The decimal equivalent of the binary number1101014 is(a) 215 (b) 225(c) 250 (d) none

26 The octal equivalent of the decimal number 215 is(a) 327 (b) 372(c) 237 (d) none

27 he maximum positive and negative numbers whichcan be represented in twos complement form usingn bits are respectively(a) + (2n–1-1), – (2n–1 – 1)(b) + (2n–1–1),-2n–1

(c) + 2n–1, –2n-1

(d) + 2n–1 , – (2n-1 – 1)28 When two n-bit binary numbers are added then the

sum will contain at the most(a) n-bit (b) (n+1)-bits

28


(c) (n+2)-bits (d) (n+ n)-bits29 The largest positive number that can be stored in a

computer that has 16-bit word length and uses.twoscomplement arithmetic is(a) 32 (b) 32767(c) 32768 (d) 65536

30 The maximum positive and negative numbers thatcan be represented in ones complement using n-bits are respectively(a) + (2n-1-1) and - (2n-1 - 1)(b) + (2n-1-1) and -2n-1

(c) + 2n-1 and - (2n-1 - 1)(d) None of these

31. A switching function f(A,B,C,D) =A’B’CD+A’BC’D+A’BCD+AB’C’D+AB’CD can

also be written as(a) Em (1,3,5,7,9) (b) Em (3,5,7,9,11)(c) Em (3,5,9,11,13) (d) Em (5,7,9,11,13)

32. The switching function f(A,B,C,D) = Em (5,9,11,14)can be written as(a) A’ B C’ D+A B’ C’ D+A B’ CD+ABCD’(b) A’ B’ C’ D + AB’ C’ D + A’ B’ CD + ABCD’(b) A’ BC’ D + A’ BC’ D’ + AB’ C D’ + ABCD(d) None

33. The switching function f(A,B,C) =(A+B’+C)(A1+B’+C)(A+61+C) can also be writtenas(a) Em(2,3,6) (b) Ern (0,1,4,5,7)(c) Em (1,2,5,6,7) (d) Em (0,2,4,6)

34. The other canonical form of f(A,B,C) = Em (0,1,5,7)is(a) rIM (2,3,4,6) (b) rIM (2,4,6,8)(c) FIM (2,5,6,7) (d) LIM (1,3,5,7)

35. The dual of Boolean theorem x(y+z) = xy+xz is(a) x + yz = xy + xz(b) x(y+z) = (x+y)(x+z)(c) x+yz = (x+y)(x+z)(d) None

36. The dual of a Boolean theorem is obtained by(a) interchanging all zeros and ones only(b) changing all zeros to ones only(c) changing all ones to zeros only(d) interchanging operators and identity

elements37. The SOP form of logical expression is most suitable

for designing logic circuit using only(a) NOR gates (b) NAND gates(c) AND gates (d) X-OR gates

38. The POS form of logical expression is most suitablefor designing logic circuits using only(a) X-OR gates (b) AND gates(c) NAND gates (d) NOR gates

39. The logic expression F = XY+XZ’+YZ is knownas(a) SSOP form (b) SOP forrn(c) POS form (d) SPOS form

40. The logic expression F = (x+y+z)(x+y)(y z’)(x+z)is known as(a) SOP form (b) SSOP form(c) SPOS form (d) POS form

41. In Boolean Algebra 1' is called (a) Additive identity

(b) Multiplicative identity(c) Either1or2(d) None

42. In Boolean Algebra 0' is called(a) Additive identity(b) Multiplicative identity(c) Both 1and2(d) None

43. A literal in Boolean algebra, is a(a) Primed or unprimed’ Boolean variable(b) primed Boolean variable only(c) Unprimed Boolean-Variable-only(d) None

44. The Boolean expression + y is equal to(a) x (b) x+y(c) y (d) x + y’

45. The Boolean expression_ (x+y)(x+z) is equal to(a) x+z (b) x+y(c) x+yz (d) y+xz

46. A minterm is nothing but(a) Standard sum term(b) Standard product term(c) May be standard sum term or product term

29


(d) None47. A maxterm is nothing but a

(a) Standard sum term(b) Standard product term(c) May be standard sum term or product term(d) None_

48. The Boolean function expressed in standard ,sumof Products form or standard product of sums formis called(a) Canonical form (b) Conical form(c) Both 1 and 2 (d) None

49. The sum of products form can be realized by usinglogic(a) NAND-NAND (b) AND-OR(c) Either1or 2 (d) None

50. The dual of x+xy = x is(a) x+y (b) x(c) x(x+y) = x (d) (x+y)(x-y) = x

51. The dual of the exclusive — OR gate is equal to(a) NAND gate (b) X-OR gate(c) X-NOR gate (d) AND gate

52. Identify the degenerative form from the followingtwo level gate networks(a) AND-AND (b) OR-NOR(c) AND-NAND (d) All the above

53. Identify the non-degenerative formfrom the followingtwo level gate networks(a) AND-AND (b) NOR-AND(c) NAND-NOR (d) NOR-NAND

54. Boolean algebra can be used to(a) Simplify any algebraic expressions(b) Minimize the number of switches in a circuits(c) Solve the mathematical problems(d) Perform arithmetic calculations

55. The value of X © 0 is(a) X (b) X’(c) 1 (d) 0

56. De-Morgan’s theorems states that(a) (A+B) ‘ = A’.B’ and (AB) ‘ = A`B`(b) (A+B) ‘A’A-B1 and (AB) ‘ = A’.B’(c) (A+B) ‘A’.B’ and (AB) ‘ = A’+B’(d) (A+B) ‘ = A’+B’ and (AB) ‘ = A’+B’

57. The number of terms in a function of four variableare

(a) 4 (b) 8(c) 16 (d) 12

58. The minterm, designator of the term AB CD is (a) 10 (b) 11

(c) 12 (d) None59. The maxterm, designator of the term A’+B’+C+D’

is(a) 2 (b) 13(c) 10 (d) 15

60. The rninterm corresponds to decimal number 12 is(a) AB C’ D’ (b) A+B+C’+D’(c) A’+B’+C+D (d) A’ B’ C D

61. The rnaxterm corresponds to decimal number 14 is(a) A+B+C+ D (b) A’+B’+C’+D(c) A’ B’ C’ D (d) ABCD

62. 1he number of cells in-a 6-variable K-map is(a) 6 (b) 12(c) 36 (d) 64

63. The code used for labelling the cells of the K-mapis(a) Natural BCD (b) Hexadecimal(c) Gray (d) Octal

64. In K-map simplification, a group of eight adjacentones leads to a term with(a) one literal less than the total number of variables(b) two literals less than the total number of

variables(c) three literals less than the total number of

variables(d) four literals less than the total number of

variables65. Minimization of logic expressions while designing

digital systems helps in reducing(a) Cost (b) Space requirement(c) Power requirement (d) All of these

66. The Boolean expression X + X’Y =(a) X + Y (b) X + XY(c) Y + YX (d) X’Y + Y’X

67. (X+Y)+Z = X+ (Y+Z)(a) shows that the boolean operator OR is

distributive

30


(b) shows that the boolean operator OR isassociative

(c) implies the associativity of the boolean operatorAND(d) none of the above.

68. The boolean expression AB + AB’ + A’ C + ACisindependent of the boolean variable(a) A (b) B(c) (d) none of these

69. Which of the following Boolean algebrastatementrepresent distributive law(a) A+(B+C)=(A+B)+C(b) A(BC)=(AB)C(c) A(B+C)=AB + AC(d) none of these

70. Which of the following Boolean algebra staternerdsrqxesent cornmutalive law(a) A+A’=A+B(b) A+AB = B(c) (A+B) (A+C) = A+BC(d) A+B = B+A

71. The basic gates are (a) AND, OR, NAND

(b) AND,OR, NOR(c) AND, OR, NOT(d) NAND, NOR

72. The output of a gate is 1 if and only if all the inputare high, what is that gate?

(a) NOT (b) NAND(c) NOR (d) AND

73. The output of the gate is 1 only for odd number ofhigh inputs, what is that gate?(a) X-NOR (b) X-OR(c) NAND (d) NOR

74. Identify the universal gate from the following gates(a) OR (b) AND(c) X-OR (d) NAND

75. The output of the gate is zero only when all theinputs are high. What is that gate?(a) AND (b) OR(c) NAND (d) NOR

76. The minimum number of NAND gates required to

realizethe X-OR gate are.(a) 5 (b) 4(c) 3 (d) 6

77. The output of a gate is Y=AB+ A’B’ ,where A andB are inputs, what is that gate?(a) X-NOR (b) NAND(c) X-OR (d) all the above

78. Output of the given two voltage levels, if we choosemore negative voltage level as logic 1 and the otheras logic 0,it is called as(a) positive logic level(b) negative logic level(c) either a or b(d) None

79. The voltage levels -7y and -2v are given, for positivelevel logic systems which voltage value we have totake as logic 1?(a) -7v (b) Ov(c) -2v (d) None

80. The circuit which will work as OR gate in positivelevel logic will work as gate in negative level logic.(a) NOR (b) NAND(c) NAND and NOR (d) AND

81. The number of rem in the truth table of a gatehaving 5 inputs are(a) 32 (b) 64(c) 31 (d) 63

82. The memory unit that is constricting using only gateis(a) ROM (b) RAM(c) Core (d) Disc

18) Which logic cote is similar to the function of twoseries switches%(a) AND (b) OR(c) NAND (d) None

83. Y= (WI is the Boolean function for gate(a) AND (b) NAND(c) OR (d) NOR

84. The output of the Boolean expression for exclusiveORgate is(a) Y=(A+B) ( A’+B’)(b) Y=A B’+ A’ B(c) Y= (A’+ AB)’

31


(d) All the above85. NAND gate is called a universal gate because

(a) it used by every body.(b) any logic function can be realized by

NAND gate alone(c) many digital computers use .NAND gates(d) None

86. In the case of OR gate, no matter what thenumb...:of inputs, a(a) 1 at any input causes the output to be at

logic 1(b) 1 at any input-causes the output’to be at

logic 0(c) 0 at any input causes the output to be at

logic 0(d) None

87. The Boolean expression (xyz + yz+ xz) aftersimplification(a) x (b) y.(c) .z (d) (x + y)z

88. Memory unit which uses only combinational logic inits implementation(a) ROM (b) RAM(c) Core (d) Disc

89. Identify the pair of basic gates from the following(a) OR, NOR (b) NAND, AND(c) AND, NOT (d) NOT, NAND

90. The Boolean expression A+BC is equivalent to(a) AB+AC (b) A+C(c) (A+B) (A+C) (d) None

91. The Boolean expression AB + AB’ + A aftersimplification is(a) A (b) B(c) AB (d) AB’

92. In the following equations th4 equals sign means isequivalent to which of the following is a negativelogic?(a) 0 = 0 V and 1 = +5 V(b) 0 = +5 V and 1 = V(c) 0 = -5 V and 1 = 0 V(d) All of these

93. According to De Morgan’s second theorem

(a) A NAND gate is always complimentary toan AND gate

(b) An AND gate is equivalent to a bubbledNAND gate

(c) A NAND gate is equivalent to ,a bubbledAND gate

(d) A NAND gate is equivalent to a bubbledOR gate

94. NAND-NAND circuits are equivalent to(a) AND-OR circuits (b) OR-XOR circuits(c) OR-NOT circuits (d) All of these

95. The output of a gate is 1 if and only if all the inputsare high, what is that gate?(a) NOT (b) NAND(c) NOR (d) AND

96. The output of a gate is 1 only for odd number ofhigh inputs, what is that gate?(a) X- NOR (b) X-OR(c) NAM (d) NOR

97. Identify the uriversal gate from the following gates(a) OR gate (b) AND gate(c) X-13R (d) NAND

98. The output of a gate is zero if and only if when allthe inputs are high_ What is that gate?(a) AND gate (b) OR gate(c) NAND gate (d) NOR gate

99. he minimum number of NAND gates required torealize X-OR gate are(a) 5 (b) 4(c) 3 (d) 6

100. The output of a gate Y = AB + A’ B’, where A andB are inputs, what is that gate?(a) X-NOR (b) NAND(c) X-OR (d) All of these

101. Identify the operation performed by the gate circuitshown in figure(a) AND (b) OR(c) NAND (d) NOR

102. Out of the given two voltage levels, if we choosemore ne negative voltage level as. logic 1 and theother as logic 0, it is called(a) Positive level logic(b) negative level logic

32


(c) either 1 or 2(d) None

103. Two voltage levels — 7 V and —2 V are given,for positive level logic system which-voltage valuewe have to take as logic 1?(a) - 7 V (b) 0 V(c) -2 V (d) None

104. The circuit which will work as OR gate in positivelevel logic will work as —— gate in negative levellogic(a) NOR gate(b) NAND gate(c) both NAND and NOR gate(d) AND gate

105. The number of rows in the truth table of a gatehaving 5 inputs are(a) 32 (b) 64(c) 31 (d) 63

106. The memory unit which can be constructed by usingonly gates is(a) ROM (b) RAM(c) Core (d) Disk

107. Which logic gate is-similar to the function of twoseries switches?(a) AND gate (b) OR gate(c) NAND gate (d) None

108. Y = (AB)’ is the Boolean function for —— gate(a) AND gate (b) NAND gate(c) OR gate (d) NOR gate

109. The output Boolean expression for the exclusiveOR gate is(a) (A+B)1(b) Y = AB + A’ B’(c) Y= (A +. B) (A’+B’)(d) None of these

110. In the following equations the equals sign means isequal to Which of the following is a positive logic?(a) 0= 0 V and 1= +5 V(b) 0 = 0 V and 1 = -5 V(c) 0 = +5 V and 1 = 0 V(d) None of these

111. XOR gates are ideal for testing parity because even-parity words produce a — output and odd paritywords procedure a output(a) low, high (b) low, low(c) high, high (d) high, low

112. Which gate corresponds to the action of parallelswitches?(a) AND gate (b) OR gate(c) NOR gate (d) NAND gate

113. An AND gate has 7 inputs. How many v. ords arethere Ei its truth table?(a) 7 (b) 49(c) 81 (d) 128

114. The number it input wonis in a truth table akvoysopals — where “ n’ is the number of input Ms(a) 2n (b) 2n+1(c) 2(n+1) (d) 2n

115. A gate can have —input signals and — outputsignals(a) one, One(b) two, two(c) one or more, one(d) two or more, two or more

116. An OR gate has 6 input. How many input wordsare there in its truth table ?(a) 6 (b) 36(c) 64 (d) 64,000,000.

117. The voltage levels for positive logic system(a) must necessarily be positive(b) must necessarily be negative(c) may be positive or negative(d) must necessarily be 0 V and 5 V

118. The voltage levels for negative logic system(a) must necessarily be negative(b) must necessarily be positive(c) need not be negative(d) must necessarily be 0 V and -5 VU

119. Which of the following operations is not associative(a) NOR (b) OR(c) X-OR (d) None

120. The working of a staircase switch is a typicalexample of the logical operation.

33


(a) OR (b) NOR(c) XOR (d) XNOR

121. In which of the folowing gates the output is 1 if atleast one input is 0 or all inputs are Zeros.?(a) NOT (b) AND(c) OR (d) NAND

122. Let X and Y and Z be the inputs and z be theoutput of XOR gate. The value of z is given by(a) (XY)’ (b) X+Y(b) XY (d) none of these

123. What is the minimum number two-input NANDgates used to perform the function of two-input ORgate?(a) one (b) two(c) three (d) four

124. Which of the following gates are added to the inputsof the OR gate to convert it to the NAND gate ?(a) NOT (b) AND(c) OR (d) XOR

125. What logic function is produced by adding invertersto the input of an AND gate?(a) NAND (b) NOR(c) XOR (d) AND

126. Which of the following gates is known ascoincidence detector ?(a) AND gate (b) OR gate(c) NOT gate (d) NAND gate

127. Identify the logic gate family which is currefft modelogic(a) TTL (b) CMOS(c) ECL (d) DCTL

126. Identify the logic gate family which does not useunipolar transistors(a) CMOS (b) MOS(c) TTL (d) All of these

127. Example for unipolar logic gate family is(a) CMOS (b) TTL(c) ECL (d) i2L

128. logic gate family is the example for unsaturatedlogic(a) CML or ECL (b) RTL(c) DTL (d) I IL

129. The fastest logic gate family is

(a) CMOS (b) ECL(c) TTL (d) RTL

130. The logic-gate family which consumes less poweris(a) ECL (b) TTL(c) IIL (d) CMOS

131. Identify the logic gate family which is slowest(a) ECL (b) TTL(c) CMOS (d) IIL

132. ‘The power consumption is more for the followingloeic gate family(a) ECL (b) TTL(c) CMOS (d) DCTL

133. For lame Rzle integration the fo:Ao..-eing logic Gatefamily is preferred(a) MCS (b) TTL(c) ECL (d) RTL

134. n’-channel MOS deviCes are preferred over p-channel MOS devices for digital circuits because(a) lower power dissipation(b) higher power dissipation(c) higher mobility of ‘electrons than holes(d) None of these

135. The propagation-delay time of a non-saturatedbipolar logic family(a) is less than that of a saturated bipolar looic

family(b) is same as that of a saturated bipOlar logic

family(c) is more-than that of a saturated bipolar logic

farnily(d) None of these

136. The log_ic family which is most suitable in theindustrial environment is(a) i2L (b) HTL(c) TTL (d) CMOS

137. The logic family with highest noise margins is(a) HTL (b) IIL(c) TTL (d) CMOS

138. HTL is preferred in the industrial environmentbecause of(a) Low power dissipation(b) high speed

34


(c) low noise margin(d) highest noise margin

139. HTL is the modified version of logic gate famil(a) DCTL (b) TTL(c) CMOS (d) FCL

140. I2L is the modified version of(a) RTL (b) DTL(c) TTL. (d) DCTL

141. The figure of merit of a logic gate family is given by(a) Gain .x bandwidth(b) propagation delay x power dissipation(c) fan-out x propagation delay time(d) noise margin x power dissipation

142. The open input terminal of a TTL gate(a) will assume a very high voltage(b) will behave as if it is connected to logic level(c) will behave as if it is connected to logic 1

level(d) none of these

143. TTTL circuits with active pull-up are preferredbecause of their suitability for(a) wired — AND operation(b) bus operated system(c) wired logic operation(d) reasonable power-dissipation and speed of

operation144. Complementary outputs are amiable in

(a) ECL gates (b) TTL gates(c) DTL gates (d) HTL gates

145. Wired logic is not possible is(a) ECL(b) TTL with active pull-up(c) open-collector TTL(d) TTL with passive pull-up

146. Tristate logic is used for(a) improving the figure of merit(b) increasing the fan-out(c) bus oriented systems(d) improving the speed of operation

147. CMOS logic consists of(a) only n-channel MOS devices(b) only p-channel MOS devices

(c) equal number of n-channel MOS devices(d) None of these

148. In ECL negative supply voltage is used because of(a) reduction in noise at the output(b) saving in power(c) ease of wired-OR operation(d) increase in speed

149. The supply•voltage permissible for CMOS devicesis(a) +5V (b) -5V(c) 3 to 15 V (d) + 12V

150. The logic swing is maximum for the logic family(a) 12L (b) ECL(c) CMOS (d) TTL

151. Which of the following logic family has maximumfan-out?(a) CMOS (b) I2L(c) PMOS (d) ECL

152. If a logic circuit has a fan-out of 4, then the circuit(a) has 4 inputs(b) has 4 outputs(c) can drive maximum of 4 inputs(d) gives output 4 times the input

153. An IC containing more than 100000 gates will bedesignated as(a) LSI (b) VLSI(c) ULSI (d) MSI

154. Which of the following parameters is not specifiedfor digital ICs(a) Bandwidth(b) Noise margin(c) Power dissipation(d) propagation delay

155. Resistor free logic gate family(a) CMOS (b) TTL(c) ECL (d) HTL

156. Which of the following is slowest and the oldesttype?(a) PMOS (b) NMOS(c) CMOS (d) None.

157. Schottky TEL is a(a) non-saturated bipolar logic

35


(b) saturated bipolar logic(c) high threshold logic(d) None of these

158. The logic swing of a gate is about 0.8 V this belongsto the logic family(a) TTL (b) NMOS(c) CMOS (d) ECL

159. ECL circuits have higher fan-out because of their(a) high impedance(b) low output impedance(c) high input and low input impedance(d) complimentary outputs

160. The of active pull-up over passive pull-up facility inthe logic gates is(a) increased delay(b) reduced speed(c) increased speed(d) none of these

161. The negative supply voltage is used in ECL because(a) the effect of noise voltage in the supply

voltage can be reduced(b) the effect of ,noise voltage in the supply

voltage can be increased(c) the speed will be increased(d) the speed will be reduced.

162. Identify the logic gate family which consumes lesspower and which has maximum Fan-out(a) MOS (b) TTL(c) ECL (d) CMOS

163. Identify the logic gate family which consumesmaximum power and which has minimumpropagation delay(a) MOS (b) TTL(c) ECL (d) cmbs

164. Identify Which is not a saturated logic gate familyfrom the following?(a) TTL (b) DTL(c) HTL (d) ECL

165. The allowable supply voltage range for TTL lbgicgate family is(a) 2 to 5.6 V(b) 3.5 to 6.2 V

(c) 4.75 V to 5.25 V(d) 4 to 6 V

166. The switching speed of ECL is very high because(a) it uses positive logic(b) it uses negative logic(c) it uses high speed transistors(d) its transistors remain unsaturated.

167. MOS logic gates have no current hogging problembecause the gate terminals are(a) low input impedance(b) zero- impedance(c) high impedance(d) compensating effect

168. The maximum frequency at which digital data canbe applied to gate is defined as(a) operating speed(b) propagation speed(c) binary level transition period(d) charging time

169. The output 0 and 1 level for TTL logic family isapproximately(a) 0.1 and 5 V(b) 0.6 and 3.5 V(c) 0.9 and 1.75 V(d) -1.75 and -0.9 V

170. The basic building blacks of combinafional digitalcircuits are(a) Gates only(b) Flip-flops only(c) Gates and Flip-flops(d) None

171. ROM is an example for(a) Sequential digital circuit(b) Combinational digital circuit(c) Both combinational and sequential(d) None

172. The memory, which is constructed by using onlygates, is(a) RAM (b) RVVM(c) ROM (d) All of these

173. Half adder can be converted into half subtractorwith

36


(a) an additional inverter(b) an additional.AND gate(c) an additional OR gate(d) None

174. Full subtractor can be implemented by using twohalf subtractors and(a) an OR gate (b) an AND gate(c) an X-OR gate (d) None

175.Full adder can be converted into full subtractor with(a) an additional OR gate(b) an additional AND gate(c) an additional NOT gate(d) All of these

176. Identify the carry expression of full-adder circuit(a) X’ Y YZ + ZX’(b) XY+ YZ + ZX(c) XY’ + YZ’ + ZX(d) X’ Y’ + XZ’ + YZ

177. Identify the borrow expression of full-subtractorcircuit(a) X’ (y+z) + yz(b) x’ (y+z) + y + z(c) x(y+z) + yz(d) None

178. decoder with enable input acts as(a) Multiplexer (b) Encoder(c) Demultiplexer (d) None

179. The number of output lines of an n-input decoder(a) must be equal to 2n

(b) must be less than 2n

(c) must be less than or equal to 2n

(d) None180. BCD to decimal decoder consists of inputs and

outputs(a) three, eight (b) four, sixteen(c) four, ten (d) None

181. 3 to -8 line decoder is also called(a) Binary to Octal code converter(b) 1-of-8 line decoder(c) Either 1 or 2(d) None

182. Decoder can be used to implement

(a) given Boolean function(b) any combinational circuit(c) three input AND gate(d) All the above

183. Active low output type of decoder can beconstructed with(a) AND gates. (b) OR gates(c) NAND gates (d) None

184. Full-subtractor can be implemented by using(a) 3 to 8 line decoder only(b) 3 to 8 line decoder and one OR gate(c) 3 to 8 line decoder and two OR gates(d) All the above

185. A multiplexer with n’ selection lines can have-inputs(a) 2n-1 (b) 2n

(c) 2n +1 (d) log10 n186. Multiplexer can be used to implement

(a) any given Boolean function(b) any combinational circuit1 When a flip-flop is reset, its output will be(a) Q = 0, Q’ = 0(b) Q =1, Q’ =1(c) Q = 0, Q = 1(d) Q = 1, Q’ = 0

187. In a J-K.flip-flop when J Zs 1, K =1 and clock isapplied the output Q will(a) not change(b) becomes 0(c) becomes 1(d) be complement of the output before the

clock was applied188. A transparent latch consists of a

(a) T-type flip-flop(b) D typeflip-flop(c) T ro D type flip-flop(d) T and D-type of flip-flop

189. The output Qn of a J-K flip-flop is 0. It chanqes to1 when a clock pulse is applied.The inputs Jr, and Kr, are respectively.(a) 1 and X (b) 0 and X(c) X and 0 (d) X and 1

37


190. The output Q, of a J-K flip-flop is 1, Its output doesnot change when a clock pulse is applied: The inputsand Kn are respectively.(a) 0 and X (b) X and 0(c) and X (d) 0 and 1

191. In a counter circuit consisting of four J-K flip-flops,all the flip-flops get triggered simultaneously. Thiscounter is(a) combinational circuit(b) an asynchronous circuit(c) is a synchronous circuit(d) may be combinational or sequential

192. Data can be changed from temporal code to spatialcode by using(a) timer circuit(b) synchronous counters(c) shift registers(d) combinational circuit

193. Data can be changed from spatial code to temporalcode by using(a) Shift registers(b) Counters(c) Combinational circuit(d) A/D converts

194. An universal register(a) accepts serial input(b) accepts parallel input(c) gives serial and parallel outputs(d) is capable of all the above .

195. A ring counter consists of 5 flip-flops will have(a) 5 states (b) 10 states(c) 32 states (d) none

196. A twisted ring counter consists of n-flip-flops willhave(a) n states (b) n2

(c) 2n (d) log n197. In a 4-bit binary ripple counter, for every input clock

pulse(a) all the flip-flops get clocked simultaneously(b) only one flip-flop get clocked at a time(c) two of the flip-flops get clocked at a time(d) all the above statements are false

196. A 4-bit binary ripple counter uses flip-flops withpropagation delay time of 25 m sec. each Themaximum possible time required for change of statewill be(a) 25 n sec. (b) 50 n sec.(c) 75 n sec. (d) 100 n sec.

198. A 4-bit synchronous counter uses flip-flops withpropagation delay time of 25 n sec. each Themaximum possible time required for change of statewill be(a) 25 n sec. (b) 50 n sec(c) 75 n sec. (d) 100.n sec.

198. The maximum possible number of states in a ring-counter consisting of 7 flipflops is(a) 4 (b) 7(c) 8 (d) 10

199. The minimum number of flip-flops required for adivide-by-12 circuit is(a) 4 (b) 7(c) 8 (d) 10

200. A Mod-2 counter followed by Mod-5 counter is(a) same as Mod-5(b) a decade counter(c) a mod-7 counter(d) none of these

201. In general sequential digital circuit consists of(a) gates only(b) flip-flops only(c) flip-flops and combinational circuits(d) none of these

202. If you want to design a boundary counter, youshould prefer a flip-flop of(a) D-type (b) S-R(c) T-type (d) J-K type

203. In a ripple counting using edge-triggered J-K flip-flops, the pulse input is applied to the(a) clock input of all flip-flops(b) clock input of one flip-flop(c) J and K inputs of one flip-flop(d) J and K inputs of all flip-flops

204. n’ flip-flops will divide the clock frequency by afactor of(a) n2 (b) n

38


(c) 2n (d) log(n)205. The number of flip-flops required to construct a

decade shift register twisted ring counter(a) 5 (b) 10(c) (d) 3

206. The number of flip-flops required to construct.amod-15 shift register ring counter are(a) 4 (b) 8(c) 15 (d) 10

207. A memory has 16-bit address bus. Then how manymemory locations are there?(a) 64k (b) 65,536(c) 216 (d) All

208. Memory size of a memory IC can be specified as(a) MXN where M= no. of memory locations, N=

no. of bits in each location(b) NXM N= no. of bits in each location, M= no.

of locations(c) 2n X m, n= no. of address bits, m= no. of bits

in each location(d) either a or c

209. Semiconductor memories are preferred for mainmemory because (a) They occupy(a) less space,(b) They are costly(c) They can store more information in small area.(d) both a & c

210. Identify which is not Random-Access memory.(a) R/W Memory (b) ROM(c) CAM (d) None

211. In statiC RAM binary information is stored in termsof(a) voltage (b) current(c) charge (d) None

212. In dynamic RAM binary information is stored interms Of(a) Voltage (b) current(c) charge (d) None

213. The main disadvantage of DRAM over SRAM is(a) High package density(b) costly(c) External memory refresh logic is required

(d) High power consumption214. Identify fast memory

(a) DRAM (b) SRAM(c) both a&b (d) None

215. Identify sequential access memory(a) R/WM (b) Magnetic core(c) Magnetic tape (d) None

216. Floppy disk is an example for(a) Random Access memory(b) sequential Access(c) Direct access(d) None

217. RAM is an example of(a) voltage(b) Non volatile(c) Destructive read out type(d) Non-destructive read out type(e) both a & d

218. Identify the memory which is not non-volatilememory(a) ROM (b) R/W Memory(c) PROM (d) EPROM

219. The desirable characteristic of a memory is(a) low cost(b) high access rates(c) low cost and high access rates(d) low cost and low access rates.

220. The address bus width of a memory of size 2048X8bits is.(a) 10 (b) 11(c) 12 (d) 13.

221. Semiconductor memories are widely used bec’auseof(a) small size(b) low cost(c) compatibility with microprocessor(d) All

222. The decimal equivalent of the highest possibleaddress for an8-bit address bus is(a) 8 (b) 128(c) 255 (d) 256

39


223. It is desired to have a 64X8 memory. The memoryIC’s available is of 16X4 size. The number of Ksrequired —(a) 8 (b) 4(c) 6 (d) 2

224. The write cycle time of a memory is 200 n sec. Themaximum rate at which data can be stored(a) 200 words/sec.(b) 5X103 words/sec.(c) 5X106 words/sec.(d) 5X109 words/sec.

225. The access time of a sequentially accessed memoryis(a) same as that of RAM(b) less than that of a RAM(c) higher than that of a RAM(d) same as that of a ROM

226. In a read-only Memory information can be stored(a) at the time of fabrication(b) by the user only once during its lifetime(c) by the user a number of times(d) any one of the above depending upon the

type of memory227. A charge-coupled device is

(a) A magnetic device(b) a bipolar semiconductor device(c) a MOS device(d) None

228. -A RAM(a) is a random access memory(b) is a volatile memory(c) is either static or dynamic memory(d) has all the above characteristics.

229. A static RAM is fabricated using(a) only the bipular(b) only the MOS technology(c) either a or b(d) None

230. Hard disk is an example of memory of the digitalcomputer(a) Primary memory(b) Secondary memory

(c) Main memory(d) none of these

231. MOS technology is used for, the fabrication of(a) static and dynamic RAMs(b) EPROMs(c) EPROMs(d) All the above

232. Read and write memory is same as(a) RAM(b) ROM(c) PROM(d) EAPROM.

234. Seek operation refers to(a) Moving the,:head to the proper track in a

floppy disk(b) loading the’ head in a floppy disk.(c) accessing a memory location in FROM(d) accessing a memory location in RAM.

235. Speed of rotation of hard disk is(a) 360 RPM (b) 3600 RPM(c) 36000 RPM (d) None.

236. The package density of D4V1, is than-that of SRAM(a) 4 times less (b) 4 tiMes more(c) 8 times less (d) 8 times more

237. DRAM is nothing but 7-(a) a bistable multi(b) simple switch in series with capacitor(c) flip-flop(d) none of these

238. Non-volatility is an important advantage of(a) CCD’S(b) Magnetic tape’s(c) Magnetic bubbles(d) both b and c

239. The desirable characteristic(s) of a memory system.is (are)(a) speed and reliability(b) low power consumption(c) durability and compactness(d) all of the above.

240. The memory which is programmed at the time it ismanufactured is

40


(a) ROM (b) RAM(c) PROM (d) EPROM

241. The memory which is ultraviolet erasable andelectrically programmable is(a) RAM (b) EEROM(c) EPROM (d) PROM

242. Which of the following memory is nonAlatile andmay be written only once?(a) RAM (b) EEPROM(c) EPROM (d) PROM

243. Which of the following memory must be refreshedmany times per second?(a) SRAM (b) DRAM(c) EPROM (d) ROM

244. The refreshing rate of dynamic memory isapproximately once in(a) two micro second(b) two milli seconds(c) fifty milli seconds(d) two seconds

245. Dynamic RAM can be fabricated using(a) MOS technology (b) TTL(c) ECL (d) IIL

246. A ROM is a(a) random-access type(b) non-volatile(c) programmable(d) has all the above characteristics.

247. A mask programmed ROM is(a) programmed at the time of fabrication(b) programmed by the user(c) erasable and programmable(d) erasable electrically

248. A PROM(a) is mask programmed(b) is erasable by ultraviolet(c) can be programmed only once(d) can be programmed any number of times

249. The process of entering information in EPROM iscommonly known as(a) writing(b) programming

(c) storing(d) none of these.

250. A function table is required in very large numbers.The memory most suitable for this purpose wouldbe(a) ROM (b) PROM(c) EPROM (d) EAPROM

251. When the power supply of a ROM is switched off,its eonients(a) become all zeros(b) became atoneess(c) remain intact(d) are unprecrciable

252. Fusible Cask is assoctjted with(a) RAM (b) ROM(c) PROM (d) EPROM

253. A PIA(a) mask programmable(b) field pnxyammable(c) can be programmed by a sewer(d) can be erased and programmed.

254. A PIA consKts of(a) AND matrix_(b) OR matrix(c) invert/non-invert matrix(d) all of the above.

255. A memory of size MxN bits cab store(a) N words of M bits each(b) M words of N bits each(c) M bits(d) N bits

……………………………………………………………………………..

1. Suppose there are two coins. The first coin givesheads with probability 5/8 when tossed, while thesecond coin gives heads with probability 1/4. Oneof the two coins is picked up at random with equalprobability and tossed. What is the probability ofobtaining heads?

41


(a) 7/8 (b) 1/2(c) 7/16 (d) 5/32

3. Consider a weighted undirected graph with positiveedge weights and let uv be an Edge in the graph.It is known that the shortest path from the sourcevertex s to u has weight 53 and the shortest pathfrom s to v has weight 65. Which one of thefollowaing statements is always true?(a) weight (u, v) < 12(b) weight (u, v) < 12(c) weight (u, v) > 12(d) weight (u, v) > 12

4. In the Spiral model of software development, theprimary determinant in selecting activities in eachiteration is(a) Iteration size(b) Cost.(c) Adopted process such as Rational Unified

Process or Extreme Programming(d) Risk.

5. Which of the following systems is a most likelycandidate example of a pipe and filter architecture ?(a) Expert system(b) DB repository(c) Aircraft fight controller(d) Signal processing

6. A processor takes 12 cycles to complete aninstruction 1. The corresponding pipelined processoruses 6 stages with the execution times of 3, 2, 5,4, 6 and 2 cycles respectively.What is the asymptotic speedup assuming that avery large number of instructions are to beexecuted?(a) 1.83 (b) 2(c) 3 (d) 6

7. Which of the following input sequences for a cross-coupled R-S flip-flop realized with two NAND gatesmay lead to an oscillation ?(a) 11, 00 (b) 01,10(c) 10, 01 (d) 00, 11

9. Consider an ambiguous grammar G and itsdisambiguated version D. Let the languagerecognized by the two grammars be denoted by

L(G) and L(D) respectively. Which one of thefollowing is true ?(a) L (D) c L (G) (b) L (D) L (G)(c) L (D) = L (G) (d) L (D) is empty

10. Processes P1 and P2 use critical_flag in thefollowing routine to achieve mutual exclusion.Assume that critical_flag is initialized to FALSE inthe main program.

get_exclusive_access ( ){

if (critical_flag = FALSE){critical_flag = TRUE;critical_region ( );

critical_flag = FALSE;}}Consider the following statements.(i) It is possible for both P1 and P2 to acess

critical_region concurrently.(ii) This may lead to a deadlock.Which of the following holds ?(a) (i) is false and (ii) is true(b) Both (i) and

(ii) are false(c) (i) is true and (ii) is false(d) Both (i) and

(ii) are true11. Let a memory have four free blocks of sizes 4k,

8k, 20k, 2k. These blocks are Allocated followingthe best-fit strategy. The allocation requests arestored in a queue as shown below.

Request No J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8

Request sizes 2k 14k 3k 6k 6k 10k 7k 20k

Usage Time 1 40 2 8 4 1 8 6The time at which the request for J7 will becompleted will be(a) 16 (b) 19(c) 20 (d) 37

42


12. The address sequence generated by tracing aparticular program executing in a pure demand pagingsystem with 100 bytes per page is 0100, 0200, 0430,0499, 0510, 0530, 0560, 0120, 0220, 0240, 0260,0320., 0410.Suppose that the memory can store only one pageand if x is the address which causes a page faultthen the bytes from addresses x to x + 99 areloaded on to the memory.How many page faults will occur ?(a) 0 (b) 4(c) 7 (d) 8

13. Consider the following statements about the timeoutvalue used in TCP.(i) The timeout value is set to the RTT (Round

Trip Time) measured during TCP connectionestablishment for the entire duration of theconnection.

(ii) Appropriate RTT estimation algorithm is usedto set the timeout value of a TCP connection.

(iii) Timeout value is set to twice the propagationdelay from the sender to the receiver

Which of the following choices hold?(a) (i) is false, but (ii) and (iii) are true(b) (i) and (iii) are false, but (ii) is true(c) (i) and (ii) are false, but (iii) is true(d) (i), (ii) and (iii) are false

14. Consider a TCP connection in a state where thereare no outstanding ACKs. The sender sends twosegments back to back. The sequence numbers ofthe first and second segments are 230 and 290respectively. The first segment was lost, but thesecond segment was received correctly by thereceiver. Let X be the amount of data carried inthe first segment (in bytes), and Y be the ACKnumber sent by the receiver. The values of X andY (in that order) are(a) 60 and 290 (b) 230 and 291(c) 60 and 231 (d) 60 and 230

15. Consider the following two statements:(i) A hash function (these are often used for

computing digital signatures) is an injectivefunction.

(ii) An encryption technique such as DESperforms a permutation on the elements ofits input alphabet. Which one of the followingoptions is valid for the above two statements?

(a) Both are false(b) Statement (i) is true and the other is false(c) Statement (ii) is true and the other is false(d) Both are true

16. The minimum positive integer p such that 3P modulo17 = 1 is (a) 5 (b) 8(c) 12 (d) 16

18. A firewall is to be configured to allow hosts in aprivate network toefrely open TCP connections andsend packets on open connections. However, it willonly allow external hosts to send packets on existingopen TCP connections or connections that are beingopened (by internal hosts) but not allow them toopen TCP connections to hosts in the privatenetwork. To achieve this the minimum capability ofthe firewall should be that of(a) A combinational circuit(b) A finite automaton(c) A pushdown automaton with one stack(d) A pushdown automaton with two stacks

19. Given below are some HTML lines.<img src = “ pict.jpg” width = “256” hight = “256”border = “0” usemap = “#map”/><map name = “map”><area shape = “poly”>

coords = “50, 50, 50, 100, 100, 100, 75, 75, 100, 50”href = “fl . html”›

< area shape= “ circle” coords =” 100, 75, 5"href =”../cgi-bin/f2. pl ? vl= ask abc’s age”›<area shape=” default” href=” fd. html”›</map>With reference to the HTML lines given above,consider the following statements.(i) Clicking on the point <80, 75> does not have

any effect.(ii) The web browser can identify the area

applicable to the mouse-click within theimage and the subsequent action to be taken

43


without additional responses from the webserver.

(iii) The dots in the cgi- bin URL will be resolvedby the web browser before it is sent to theweb server

(iv) The “ fd. html” request when sent to the webserver will result in a GET request. Exactlyhow many of the statements given above arecorrect?

(a) 0 (b) 1(c) 2 (d) 3

20. Consider the XML document fragment given below:<Book><Title> GATE 2K7 Example</Title> <Content>One of many lines </Content><TOC>One of many content entries </TOC></Book>Consider the XPath expression: * [not (self):: TOC]What would be the result of the given XPathexpression when the current node is Book?(a) The Title and Content elements(b) The Content and TOC elements(c) The Title and TOC elements(d) The Title Content and TOC elements

21. Which one of these first-order logic formulae isvalid?(a) V x(P(x)Q(x)) = ((VxP(x)) (VxQ(x)))(b) 3x(P(x) v Q(x)) = ((3xP(x)) = (3xQ(x)))(c) 3 x(P(x) n Q(x)) <7> ((3xP(x)) A (3xQ(x)))(d) V x3yp(x, y) = ayV x p(x, y)

22. The trapezoidal method is used to evaluate thenumerical value of the step size h.(i) 10-2 (ii) 10-3 (iii) 10-4 (iv) 10-5

For which of these values of the step size h, is thecomputed value guaranteed to be correct to sevendecimal places. Assume that there are no round-offerrors in the computation.(a) (iv) only(b) (iii) and (iv) only(c) (ii), (iii) and (iv) only(d) (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv)

23. A partial order P is defined on the set of naturalnumbers as follows. Here x / y denotes integerdivision.(i) (0, 0) õ P.(ii) (a, b) õ P if and only if a %10 d” b %10 and

(a/10, b/10) õ P.Consider the following ordered pairs:(i) (101, 22) (ii) (22, 101)(iii) (145, 265) (iv) (0, 153)Which of these ordered pairs of natural numbersare contained in P?(a) (i) and (iii) (b) (ii) and (iv)(c) (i) and (iv) (d) (iii) and (iv)

24. A depth-first search is performed on a directedacyclic graph. Let d[u] denote the time at whichvertex u is visited for the first time and flu] the timeat which the dfs call to the vertex u terminates.Which of the following statements is always truefor all edges (u, v) in the graph ?(a) d[u] < d[v] (b) d[u] < fly](c) flu] < fly] (d) flu] > f[v]

25. What is the largest integer m such that every simpleconnected graph with n vertices and n edgescontains at least m different spanning trees ?(a) 1 (b) 2(c) 3 (d) n

27. The function f is defined as follows: int f(int n){

if (n < = 1) return 1;else if (n % 2 == 0) return f(n/2);else return f (3n - 1);

Assuming that arbitrarily large integers can bepassed as a parameter to the function, consider thefollowing statements.(i) The function f terminates for finitely many

different values of n > 1.(ii) The function f terminates for infinitely many

different values of n > 1.(iii) The function f does not terminate for finitely

many different values of n > 1.(iv) The function f does not terminate for

infinitely many different values of n > 1.

44


Which one of the following options is trueof the above?

(a) (i) and (iii) (b) (1) and (iv)(c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (ii) and (iv)

28. Consider a hash function that distributes keysuniformly. The hash table size is 20.After hashing of how many keys will the probabilitythat any new key hashed collides with an existingone exceed 0.5.(a) 5 (b) 6(c) 7 (d) 10

29. When searching for the key value 60 in a binarysearch tree, nodes containing the key values 10, 20,40, 50, 70,80, 90 are traversed, not necessarily inthe order given. How many different orders are possible in whichthese key values can occur on The search pathfrom the root to the node containing the value 60?(a) 35 (b) 64(c) 128 (d) 5040

30. Suppose you are given an implementation of a queueof integers. The operations that can be performedon the queue are:(i) i sEmpt y (Q) — returns true if the queue is

empty, false otherwise.(ii) delete (Q) — deletes the element at the front

of the queue and returns its value.(iii) insert (Q, i) — inserts the integer i at the

rear of the queue.Consider the following function:void f(queue Q) {int i;if (!isEmpty (Q)){i = delete (Q) ;f (Q) ;insert (Q, i) ; }}What operation is performed by the above functionf ?(a) Leaves the queue Q unchanged(b) Reverses the order of the elements in the

queue Q(c) Deletes the element at the front of the queue

Q and inserts it at the rear keeping the otherelements in the same order

(d) Empties the queue Q31. Consider the C program given below :

# include <stdio.h>int main H {int sum = 0, maxsum = 0; i, n = 6;int a ( ) = {2, -2, -1, 3, 4, 2};for (i = a; i < n; i ++)if (i == 0 II a [i] < 0 II a[i] < a [i - 1] ) {if (sum > maxsum) maxsum = sum;sum = (a[i] > 0) ? a[i] : 0; }else sum + = a[i];if (sum > maxsum) maxsum = sum ;print f (11 %d\n”, maxsum) }What is the value printed out when this program isexecuted?(a) 9 (b) 8(c) 7 (d) 6

32. Consider the following C program:# include <stdio.h># define EOF -1Void push(int); /* push the argument on the stackint pop (void) ; 1* pop the top of the stack */void flagError - () ; int main () {int c, m, n, r;while ( (c= getchar() ) ! = EOF)(if (isdigit (c) ) push (c) ;else if (( c == ‘+’ ) Ð Ð (c == ‘*’) ) {m = pop () ;n = ‘pop ()r = (c == ‘+’ ? n+m: p*m ; push (r) ; }else if (c ! = )flagError () ;}printf (“% c”, pop () ) ;}What is the output of the program for the followinginput ?52 * 332 + * +(a) 15 (b) 25(c) 30 (d) 150

33. Consider the program below in a hypotheticallanguage which allows global variable and a choice

45


of call by reference or call by value methods ofparameter passing.int i;Program main (){

int j = 60;i = 50;call f (i , j )print i, j ;}procedure f (x, y){i = 100 ;x = 10 ;y = y + i ;}Which one of the following options represents thecorrect output of the program for the two parameterpassing mechanisms?(a) Call by value : i = 70, j =10; Call by reference

: i = 60, j = 70(b) Call by value : i = 50, j = 60; Call by reference

: i = 50, j = 70(c) Call by value : i = 10, j = 70; Call by reference

: i = 100,1 = 60(d) Call by value : i = 100, j = 60; Call by

reference : i = 10, j = 7039. Data forwarding techniques can be used to speed

up the operation in presence of datadependencies.Consider the following replacementsof LHS with RHS.(i) Ri Loc, Loc R2 R1 R2, Ri Loc(ii) Ri Loc, Loc R2 R1 ——> R2(iii) R1 —> Loc, R2 —> Loc R1—> Loc.(iv) R1 Loc, R2 Loc R1 LocIn which of the following options, will the result ofexecuting the RHS be the same as executing theLHS irrespective of the instructions that follow ?(a) (i) and (iii) (b) (i) and (iv)(c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (ii) and (iv)

41. Following table indicates the latencies of operationsbetween the instruction producing the result andinstruction using the result.

Instruction production Instruction using the Latencythe result result

A L U Operation ALU Operation 2

ALU Operation Store 2

Load ALU Operation

Load Store 0Consider the following code segment.Load R1, Loc 1; Load R1 from memory location LoclLoad R2, Loc 2 ; Load R2 from memory location Loc2Add R1, R2, R1; Add R1 and R2 and save result in R1Dec R2; Decrement R2Dec R1; Decrement R1Mpy R1, R2, R3; Multiply R1 and R2 and save result in R3Store R3, Loc 3; Store R3 in memory location Loc3

What is the number of cycles needed to executethe above code segment assuming each instructiontakes one cycle to execute ?(a) 7 (b) 10(c) 13 (d) 14

42. (C012.25)H - (10.111001110.101)B =(a) (135103.412)o (b) (564411.412)o(c) (564411.205)o (d) (135103.205)o

43. An error correcting code has the following codewords: 00000000, 00001111,01010101, 10101010, 11110000.What is the maximumnumber of bit errors that can be corrected ?(a) 0 (b) 1(c) 2 (d) 3

44. A hard disk system has the following parameters:Number of tracks = 500Number of sectors/track = 100Number of bytes/sector = 500Time taken by the head to move from one track toadjacent track =1 ms Rotation speed = 600 rpm.What is the average time taken for transferring 250bytes from the disk?(a) 300.5 ms (b) 255.5 ms(c) 255 ms (d) 300 ms

46. The two grammars given below generate a languageover the alphabet (x, y, z}G1: S ’! x Ðz Ð xS ÐzS Ð yB

46


B ’! y Ð z ÐyB Ð zBG2: S ’! y Ð z Ð yS Ð zS Ð xBB ’! y Ð ySWhich one of the following choices describes theproperties satisfied by the strings in theselanguages ?(a) Gl: No y appears before any x

G2: Every x is followed by at least one y(b) Gl: No y appears before any x

G2: No x appears before any y(c) G1: No y appears after any x

G2: Every x is followed by at least one y(d) Gl: No y appears after any x

G2: Every y is followed by at least one x47. Consider the following DFA in which so is the start

state and sl, s3 are the final states.

What language does this DFA recognize ?(a) All strings of x and y(b) All strings of x and y which have either even

number of x and even number of y of oddnumber or x and odd number of y

(c) All strings of x and y which have equalnumber of x and y

(d) All strings of x and y with either evennumber of x and odd number of y or oddnumber of x and even number of y

51. The following table shows the time between failuresfor a software system.Error Number 1 2 3 4 5

Time since last failure 6 4 8 5 6The reliability of the system for one hour of operationassuming an exponential model is(a) 0.45 (b) 0.63(c) 0.84 (d) 0.95

52. Given the following algorithm for shorting an arrayX and N numbers:SUBROUTINE SHORT (X, N)IF (N < 2)

RETURNFOR (i = 2) TO N INCREMENT BY1)FOR (j = 1) TO i INCREMENT BY1)IF (X [i] > X [1])CONTINUETEMP = X[i]X[i] = X[j]X[j] = TEMPEND FOREND SUBROUTINEA good approximation of Haistead’s estimatedprogram length is(a) 20 (b) 50(c) 80 (d) 110

57. In a multi-user operating system on an average, 20requests are made to use a particular resource perhour. The arrival of requests follows a Poissondistribution.The probability that either one, three or five requestsare made in 45 minutes is given by(a) 6.9 x 106 x e-20 (b) 1.02 x 106 x e-20

(c) 6.9 x 103 x e-20 (d) 1.02 x 103 x e-20

58. A demand paging system takes 100 time units toservice a page fault and 300 time units to replacea dirty page. Memory access time is 1 time unit.The probability of a page fault is p. In case of apage fault, the probability of page being dirty is alsop.It is observed that the average access time is 3time units. Then the value of p is(a) 0.194 (b) 0.233(c) 0.514 (d) 0.981

59. The contents of the text file tl txt containing fourlines are as follows :al bla2 b2a3 b2a4 blThe contents of the text file t2 txt containing fivelines are as follows :al cla2 c2a3 c3

47


a4 c3a5 c4Consider the following Bourne shell script :awk - F “ {Print $1, $2} tl . txt Iwhile read a b ; doawk -v aV = $ a - v by = $b - F “ aV ==$1 (print aV, bV, $2 ) t2. txtdoneWhich one of the following strings will NOT bepresent in the output generated when the abovescript in run? (Note that the given strings may besubstrings of a printed line.)(a) “b1 c1” (b) “b2 c3”(c) “b1 c2” (d) “bl c3”

65. Consider a selection of the form crA, 100(r), wherer is a relation with 1000 tuples.Assume that the attribute values for A among thetuples are uniformly distributed in the interval [0,500].Which one of the following options is the bestestimate of the number of tuples returned by thegiven selection query ?(a) 50 (b) 100(c) 150 (d) 200

66. Consider the following two transactions: T1 andT2.T1: read (A); T2: read (B);read (B); read (A);if A = 0 then B← B+1; if B ‘“ 0 then A← A-1;write (B); write (A);Which of the following schemes, using shared andexclusive locks, satisfy the requirements for stricttwo phase locking for the above transactions?

(a) S1: lock S(A); S2: lock S(B); (b) S1: lock X(A); S2: lock X(B);read (A); read(B); read (A); read(B);lockS(B); lockS(A); lockX(B); lockX(A);read(B); read(A); read(B); read(A);if A = 0 ifB# 0 if A = 0 ifB*0then B •! B+1; then A •!A-1; then B• !B+1; then A ’!A-1;write (B); write (A); write (B); write (A);commit; commit; unlock (A); unlock (A);unlock (A); unlock (B); commit; commit;unlock (B); unlock (A); unlock (B); unlock (B);

(c) S1:lock S(A); S2: lock S(B); (d) S1: lock S(A); S2: lock S(B);

read (A); read(B); read (A); read(B);lock X(B); lock X(A); lock X(B); lock X(A);read(B); read(A); read(B); read(A);if A=0 if B # 0 if A = 0 ifB*0then B • !B+1; then A • ! A-1; then B • !B +1; then A • ! A-1;write (B); write (A); write (B); write (A);unlock (A); unlock (A); unlock (A); unlock (A);commit; commit; unlock (B); unlock (B);unlock (B); unlock (B); commit ; commit ;

67. Consider the following implications relating tofunctional and multivalued dependencies given below,which may or may not be correct.(i) If A ->> B and A ->>, C then A -> BC(ii) If A -> B and A -> C then A ->> BC(iii) If A ->> BC and A -> B and A -> C(iv) If A -> BC and A -> B and A ->> CExactly how many of the above implications arevalid?(a) 0 (b) 1(c) 2 (d) 3

73. Which one of the regular expressions given belowdefines the same language as defined by the regularexpression R ?(a) (a(ba)’” + b(ab)’”)’”(a + b)+

(b) (a(ba)’” + b(ab)’”)’”(a+b)’”(c) (a(ba)’”(a + bb) + b(ab)’”’”(b+ aa))(a+b)’”(d) (a(ba)’”(a + bb) + b(ab)’”(b + aa))(a+b)+

Common Data for Questions 74, 75.Consider a token ring topology with N stations

(numbered 1 to N) running token ring protocol where thestations are equally spaced. When a station gets the tokenit is allowed to send one frame of fixed size. Ring latencyis tp, while the transmission time of a frame is tt. All otherlatencies can be neglected.74. The maximum utilization of the token ring when tt

= 3 ms, tp = 5 ms, N = 10 is(a) 0.545 (b) 0.6(c) 0.857 (d) 0.961

75. The maximum utilization of the token ring when tt

= 5 ms, tp = 3 ms, N = 15 is(a) 0.545 (b) 0.655(c) 0.9375 (d) 0.961

48


Stement for Linked Answer Questions 82 and 83.The head of a hard disk serves requests following theshortest seek time first (SSTF) policy. The head is initiallypositioned at truck number 180.82. Which of the request sets will cause the head to

change its direction after servicing every requestassuming that the head does not change direction ifthere is a tie in SSTF and all the requests arrivebefore the servicing starts?(a) 11, 139, 170, 178, 181, 184, 201, 265,(b) 10, 138, 170, 178, 181, 185, 201, 265(c) 10, 139, 169, 178, 181, 184, 201, 265(d) 10, 138, 17?, 178, 181, 185, 200, 265

83. What is the maximum cardinality of the request set,so that the head changes its direction after servicingevery request if the total number of tracks are2048 and the head can start from any track?(a) 9 (b) 10(c) 11 (d) 12

1. A set of Boolean connectives is functionally completeif all Boolean functions can be synthesized usingthose. Which of the following sets of connectivesis NOT functionally complete?(a) EX-NOR(b) implication, negation(c) OR, negation(d) NAND

2. A sample space has two events A and B such thatprobabilities P(A n B) =1/2,P(A) =1/3, P( B) = 1/3. What is P(A U B)?(a) 11/12 (b) 10/12(c) 9/12 (d) 8/12

3. What is the size of the smallest MIS(MaximalIndependent Set) of a chain of nine nodes?(a) 5 (b) 4(c) 3 (d) 2

4. Which of the following regular expressions describesthe language over{0, 11 consisting of strings thatcontain exactly two l’s?(a) (0 +1) *11(0 +1) *(b) 0 *110 *(c) 0 *10 * 10 *(d) (0 +1) *1(0 +1) *1 (0 +1) *

5. Let N be an NFA with n states and let M be theminimized DFA with m states recognizing the samelanguage. Which of the following in NECESSARILYtrue?(a) m d” 2n(b) n d” m(c) M has one accept state(d) m = 2n

6. The following bit pattern represents a floating pointnumber in JEEE 754 single precision format1 10000011 10100000000000000000000The value of the number in decimal form is(a) -10 (b) -13(c) -26 (d) None of the above

8. Consider the following Boolean function of fourvariablesf(A, B, C, D) = E(2,3,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13)The function is(a) independent of one variable(b) independent of two variables(c) independent of three variable(d) dependent on all the variables

24. The exponent of 11 in the prime factorization of300! is(a) 27 (b) 28(c) 29 (d) 30

25. In how many ways can b blue balls and r red ballsbe distributed in n distinct boxes?(a) (n+b-1)!(n+r-1)! (b) (n+(b+r)-1)!

(n - 1)!b!(n -1)!r! (n-1)!(n-1)!(b+r)!(c) n! (d) (n+(b+r)-1)!

b!r! n!(b + r -1)!26. Consider the field C of complex numbers with

addition and multiplication.Which of the following form(s) a subfield of C withaddition and multiplication?(S1) the set of real numbers (S2) {a + ib) Ð aand b are rational numbers}(S3) {a + ib Ð (a2+ b2) d” 1} (S4) {ia Ð a isreal)(a) only S1 (b) S1 and S3(c) S2 and S3 (d) S1 and S2

49


27. G is a simple undirected graph. Some vertices of Gare of odd degree. Add a node v to G and makeit adjacent to each odd degree vertex of G. Theresultant graph is sure to be(a) regular (b) complete(c) Hamiltonian (d) Euler

29. If M is a square matrix with a zero determinant,which of the following assertion (s) is (are) correct?(S1) Each row of M can be represented as a linearcombination of the other rows(S2) Each column of M can be represented as alinear combination of the other columns(S3) MX = 0 has a nontrivial solution(S4) M has an inverse(a) S3 and S2 (b) S1 and S4(c) S1 and S3 (d) Sl, S2 and S3

30. Consider the function f(x) = x2 — 2x —1. Supposean execution of the Newton-Raphson method tofind a zero of f(x) starts with an approximation xo=2 of x. What is the value of x2, the approximationof x that algorithm produces after two iterations,rounded to three decimal places?(a) 2.417 (b) 2.419(c) 2.423 (d) 2.425

29. If the fmal states and non-final states in the DFAbelow are interchanged, then which of the followinglanguages over the alphabet {a, b} will be acceptedby the new DFA?

a

(a) Set of all strings that do not end with ab(b) Set of all strings that begin with either an a

or a b(c) Set of all strings that do not contain the

substring ab(d) The set described by the regular expression

b*aa*(ba)*b*41. Assume that a main memory with only 4 pages,

each of 16 bytes, is initially empty. The CPUgenerates the following sequence of virtual addresses

and uses the Least Recently Used (LRU) pagereplacement policy.0,4,8,20,24,36,44,12,68,72,80,84,28,32,88,92How many page faults does this sequence cause?What are the page numbers of the pages presentin the main memory at the end of the sequence?(a) 6 and 1,2,3,4 (b) 7 and 1,2,4,5(c) 8 and 1,2,4,5 (d) 9 and 1,2,3,5

42. The two numbers given below are multiplied usingthe Booth’s algorithm.Multiplicand : 0101 1010 1110 1110Multiplier : 0111 0111 1011 1101How many additions/Subtractions are required forthe multiplication of the above two numbers?(a) 6 (b) 8(c) 10 (d) 12

46. The following three are known to be the preorder,inorder and postorder sequences of a binary tree.But it is not known which is which.I. MBCAFHPYKII. KAMCBYPFH III. MABCKYFPHPick the true statement from the following.(a) I and II are preorder and inorder sequences,

respectively(b) I and III are preorder and postorder sequences,

respectively(c) II is the inorder sequence, but nothing more

can be said about the other two sequences(d) II and III are the preorder and inorder

sequences, respectively47. Consider the following sequence of nodes for the

undirected graph given below.I. abefdgc II.abefcgd III.adgebcf IV. adbcgefA Depth First Seacrh (DFS) is started at node a.The nodes are listed in the order they are firstvisited. Which all of the above is (are) possibleoutput(s)?(a) I and III only (b) II and III only(c) II, III and IV only (d) I, II and III only

48. Consider a hash table of size 11 that uses openaddressing with linear probing. Let h(k) = k mod11be the hash function used. A sequence of recordswith keys

50


43 36 92 87 11 4 71 13 14is inserted into an initially empty hash table, the binsof which are indexed from zero to ten. What is theindex of the bin into which the last record is inserted?(a) 3 (b) 4(c) 6 (d) 7

59. A software engineer is required to implement twosets of algorithms for a single set of matrixoperations in an object oriented programminglanguage; the two sets of algorithms are to provideprecisions of 10-3 and 10-6, respectively. She decidesto implement two classes, Low Precision Matrixand High Precision Matrix, providing precisions 10-3 and 10-6 respectively. Which one of the followingis the best alternative for the implementation?(S1) The two classes should be kept independent.(S2) Low Precision Matrix should be derived fromHigh Precision Matrix.(S3) High Precision Matrix should be derived fromLow Precision Matrix.(S4) One class should be derived from the other;the hierarchy is immaterial(a) S1 (b) S2(c) S3 (d) S4

60. Which of the following requirement specificationscan be validated?(S1) If the system fails during any operation, thereshould not be any loss of data(S2) The system must provide reasonableperformance even under maximum load conditions(S3) The software executable must be deployableunder MS Windows 95, 2000 and XP(S4) User interface windows must fit on a standardmonitor’s screen(a) S4 and S3 (b) S4 and S2(c) S3 and S1 (d) S2 and S1

61. Let R (A, B, C, D) be a relational schema with thefollowing functional dependencies : A → B, B → C,C → D and D B. The decomposition ofR into (A,B), (B,C), (B,D)(a) gives a lossless join, and is dependency

preserving(b) gives a lossless join, but is not dependency

preserving

(c) does not give a lossless join, but isdependency preserving

(d) does not give a lossless join and is notdependency preserving

62. Let R (A, B,C,D,E,P,G) be a relational schema inwhich the following functional dependencies areknown to hold: AB → CD, DE → P, C E, P → Cand B → G. The relational schema R is(a) in BCNF(b) in 3NF, but not in BCNF(c) in 2NF, but not in 3NF(d) not in 2NF

63. Consider the following three schedules oftransactions T1, T2 and T3. [Notation: In thefollowing NYO represents the action Y (R for read,W for write) performed by transaction N on objectO.]

(S1) 2RA 2WA 3RC 2WB 3WA 3WC 1RA 1RB 1WA 1WB(S2) 3RC 2RA 2WA 2WB 3WA 1RA 1RB 1WA 1WB 3WC(S3) 2RA 3RC 3WA 2WA 2WB 3WC 1RA 1RB 1WA 1WB

Which of the following statements is TRUE?(a) Si, S2 and S3 are all conflict equivalent to

each other(b) No two of Si, S2 and S3 are conflict

equivalent to each other(c) S2 is conflict equivalent to S3, but not to S1(d) Si is conflict equivalent to S2,but not to S3

34. A 1Mbps satellite link connects two ground stations.The altitude of the satellite is 36,504 km and speedof the signal is 3 x108m/s. What should be thepacket size for a channel utilization of 25% for asatellite link using go-back-127 sliding windowprotocol? Assume that the acknowledgment packetsare negligible in size and that there are no errorsduring communication.(a) 120 bytes (b) 60 bytes(c) 240 bytes (d) 90 bytes

65. The minimum frame size required for a CSMA/CDbased computer network running at 1 Gbps on a200m cable with a link speed of 2 x108m/s is(a) 125 bytes (b) 250 bytes(c) 500 bytes (d) None of the above

51


66. Data transmitted on a link uses the following 2Dparity scheme for error detection:Each sequence of 28 bits is arranged in a 4x7matrix (rows ro through r3, and columns d7 throughd1) and is padded with a column do and row r4 ofparity bits computed using the Even parity scheme.Each bit of column do (respectively, row r4)givesthe parity of the corresponding row (respectively,column). These 40 bits are transmitted over thedata link.

d7 dg d6 d4 d3 d2 d1 I doro 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1r1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0r2 0 0 0 1 0 1 0r3 0 1 1 0 0 1 0r4 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

The table shows data received by a receiver andhas n corrupted bits. What is the minimum possiblevalue of n?(a) 1 (b) 2(c) 3 (d) 4

67. Two popular routing algorithms are DistanceVedtor(DV) and Link State (LS) routing. Which ofthe following are true?(S1) Count to infmity is a problem only with DVand not LS routing(S2) In LS, the shortest path algorithm is run onlyat one node(S3) In DV, the shortest path algorithm is run onlyat one node(S4) DV requires lesser number of networkMessages than LS(a) S1, S2 and S4 only(b) Si, S3 and S4 only(c) S2 and S3 only(d) S1 and S4 only

68. Which of the following statements areTRUE?(S1) TCP handles both congestion and flow control(S2) UDP handles congestion but not flow control(S3) Fast retransmit deals with congestion but notflow control

(S4) Slow start mechanism deals with bothcongestion and flow control(a) Si, S2 and S3 only(b) S1 and S3 only(c) S3 and S4 only(d) S1, S3 and S4 only

69. The three way handshake for TCP connectionestablishment is shown below.

Client Server

time

Which of the following statements are TRUE?(S1) Loss of SYN + ACK from the server will notestablish a connection(S2) Loss of ACK from the client cannot establishthe connection(S3) The server moves LISTEN -> SYN_RCVD-> SYN_SENT -> ESTABLISHED in the statemachine on no packet loss(S4) The server moves LISTEN -> SYN_RCVD-> ESTABLISHED in the state machine on nopacket loss.(a) S2 and S3 only (b) S1 and S4 only(c) S1 and S3 only (d) S2 and S4 onlyCommon Data QuestionsCommon Data for Questions 71, 72 and 73:A Binary Search Tree (BST) stores values in therange 37 to 573. Consider the following sequenceof keys.I. 81, 537, 102, 439, 285, 376, 305II. 52, 97, 121, 195, 242, 381, 472III. 142, 248, 520, 386, 345, 270, 307 IV 550,

149, 507, 395, 463, 402, 27071. Suppose the BST has been unsuccessfully searched

for key 273. Which all of the above sequences listnodes in the order in which we could haveencountered them in the search?(a) II and III only (b) I and III only

52


(c) III and IV only (d) III only72. Which of the following statements is TRUE?

(a) I,II and IV are inorder sequences of threedifferent BSTs

(b) I is a preorder sequence of some BST with439 as the root

(c) II is an inorder sequence of some BSTwhere 121 is the root and 52 is a leaf

(d) IV is a postorder sequence of some BST with149 as the root

73. How many distinct BSTs can be constructed with3 distinct keys?(a) 4 (b) 5(c) 6 (d) 9Common Data for Questions 74 and 75:Consider the following relational schema:Student (school-id. sch-roll-no, sname, saddress)School (school-id, sch-name, sch-address, sch-phone)Enrolment(school-id, sch-roll-no,erollno, examname)ExamResult(erollno, examname, marks)

74. What does the following SQL query output?SELECT sch-name, COUNT(*)

FROM SchoolC, Enrolment E, ExamResult RWHERE E.school-id = C.school-idANDE. examname=R.examname AND E.Erollno =

R.erollnoANDR.marks =100 AND S.school-id IN (SELECT school-idFROM studentGROUP BY school-idHAVING COUNT (*) > 200)GROUP By school-id(a) for each school with more than 200 students

appearing in exams, the name of the school and thenumber of 100s scored by its students

(b) for each school with more than 200 studentsin it, the name of the school and the number of100s scored by its students

(c) for each school with more than 200 students in it,the name of the school and the number of itsstudents scoring 100 in at least one exam

(d) nothing; the query has a syntax error

Linked Answer Questions :Q.77 to Q.81 carrytwo marks each.

Statement for Linked Answer Questions 76 and ’77:A binary tree with n >1 nodes has n1, n2 and n3 nodesof degree one, two and three respectively. The degree ofa node is defined as the number of its neighbours.77. Starting with the above tree, while there remains a

node v of degree two in the tree, add an edgebetween the two neighbours of v and then removev from the tree. How many edges will remain atthe end of the process?(a) 2*n1-3 (b) n2+2 *n22(c) n2 (d) n2+111-2Statement for Linked Answer Questions 78 and 79:A CFG G is given with the following productionswhere S is the start symbol, A is a non-terminal anda and b are terminals.S’! aSÐ AA’!aAbÐbAaÐõ

78. Which of the following strings is generated by thegrammar above?(a) aabbaba (b) aabaaba(c) abababb (d) aabbaab

79. For the correct answer in Q.78 how many stepsare required to derive the string and how manyparse trees are there?(a) 6 and 1 (b) 6 and 2(c) 7 and 2 (d) 4 and 2Statement for Linked Answer Questions 80 and 81:Consider a computer with a 4-ways set-associativemapped cache of the following characteristics: atotal of 1 MB of main memory, a word size of 1byte, a block size of 128 words and a cache sizeof 8 KB.

80. The number of bits in the TAG, SET and WORDfields, respectively are:(a) 7,6,7 (b) 6,5,7(c) 8,6,6 (d) 9,4,7

82. What does f(173) print?(a) 010110101 (b) 010101101(c) 10110101 (d) 10101101

53


1. Which one of the following is NOT necessarily aproperty of a Group?(a) Commutativity(b) Associativity(c) Existence of inverse for every element(d) Existence of identity

2. What is the chromatic number of an n-vertex simpleconnected graph which does not contain any oddlength cycle ? Assumen n2.(a) 2 (b) 3(c) n – 1 (d) n

3. Which one of the following is TRUE for any simpleconnected undirected graph with more than 2 verti-ces ?(a) No two vertices have the same degree.(b) At least two vertices have the samedegree.(c) At least three vertices have the same degree.(d) All vertices have the same degree.

4. Consider the binary relationR = 1(x, y), (x, z), (z, x), (z, y)} on the set (x, y,z). Which one of the following is TRUE?(a) R is symmetric but NOT anti-symmetric.(b) R is NOT symmetric but anti-symmetric.(c) R is both symmetric and anti-symmetric.(d) R is neither symmetric nor anti symmetric.

5. (1217)8 is equivalent to(a) (1217)16 (b) (028F)16

(c) (2297)10 (d) (0B17)16

6. What is the minimum number of gates required toimplement the Boolean function (AB + C) if wehave to use only 2-input NOR gates ?(a) 2 (b) 3(c) 4 (d) 5

7. How many 32 x 1 RAM chips are needed to providea memory capacity of 256 K-bytes?(a) 8 (b) 32(c) 64 (d) 128

8. A CPU generally handles an interrupt by executingan interrupt service routine(a) as soon as an interrupt is raised.(b) by checking the interrupt register at the end

of fetch cycle.

(c) by checking the interrupt register afterfinishing the executing of the currentinstruction.

(d) by checking the interrupt register at fixedtime intervals.

9. In which one of the following page replacementpolicies, Belady’s anomaly may occur ?(a) FIFO (b) Optimal(c) LRU (d) IVIRU

10. The essential content (s) in each entry of a pagetable is/are(a) virtual page number.(b) page frame number.(c) both virtual page number and page frame

number(d) access right information.

11. What is the number of swaps required to sort nelements using selection sort, in the worst case?(a) 0 (n) (b) 0 (n log n)(c) 0 (n2) (d) 0 (n2 log n)

12. S → aSalbSblalbThe language generated by the above grammar overthe alphabet (a, b} is the set of(a) all palindromes.(b) all odd length palindromes.(c) strings that begin and end with the same

symbol.(d) all even length palindromes.

13. Which of the following statement (s) is/are correctregarding Bellman-Ford shortest path algorithm`?P. A always finds a negative weighted cycle, if oneexists.Q. Finds whether any negative weighted cycle isreachable from the source.(a) P only (b) Q only(c) both P and Q (d) neither P nor Q

27. Given the following state table of an FSM with twostates A and B, one input and one output:

Present Present Input Next Next utputState A State B State C State A State B O

0 0 0 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 0

54


1 0 0 0 1 0

1 1 0 1 0 0

0 0 1 0 1 0

0 1 1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0 1 1

1 1 1 0 0 1If the initial state is A = 0, B = 0, what is theminimum length of an input string which will takethe machine to the state A= 0, B =1 with Output= 1?(a) 3 (b) 4(c) 5 (d) 6

S1 S2 S3 S4

II. 2 1 1 1

I2 1 3 2 2

13 2 1 1 3

14 1 2 2 228. Consider a 4 stage pipeline processor. The number

of cycles needed by the four instructions 11,12,13,14 in stages Sl, S2, S3, S4 is shown below:What is the number of cycles needed to executethe following loop?for (i = 1 to 2) {I1; 12; 13; 14}(a) 16 (b) 23(c) 28 (d) 30

29. Consider a 4-way set associative cache (initiallyempty) with tota116 cache blocks. The mainmemory consists of 256 blocks and the requst formemory blocks is in the following order:0, 255,1, 4, 3, 8, 133, 159, 216, 129, 63, 8, 48, 32,73, 92, 155.Which one of the following memory block will NOTbe in cache if LRU replacement policy is used?(a) 3 (b) 8(c) 129 (d) 216

31. Consider a disk system with 100 cylinders. Therequests to access the cylinders occur in followingsequence:4, 34, 10, 7, 19, 73, 2, 15, 6, 20Assuming that the head is currently at cylinder 50,what is the time taken to satisfy all requests if it

takes 1 ms to move from one cylinder to adjacentone and shortest seek time first policy is used ?(a) 95 ms (b) 11.9 ms(c) 233 ms (d) 276 ms

43. Which of the above schedules are conflict-serializable?(a) S1 adn S2 (b) S2 and S3(c) S3 only (d) S4 only

44. The following key values are inserted into a B+ —tree in which order of the internal nodes is 3, andthat of the leaf nodes is 2, is the sequence givenbelow. The 9rder of internal nodes in the maximumnumber of tree pointers in each node, and the orderof leaf nodes is the maximum number of data itemsthat can be stored in it. The B+ —tree is initiallyempty.10, 3, 6, 8, 4, 2, 1The maximum number of times leaf nodes wouldget split up as a result of these insertions is(a) 2 (b) 3(c) 4 (d) 5

47. Which opening a TCP connection, the initial se-quence number is to be derived using a time-of-day(ToD) clock that keeps running even when the hostis down. The low order32 bits of the counter of theToD clock is to be used for the initial sequencenumbers. The clock counter increments once permillisecond. The maximum packet lifetime is givento be 64s.Which one of the choices given below is closest tothe minimum permissible rate at which sequencenumbers used for packets of a connection can in-crease ?(a) 0.015/s (b) 0.064/s(c) 0.135/s (d) 0.327/s

48. Let G(x) be the generator polynomial used for CRCchecking. What is the condition that should besatisfied by G(x) to detect odd number of bits inerror?(a) G(x) contains more than two terms.(b) G(x) does not divide 1 + xk, for any k not

exceeding the frame length.(c) 1+ xis a factor of G(x).(d) G(x) has an odd number of terms.

55


49. Which of the following statements are TRUE ?I. The context diagram should depict the system asa single bubble.II. External entities should be identified clearly atall levels of DFDs.III. Control information should not be representedin a DFD.IV. A data store can be connected either to anotherdata store or to an external entity.(a) II and III (b) L II and IV(c) I and III (d) I, II and III

-----------

P.P. (PROCESS POURING )

1. Process of making hollow castings of desiredthickness by permanent mould without the use ofcores, is called(a) permanent mould casting(b) die casting(c) slush casting(d) centrifugal casting

2. Process of pouring molten metal under high pressureinto mould is called(a) permanent mould casting(b) die casting(c) slush casting(d) centrifugal casting

3. Process of pouring molten into mould and allowedto solidify, when the mould is revolving is called(a) permanent mould casting(b) die casting(c) slush casting(d) centrifugal casting

4. Process of making hollow casting from permanentmould by a close fitting core, is called(a) slush casting(b) die casting(c) pressed casting(d) investment casting

5. Casting process used for ornaments and toys of

non-ferrous alloys is(a) slush casting(b) die casting(c) pressed casting(d) investment casting

6. Casting process being expensive used only wheresmall number of intricate and highly accurate

parts are to be manufactured is(a) slush casting(b) die casting(c) pressed casting(d) investment casting

7. Investment casting uses pattern made of(a) wax (b) clay(c) metal (d) wood

8. Tolerance produced by investment casting methodin average work is(a) +0.05 mm (b) +0.2 mm(c) +0.5 mm (d) +1 mm

9. Misrum is a casting defect which occurs when(a) pauring temperature is very high(b) gases have been absorbed by the liquid metal(c) sufficient superheat has not been provided

to the liquid metal(d) alignment is improper.

10. True centrifugal casting is used to get(a) accurate castings(b) dynamically balanced castings(c) statically balanced castings(d) chilled castings

11. In die casting process(a) any metal can be cast(b) any size casting can be prepared(c) very high production rate is possible(d) die is cheap

12. The addition of coal dust to the green mouldingsand is to improve(a) permeability (b) surface finish(c) mouldability (d) green strength

13. The purpose of adding wood flour or saw dust tofoundry sand is to improve(a) mouldability

56


(b) dry strength(c) hot strength(d) collapsibility

14. Surface finish of casting depends upon(a) mould dressings(b) pattern finish(c) fineness of sand(d) all of these

15. In centrifugal casting method, impurities are(a) forced outisde the surface(b) collected at the centre of the casting(c) uniformly distributed(d) none of these

16. Squeezing machine is used to(a) ram the sand harder at the back of the

mouldand softer on the pattern face(b) ram the sand harder at the pattern face with

decreasing hardness towards the back of themould

(c) produce uniform packing of sand in the mould(d) give uniform sand hardness throughout the

mould17. A Jolt machine is used to

(a) ram the sand harder at the back of the mouldand softer on the pattern face

(b) ram the sand harder at the pattern facewith decreasing hardness towards the backof the mould

(c) produce uniform packing of sand in the mould(d) give uniform sand hardness throughout the

mould18. A sand slinger is used to


(b) ram the sand harder at the pattern face withdecreasing hardness towards the back of themould

(c) produce uniform packing of sand in themould

(d) give uniform sand hardness throughout themould

19. A diaphragm moulding machine is used to


(b) ram the sand harder at the pattern face withdecreasing hardness towards the back of themould

(c) produce uniform packing of sand in the mould(d) give uniform sand hardness throughout

the mould20. Machine used to draw the pattern from the mould

is know as(a) sand slinger(b) Jolt machine(c) stripper-plate machine(d) squeezing machine

21. The addition of Iron Oxide to the foundry sandimproves the(a) bonding (b) green strength(c) hot strength (d) permeability

22. A mesured quantity of molten metal is brought in aladle from the melting pot to a chamber and forcedinto the closed die-section by applying hydraulicpressure upon the plunger, in a(a) hot chamber die casting machine(b) cold chamber die casting machine(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

23. In a cold chamber die casting machine(a) melting pot is separate from the machine(b) only non-ferrous alloys with high melting

temperature are casted(c) aluminium, magnesium, copper base alloys

and other high melting alloys are casted(d) all of these

24. In a hot chamber die casting machine(a) melting pot is an integral part of the machine(b) non-ferrous alloys with low melting

temperatures are casted(c) zinc, tin, lead and other low melting alloys

are casted(d) all of these

25. In the foundry sand ‘Bentonite’ is used as(a) plasticiser(b) surface finish improver

57


(c) binder(d) refractory power

26. Shift is a casting defect which(a) results in a mismatching of the top and

bottom parts of a casting(b) is due to enlargement of the mould cavity by

metal pressure causing partial or over allenlargement of the casting

(c) occurs near the ingates as rough lumps onthe surface of the casting

(d) is due to a thin projection of metal notintended as part of the casting

27. Swell is a casting defect which(a) results in a mismatching of the top and

bottom parts of a casting(b) is due to enlargement of the mould cavity

by metal pressure causing partial or overall enlargement of the casting



28. Sand wash is a casting defect which(a) results in a mismatching of the top and





29. Fin is a casting defect which(a) results in a mismatching of the top and





30. Slag inclusion in casting is a

(a) surface defect (b) internal defect(c) superficial defect (d) none of these

31. Slush casting process is used to produce(a) hollow castins (b) intricate castings(c) large size castings (d) thin walled castings

32. Casting defect development due to inadequateventing is(a) inclusions (b) blow holes(c) cold shuts (d) none of these

33. Sever quenching can cause(a) blow holes(b) warping(c) crack formation(d) none of these

34. Casting defect caused by the molten metal is(a) blow holes (b) swell(c) scad (d) all of these

35. Casting defect caused by mixing of two streams ofmolten metal that are too cold to fuse properly, is(a) scab (b) swell(c) colds shots (d) shrinkage

36. Down spruce in casting is given a tapered shapefor(a) easy flow of molten metal(b) easy withdrawal of casting(c) preventing aspiration of gases through

spruce(d) preventing bulging of spruce during pouring.

37. Gas generated in mould with synthetic sand ascompared to silica sand is(a) more (b) less(c) same (d) unpredictable

38. Riddle is(a) round sieve(b) a long, flat metal plate fitted with an offset

handle(c) used to make or repair corners in a mould(d) used to scoop sand deep in the mould

39. The most suitable material for die casting is(a) steel (b) cast iron(c) nickel (d) copper

40. Draft on pattern for casting is

58


(a) shrinkage allowance(b) identification number marked on it(c) taper to facilitate its removal from mould(d) for machining allowance.

41. Casting process is preferred for parts having(a) a few details(b) many details(c) no details(d) non-symmetrical shape

42. In order to facilitate withdrawal of pattern(a) pattern is made smooth(b) water is applied on pattern surface(c) allowances are made on pattern(d) draft is provided on pattern

43. Loose piece patterns are(a) a sort of split patterns(b) used when the pattern cannot be drawn

from the mould(c) similar to core prints(d) never used in foundry work

44. Cores are used to(a) make desired recess in castings(b) strengthen moulding sand(c) support loose pieces(d) remove pattern easily

45. Trowel is(a) round sieve(b) a long, flat metal plate fitted with an offset

handle(c) used to make or repair corners in the mould(d) used to scoop sand deep in the mould

46. Shrinkage allowance is made up by(a) adding to external and internal dimensions(b) subtracting from external and internal

dimensions(c) subtracting from external dimensions and

adding to internal dimensions(d) adding to external dimensions and

subtracting from internal dimensions47. Wood for pattern is considered dry when moisture

content is(a) zero (b) 5%

(c) less than 15% (d) less than 25%48. The purpose of gate is to

(a) feed the casting at a rate consistent withthe rate of solidification

(b) act as reservoir for molten metal(c) help feed the casting unitl all solidification

takes place(d) feed molten metal from pouring basin to gate

49. Lifter is(a) round sieve(b) a long, flat metal plate fitted with an offset

handle(c) used to make or repair corners in the mould(d) used to scoop sand deep in the mould

50. Facing sand used in foundry work comprises of(a) silica and clay(b) clay and alumina(c) silica and alumina(d) clay and silica

51. Loam sand comprises of(a) 50% sand and 10% moisture(b) 40% sand and 10% moisture(c) 50% sand and 18% moisture(d) 80% sand and 20% moisture

52. The purpose of sprue is to(a) feed the casting at a rate consistent with the

rate of solidification(b) act as a reservoir for molten metal(c) help feed the casting until the solidificationtakes place(d) feed molten from pouring basin to gate

53. Accuracy of shell moulding is of the order of(a) 0.001 m/m(b) 0.003 to 0.005 m/m(c) 0.01 m/m(d) 0.1 m/m

54. Hexamethylene tetramine is added to the resin sandas a(a) binder (b) releasing agent(c) dispersant (d) catalyst

55. Sand slinger gives(a) better packing of sand near pattern

59


(b) better packing of sand near the flask(c) uniform sand density in the mould(d) none of these

56. When using disposable pattern, the metal should bepoured(a) very slowly(b) rather rapidly(c) at same rate as for other casting processes(d) at any rate

57. The purpose of pouring basin is to(a) feed the casting at a rate consistent with the

rate of solidification(b) act as a reservoir for molten metal(c) help feed the casting until the solidification

takes place(d) feed molten from pouring basin to gate

58. Match plate pattern is used in(a) green sand moulding(b) bench moulding(c) pit moulding(d) machine moulding

59. For steel castings, which of the following type ofsand is better ?(a) fine-grain(b) coarser-grain(c) medium grain(d) all are equally good

60. As the size of castings increases, it is often betterto use increasingly(a) fine-grain (b) medium grain(c) coarser-grain (d) any of these

61. The purpose of riser is to(a) feed the casting at a rate consistent with the

rate of solidification(b) act as a reservoir for molten metal(c) help feed the casting until the solidification

takes place(d) feed molten metal from pouring basin to gate

62. Slick is(a) a round sieve(b) a long, flat metal plate fitted with an offset

handle

(c) used to make or repair corners in themould

(d) used to scoop sand deep in the mould63. Linseed oil is used in the core sand as a

(a) catalyst (b) parting agent(c) flux (d) binder

64. In permanent mould casting method(a) molten metal is fed into the cavity in

metallic mould by gravity(b) metal is poured into die cavity, and at a

predetermined time the mould is inverted topermit a part of metal still in molten state tolfow out of cavity

(c) cavity is filled with a precalculated quantityof metal and a core or plunger is inserted toforce the metal into cavity

(d) metal is forced into mould under highpressure

65. Investment casting is used for(a) shapes which are made by difficulty using

complex patterns in sand casting(b) mass production(c) shapes which are very complex and

intricate and can’t be cast by any othermethod

(d) there is nothing like investment casting66. Pipes subjected to very heavy pressures of the order

100 kg/cm2 are made by(a) electric resistance welding process(b) centrifugal casting(c) die casting(d) extrusion process, as seamless pipes

67. Water pipes of large length and diameter are madeby(a) semi-centrifugal casting(b) continuous casting(c) sand casting(d) electric resistance welding

68. Strongest components are produced by(a) die casting (b) hot rolling(c) cold rolling (d) forging.

69. Longitudinal joint of drums of 150 mm thick sheetsare made by

60


(a) electric arc welding(b) plaska arc welding(c) electro-slag welding(d) resistance welding

70. Antioch process is a(a) continuous casting process(b) welding process(c) process of making porous moulds(d) there is nothing like antioch

71. Semi-centrifugal casting is used to(a) ensure purity and density at extremities

of a casting(b) cast symmetrical objects(c) obtain high density and pure castings(d) use heavy cast iron mould to act as chill

72. Surfaces to be machined are marked on the patternby the(a) black colour(b) yellow colour(c) red colour(d) blue colour

73. Blue colour on the pattern is marked for(a) machined surfaces(b) unfinished surfaces(c) loose piece pattern(d) never used in pattern marking operation.

74. Chilled surfaces are marked on the pattern by(a) oblique red trips(b) yellow cross strips(c) black cross strips on yellow(d) oblique red strips on yellow

89. Scabs or buckles are the casting defects(a) which occur due to some sand shearing

from the cope surface(b) which take the form of voids of surface

depression due to excessive gaseous materialnot able to escape

(c) which occur due to discontinuity in metalcasting resulting from hindered contraction

(d) casued by two streams of metals that are toocold to fuse properly

90. The provision of pattern shrinkage is to compensatethe shrinkage of(a) mould cavity(b) pattern(c) casting during solidification(d) casting after solidification

91. The ratio between the pattern shrinkage allowanceof steel and cast iron is about(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1(c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 1.5

92. Large and heavy castings are made by(a) green sand moulding(b) pit moulding(c) dry sand moulding(d) pressure moulding

93. Graphite moulds are used for continuous castingprocess in order to provide(a) non-wetting agent(b) self-lubricating qualities(c) chilling effect(d) heat resisting medium

94. Ferrous alloys are usually cast by(a) hot chamber machine(b) cold chamber machine(c) die casting machine(d) none of these

95. Suitable pattern for large size and symmetrical shapecastings such as wheel and bell is(a) split pattern(b) skeleton pattern(c) solid pattern(d) sweep pattern

96. Fludity is greatly influenced by(a) melting temperature(b) tapping temperature(c) pouring temperature(d) solidification temperature

97. Sweep pattern is used for moulding parts having(a) rectangular shape(b) elliptical shape(c) circular shape(d) complicated shape having intricate details

61


98. Centrifuging process is(a) limited to symmetrical object about horizontal

axis(b) limited to symmetrical objects about vertical

axis(c) used for producing castings of irregular

shape(d) used for producing one casting at a time

99. Hot tears are casting defects(a) which occur due to some sand shearing from

the cope surface(b) which take the form of internal voids of

surface depression due to excessive gaseousmaterial not able to escape

(c) which occur due to discontinuity in metalcasting resulting from hindere contraction

(d) casued by two streams of metals that aretoocold to fuse properly

100. Fettling is an operation performed(a) before casting(b) during casting(c) after casting(d) after heat treatment

101. Vertical centrifugal castings as compared tohorizontal centrifugal castings are spun at(a) higher speed(b) slower speed(c) same speed(d) unpredictable

102. Sheel moulding process requires(a) wooden patterns(b) sand patterns(c) plastic patterns(d) metal patterns

103. Cold shots are casting defects(a) which occur due to some sand shearing from

the cope surface(b) which take the form of internal voids of


(c) which occur due to discontinuity in metalcasting resulting from hindered contraction

(d) casued by two streams of metals that aretoo cold to fuse properly

104. Draft on pattern means(a) locating aid(b) allowance for machining(c) facility for stripping(d) compensation for shrinkage

105. Core prints are used to(a) strengthen core(b) form seat to support and hold the core in

place(c) fabricate core(d) none of these

106. Jolt machines produce(a) uniform ramming about the pattern(b) uniform ramming about the flask(c) uniform distribution throughout(d) pack sand loosely all around

107. Blow holes are casting defects(a) which occur due to some sand shearing from

the cope surface(b) which takes the form of internal voids of

surface depression due to excessiveg a s e o u s

material not able to escape(c) which occur due to discontinuity in metal

casting resulting from hindered contraction(d) casued by two streams of metals that are too

cold to fuse properly108. The main advantage of shell moulding is

(a) Strong mould(b) Ability to cast thin sections(c) High production rate(d) Ability to cast large sizes

109. Amount of gas generated while pouring hot metalin mould made with resin sand as compared to CO2

sand is(a) more (b) less(c) same (d) umpredictable

110. The purpose of chaplets is to(a) provide benting(b) induce directional solidification(c) compensate shrinkage

62


(d) support the core111. Sand are graded according to their

(a) source of origin(b) strength(c) permeability(d) clay content and grain size

112. In sand moulding, the bottom most part of thelfask is called(a) drag (b) flask bottom(c) cope (d) check

113. Cow dung is some times used in(a) bench moulding(b) dry sand moulding(c) green sand moulding(d) all of the above

114. Moulding sands can contain which of the followingpercentage of maximum quantity of moisture ?(a) 2.5% (b) 5%(c) 8% (d) 12%

115. Cope in foundary practice refers to(a) bottom half of moulding box(b) top half of moulding box(c) middle portion of the moulding box(d) heavy weight kept on moulding box to

overcome buoyant effect of molten metal116. Which of the following material has more shrinkage

allowance ?(a) cast iron (b) brass(c) lead (d) steel

117. The mould is housed in a(a) flask (b) cope(c) drug (d) check

118. Loose piece patterns are(a) a sort of split patterns(b) used when the pattern cannot be drawn

from the mould(c) similar to core print(d) never used in foundry work

119. Core are used to(a) make desired recess in casting(b) strengthen moulding sand(c) support loose pieces

(d) remove pattern easily120. In order to facilitate the withdrawal of pattern

(a) pattern is made smooth(b) water is applied on pattern surface(c) allowances are made on pattern(d) draft is provided on pattern

121. Least shrinkage allowance is provided in case of(a) brass (b) aluminium(c) cast iron (d) steel

122. The purpose of sprue is to(a) act as a reservoir for molten metal(b) feed molten metal from pouring basin to

gate(c) removing pattern from the mould(d) split pattern in two parts.

123. Aluminium is the best of the metals for makingpattern because it is(a) easy to work(b) light in weight(c) resistant to corrosion(d) all of these

124. Process of making hollow casting from permanentmould by a closed fitting core is known as(a) die casting (b) slush casting(c) pressed casting (d) centrifugal casting

125. The process of pouring molten metal in the metallicmould by gravity, is called(a) die casting(b) slush casting(c) pressed casting(d) permanent mould casting

126. For ornamental parts and toys of non-ferrous alloys,casting used is(a) die casting(b) slush casting(c) centrifugal casting(d) permanent mould casting

127. The tolerance obtained by investment casting is ofthe order of(a) ± 0.5 mm (b) ± 0.05 mm(c) ± 0.005 mm (d) ± 0.0005 mm

128. Pipes of large length and diameters are made by

63


(a) pressed casting(b) semi-centrifugal casting(c) slush casting(d) extrusion process

129. Pipes subjected to very high pressure of the order11120 kgf/cm2 are made by(a) pressed casting(b) semi-centrifugal casting(c) slush casting(d) extrusion process

130. To obtain high density and pure casting, whichof the following method is used?(a) Die casting(b) Centrifugal casting(c) Slush casting(d) Permanent mould casting

131. ‘lb cast symmetrical object, which of the followingcasting method is used ?(a) Die casting(b) True centrifugal casting(c) Investment casting(d) None of these

132. The colour marked on the surface of a patternnot to be machined is(a) black (b) green(c) red (d) blue

133. For reinforcement of sand in the top part ofmoulding box,(a) riddle is used (b) slick is used(c) swab is used (d) lifter is used

134. Which of the following is not a casting process ?(a) Carthias process(b) Extrusion(c) Semi-centrifugal method(d) Slush process

135. The purpose of gate is to(a) feed the casting at a rate consistent with

the rate of solidification(b) act as reservoir for molten metal(c) help feed the casting until to the solidification

takes place(d) feed molten metal from pousing basin

136. Facing-sand used in foundary work comprises(a) Alumina, Silica, Clay(b) Silica and Clay(c) Clay and Alumina(d) Silica and Alumina

137. Loam sand comprises of(a) 50% sand and 10% moisture(b) 40% clay and moisture(c) 50% clay and 18% moisture(d) 80% clay and 20% moisture

138. Dilatometer is used to find out which thefollowing property of moulding sand ?(a) permeability(b) moisture content(c) hot strength(d) compactness

139. Accuracy of shell moulding is of the order of(a) 0.001 min/mm(b) 0.003 to 0.005 mm/mm(c) 0.01 mm/mm(d) 0.1 mm

140. Moulding of casting ferrous material in continuouscasting process is made of(a) low carbon steel(b) medium carbon steel(c) high carbon steel(d) copper

141. When using disposable pattern, the metal should bepoured(a) very slowly(b) rather rapidly(c) at same rate as for other casting processes(d) any rate

142. For steel casting, which of the following type ofsand is better ?(a) Fine grain (b) Coarse grain(c) Medium grain (d) All are equally good

144. Hot tear refers to(a) casting defect(b) process of fabrication(c) process of heat treatment(d) weathering of non-ferrous materials

64


145. Slag inclusion in casting is a(a) surface defect (b) internal defect(c) crack (d) notch

146. Blow holes are casting defects,(a) which occur due to some sand shearing from

the cope surface(b) which takes the form internal voids or

surface depression due to excessiveg a s e o u s

material not able to escape(c) which occur due to discontinuity in metal

casting resulting from hindered contraction(d) which are caused by two stream of metals

that are too cold to fuse properly.147. Cold ducts are

(a) a forging defects due to insufficient filling(b) bores is welds(c) casting defects due to two streams not able

to fuse due to being cool(d) casting defect due to moisture

148. Slabs or buckles are the casting defects(a) which occur due to some sand shearing

from the cope(b) which take the form of internal voids or


(c) which occur due to discontinuity in metalcasting resulting from hindred contraction

(d) caused by which streams of metals that aretoo cold to fuse property

149. Sweep pattern is used for moulding parts having(a) rectangular shape(b) elliptical shape(c) uniform symmetrical shape(d) complicated shape having intricate details

150. The internal cracks in casting can be easily foundout by which of the following method ?(a) Magnatic particle inspection(b) Fluorescent penetrant(c) Dry penetrant(d) Ultrasonic

151. The internal hot tears defects in casting can beinspected by the method of

(a) radiography (b) visual inspection(c) damping test (d) hardness test

152. The surface and subsurface cracks in non-magneticalloys can be easily located and detected by theinspection method of(a) X-ray testing(b) ultrasonic testing(c) magnetic particle inspection testing(d) dye-penetrant

153. Hot tear are casting defects(a) which occur due to some sand shearing from

the cope surface(b) which take the from of internal voids or

surface depression due to excessive gas asmaterial not able to escape

(c) which occur due to discontinuity in metalcasting resulting from hindred contraction

(d) none of these154. During the freezing of pure metal, the possible

casting structure is(a) columnar structure(b) equi-axed grain structure(c) dendritic structure(d) dendritic and columnar

155. When an alloy solidify over a short range oftemperatures, the resulting casting structure will be(a) dendritic(b) partially columnar and partially equ-iaxed(c) wholly equi-axed(d) wholly columnar

156. Flogging in boundary practice refers to(a) type of moulding method(b) removal of spine and risers(c) removal of slag during pouring(d) casting defect

157. Vertical centrifuegal castings as compared tohorizontal centrifugal casting are spun at(a) higher speed (b) slower speed(c) same speed (d) none of these

158. Shell moulding process requires(a) wooden pattern (b) sand pattern(c) plastic pattern (d) none of these

65


159. Sand is packed on pit moulds with(a) manually (b) squeezers(c) jolt machines (d) sand slinger

160. For grey cast iron, the pattern shrinkageallowance is of the order of(a) 2 to 5 mm/m (b) 5 to 7 minim(c) 7 to 10.5 mm/m (d) 13.5 to 18 mm/m

1. Melting process is carried out by heating the metalpieces to plastic or fusion state bringing themtogether(a) with the application of pressure and filler(b) without the application of pressure and

without filler(c) with application of pressure and without filler(d) all of these

2. The process of welding, where the metal piecesto be joined are heated to plastic state and thenjoined together by application of pressure is called(a) Thermit welding(b) Arc welding(c) Gas welding(d) Plastic welding

3. The process of welding where the metal piecesare heated to molten state at the joint and thenallowed to solidify with the application of fillermaterial is called(a) Forge welding(b) Cold welding(c) Thermit welding(d) Fusion welding

4. The forging temperature in forge welding processis about(a) 350°C (b) 500°C(c) 1000°C (d) 1350°C

5. The flux commonly used in forge welding is amixture of borok, clean fine sand, and iron fillingsit the proportion of(a) 40 : 40 : 20 (b) 20 : 60 : 20(c) 20 : 40 : 40 (d) 40 : 20 : 40

6. Iron and low carbon steels are commonly joined byforge welding(a) without the application of flux(b) with the application of flux(c) both (a) and (b)(d) something else

7. In cold welding, the metal pieces are joined(a) by heating upto 500°C(b) by heating upto 1000°C(c) by heating upto 1350°C(d) without heating them

8. In cold welding the pressure range varies from(a) 300 kg/cm2 to 500 kg/cm2(b) 1300 kg/cm2 to 13,000 kg/cm2(c) 200 kg/cm2 to 300 kg/cm2(d) 100 kg/m2 to 1000 kg/m2

9. Oxygen to acetylene ratio in case of neutral flameis(a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1(c) 1 : 2 (d) 0.8 : 1

10. In resistance arc welding, the requirement is(a) heavy current, low voltage(b) heavy current, heavy voltage(c) low current, low voltage(d) low current, heavy voltage

11. Resistance welding include(a) Butt welding(b) Spot welding(c) Seam welding(d) all of these

12. For welding rods, wires or small pipes which ofthe following is used ?(a) Butt welding (b) Spot welding(c) Seam welding (d) Forge welding

13. In spot welding, the sheets are pressed together by(a) Air pressure(b) Hydraulic pressure

66


(c) Mechanical pressure(d) Something else

14. For constructing a tank or bucket, welding used is(a) Seam welding(b) Forge welding(c) Cold welding(d) Pressure gas welding

15. After mixing with pure oxygen, atylene burns toproduce a flame temperature varying between(a) 320°C to 1320°C(b) 350°C to 2500°C(c) 2000°C to 3000°C(d) 3200°C to 3500°C

16. Oxyacetylene flame is obtained through the tip ofthe welding torch into(a) one stage (b) two stages(c) three stages (d) four stages

17. Carburising flame has(a) 3 zones (b) 2 zones(c) 4 zones (d) 1 zone only

18. Neutral flame has(a) 2 zones (b) 1 zone(c) 3 zones (d) 4 zones

19. For welding materials upto 25 mm thickness, thejoint generally used is(a) Butt joint(b) T-joint(c) Plug weld joint(d) Jogged welded joint

20. In case, where longitudinal shear is present, forwelding the joint generally used is(a) Butt joint (b) Plug weld joints(c) Joggled joint (d) T joint

21. Arc length in arc welding should be equal to(a) Rod diameter(b) Half diameter of electrode rod(c) 2.5 times the diameter 7 rod(d) 3 times the diameter 7 rod

22. In arc welding temperature of following order isgenerated ?(a) 500°C (b) 5500°C

(c) 50°C (d) 55,000°C23. Projection welding is

(a) continuous sport welding process(b) multi spot welding process(c) used to form rectangle(d) something else

24. For welding materials like aluminium, stainless steel,zinc die casting, nickel, monel etc., the flame usedis(a) carburising flame(b) neutral flame(c) oxidising flame(d) something else

25. For welding materials like copper and brass, thelfame used is(a) oxidising (b) neutral flame(c) carburising (d) something else

26. For welding materials like steel, the flame used is(a) oxidising (b) neutral(c) carburising (d) something else

27. Oxygen to acetylene ratio in case of oxidising flameis(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1.5 : 1(c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1

28. Oxygen to acetylene ratio in case of carburisinglfame is(b) 0.6 : 1(d) 0.8 : 1

29. The positive pressure type of torch works on(a) Equal pressure principle(b) Differential pressure principle(c) Equal volume principle(d) Something else

30. As compared to lower conductivity materials, thehigh conductivity materials requires a torch head of(a) smaller diameter(b) larger diameter(c) equal diameter(d) has no relationship

31. For welding horizontal and over head joints whichwelding technique is used ?(a) Fore hand welding technique

67


(b) Back hand welding technique(c) both (a) and (b)(d) something else

32. For welding thinner metals (thickness less than5mm) which welding technique is used ?(a) Fore hand welding technique(b) Back hand welding technique(c) both (a) and (c)(d) something else

33. In arc welding, the voltage applied is(a) 4 volts (b) 40 volts(c) 4000 volts (d) 4000 volts

34. In arc welding, the voltage supplied is(a) A.C.(b) D.C.(c) Both A.C. and D.C.(d) something else

52. In resistance welding, two copper electrodes arcused. The electrode arc cooled by(a) air(b) water(c) either air or water(d) both air and water

53. The number of zones of heat generation in spotwelding are(a) two (b) three(c) four (d) five

54. Spot welding is most suitable for joining parts havingthickness upto(a) 50 mm (b) 30 mm(c) 20 mm (d) 10 mm

55. Which of the following welding processes uses non-consumable electrodes ?(a) MIG welding(b) TIG welding(c) CIG welding(d) Sub-merged arc welding

56. Which of the following welding processes useconsumable electrodes ?(a) MIG welding(b) TIG welding(c) CIG welding

(d) Sub-merged arc welding57. In arc-welding process, penetration is deepest for

(a) DCRP(b) DCSP(c) A.C.(d) None of these

58. In arc-welding processes, penetration is least for(a) DCRP (b) DCSP(c) A.C. (d) none of these

59. The welding process is which heat is produced forwelding chemical reaction is called(a) Forge welding (b) Resistance welding(c) Gas welding (d) Thermit welding

60. In thermit welding, a very high temperature isdeveloped. This temperature is of the order of(a) 1000°C (b) 2000°C(c) 2700°C (d) 3600°C

61. In thermit welding, the aluminium and iron oxideare mixed in the proportion of(a) 1 : 3 (b) 1 : 2(c) 1 : 1 (d) 2 : 1

62. For welding heavy parts such as trucks, brokenmotor castings connecting rods etc., the weldingprocess used in generally(a) resistance welding(b) gas welding(c) thermit welding(d) spot welding

63. The process of joining two pieces of metals in whicha non-ferrous alloy is introduced in a liquid statebetween the pieces of metals to be joined andallowed to solidify is called(a) welding (b) soldering(c) brazing (d) lancing

64. The process of joining two or more pieces of metalsheets, by means of a fusible alloy or metal appliedin the molten state, is called(a) welding (b) wiping(c) GMAW (d) lancing

65. Soldering of lead-pipe is known as(a) lancing (b) soldering(c) brazing (d) GTAW

68


66. After the welding operation, the residual flux mustbe removed from the metal surface immediatelyotherwise the presence of residual f l ux will promote(a) crack formation (b) corrosion(c) diffusion (d) undercutting .

67. Inadequate penetration in case of welding operationwill lead to(a) crack formation(b) corrosion(c) diffusion(d) undercutting

68. For welding steel by MIG process, the gas used is(a) pure argon gas(b) CO,(c) argon-oxygen mixture(d) nitrogen

1. Side rake angle of single point tool is the angle(a) between surface of flank immediately below

point and straight line from the point inclinedat 90° to the base.

(b) by which face of the tool is machined sideways

(c) by which face of the tool leans backwards(d) none of these

2. Back rack angle of a single point tool is the angle(a) between surface of flank immediately below

the point and a straight line from the pointinclined at 90° to the base.

(b) by which face of the tool is inclinedtowards back

(c) by which face of the tool leans sidways(d) none of these

3. Helix angle of a drill for ferrous materials is(a) 45° (b) 70°(c) 90° (d) 30°

4. For softer materials , the point angle of drill is(a) decreased

(b) increased(c) 120°(d) material does not affect the point angle

5. When the speed goes above 20 r.p.m in metal cutting,the maximum heat is carried by(a) tool (b) chip(c) work (d) tailstock

6. In cemented carbides, the binding material used is(a) Cobalt (b) Chromium(c) A1203 (d) Araldite

7. When the cutting speed increases, the powerrequirement(a) increases linearly(b) varies randomly(c) remain constant(d) decreases

8. When cutting speed increases, the cutting force(a) increases linearly(b) varies randomly(c) decreases(d) more or less remain constant

9. The broaching process in which the broaching toolmoves past the stationary work is called(a) Straight broaching(b) Continuous broaching(c) Pull broaching(d) Counter broaching

10. The tailstock and carriage, in a lathe are guided on(a) different guideways(b) rails(c) same guideway(d) magnets

11. The rake angle in a drill(a) decreases from centre to periphery(b) increase from centre to periphery(c) remain constant(d) is irrelevant to the drilling operations

12. Plain milling of mild steel plates produces(a) irreguler shaped discontinuous chips(b) regular shaped discontinuous chip(c) continuous chips without build up edge(d) jointed chips

69


13. Among the conventional processes, maximumspecific energy is consumed in(a) turning (b) drilling(c) plaining (d) grinding

14. The 18 : 4 : 1 high speed steel has a compositionof(a) 18% Ni, 4% Mo, 1% C(b) 18% Cr, 4% Mo, 1% C(c) 18% W, 4% Cr, 1% C(d) 18% Ni, 4% Cr, 1% V

15. While cutting aluminium with high speed steel, therecommended average cutting speed in Metre/minutes is(a) 20 (b) 25(c) 75 (d) 90

16. The milling machine cutting tool has(a) reciprocating motion(b) horizontal motion(c) rotational motion(d) vertical motion

35. Depth of finishing cut on milling machine is of theorder of(a) 0.01 to 0.1 mm (b) 0.4 to 0.8 mm(c) 0,01 to 0.3 mm (d) 0.8 to 1.2 mm

36. Best coolant and lubricant for Aluminium is(a) water soluble oils for sulpher based mineral

oils(b) mineral and fully oils or soluble oils(c) soluble oils(d) dry

37. For ferrous material , the_helix angle of drill is takenas(a) 30° (b) 45°(c) 60° (d) 90°

38. The cut per tooth while broaching steel in a keyway broach is by the order of(a) 0.01 to 0.05 mm(b) 0.05 to 0.2 mm(c) 0.001 to 0.01 mm(d) 0.02 to 0.08 mm

39. Cylindrial part held on planner by(a) V-block and arrestors

(b) angle plates(c) V-block, T-bolts, and clamps(d) T-bolt and clamps

40. The feeding of job in a shaper is done by(a) movement of the clapper box(b) table movement(c) V-block(d) tool movement

41. Discontinuous chips will be formed whenmachining speed is(a) high(b) low(c) medium(d) irrespective of cutting speed

42. Continuous chip will be formed when machiningspeed is(a) high(b) Low(c) medium(d) irrespective of cutting speed

43. For the same amount of metal removal, the shearstress is induced in orthogonal as compared tooblique cutting is(a) more(b) less(c) equal(d) there is no such correlation

44. Which of the following is used as cutting fluid forthe turning and milling operation on alloy steels?(a) CO2

(b) Kerosene(c) Soluble oil(d) Sulphurised mineral oil

45. Which of the following is the chip removal process?(a) Rolling (b) Extruding(c) Die casting (d) Broaching

46. Ceramic tools are made from(a) Tungsten oxide (b) Silicon carbide(c) Cobalt (d) Aluminium oxide

47. The angle between lathe centre is(a) 15° (b) 30°(c) 45° (d) 60°

70


48. The movement of the various slides as well as thefeeding of the stock is entirely automatic on screwmachine and is obtained by the action of(a) gear (b) toilet(c) roller (d) cam

49. The grit, grade and structure of grinding wheels forspecific operation are based on(a) grinder clearance(b) spindle size of the grinder(c) diameter of wheel(d) speed at which the wheel is to be used

50. For grinding high tensile strength materials, whichof the following abrasive is recommended ?(a) A1203 (b) SiC(c) Diamond (d) Corundum

51. A 5mm thick shoulder on a 100mm diameter shaftwill be ground by which of the following operation?(a) Cylindrical grinding(b) Centreless grinding(c) Plunge grinding(d) Surface grinding

52. Operation of sharpening a grinding wheel is called(a) truing(b) dressing(c) aligning(d) balancing

53. Honing operation produces normal quality of finishof the order of(a) 0.01 to 0.08 mm CLA value(b) 0.08 to 0.2 mm CLA value(c) 0.2 to 0.4 mm CIA value(d) 0.8 to 1.5 mm CIA value

54. Which of the following is the natural abrasive ?(a) A1203 (b) SiC(c) Boron-carbide (d) Corundum

55. Which of the following abrasive will be used forgrinding ceramics ?(a) Diamond (b) A1203

(c) SiC (d) Boron carbide56. Which of the following is fastest method of cutting

gear ?(a) Milling (b) Gear shaping

(c) Gear bobbing (d) All of these57. Holes is parts which have been hardened by heat

treatment can be finished to accurate size only by(a) drilling(b) boring(c) internal grinding(d) reaming

58. A grinding wheel gets glazed due to(a) wear of abrasive grinds(b) wear of bond(c) breaking of abrasive(d) cracks

59. Drilling brass and bronze, the lubricant used is(a) keroscene(b) a flood of soluble oil(c) dry(d) sodawater

60. For drilling brass, a drill with(a) zero helix angle is required(b) low helix angle is required(c) high helix angle is required(d) any helix angle can be used

61. The accuracy of surface finish in case of broachingis of the order of(a) 8.0 microns (b) 0.8 microns(c) 0.08 microns (d) 0.008 microns

62. Maximum cut per tooth in case of broaching is(a) 1 mm (b) 0.5 mm(c) 0.15 mm (d) 0.01 mm

63. Which of the following pitch leads to chatter incase of broaching ?(a) Fine pitch (b) Large pitch(c) Uniform pitch (d) All of these

64. Process used for completing job in one stroke ofthe machine is(a) milling (b) drilling(c) broaching (d) boring

65. The drills are made in(a) Number sizes (b) letter sizes(c) metric sizes (d) all of these

66. The main cutting edge of a drill that are formed byintersection of the flank and surface is called

71


(a) shanks (b) lips(c) webs (d) none of these

67. The best angle to grind a drill for work on extremelyhard and soft material is(a) 70, 70 (b) 59, 59(c) 59, 70 (d) 30, 59

68. With the increase of helix angle the cutting edgebecomes(a) weak (b) story(c) normal (d) none of these

69. For harder material, helix angle are of the order of(a) 50 to 60° (b) 35 to 45°(c) 20 to.30° (d) 10 to 13°

70. In grinding carbon-steel drill(a) no water should be used(b) plenty of water should be used(c) cold air should be used(d) none of these

71. For drilling aluminium and copper the lubricant usedis(a) keroscene (b) soda water(c) turpentine (d) dry

72. For drilling malleable carbon, the lubricant used is(a) keroscene (b) sodawater(c) turpentine (d) dry

89. Average thickness of the cut in one travel of thereciprocating saw is

(a) 1.5 mm (b) 3.0 mm(c) 6.25 mm (d) 8.0 mm

90. The operation of cutting a metal to some specifiedlength before the metal is presented to a machinetool, is called(a) broaching (b) milling(c) sawing (d) boring

91. In order to obtain a high surface finish, the machineshould(a) have vibration of maximum amplitude(b) have vibration of minimum aplitude(c) be free from vibration(d) none of these

92. Ray digram is a graph showing the relation between(a) cutting speed and speed of spindle

(b) cutting speed and diameter of workpiece(c) diameter of workpiece and spindle speed(d) cutting speed, diameter of job and spindle

93. A twist drill is specified by its shank, material and(a) diameter (b) dia angle(c) size of flute (d) length of body

96. Depth of cut is shaper should not be less than(a) 0.1 mm (b) 0.2 mm(c) 0.01 mm (d) 0.4 mm

97. The overhand of the tool slide in case of a shapershould be(a) maximum (b) minimum(c) zero (d) none of these

98. The front clearance angle is case of shaper whenthe tool is in the cutting position could be(a) 10 to 12° (b) 8 to 10°(c) 4 to 6° (d) 3 to 4°

99. Stroke of slotting machine ranges from(a) 100 to 200 mm(b) 200 to 300 mm(c) 300 to 1800 mm(d) 1800 to 30000 mm

100. In case of slotting machine, the cutting action takesin(a) upward stroke(b) forward stroke(c) downward stroke(d) backward stroke

101. The longitudinal and transverse power feeds in caseof slotting machine varies from(a) 2 to 4 mm /stroke(b) 0.05 to 2.5 mm / stroke(c) 1 to 2 mm/ stroke(d) 0.5 to 1.0 mm/ stroke

106. The length of approach in case of drilling operationis equal to(a) 0.8 D (b) 0.6 D(c) 0.29 D (d) 0.14 D

109. If speed of workpiece is increased, the grain depthof cut in case of grinding(a) decreases(b) increases

72


(c) remain constant(d) first decrease and then increases

110. Temperature in fine grinding can be reduced by(a) decreasing wheel speed and increasing chip

thickness(b) decreasing wheel speed and chip thickness(c) increasing wheel speed and decreasing

chip Thickness(d) increasing wheel speed and chip thickness

111. The temperature in normal grinding can be reducedby(a) decreasing wheel speed(b) decreasing wheel speed and chip thickness(c) increasing wheel speed(d) increasing wheel speed and chip thickness

112. Electro-chemical forming machining works on theprinciple of(a) Faraday’s law of electrolysis(b) Joule’s law(c) Ohm’s law(d) Charle’s law

113. The flow of abrasive particles is controlled byamplitude of vibration of honing chamber (AJM)which is generally(a) 30 cps (b) 60 cps(c) 100 cps (d) 2000 cps

114. AJM is used where(a) materials are sensitive heat(b) thin sections of hard material(c) intricate holes which are difficult to produces

by other machining processes(d) all of these

115. Drilling of hole (0.025) in fuel injection nozzle canbe done by(a) ECF (b) ECG(c) ECM (d) EDM

116. Drilling holes with curved axis as well as machiningof non-symmetrical mterial section, trepanningrectan-gular holes is thin value sleeves in moreeffectively done by(a) EDM (b) ECM(c) EBM (d) LBM

117. In EDM, the current density in the discharge ofchannel is of the order of(a) 10 amp. per cm2(b) 100 amp. per cm2(c) 1000 amp per cm2(d) 10,000 amp per cm2

118. Mechanical driven presses range in capacity(a) 2-5T (b) 5-100T(c) 100-200T (d) 0.5-2T

119. Hydraulic driven presses use the hydraclic powerstored is an accumulator. The pressure in pipe linemay vary from(a) 800-300 kg/cm2(b) 25-75 kg/cm2(c) 10-25 kg/cm2(d) 300 — 700 kg/cm2

120. LASER beam machining process is used formachining(a) very thick material(b) thin material(c) heavy section(d) is not used for machining

121. Sintered and tungsten carbides can be machined by(a) brazing(b) grinding(c) diamond tools(d) Electro-machining process

122. Spark errosion machining method can be used forthe machining of(a) conducting materials-only(b) non-conducting materials only(c) semi-conductors only(d) any metal

123. Chemical milling operation is carried out on(a) grinder(b) milling machine(c) tank containing etching solution(d) surface table

124. Which of the following electrolyte is used in electrochemicals machining process ?(a) Brine solution (b) Keroscene(c) Transformered (d) Water

73


125. For machining of tungsten carbide by ultrasonicmachining, which abrasive is used for maximummachining rate?(a) Silicon carbide (b) Boron carbide(c) Aluminium oxide (d) Glass

126. In electro-chemical milling operation, the gapbetween tool and work kept is of the order of(a) no gap, two are in contact with each other(b) 0.25 mm(c) 0.75 mm(d) 1.25 mm

127. In spark errosion machining process, gap betweentool and workpiece is filled with(a) photo etchant(b) brine solution(c) acid solution(d) liquid dielectric

128. In electro-discharge machining process, theworkpiece and the electrode are submerged in(a) dielectric fluid(b) abrasive slurry(c) electrolytic solution(d) vaccum

129. The cutting tool used in the spark errosion machiningprocess is called(a) arc (b) capacitor(c) electrode (d) dielectric

130. The machining process in which the metal of aworkpiece is dissolved, is(a) electro-discharge machining(b) ultra sonic machining(c) electro-chemical machining(d) chemical machining

131. The machining method which uses abrasive slurryis called(a) Electro-discharge machining(b) Laser machining(c) Plasma arc machining(d) Ultrasonic machining

132. A big advantage of ELM over EDM is that(a) it can cut harder material(b) it is more accurate and precise

(c) it consumes less power(d) tool wear is negligible

133. A hole ‘1 mm’ is to be drilled is glass. It could bestbe done by(a) laser drilling(b) plasma arc drilling(c) ultrasonic method(d) electro beam drilling

134. In ultrasonic drilling process, the tool is usually given(a) rotary motion(b) reciprocating motion(c) linear motion(d) both rotary and reciprocating motion

135. Ultrasonic machine finds application for(a) production of tapped holes and threads in

brittle materials(b) die casting(c) machining sintered carbides diamonds etc(d) all of these

136. In spark errosion machining process which is usedfor die sinking, the usual tool material is(a) high speed steel(b) brass(c) tungsten carbide(d) diamond

137. Spark errosion machining method can be used forthe machining of(a) conducting material only(b) non-conducting materials(c) semi-conducters only(d) both conducting and non-conducting materials

138. Metal in machining operation is removed by(a) tearing chips(b) distorsion of metal(c) shearing the metal across a zone(d) cutting the metal across a zone

139. In EDM process, if both the electrodes (one tooland the other workpiece) are made of the samematerial, then errosion of the metal(a) greatest at positive electrode (anode)(b) greatest at negative electrode (cathode)(c) same at both anode and cathode

74


(d) minimum at anode and cathode141. In ECG process, the metal is removed by

(a) abrasion of metal only(b) electro chemical decomposition only(c) 10% electro-chemical decomposition are

90% abrassion of the metal(d) 90% electro-chemical decomposition and

10% abrassion of the metal142. Reverse of electro-plating process is

(a) EDM (b) ECM(c) ECG (d) LBM

143. In ECG process(a) grinding pressure is low(b) pressure is lest but temperature is high(c) temperature is very low(d) both grinding pressure and temp are low

144. In chemical milling process, chemical etching reagentis used. The chemical reagent for aluminiumworkpiece is(a) Nitric acid (b) Sodium sulphate(c) Caustic soda (d) Sodium chloride

145. In chemical milling process, the chemical reagentfor steel workpiece is(a) Nitric acid (b) Sodium sulphate(c) Castic soda (d) Sodium chloride

146. In USM process, the cutting rate will be factor ifamplitude of vibration is(a) minimum (b) maximum(c) constant (d) none of these

147. In AJM process, inside diameter of the nozzlethrough which abrassive particle flow, is about(a) 10 mm (b) 5 mm(c) 1 mm (d) 0.04 mm

148. USM process is used for machining(a) hard metal (b) brittle metal(c) conduction (d) all of these

149. In electro-discharge machining, the tool is made of(a) castiron (b) copper(c) brass (c) all of these

150. In EDM process, in order to remove maximum metaland have minimum wear on the tool(a) tool is made cathode and workpiece as anode

(b) tool is made anode and workpiece as cathode(c) tool and workpiece should be of different

metals(d) none of these

1. Sheet metal cutting operations include operation for(a) producing blanks(b) cutting holes(c) progressive working like notching, lancing

etc.(d) all of these

2. In shearing process(a) no dies are required(b) shear cut is along a straight line(c) no scrap is produced(d) all of these

3. Cutting operations during which the punch does notcut on all the sides are called(a) slotting (b) blanking(c) notching (d) lancing

4. Semi-notching is(a) similar to notching(b) used to free the metal for drawing or forming(c) process in which metal is cut about a closed

contour(d) all of these

5. When a cut is made partway across the metal, theoperation is called(a) trimming (b) lancing(c) slotting (d) notching

6. Cutting off of the excess metal is called(a) trimming (b) lancing(c) slotting (d) none of these

7. Shaving of metals is done in order to remove(a) burr and improve accuracy(b) excess metal(c) scrap(d) all of these

75


8. Sum of the burnish height and the vertical dish-shaped deformation is called(a) clearance (b) penetration(c) slitting (d) none of these

9. Clearance is(a) space between the punch cutting edge and

the die cutting edge.(b) more in thicker sheet metal(c) more in the softer sheet metal(d) all of these

10. For softer metals, the proper clearance is between(a) 6 and 10% of the sheet metal thickness(b) 8 and 12% of the sheet metal thickness(c) 10 and 18% of the sheet metal thickness(d) 20 and 30% of the sheet metal thickness

11. For harder metals, the amount of plasticdeformation is(a) less (b) more(c) moderate (d) uncertain

12. As the metal becomes softer, the angle of fracturing(a) increases(b) decreases(c) remains constant(d) none of these

13. Cold welding occurs(a) to a greater degree when cutting soft metals(b) between the punch and the hole in the sheet

metal(c) between the die and the slug cut out(d) all of these

14. Proper functioning of cutting die may beascertained by minimum of(a) plastic deformation of edge of sheet metal(b) burnish area on edges of sheet metal(c) burr height on edge of sheet metal(d) all of these

15. Inclinable or open back inclinable press(a) aid to remove parts or scrap by gravity(b) has more rigid base(c) has adjustable table(d) all of these

16. Vertical frame position is in

(a) straight sided (b) horning(c) open-end frame (d) all of these

17. The force that the press ram is able to exert iscalled(a) tonnage of the press(b) horning(c) stroke of the press(d) none of these

36. Jigs and fixtures may be done by(a) casting iron(b) fabricating from steel plates and machined

parts by welding(c) building up bolting sections and bolting parts

together.(d) all of these

37. The method used to manufacture jigs and fixturesdepends on(a) size of the equipment(b) shape of the equipment(c) time allowed to manufacture it(d) all of these

38. A body which is free in space has degrees offreedom(a) two (b) three(c) six (d) zero

39. A body which is free in space has freedom oftranslation.(a) two (b) three(c) six (d) zero

40. The choice of location system depends on the(a) operation being performed(b) workpiece before the operation(c) degree of freedom necessary(d) all of these

41. A redundant location is said to exist when twolocators are attempting to constrain(a) one freedom from two location points(b) two freedoms from one location point(c) two freedoms from two location points(d) one freedom from one location point

42. Locators are

76


(a) usually made separate from the fixture or jigbody

(b) of direct or casehardened steel accuratelyground to size

(c) accurately positioned in jig or fixture body(d) all of these

43. Clamping(a) must be at thick sections of the workpiece to

avoid distortion due to clamping forces(b) must provide necessary support if the

workpiece is too thin to resist deformationby clamping forces

(c) screw must be strong enough not to becomedistorted under the clamping force.

(d) all of these44. Drill jigs are used to hold the workpiece when

(a) drilling and reaming(b) spotfacing and tapping(c) counterboring and countersinking(d) all of these

45. Head drill bushes are used when(a) the hole depth must be controlled(b) a hole is to be drilled in a face that is at

some distance from the drill plate(c) the workpiece is lightly clamped in the region

of cutting(d) all of these

46. A jig in which the workpiece is located from itsoutside in a bush and the drill bush is located on thepost, is(a) angular post jig (b) pot jig(c) latch jig (d) post jig

48. Angular post jig is made(a) from a block of steel(b) of welded construction(c) from the channel section(d) none of these

49. In milling fixtures, the cutting forces are(a) high(b) interrupted(c) tend to lift the workpiece(d) all of these

50. Setting block

(a) is located relative to the fixture locationsystem

(b) is retained in position by screw(c) has two hardened setting faces(d) all of these

51. To give maximum convenience for the operatorduring setting, the setting block is so positioned thatthe cutter is between vertical face of the block and(a) operator (b) spindle nose(c) fixture body (d) setting face

52. Two tenons(a) are made by hardened steel(b) should be as far as possible to produce

maximum accuracy(c) are located on the underside of the fixture

base(d) all of these

97. When punch diameter is equal to stock thickness,the unit compressive stress in punches rises asmultiple of shear stress of material equal to(a) 4 times (b) 2 times(c) 6 times (d) 10 times

98. The compressive stress is high for punch toolmaterials and hence the value of punch dia/ thicknessof stock ratio should not fall below(a) 1.00 (b) 1.5(c) 0.5 (d) 0.25

99. Generally die shoe is made of(a) C.I. (b) Bronze(c) Brass (d) Copper

100. Die shoe thickness varies in between(a) 5-10 mm (b) 25 — 75 mm(c) 75 — 125 mm (d) 10 — 15 mm

101. Upper part of the punch holder is provided with ashank(a) equal in diameter to the ram hole(b) half in diameter to the ram hole(c) double in diameter to the ram hole(d) one fourth in diameter to the ram hole

102. The die holder should be at least(a) 2.5 mm larger all round that the die element(b) 5 mm larger all round than the die

clearance

77


(c) 5 mm large all round than punch element(d) 2.5 mm larger all round than the punch

clearance.103. In drawing operation, with the increase of die radius

(a) punch load increases(b) has no impact on punch load(c) has much influence and it decreases(d) none of these

105. Bending operation should be performed(a) parallel to the grain direction(b) at 30° to the grain direction(c) at 90° to the grain direction(d) there is no direction

106. Deep drawing operations are those in which(a) height equals or exceeds the diameter of

the ifnished part.(b) height equals or less than diameter of the

ifnished part(c) height is half the diameter of the finished

part(d) none of these

107. Under no circumstances, the die plate should bethinner than the(a) 0.25 mm (b) 8.5 to 9.5 mm(c) 4 mm — 5 mm (d) 20 mm to 30 mm

108. Most practical method for taking care of springback during bending is to(a) punching the inside corner of bend(b) try a sample make the necessary

adjustments and try again(c) use hollow can came punches(d) undercutting the punches so that material is

free to over bend109. In drawing operation, increase of punch radius

(a) does not influence the punch load much(b) has much influence on punch decrease(c) punch load increase(d) none of these

110. Bulging is the operation(a) of providing contours in sheet metal and of

bending previously rolled formed section(b) employed to expand a tubular or

cylindrical part

(c) in which edges of sheet are turned over toprovide stiffness and a smooth edge

(d) none of these111. In combination dies

(a) two or more cutting operations can beperformed simultaneously

(b) work piece moves from one station to otherwith separate operation performed at eachstation

(c) cutting and formation operations arecombined and carried out in singleoperation

(d) combination punch does not exist 112. The combination dies perform

(a) two or more dissimilar operation(b) two or more similar operations(c) only one operations(d) none of these

113. In design of tools and dies, often the weakest linkis(a) die (b) punch(c) fasteners (d) something else

114. In progressive dies for-(a) two or more cutting operations may be

performed simultaneously(b) cutting and formations are combined and

carried out in a single operation(c) workpiece moves from on station to other

with separate operation performed at eachstation

(d) something else115. In press operation, process of shearing gives rise to

a sheared edge that has characteristics of(a) corner radius(b) clean brushed radius(c) rough taper surface(d) all of these

116. Too small clearance in press operation require(a) excessive force to shear the material(b) less force to shear the material(c) only ductile materials can be punched(d) none of these

78


117. There is a possibility of cracking of die block duringhardening process if(a) too little space is provided between holes

and edges of parts(b) too much space is provided between holes

and edges of parts(c) too much space on one side of hole and edges

of parts(d) all these

118. In each block or element that require accurate andpermanent positioning, if dowels are used, then(a) only two dowels be provided(b) only 4 dowels be provided(c) only one dowel be used(d) only 10 dowels be provided

119. The press capacity must be(a) higher than cutting force required to

punch the material(b) lesser than the cutting force required to punch

the material(c) equal to the cutting force required to punch

the material(d) none of these

120. In metal working, machines — Lathes, shapers etcare called(a) jigs (b) fixtures(c) machine tools (d) tooling up

121. The devices in which a component is held andlocated for a specific operation in such a way thatit will guide one or more cutting tools in the samezone of machining is called(a) jigs (b) fixtures(c) machine tools (d) templates

122. Devices designed for locating and holding cuttingtools are usually called(a) gauges (b) templates(c) fixtures (d) tool holders

123. The device which locates and hold the componentfor a specific operation but it does not guide thecutting tool is called(a) templates (b) Fixture(c) top holders (d) Machine tool

124. Jigs and fixtures make the machine tool automatic

(a) in full way (b) partly(c) not at all (d) either fully or partly

125. To take care of variation in dimensions in massmanufacture, the clearance between jig and fixtureshould be kept as(a) plenty (b) minimum(c) zero (d) something else

126. In small drill Jigs swarf clearance is kept as(a) zero (b) minimum(c) plenty (d) something else

127. The application of jigs and fixtures(a) widens the technological capacity of machine

tools(b) either fully or partly automates the machine

tools(c) increases the production and productivity(d) all these

147. Generally clamps are used to control(a) 3 freedoms(b) 6 freedoms(c) 9 freedoms(d) 12 freedoms

148. Locating points should be chosen as far as part aspossible an any work surface, is called the principleof(a) extreme positions(b) least point(c) mutually perpendicular planes(d) location of accurate work

149. Points more than necessary should not be used toscure location in any plane is called principle of(a) least point(b) extreme positions(c) mutually perpendicular planes(d) something else

150. A vee locator should easily be built up with the helpof(a) one dowel pin and two allen screws(b) two dowels pins and two alien screws(c) 4 dowel pins and two alien screws(d) 4 dowels pins and 4 allen screws

151. All types of pins support the work and loaded in

79


(a) compression(b) tension(c) shear(d) bending

152. Round head rest buttons used for locating a(a) finish surface(b) rough surface(c) super finish surface(d) something else

153. Flat rest buttons or pads are used for locating(a) flat machined surfaces(b) cylindrical machined surfaces(c) grooved surface(d) something else

154. If diameter of the hole is subject to considerablevariation, then use(a) conical location(b) vee blow(c) pin(d) plain located pin

155. When reamed or finally finished small holes areavailable for positioning purposes, use(a) vee blocks(b) pin(c) conical locators(d) plain locating pin

156. A component incorporating a circular or semicircularprofile may be located by means of a(a) vee block(b) pin(c) conical Locators(d) plain locating pin

157. V-blocks usually have an angle of(a) 45° (b) 90°(c) 115° (d) 60°

158. All sheets and angles used in wagon manufacturingare clamped to the frames by(a) wedges(b) clamp(c) hinged clamps(d) tuggle clamp

159. To hold sheet metal arts in position while they arebeing welded or otherwise fastened use(a) tuggle clamps(b) clamps(c) wedges(d) hinged clamps

160. Total throw of a cam is about(a) 140° (b) 180°(c) 90° (d) 110°

161. For drilling holes in long strip use(a) plate jigs(b) channel jig(c) leaf jig(d) box and tumbling jig

162. To drill a series of holes in a circular on the faceof a work piece, use(a) Index jigs(b) Leaf jig(c) Lot type jigs(d) Box and tumble jig

1. The ease with which observations can be madeaccurately is called(a) readability (b) sensitivity(c) accuracy (d) presision

2. Accuracy of measuring equipment is(a) the closeness with which a measurement can

be read directly from a measuring instrument(b) measure of low close the reading is to the

true size(c) the difference between measured value and

actual value(d) the small change in measure and that can be

measured.3. Which of the following errors are generally

distributed in accordance with the gaussiandistribution?(a) Controllable errors(b) Calibration errors

80


(c) Avoidable errors(d) Random errors

4. Tolerance are specified(a) to obtain derived fit(b) became it is not possible to manufacture a

size exactly(c) to obtain high accuracy(d) to have proper inspection

5. Which of the following is the most importantcharacteristics of a measuring instrument in general?(a) Precision (b) Accuracy(c) Repeatability (d) Sensitivity

6. Sensitivity and range of measuring instrument have(a) direct relation ship(b) linear relationship(c) inverse relationship(d) no relationship

7. Systematic errors are(a) randomly distribution(b) regularly repetitive in nature(c) distributed on both the and ve sides of mean

value(d) unknown errors

8. Precision of measuring equipment is(a) closeness with which a measurement can

be read directly from a measuringinstrument

(b) measure of close the reading is to the truesize

(c) difference between measured value and actualvalue

(d) smallest change in material9. The maximum amount by which the result differ

from the true value is called(a) correction (b) descrepancy(c) accuracy (d) error

10. Which of the following can be used to scribe linesparallel to the edge of a part ?(a) Vernier calliper(b) Screw gauge(c) Divider(d) Hermaphrodite calliper

11. Which of the following can’t fall under the head-controllable errors ?(a) Caliberation(b) Environmental errors(c) Avoidable errors(d) Random errors

12. Which of the following errors are regularly repetitivein nature ?(a) Systematic errors(b) Random errors(c) Illegitimate error(d) Controllable error

13. Which of the following errors are inevitable in themeasuring system and it would be vainful exerciseto avoid them ?(a) Systematic errors(b) Random errors(c) Caliberation errors(d) Environmental errors

14. Which of the following instrument is most accurate?(a) Vertical calliper(b) Manometric screw gauge(c) Optical projector(d) Mechanical comparator

30. Taper internal dovetail can be measured with thehelp of(a) sine bar(b) combination set(c) balls of standard dimension and slip gauge(d) dial gauge

31. External taper can be accurately measured withthe help of(a) sin bar and slip gauge(b) dividing end(c) precision ball and height gauge(d) combination net

32. Stick micrometer are designed for measuring(a) bore of cylinder(b) longer external length(c) cylindering(d) longer internal length

81


33. Differential screw micrometer is used(a) to give direct indication of difference between

reading(b) to measure gap between grooves(c) for digital layout(d) to very high degree of accuracy

34. A sine bar ;s specified by(a) its total length(b) centre distance between the two roller(c) size of the roller(d) weight of sine bar

35. The dia of very large bore can be measured by(a) flexible graduated tape(b) cylindrical gauge(c) flexi part gauge(d) swinging a pin gauge in the bore

36. The number of slip gauge in a set are(a) 87 (b) 45(c) 103 (d) 31(e) All of theses

37. Profile of gear tooth can be checked by(a) sine bar (b) bench micrometer(c) optical pyrometer (d) optical projector

38. Gear tooth calliper is used to find the chordalthickness of which of the following type ?(a) Spur gear (b) Helical gear(c) Worm gear (d) Sevel gear

39. The M and E system in metrology are related withmeasurement of(a) gears (b) screw threads(c) flatness (d) thread gauge

40. Advantage of vernier calliper over micrometer isthat it(a) is easier and quicker to use(b) is more accurate(c) can be used to make both inside and

outside measurement over a range of size(d) all of these

41. Standards to be used for reference purposes inlaboratories and workshops are called(a) primary standard(b) secondary standard

(c) tertiary standards(d) working standard

42. The combinaticn set C211 be used to(a) check angular surfaces(b) draws circle and arcs(c) scribe line(d) all of these

43. All the thread characteristics can be measuredprecisely with(a) screw pitch gauge(b) micrometer with anvil(c) tool room microscope(d) thread gauge

44. The term traceability in engineering metrology isconcerned with(a) measuring machine(b) optical instruments(c) pneaumatic comparator(d) standards

45. The advantage of wavelength standard is that itwould be possible to repeat measurements to a veryhigh degree of accuracy. The wavelength standardcan be reproduced to an accuracy of about onepart is(a) 1000 (b) 105(c) 107 (d) 109

46. The basic unit in angular measurement is(a) degree (b) minute(c) second (d) right angle

47. Optical gauge works on the principle of(a) refraction(b) reflection(c) dispersion(d) interference of light rays

48. Millimeter scale in a micrometer is marked on(a) barrel (b) thimble(c) spindle (d) anvil

49. Circular scale of the micrometer is marked on(a) anvil (b) barrel(c) ratchet (d) thimble

50. Which of the following type of gauge has gaugingsection combined on one end ?

82


(a) Combination gauge(b) Limit gauge(c) GO and NOT GO gauge(d) Progressive gauge

51. The vernier reading should not be taken at its facebefore an actual check has been taken for(a) zero error(b) its caliberation(c) flatness of measuring(d) temperature equilisation

52. Which comparator utilises the principle of a bultonspinning on a loop of string ?(a) Sigma comparator(b) Aramson comparator(c) Optical comparator(d) Zeiss interferrometer

53. Gear teeth vernier is used to measure(a) circular pitch (b) depth of tooth(c) tooth thickness (d) pith line thickness

54. Error of measuring equipment is(a) closeness with which a measurement can be

read directly from a measuring instrument(b) measure of how close the reading is to the

true size(c) difference between measured value and

actual value(d) smallest change in measured that can be

measured55. Fiducial indicators contain

(a) caliberated scale(b) single index mark(c) micrometer screw movement(d) optical head

56. Random errors follows which of the followingdistribution(a) Gaussian (b) Hyperbolic(c) Parabolic (d) t-student(e) B-distribution

57. Which one of the following is the least accuratemeasuring device ?(a) Air gauge(b) Micrometer screw gauge

(c) Steel scale(d) Vernier micrometer

58. A comparator for its working depends on(a) accurately caliberated scale(b) compansion with standard such as slib

gauge(c) accurate micrometer(d) optical head

59. Precision is(a) repeatability of a measuring process(b) agreement of the result of a measurement with

the true value of measured quantity(c) the ability of measuring device to detect small

difference in a quanity being measured(d) error of judgement in reading unobservation

60. The thickness of oil film at the surface of slip gaugesis of the order of(a) 0.005 micron (b) 0.1 micron(c) 1 micron (d) 10 micron

61. In case of high pricesion surface plates of diameterupto 200 mm, the working surface should lie betweentwo parallel planes, whose maximum distance apartis(a) 0.005 mm (b) 0.0005 mm(c) 0.05 mm (d) 0.5 mm

63. Which of the following is not the accessory of slipgauge ?(a) Scribing and centre points(b) Measuring jaws(c) Holder(d) Calliper

64. The lateral faces of slip gauge are at right anglescorrect to within(a) ± 1 degree(b) ± 30 degree(c) ± 10 minute(d) ± 1 minute

65. Projector gauge blocks in slip gauge are(a) use as reference block(b) mounted in the centre of pile(c) never touched(d) wrung the end of combination

83


66. According to accuracy, slip gauge are classifiedunder which of the following number of accuracyclasses ?(a) two (b) three(c) five (d) seven

67. Projector slip gauge is provided to(a) protect slip gauges when not in use(b) take up all wear when in use(c) clean the slip gauge(d) facilitate wringing of slip gauge

69. The two slip gauges in precision measurement arejoined by(a) assembling (b) sliding(c) adhesion (d) wringing

70. Plug gauge are used to(a) measure the diameter of the workpiece(b) measure the diameter of the holes in the

workpiece(c) check diameter of the hole in theworkpiece(d) check the length of the holes in the workpiece

71. Pickout the wrong statement about Taylor’s principleof gauging(a) Go gauge should be full form gauge(b) Go gauge should check all the related

dimension simultaneously(c) It is sufficient to use GO gauge on the

width and length of the component(d) NOT GO gauges should check only one

dimension at a time72. The term “Allowance” in limits and fits are usually

referred to as(a) minimum clearance between shaft and

hole(b) maximum clearance between shaft and hole(c) difference of tolerance of hole and shaft(d) difference between maximum size and

minimum size of the hole73. Drilled holes and honed holes could be designated

by which of thefollowing grades ?(a) H5, Hi, (b) H6, H10(d) 118, H6 (d) H10, 115

76. New all system of limits and fits is the oldest systemworking on hole basis system. The grades of holesand shaft specified respectively are(a) 2, 6 (b) 1, 8(c) 4, 12 (d) 6, 20

77. Sensitivity of measuring equipment is(a) the closeness with which a measurement can

be read directly from a measuring instrument(b) a measure of low close the reading is to the

size(c) the difference between measured value and

at actual value(d) the smallest change is measured can be

measured78. Expressing a dimension as 25.31 ‘Dm mm is the

case of(a) unilateral tolerance(b) bilateral tolerance(c) limiting dimesnions(d) all of these

79. ISA tolerance system consist of following numbersof qualities of tolerance, and grades of fitrespectively(a) 6, 15 (b) 8, 20(c) 12, 21 (d) 16, 21

80. Surface roughness is represented by(a) triangles (b) circles(c) squares (d) rectangles

82. A bore of 14.67 mm in a workpiece can be measuredby(a) steel rule (b) vernier calliper(c) pneumatic gauge (d) micrometer

83. The diamenter of finish turned shaft can best bechecked with a(a) combination set(b) slip gauge(c) height gauge(d) micrometer screw gauge

84. Accurate centring of work mounted in anindependent check can be determined by using(a) centre gauge (b) height gauge(c) dial indicator (d) surface gauge

84


85. In limits and fits system, basic shaft system is onewhose(a) lower deviation is zero(b) upper deviation is zero(c) minimum clearance is zero(d) maximum clearance is zero

86. Which of the following is not the angle measuringdevice(a) Angle plate (b) Sine bar(c) Bevel protector (d) Angle gauge

87. To check the diameter of a twist drill with amicrometer, the measurement must be taken(a) margin of the drill(b) flutes of drill(c) cutting edge of the drill(d) lips of the drill

88. Expressing a dimension as 18.312 mm in the caseof(a) unilateral tolerance(b) bilateral tolerance(c) limiting dimension(d) all of these

89. Many external comparators have anvils or worktables which are grooved. The purpose of this is to(a) facilitate supporting of work(b) provide three points support to the work(c) not to pass on in accuracy of surface to the

measurement(d) avoid sticking of standards on the table

90. Straight edges are used to measure(a) straight length of parts(b) flatness(e) parallelism(d) perpendicularity

91. IS : 919 on limits and fits, specifies following numbersof grades of fundamental tolerance and fundamentaldeviation respectively(a) 25, 18 (b) 25, 16(c) 18, 22 (d) 18, 25

108. Polygon in metrology are concerned with(a) method of circular dividing(b) testing of parallelism

(c) testing of circularity(d) interferrometry measurement

109. Bevel protector are used for(a) angular measurement(b) linear measurement(c) height measurement(d) flatness measurement

110. Clinometer is related with(a) Engineer’s parallels(b) angle gauge(c) sprit level(d) bevel protector

111. A comparator(a) needs to be caliberated(b) need not be caliberated(c) contains a caliberated(d) a best suited for measurement of absolutedimension

112. Auto collimator is used for(a) parallelism measurement(b) straightness measurement(c) flatness measurement(d) angular measurement

113. The long straight edge are supported at two pointsfor minimum deflection at centre. The distancebetween support compared to the length:— ofstraight edge should be(a) 0.5 (b) 0.554(c) 0.577 (d) 0.6

114. Filar microscope(a) have no reticles(b) have fixed reticles(c) have moving reticles(d) can be moved relative to work by means of

f i ne pitch lead screw116. Angle dekkor is another types of

(a) auto collimator(b) optical square(c) clinometer(d) angle gauge

117. Wickman gauge of used for inspection of(a) holes (b) shafts

85


(c) gears (d) screw thread118. The reflector combined with autocollimator can be

used for checking(a) alignment (b) parallelism(c) circularity (d) surface finish

119. The more sensitive instrument(a) has fast oscillation(b) oscillates more slowly(c) has no oscillation(d) is never stable

120. Which of the following methods is not concernedwith surface finish measurement ?(a) Spectro photometry method(b) Ultrasonic method(c) Field emission method(d) Talysurf principle

121. A sprit level is required to have 2 mm of bubblemovement of 2" inclination. The radius of tube shouldbe around(a) 2 m (b) 20 mm(c) 80 m (d) 120 m

122. The only natural material producing a spectral line(6440° A red) almost completely symmetrical is(a) Cadmium (b) Mercury(c) Krypton (d) Helium

123. Universal surface gauge is used for(a) checking straightness(b) checking flatness(c) checking parallelism(d) layout work and inspection

124. Tomilson recorder is associated with measurementof(a) surface flows(b) surface perpendicularity(c) surface finish(d) surface curvature

125. Some substance generate voltage when they aresubjected to mechanical forces or stresses alongspecific \plane. Such substance are known as(a) thermo-electric (b) magneto-electric(c) piezo-electric (d) photo-electric

126. A three-lobed part is checked on 60° V-block wouldprovide which of the following magnification of theradial out-of-round characteristic ?

(a) 1 time (b) 2 times(c) 3 times (d) 4 times

127. A five-lobed part if gauged in the 60° V-block wouldproduce which of the following magnification of theradial out-of-round characteristic ?(a) zero time (b) 1 time(c) 3 times (d) 5 times

129. A master gauge is(a) a screw gauge(b) an international reference standard(c) a gauge used by experienced techniques(d) a standard gauge for checking accuracy

of gauges used on shop floors130. Moire fringes are observed when

(a) an optical flat is placed over smooth surface(b) a microscope is used to observe surface

texture(c) index grating is moved over scale grating(d) white light is diffused through a prism.

131. Inside and outside diameters of a thin tube areto be measured. Only one of the following tools isto be selected. Which one would you choose ?(a) Inside calliper (b) Outside calliper(c) Trummel (d) Vernier calliper

132. Electronic level contain(a) pendulum (b) sprit level(c) micrometer (d) clinometers

133. If the correctness of profile of a thread is to bechecked which instrument would you choose ?(a) Bench micrometer(b) Screw pitch gauge(c) 18.3102 Optical projector(d) Telescopic gauge

134. Grating are used in connection with(a) flatness measurement(b) roundness measurement(c) surface texture measurement(d) linear displacement measurement

86


135. The method of fractional coincidence ininterferrometry techniques is used for(a) measurement of end gauge(b) flatness of surface(c) linear displacement measurement(d) surface roughness measurement

136. An optical gauge works on the principle of(a) reflection of light rays(b) polarisation(c) interference of light rays(d) refraction of light rays

137. Involute function of a gear is defined as(a) (cosa — a) radian(b) (sina — a) radian(c) (tana — a) radian(d) (cota — a) radian

138. Addendum of gear is equal to(a) pitch p (b) 0.3 p(c) 0.6866 p (d) 0.3183 p

139. Optical flats are used in conjuction with(a) angular measurement(b) surface flats(c) surface parallelism(d) interferrometric measurement

140. The normal chordal tooth thickness of a gear is theshortest distance from the(a) tooth crest to the point of the chord(b) tooth crest to the mid point of the chord(c) midpoint of constant chord to the tip of the

tooth(d) from the tooth crest to any point on the chord

141. The NPL gauge interferrometer is designed andused for(a) absolute measurement of length of slip

gauge(b) judging flatness of surface(c) comparing height with standard reference(d) parallelism of two ends of slip gauge

142. A 20 mm diameter international metric thread withhave a pitch of(a) 1 mm (b) 1.25 mm(c) 2.5 mm (d) 2.0 mm

143. Wear allowance is provided on(a) GO gauge(b) NOT GO gauge(c) both GO and NOT GO gauge(d) when both are combined to one gauge

144. Accuracy of setting a sine bars(a) poor for smaller angles(b) is maximum when angle of measurement is

45°(c) decrease appreciably with steep angle(d) is function of size of roller of sine bar

145. Inspection by attributes(a) good quantities are separated from bad(b) variation due to assignable factors are

determined(c) theory of probability is applicable(d) variation due chance factors are determined

146. A scale in which the distance between graduationis proportional to the value that graduation is called(a) equidistant scale(b) regular scale(c) linear scale(d) non-linear scale

148. Profilometer is an instrument used to measure(a) gear involve (b) thread profile(c) taper (d) surface roughness

1. Injection mould is the ideal method of processing(a) plastics(b) thermo-setting plastic(c) thermo plastics(d) non-ferrous materials

2. Compression moulding is the ideal method ofprocessing(a) plastics(b) thermo-setting plastic(c) thermo plastics(d) non-ferrous materials

87


3. Which of the following is not generally employedfor shaping of thermoplastic materials ?(a) Injection moulding(b) compression moulding(c) Blow moulding(d) Extrusion

4. Which of the following commonly used items arenot produced using thermo setting plastics ?(a) Household buckets(b) Electric switches used in domestic wiring(c) Dining table tops(d) Both (b) and (c)

5. The process of growing large molecules from smallmolecules is called(a) polymerization (b) polymorphism(c) hystresis (d) allotropy

6. The small molecules, which combine end-to-end tofrom a large molecule, is called(a) polymers (b) manomer(c) ceramic (d) stellite

7. The small molecules combine end-to-end to form alarge molecule. The large molecule is called(a) polymer (b) manomer(c) ceramic (d) stellite

8. Which of the following are exmaples of polymers?(a) Starch (b) Nylon(c) Resin (d) All of these

9. The polymetric materials composed of carboncompounds are called(a) organic materials(b) ceramic materials(c) ferrous materials(d) non-ferrous materials

10. All composite materials are(a) isotropic (b) orthotropic(c) anisotropic (d) rhombohedral

11. An elastomer is a polymer whose percentageelongation should be(a) more then 200 % (b) more than 100 %(c) less than 50 % (d) more than 50 %

12. GFRP means glass fibre(a) reinforced polymers (b) ribbon polymers

(c) reinforced plastics (d) ribbon plastics13. The individual components in composite materials

(a) do not retain their characteristics(b) retain their characteristics(c) may or may not retain their characteristics(d) have no effect on the composite

characteristics14. Plastics (P), Steel (S), cast iron (C), Aluminium

(A).The order of use of these material for householdgoods is(a) C>S>A>P (b) P>C>S>A(c) S>A>P>C (d) A>P>C>S

15. Polymers can(a) be vapourised and recycled(b) not be vapourised and recycled(c) be vapourised but cannot be recycled(d) neither be vapourised but can be recycled

16. Plastics are(a) bad conductor of heat and electricity(b) good conductor of 1, at and electricity(c) good conductor of heat and bad conductor of

electricity(d) bad conductor of heat good conductor of

electricity17. Thermosetting plastics are material which

(a) becomes soft on application of heat and canbe moulded again

(b) do not become hard with the application ofheat and pressure and no chemical changeoccurs

(c) permanently set with heat and pressureand can not deformed when againsubjected to heat

(d) produced on synthesis basic18. Thermoplastic materials are those which

(a) becomes soft an application are those which(b) do not become hard with the application

of heat and pressure and no chemical changeoccurs

(c) permanently set with heat and pressure andcan not deformed when again subject to heat

(d) produced on synthesis basic19. Thermosetting materials are produced by

88


(a) cast moulding process(b) injection moulding process(c) extrusion process(d) none of these .

20. Thermoplastic materials cannot be produced by(a) Injection moulding process(b) extrusion process(c) blow moulding process(d) both (a) and (b)

21. Thermoplastic materials can be produced by(a) blow moulding(b) ‘cast moulding(c) compression moulding(d) calendering

22. Difference between thermoplastic and thermosettingmaterials is of(a) mechanical behaviour(b) thermal behaviour(c) glass transition temperature(d) none of these

23. Other than elasticity and rubber like material, theimportant property of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) is(a) odourless (b) colourability(c) non-flammable (d) impervious to water

24. Filler is used in plastics to(a) fill up completely the voids created during

manufacturing(b) improve colour, strength and toughness(c) provide colour, strength, impact and

resistance and reduce cost(d) accelerate the condensation and

polymerisation25. The moulding process employed for thermoplastic

material is(a) injection and extrusion methods(b) compression and transfer moulding(c) similar to thermosetting plastic except that

higher temperature is used(d) similar to thermosetting plastics except that

a lower temperature is used26. The main disadvantage of thermosetting and

thermoplastic plastics is that

(a) they deform under heat and pressure(b) they are resistant to water upto 100°C only(c) they do not possess a high mechanical

strength(d) their shape cannot be changed without

application of heat27. Polyesters belong to the group of

(a) thermoplastic plastics(b) thermo-setting plastics(c) phenolics(d) PVC

28. The dominant property of cellulosics, a form ofthermoplastic is(a) ease of working and toughness(b) corrosion resistance and mechanical strength(c) high heat and wear resistance and fine grain

structure(d) good colour, good surface finish, texture and

light transmissibility28. Poly merisation is associated with

(a) cast Iron(b) aluminium(c) thermosetting plastic(d) thermoplastics

30. Synthetic resins is /are(a) polyethylenes(b) polystyrene(c) acrylic resins(d) all of these

1. Computer-aided design can be defined as the useof computer systems to(a) assist in creation of design(b) modification of a design(c) analysis of a design(d) all of these

2. The evaluation in the general design process requires(a) optimisation of the design(b) fabrication and testing of a prototype

model to access

89


(c) material specification(d) none of these

3. General design process of CAD does not consist ofusing phase(a) implementation (maintenance)(b) synthesis(c) presentation(d) optimization

4. Volume of work produced in FMS environment isdetermined from(a) number of machine used in the FMS(b) kind of material handling equipment used in

FMS(c) kind of layout used in FMS(d) all of these

5. The advantage of implementing CAD is to(a) increase quality of design(b) expertize in the area of data base

manufacturing management(c) increase productivity(d) improve communication

6. Which one of the following items, best describesthe CAM technology ?(a) Numerical control(b) Documentation(c) Drafting(d) Geometric modelling

7. CAD/CAM is nothing but the relationship between(a) marketing and design(b) manufacturing and marketing(c) engineering and marketing(d) engineering and manufacturing

8. What key hardware items ties a CAD/CAM systemtogether ?(a) Keyboard(b) Graphic work station(c) Digitizer(d) Plotter

9. Robots consist of three basic components : Powersupply, control (memory) console and(a) Micro computer(b) Coaxial cable

(c) Mechanical unit (arm)(d) Software

10. In CAD process more than one phase of designare closed related and highly interactive. Thesephases are(a) recognition and evaluation(b) analysis and presentation(c) synthesis and analysis(d) definition and presentation

31. A NC machine tool system has replaced(a) hand action of the operator(b) brain of the operation(c) hand and Brain of the operator(d) none of these

32. The NC system in a NC machine tool has to performmany tasks such as(a) to read and decode the tapes information(b) to read, decode and pass on the information

to control tools(c) to read, decode and control the machine

tool actions towards completion of the job(d) none of these

33. While producing a few parts with an accuracy of0.01 mm, it would be preferable to select(a) a automatic machine tool(b) numerical controlled machine tool(c) transfer machine(d) none of these

34. NC machine is economical to use especially whenone has to manufacture(a) small quantity of parts products(b) new product(c) large variety with small number of

products/parts(d) none of these

35. In point-to-point NC machine tool system themovement of tool to the next point(a) is of most significance(b) is of no significance(c) next position of the work is achieved by

moving the job(d) both (a) and (c)

90


36. In a closed loop control NC machine, tool systemis the design of control loop that decides(a) position error, accuracy and repeatability(b) cost of the machine tool, cost of maintenance

and cost of operation(c) programming of a part, load and torque, cost

of machining(d) none of these

37. In point-to-point NC system, it is not the entiremovement of the job that is controlled, but controlis made only on(a) final position of the job movement(b) final position of the tool movement(c) movement of the job and tool both(d) none of these

38. The use of NC machine tools in manufacturing isa major step towards automation so as to(a) reduce the machine time(b) reduced cost per piece(c) increase quality of work(d) all of these

39. In CNC systems editing is easier as compared tothat of NC system because in the former(a) the part programme is stored in computer

accuracy(b) the part programme can be easily checked

and corrected in the former(c) data tape in case of NC system cannot be

reused, whereas disc in CNC system can bereused

(d) all of these40. The use of NC system in manufacturing has

enhanced productivity by way of automation suchthat it has(a) reduced the infallibility of the operator(b) relieved the operator from constant

supervision(c) inhanced quantity and accuracy of the work(d) all of these

41. Numerical control system are same as directnumerical control systems but they differ from oneon another only to the extent that

(a) tape is used as storage device for partprogramme in the former whereas computeris used in the later

(b) the former does not allow integration ofvarious machining processes, whereas thelater allows to do so

(c) the former is altogether a hardware system,whereas the later is a software system

(d) all of these42. Computer numerical control and direct numerical

control system are characterised with very smalldifference such as(a) size of computer in DNC system is much

smaller than that of CNC system(b) size of computer used in CNC system is

restricted by cost consideration which is nottrue in case of DNC

(c) DNC system operates in a time share madewhereas CNC system operates on dedicatedon line system mode

(d) all of these

1. Product engineering is concerned with(a) initiation of the need for the product(b) product design, development and

manufacturing(c) product’s use and final disposal(d) all of these

2. Choice of manufacturing technology is based on(a) unit cost of production(b) quantity and uniformity of product(c) quantity of manufacturing envisaged(d) all of these

3. For an envisaged design item, a lather is able toproduce 10 units per hour and if a semi-automat isused one could produce 50 units per hour. The costanalysis has indicated that the total cost of prducingN units in the lathe and Automat are as CL = 40+ 1.5 N and CA = 320 + 0.5 N repectively. If the

91


demand is 200 units, then choice of the process willbe(a) Lathe(b) Semi-automat

4. Womb to tomb is(a) life cycle of a proeduct(b) choice of manufacturing process(c) aspect of product design(d) none of these

5. A continuous products of the same design on a lineof machines arranged according to therequiredsequence of operations, in known as(a) flow production(b) mass production(c) line production(d) continuous production(e) all of these

6. Life cycle cost includes cost involved in(a) manufacturing (b) disposal(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

7. “A process of formulating and applying rules fororderly approach to a specific activity for the benefitand with the cooperation of all concerned and inparticular for the promotion of overall economy,taking due account of functional conditions andsafety requirement” is(a) standardisation (b) simplification(c) specialisation (d) diversification

8. Simplification is a process of(a) application of preferred numbers(b) variety reduction(c) product development(d) none of these

9. A product is having a lengthy active life under thegiven working conditions, then we say that it is(a) not durable (b) less durable(c) more durable (d) none of these

10. Standardisation helps in(a) making longer production runs possible(b) The process of application of interchangea-

bility of parts(c) The process of variety production

(d) none of these11. Which of the following statements is wrong?

(a) It is not necessary that every product has topass through every stage of the life cycle.

(b) Standardisation helps in making longerproduction runs possible.

(c) Life cycle cost is the sum total costs ofoperation and maintenance of the productthroughout its active life.

(d) The outcome of standardisation issimplification; and the easiest step to take instandradisation is to use the technique knownas simplification.

12. In industries, the modifications from the functionaldesign to production design are made(a) improve the production capacity of the

product(b) make it easy to manufature(c) tighten the tolerance limits(d) improve the sales.

13. Product Life Cycle refers to(a) all the stages from its acquiring, operation,

maintenance, use and final dosposal(b) all the stages from the initiation of an idea

until it has become a reality(c) from initiation of the idea and goes

through all the stages of design,production, use and final disposal

(d) from intial picking up of sales, rapid increase,then becoming steady with marginal increaseand final fall due to superceeding of improvedproduct in the market.

16. A rupee received one year, hence is not theequivalent of a rupee received today, because theuse of money has a value; this is the principle under(a) pay-back method(b) average return on investment method(c) present value method(d) discounted cash flow method

17. The equal payments series sinking fund factor fora given number of years (n) is used to calculate

92


(a) equal payments to be made at the end ofeach year when compound amount aftern years is given

(b) compound amount after n years whenpayments to be made each year are given

(c) present net work when payments to be madeeach year are given

(d) none of these18. All financial decisions on any project appraisal are

based on the(a) future value of money(b) present value of money(c) opportunity cost of money(d) anyone of these

19. The capital and running costs of similar machineshaving unequal service life can be compared by(a) present net work method(b) rate of return method(c) equivalent annual cost method(d) capitalised cost method

22. Capitalised cost comparison method is used forcomparing alternatives having(a) high initial cost(b) high maintenance cost(c) high service life(d) high running cost

23. Internal rate of return is that discount rate whichmakes the value of net present value equal to(a) zero(b) 1(c) some +ve value(d) some —ve value

24. For a project to be feasible, internal rate of returnshould be greater than(a) zero(b) 1(c) rate of interest for loan(d) expenses

25. Depreciation of machines is categorised under thehead(a) direct expenses(b) indirect expenses(c) receipts

(d) administrative expenses26. Depreciation of machines, according to income tax

regulations is calculated on the basis of(a) straight line method(b) sinking fund method(c) rate of return method(d) declining balance method

27. Cash discounts are reduction in the price’of goods(a) sold on credit(b) which depends on assurance of payment(c) which depends on prompt cash payment(d) obtainable on bad debt loans

28. In a capital intensive production system, thedominant position is occupied by(a) replacement policy(b) labour policy(c) capital investment policy(d) material procurement policy

29. Salvaging means(a) writing off the assets(b) adjusting losses against assets(c) mortgaging property(d) disposing off perperty which is no longerc

useful in present situation30. The most flexible criteria for analysing an economic

investment is(a) present value method(b) future value method(c) salvage value(d) rate of return criteria

31. A company spends considerable amount on publicityto promote sales. This expenditure in break evenchart is shown below the(a) fixed cost line(b) variable cost line(c) total cost line(d) sales revenue line

32. Break even point is the point where(a) fixed and variable cost lines intersect(b) fixed and total cost lines intersect(c) variable and total cost lines intersect

93


(d) sales revenue and toal expenditure linesintersect

33. Direct expenses include(a) factory expenses(b) selling expenses(c) administrative expenses(d) none of these

34. Indirect expenses include(a) factory expenses(b) selling expenses(c) administrative expenses(d) all of these

35. The diminishing balance method of providing fordepreciation is one according to which(a) the rate percent at which depreciation is

written off goes on declining from year toyear

(b) the amount of depreciation and theamount of which depreciation charged isreduced from year to year

(c) the rate percent and also the amount arereduced from year to year

(d) none of these36. Choose the wrong statement

(a) Break even analysis consists of fixed andvariable costs

(b) Break-even analysis represents relationshipbetween cost and volume

(c) At the break-even point, total cost is equal tosales revenue

(d) If variable cost is less than fixed cost, thenbreak-even analysis shows profit

37. Product cost implies(a) primary costs(b) primary cost + factory overheads(c) factory expenses(d) primary cost + factory expenses

38. If fixed expenses of a company are Rs. 138,00,000,variable expenses are Rs 270,00,000, total salesvolume is Rs 500,00,000. Break even sales volumewould be(a) Rs 330,00,000(b) Rs 300,00,000

(c) Rs 30,00,000(d) Rs 3,00,000

39. Initial cost for machine A is Rs 1.5 lakh and theunit production cost on the machine is Rs 75 each.For another machine B, the initial cost is Rs 6 lakh,and the unit production cost on this machine is Rs15 only. The volume of production at the breakeven point is(a) 6000 units(b) 9000 units(c) 7500 units(d) 10500 units

40. A manufacturer produces 15000 consumer productwhich are sold at Rs. 300/- each. At this volume,fixed costs were Rs. 15.2 lakhs and variable costswere Rs. 21 lakhs. What is the break-even quantity?(a) 4000(b) 7800(c) 8400(d) 9500

42. The indirect cost of a plant is Rs 4,00,000 per year.The direct cost is Rs. 20 per product. If the averagerevenue per product is Rs. 60, the break-even pointis

(a) 10000 products(b) 20000 products(c) 40000 products(d) 60000 products

43. The initial cast of an equipment is Rs. 20,000. Itslife is estimated as 10 years. What is rate ofdepreciation by straight line depreciation method,when scrap value after its life becomes zero ?(a) 1000(b) 2000(c) 3000(d) 4000

44. An automatic screw cutting machine has beenpurchased for Rs. 60000. Its scrap value at the endof 10 years is estimated as Rs. 12000. Fixed percent depreciation is (by sinking fund method)(a) 13.9%(b) 14.9%(c) 15.9%

94


(d) 14%45. The initial cost of an equipment is Rs. 11,000 an

estimated solvage value Rs. 1000 and the estimatedlife of 10 years. The rate of interest, 6%. What isbook value after two years ?(a) Rs 8438(b) Rs. 9438(c) Rs. 9538(d) Rs 8458

46. A bench drilling machine has been purchased forRs 7000. Its estimated life is assumed as 5 years.What is depreciation at the end of 2nd year bysum of year’s digits method ?(a) Rs 2000(b) Rs 1600(c) Rs 1200(d) Rs 800

1. Net force on a control volume due to uniform normalpressure alone(a) depends upon the shape of the control volume(b) translation and rotation(c) translation and deformation(d) deformation only

3. One kilomole of an ideal gas is throttled from aninitial pressure of 0.5 MPa to 0.1 MPa. The initialtemperature is 300 K. The entropy change of theuniverse is(a) 13.38 kJ/K(b) 401.3 kJ/K(c) 0.0446 kJ/K(d) —0.0446 kJ/K

4. A heat reservoir at 900 K is brought into contactwith the ambient at 300 K for a short time. Duringthis period 9000 kJ of heat is lost by the heatreservoir. The total loss in availability due to thisprocess is(a) 18000 kJ(b) 9000 kJ

(c) 6000 kJ(d) None of these

5. The specific heats of an ideal gas depend on its(a) temperature(b) pressure(c) volume(d) molecular weight and structure

7. For two cycles coupled in series, the topping cyclehas an efficiency of 30% and the bottoming cyclehas an efficiency of 20%. The overall combinedcycle efficiency is(a) 50% (b) 44%(c) 38% (d) 55%

8. A system undergoes a state change from 1 to 2.According the second law of thermodynamics forthe process to be feasible, the entropy change, S2— S1 of the system(a) is positive or zero(b) is negative or zero(c) is zero(d) can be positive, negative or zero

9. When an ideal gas with constant specific heats isthrottled adiabatically, with negligible changes inkinetic and potential energies.(a) Ah = 0, AT = 0 (b) Ah > 0, AT = 0(c) Ah > 0, As > 0 (d) Ah = 0, As > 0

Linked Answers Q. 10-11At a place where the surroundings are at 1 bar 27°C, aclosed rigid thermally insulated tank contains 2 kg air at2 bar, 27°C. This air is then churned for a while, by apaddle wheel connected to an external motor. If it is giventhat the irreversibilityof the process is 100 kJ, Assume forair, cv = 0.718 kJ/kg K.

10. The final temperature will be(a) 90°C (b) 95°C(c) 100°C (d) 105°C

11. The increase in availibility will be(a) 11.5 kJ (b) 12 kJ

95


(c) 12.5 kJ (d) 13 kJ12. Availability of a system at any given state is

(a) a property of the system(b) the maximum work obtainable as the system

goes to dead state(c) the total energy of the system(d) the maximum useful work obtainable as

the system goes to dead state13. In steam and other vapour cycles, the process of

removing non -condensables is called(a) scavenging process(b) dearation process(c) exhause process(d) condensation processCommon Data Q. 15-16The velocity of steam exiting the nozzels of theimpulse stage of a turbine is 400 in/s. The bladesoperate closeto the maximum blading efficiency. The nozzle angleis 20.. Consider equiangular blades and neglectingblade friction, for a steam flow of 0.6 kg/s.

15. The diagram power will be(a) 32 kW (b) 40 kW(c) 48 kW (d) 64 kW

16. The diagram efficiency will be(a) 80% (b) 84%(c) 88% (d) 92%

17. Which among the following is the boiler mounting?(a) Blow off cock (b) Feed pump(c) Economiser (d) Superheater

18. The following data pertain to a single stage impulsesteam turbine :Nozzle angle = 20°,Blade velocity = 200 m/sRelative steam velocity at entry = 350 m/sBlade inlet angle = 30° Blade exit angle = 25°If blade friction is neglected, the work done perkg steam is(a) 124 kJ (b) 164 kJ(c) 169 kJ (d) 174 kJ

20. A Curtis stage, Rateau stage and a 50% reactionstage in a steam turbine are examples of(a) different types of impulse stages

(b) different types of reaction stages(c) a simple impulse stage, a velocity

compounded impulse stage and reaction stage(d) a velocity compounded impulse stage, a

simple impulse stage and a reaction stage21. The isentropic heat drop in the nozzle of an impulse

steam turbine with a nozzle efficiency 0.9, bladevelocity rati 0.5, and mean blade velocity 150 m/sin kJ/kg is(a) 50 (b) 40(c) 60 (d) 75

22. A steam turbine receives steam steadily at 10 barwith an entrhlpy of 3000 kJ/kg and discharges at 1bar with an enthalpy of 2700kJ/kg. The work outputis 250 kJ/kg. The changes in kinetic and potentialenergies are negligible. The heat transfer from theturbine casing to the surroundings is equal to(a) 0 kJ (b) 50 kJ(c) 150 kJ (d) 250 kJ

23. Which of the the following is a pressue compoundedturbine ?(a) Parsons(b) Curtis(c) Rateau(d) All the three

24. A simple impulse turbine expands steam frictionlesslyfrom 12 bar, 250°C with an enthalpy of 2935 kJ/kgto an enthalpy of 2584 kJ/kg at 0.1 bar. Assumingthat the nozzle makes an angle of 20° with theblade motion, and that the blades are symmetrical,find the blade velocity that produces maxiumumefficiency for a turbine speed of 3600 rev/min.Assume that the steam enters the nozzle withnegligible velocity.(a) 638 m/s (b) 688m/s(c) 724 m/s (d) 928 m/s

25. The Rateau turbine belongs to the categrory of(a) pressure compounded turbine(b) reaction turbine(c) velocity compounded turbine(d) radial flow turbine

26. Steam at 300 kPa and 500. C (h = 3486.0 kJ/kg)enters a steam turbine and exits at atmospheric

96


pressure and 350. C (h = 3175.8 kJ/kg). Heat lossesin the turbine are 50 kW and the mass lfow rate is0.25 kg/s. Power output of the turbine if kineticenergy losses are negligible, will br(a) 27.55 kW (b) 30.55 kW(c) 35.56 kW (d) 40.55 kW

39. The air standard diesel cycle is less efficient thanthe Otto cycle for the(a) same compression ratio and heat addition(b) same pressure and heat addition(c) same rpm and cylinder dimensions.(d) same pressure and compression ratio

40. Cetane is(a) C16 1134 (b) C12 H32(C) C10 H32 (d) C8 1116

41. Higher proportion of residual gases in the Cylinderwould mean.(a) smooth operation of engine.(b) lower operating speeds(c) lower volumetric efficiency(d) higher thermal efficiency

42. In internal combustion engines, the approximatepercentage of the combustion heat that passes tothe cylinder walls is nearly(a) 5% (b) 10%(c) 25-30% (d) 45-50%

43. Which part is not common between the petrol anddiesel engines?(a) Air cleaner(b) Exhaust silencer(c) Battery(d) Fuel injector.

44. The actual volume of fresh mixture admitted in afour stroke petrol engine is(a) more than the stroke volume(b) equal to the stroke volume(c) equal to stroke volume plus clearance volume(d) less than stroke volume

45. Reduced knocking tendency in SI engines isobserved(a) with increased rate of burning(b) with rich air fuel mixtures(c) with increased charge dinsity

(d) with reduced charge temperature46. Knocking tendency of SI engine increases

(a) as the length of the carbon chain in fuelstructure increases

(b) as the carbon atoms in the fuel structure arecentralized.

(c) when methyl group is added to the side ofcarbon chain in the centre.

(d) any of the above.47. The calorific value of which of the following fuels

is expected to be nearly equal ?(a) Coal gas and lignite coal(b) Natural gas and coal gas.(c) Anthracite coal and lignite coal(d) Petrol and diesel.

48. The major constituent of natural gas is(a) methane(b) acetylene(c) hydrogen(d) carbon monoxide.

49. In a four stroke diesel engine, for combustion ofone litere of fuel, the volume of air required wouldbe approximately.(a) 1 cu.m. (b) 2 cu.m(c) 5 to 7 cu.m (d) 9 to 10 cu.m

50. In a SI engine, when most economical mixture issupplied, the colour of exhaust can be expected tobe(a) bluish(b) dark red(c) dark blue to reddish yellow(d) yellow

51. In which engine, the charge consists of air + fuel+ lubricating oil ?(a) Four stroke petrol engine(b) Two stroke petrol engine(c) Two stroke diesel engine.(d) Supercharged diesel engine

52. In case of a four stroke diesel engine, the heatcarried away by the exhaust gases will be around.(a) 5 to 7 percent (b) 7 to 10 percent(c) 10 to 20 percent (d) 20 to 35 percent

97


53. The reduced knocking in SI engines is generallyobserved with(a) increased exhaust pressure(b) reduced atmospheric humidity(c) increased cylinder carbon deposits.(d) increased atmospheric humidity

54. For minimising knocking tendency in SI engines, thespark plug should be located(a) near the inlet valve.(b) away from inlet valve.(c) near the exhaust valvel(d) midway between inlet and exhaust valve

55. In the following, choose the correct word out of is/ is not and then fill in the blanks : For the samemaximum pressure and temperature, the Otto cycleis / is not more efficient than the diesel cycle,because(a) is not, of reduced compression ratio of Otto

cycle(b) is, of reduced compression ratio of Otto cycle.(c) is, of increased compression ratio of Otto

cycle.(d) is not, of increased compression ratio of Otto

cycle.56. An automobile heats up while lying in a parking lot

on a sunny day. The process can be assumed to be.(a) isothermal (b) isobaric(c) isometric (d) isentropic

57. All of the following factors will have the tendencyto increase the possibility of knock in the CI engineexcept(a) lowering the compression ratio(b) lowering the intel air temperature.(c) lowering the coolant temperature(d) increasing the temperature of the cylinder

and combustion chamber walls.58. By adding tetraethyl lead to iso-octane

(a) exhaust smoke can be reduced.(b) knocking can be completely supressed(c) octane number above 100 can be obtained.(d) specific fuel consumption can be reduced.

59. Alcohols are unsuitable as diesel engine fuelsbecause

(a) the cetane number of alcohol fuels is verylow which preventes their ignition bycompression

(b) the cetane number of alcohol fuels is veryhigh which prevents their ignition bycompression

(c) the cetane number of alcohol fuels is verylow which prevents their ignition bycompression

(d) none of the above60. Brake thermal efficiency of the three types of

reciprocating engines commonly used in road vehiclesare given in the increasing order as(a) 2 stroke SI engine, 4 stroke SI engine, 4

stroke CI engine(b) 2 stroke SI engine, 4 stroke CI engine, 4

stroke SI engine(c) 2 stroke SI engine, 4 stroke SI engine, 4

stroke CI engine(d) 2 stroke CI engine, 2 stroke SI engine, 4

stroke SI engine61. Blowers deliver gaseous fluids at pressure ratios

(below / above) 1, 15, and (have / have no ) artificialcooling arrangement.The appropriate words for the blanks are(a) below , have no (b) above, have no(c) below, have (d) above, have

62. A gas turbine cycle with heat exchanger andreheating improves(a) only the thermal efficiency.(b) only the specific power output.(c) both thermal efficiency and specific power

output(d) neither thermal efficiency nor specific power

output63. Knocking tendency in a S. I. engine reduces with

increasing(a) compression ratio (b) wall temperature(c) supercharging (d) engine speed

64. A gas turbine cycle with infinitely large number ofstages during compression and expansion leads to(a) Stirling cycle (b) Atkinson cycle(c) Ericsson cycle (d) Brayton cycle.

98


66. With increasing temperature of intake air, IC engineefficiency(a) decreases.(b) increases(c) remains same(d) depends on other factors

67. An IC engine has a bore and stroke of 2 unitseach. The area to calculate heat loss can be takenas(a) 4 it (b) 5 7E(C) 6 ‘it (d) 8 n

69. Alcohols are unsuitable as diesel engine fuelsbecause(a) the cetane number of alcohol fuels is very

low which prevents their ignition bycompression

(b) the cetane number of alcohol fuels is veryhigh which prevents their ignition bycompression

(c) the cetane number of alcohol fuels is verylow which prevents their ignition bycompression

(d) none of the above70. The theoretical mechanical efficiency of a jetengine

(neglecting frictional and thermal losses), whendriving a vehicle, has its maxium(a) only when the vehicle moves at sonic velocity(b) when outlet gases approach zero absolute

velocity(c) when the vehicle speed approaches the

magnitude of the relative velocity fo gasesat nozzle exit

(d) only when the relative velocity at nozzle exitis at its maximum.

71. In order to burn 1 kilogram of CH, comletely, theminimum number of kilograms of oxygen needed is(take atomic weights of H, C and 0 as 1, 12 and 16respectively).(a) 3 (b) 4(c) 5 (d) 6

72. Match List-I with List-II and select the correctanswer from the codes given below the listsList I List II

(a) Cetane number 1. Ideal gas(b) Approach and range 2. VAn der Waals gas(c) (LT)0 3. S.I. engine 813 h(d) dh = CpdT,even 4. C.I.engine

when pressurevaries

5. Cooling towers 6. Heat exchangers

Codes :A BC D(a) 1 2 3 4(b) 1 2 4 5(c) 4 5 2 1(d) 5 4 1 2

Common Data Q. 73-74Afour cylinder,, four-stroke S.1. engine has a compressionratio of 8 and bore of 100 mm, with stroke equal to thebore. The volumetric efficiency of each cylinder is equalto 75%. The engine operates at a speed of 4800 rpm, withan air-fuel ratio of 15.Given that the calorific value of fuel = 42 MJ/kg,atmospheric air density = 1.12 kg/m3, mean effectivepressure in the cylinder = 10 bar and mechanicalefficiency of the engine = 80%,73. Brake power will be

(a) 20.6 kW (b) 24.6 kW(c) 32.2 kW (d) 48.6 kW

74. With increasing temperature of intake air, IC engineefficiency(a) decreases(b) increases(c) remains same(d) depends on other factors

Common Data Q. 76-77A turbocharged six cylinder diesel engine has thefollowing performance details :

(i) Work done during compression andexpansion = 820 kW.

(ii) Work done during intake and exhust = 50kW.

(iii) Rubbing friction in the engine = 150 kW.(iv) Net work done by turbine = 40 kW.

99


The brake mean effective pressure is 0.6 MPa, theratio of bore to stroke as 1 and engine speed as1000 rpm.

76. The bore of engine will be(a) 15 cm ( b ) 20 cm(c) 30 cm (d) 40 cm

77. The stroke of the engine will be(a) 20 cm (b) 30 cm(c) 40 cm (d) 50 cm

78. The silencer of an internal combusion engine.(a) reduces noise(b) decreases brake specific fuel consumption

(BSFC)(c) increases BSFC(d) has no effect on its efficiency

81. A fuel represented by the formula C81116 is usedin an I.C. Engine. Given that the molecular weightof air is 29 and that 4.76 kmols of air contain 1kmol of oxygen and 3.76 kmols of nitrogen, theAir/Fuel ratio by mass is(a) 11.47 (b) 12.78(c) 14.79 (d) 19.52

82. For the following “Matching” exercise, choose thecorrect oneGroup I Group IIA. Marine Diesel Engine 1. Two stroke engineB. Air conditioning 2. Four stroke engineC. Steam Power Plant 3. Rotary engineD. Gas Turbine Power 4. Cooling andPlant dehumidification

5. Cooling tower 6. Brayton cycle 7. Rankine cycle 8. D-slide valve

Codes :A BC D(a) 3 5 7 2(b) 4 6 8 1(c) 5 2 3 4(d) 2 5 6 8

83. In a spark ignition engine working on the ideal Ottocycle, the compression ration is 5.5. The workoutput per cycle (i.e., area of the P.V. diagram) is

equal to 23.625 x 105 x V, J, where V, is theclearance volume in m3. The indicated meaneffective pressure is(a) 4.285 bar (b) 5.250 bar(c) 86.870 bar (d) 106.300 bar

84. Two insulating materials of thermal conductivity Kand 2K are available for lagging a pipe carrying ahot fluid. If the radial thickness of each material isthe same(a) material with higher thermal conductivity

should be used for the inner layer and onewith lower thermal conductivity for the outer.

(b) material with lower thermal conductivityshould be used for the inner layer andone with higher thermal conductivity forthe outer.

(c) it is immaterial in which sequence theinsulating materials are used.

(d) it is not possible to judge unless numericalvalues of dimensions are given.

85. The practice to use steam on the shell side andcooling water on the tube side in ondensers of steampower plant is because(a) to increase overall heat transfer coefficient

water side velocity can be increased ifwater is on the tube side.

(b) condenser can act as a storage unit forcondensed steam.

(c) rate of condensation of steam is invariablysmaller than the mass flow rate of coolingwater.

(d) it is easier to maintain vacuum on the shellside than on the tube side.

86. For a given heat flow and for the same thickness,the temperature drop across the material will bemaximum for(a) copper (b) steel(c) glass-wool (d) refractory brick

87. For a current wire of 20 mm diameter exposed toair (h = 20 W/m2 K), maximum heat dissipationoccurs when thickness of insulation (k = 0.5 W/mK) is(a) 20 mm (b) 25 mm(c) 20 mm (d) 10 mm

100


88. In radiative heat transfer, a gray surface is one(a) which appears gray to the eye(b) whose emissivity is independant of

wavelength(c) which has reflectivity equal to zero(d) which appears equally bright from all

directions.89. In a certain heat exchanger, both the fluids have

identical mass flow rate-specific heat product. Thehot fluid enters at 76°C and leaves at 47°C and thecold fluid entering at 26°C leaves at 55°C. Theeffectiveness of the heat exchanger is(a) 0.16 (b) 0.58(c) 0.72 (d) 1.0

90. Heat transfer coefficients for free convection ingases, forced convection in gases and vapours, andfor boiling water lie, respectively in the ranges of

(a) 5 - 15, 20 - 200 and 3000 - 50,000 W/m2K.(b) 20 - 50, 200 - 500, and 50,000 -105 W/m2K.(c) 50 -100, 500 - 1000, and 105 - 106 W/m2K.(d) 20 - 100, 200 - 1000, and a constant 106

W/m2K.91. A steel ball of mass 1 kg and specific heat 0.4 kJ

kg is at a temperature of 60°C. It is dropped into1 kg water at 20°C. The final steady statetemperature of water is(a) 23.5°C (b) 30°C(c) 35°C (d) 40°C

Linked Answer Q. 92-93.A copper tube of 20 mm outer diameter, I mm thicknessand 20 m long (thermal conductivity = 400 W/m-K) iscarrying saturated steam at 150 °C (convective heattransfer coefficient = 150 W/m2-K). The tube is exposedto an ambient temperature of 27 °C. The convective heattransfer coefficient of air is 5 W/ m2-K. Glass wool isused for insulation (thermal conductivity = 0.075 W/m-K).

Thickness of the insulation used is 5 mm higher than thecritical thickness of insulation (enthalpy of condensationof steam = 2230 kJ/kg).

92. The rate of heat lost by the steam will be(a) 132.2 kJ/hr-m (b) 136.5 kJ/hr.m(c) 139.2 kJ/hr-m (d) 142.7 kJ/hr-m

93. The rate of steam condensation (in kg/hr-m) will be(a) 0.022 (b) 0.43(c) 0.62 (d) 0.84

94. Ina pula*erised-fuel large power boiler, the heattransfer from the burning fuel to the walls of thefurnace is(a) by conduction only(b) By convection only(c) by conduction and convection(d) predominantly by radiation

95. Kinematic viscosity of air at 20°C is given to be 1.6x 10-5 m2/s. Its kinematic viscosity at 70°C will bevary approximately(a) 2.2 x 10-5 m2/s (b) 1.6 x 10-5 m2/s(c) 1.2 x 10-5 m2/s (d) 10-5 x m2/s

96. It is proposed to coat a 1 mm diameter wire withenamel paint (k = 0.1 W/mK) to increase heattransfer with air. If the air side heat transfercoefficient is 100 W/m2 K, the optimum thicknessof enamel paint should be(a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.5(c) lmm (d) 2 mm

97. A steel steam pipe 10 cm inner diameter and 11 cmouter diameter is covered with an insulation havinga thermal conductivity of 1 W/mK. If convectiveheat transfer coefficient between the surface ofinsulation and the surrounding air is 8 W/m2K, thecritical radius of insulation will be(a) 10 cm (b) 11 cm(c) 12.5 cm (d) 15 cm

98. Air enters a counterflow heat exchanger at 70°Cand leaves at 40°C. Water enters at 30°C and leavesat 50°C. The LMTD in dev °C will be(a) 5.65 (b) 4.43(c) 19.52 (d) 20.17

101


99. Lumped heat transfer analysis of solid objectsuddenly exposed to a fluid medium at a differenttemperature is valid when(a) Biot number < 0.1(b) Biot number > 0.1(c) Fourier number < 0.1(d) Fourier number > 0.1

------------------

E C FIGURE ENGLISH-2

192. When a number of 2 port networks are connectedin cascade, the individual(a) Zoe matrices are added(b) Vsc matrices are added(c) Chain matrices are multiplied(d) H-matrices are multiplied

201. In a two-port network containing linear bilateralpassive circuit elements, which one of the followingconditions for z-parameters would hold ?(a) Z11 = Z22

(b) Z12Z21 = Z11Z22

(c) Z11Z12 = Z22Z21

(d) Z12 = Z21

202. The two electric sub-networks N1 and 2 areconnected through three resistors as shown in thefigure below. The voltage across 5Q resistor and152 resistor are given to be 10V and 5V respectively.Then voltage across 15Q resistor is

(a) -105 V (b) +105 V(c) -15 V (d) + 15 V

213. When a number of 2-port networks are connectedin cascade, the individual(a) z. matrices are added(b) z.-matrices are added(c) chain matrices are multiplied(d) h-matrices are multiplied

212. The V-I relation for the network shown in theV = 4I – 9 If now a resistor R = 2 W is connectedacross it, then the value of I will be

I

R = 2W(a) - 4.5 A (b) - 1.5 A(c) 1.5 A (d) 4.5 A

217. For a two-port reciprocal network, the output open-circuit voltage divided by the input current equal to(a) B (b) Z12

(c) 1 / y12 (d) h12

218. In the circuit shown in the figure, for R = 20 W thecurrent I is 2 A. When R is 10 W the current Iwould be(a) 1A (b) 2A(c) 2.5 A (d) 3 A

220. The short-circuit test of a 2-port network is shownin Fig-I. The voltage across the terminals AA’ inthe network shown in Fig-II will be

10A

20V 2AFig-I

10V

(a) 20 V (b) 10V(c) 5 V (d) 2 V

223. A two-port network i.. defined by the relationsI1= 2V1 + V2, I2= 2I1+ 3V2 Then Z12 is(a) -2 W (b) -1WWWWW

102


(c) -1/2 W (d) -1/4 W224. With the usual notations, a two-port resistive network

satisfies the condition A = D = 3 / 2 B = 4/3C Thez11 of the network is(a) 5/3 (b) 4 / 3(c) 3/4 (d) 1/3

227. For a two-port symmetrical bilateral network, if A= 3 and B =1W, the value of parameter C will be(a) 4 s (b) 6 s(c) 8 s (d) 16 s

229. The h parameters h11 and h222 are related to z anyy parameters as(a) h11=z11 and h22 = 1/z22

(b) h11 = z11 and h22 = y22

(c) h11 = 1/y11 and h22 = 1/z22

(d) h11 = 1/ y11 and h22 = y22

241. The circuit shown in the given figure in resonatesat

4H 1F

(a) all frequencies(b) 0.5 rad/sec(c) 5 rad/sec(c) 1 rad/sec

242. A current impulse, 55 (t) is forced through acapacitor C. The voltage Vc(t) across the

Capacitor is given by(a) 5t (b) 5u(t) – C(c) 5/C t (d) 5u(t) / C

244. In the circuit of given figure, the current iD throughthe ideal diode (zero cut in voltage and forwardresistance) equals

b

10V 2A(a) 0 A (b) 4 A

(c) 1 A (d) none of these245. The voltage Vc p Vc2 and Vc3 across the

capacitors in the circuit in the given figure, understeady state are respectively

+ 100 3F

_ -(a) 80 V, 32 V, 48 V (b) 80 V, 48 V, 32 V(c) 20 V, 8 V, 12 V (d) 20 V, 12 V, 8 V

246. In the given figure, A1, A2 and A3 are idealammeters. If Ai reads 5A, A2 reads 12A, then A3

should read

(a) 7 A (b) 12 A(c) 13 A (d) 17 A

247. A fixed capacitor of reactance -j 0.02 W isconnected in parallel across a series combination ofa fixed inductor j 0.01 W and a variable resistanceR. As R is varied from zero to infinity, the locusdiagram of the admittance of this L-C-R circuit willbe(a) a semi circle of diameter j 100 and centre

at zero.(b) a semi circle of diameter j 50 and centre at(c) a straight line inclined at an angle.(d) a straight line parallel to the x-axis.

248. An 11 V pulse of 10 xis duration is applied to thecircuit shown in the figure. Assuming that thecapacitor is completely discharged prior to applyingthe pulse, the peak value of the capacitor voltage is

103


11µF(a) 11 V (b) 5.5 V(c) 6.32V (d) 0.96 V

249. Consider the circuit shown in the figure. If thefrequency of the source is 50 Hz, then a value ofto which results in a transient free response is

sin (cot)(a) 0 ms (b) 1.78 ms(c) 2.71 Ms (d) 2.91 ms

250. A sinusoidal voltage V and frequency f is connectedto a series circuit at variable resistance R and afixed reactance X. The locus of the tip of the currentphasor I as R is varied from 0 to co is(a) a semicircle with a diameter V / X(b) a straight line with a slope R/X(c) an ellipse with V/R as major axis(d) a circle at radius R/X and origin at (0, V/2)

251. A circuit with a resistor, inductor and capacitor inseries is resonant off. Hz. If all the componentvalues are now doubled, the new resonant frequencyis(a) 2 f0 (b) stil f0

(c) f0 / 2 (d) f0 / 4254. A water boiler of home is switched on to the a.c.

mains supplying power at 230 V/50 Hz. Thefrequency of instantaneous power consumed by theboiler is(a) 0 Hz (b) 50 Hz(c) 100 Hz (d) 150 Hz

256. In the network shown in the figure, the circuit wasinitially in the steady-state condition with the switchK closed. At the instant when the switch is opened,the rate of decay of current through the inductancewill be

2A 2H

(a) Zero (b) 0.5 A/s(c) 1 A/s (d) 2 A/s

257. In the circuit shown in the figure, the switch S hasbeen opened for long time. It is closed at t = 0. Fort> 0, the current flowing through the inductor willbe given by

12W 6W

36 15H(a) iL (t) = 1.2 + 0.8 e2t

(b) iL (t) = 0.8 + 1.2 e-2t

(c) iL (t) = 1.2 - 0.8 e-2t

(d) iL(t) = 0.8 - 1.2 e-2t

----------

SUPERVISER SCIENCE

1. A vast collection of stars held together by mutualgravitation is called(a) a galaxy (b) universe(c) constellations (d) nebula

2. The stars which appear in the form of closed groupsand form recognisable shapes and patterns areknown as(a) supernova (b) neutron stars(c) Milky Way (d) constellations

3. During the formation of a star, the cloud of gasesbegins to contract under its own gravity. Thecontracting mass is known as(a) Supernova (b) Orion

104


(c) Protostar (d) Meteor4. The smallest planet in the solar system is

(a) Mars (b) Mercury(c) Earth (d) Pluto

5. Super dense planetary material formed due to thedeath of a star of mass more than five molar massesis called(a) asteroid (b) meteorite(c) black hole (d) binary stars

6. Constellations appear to change their positions atdifferent times of night because(a) the earth rotates about its axis(b) the earth revolves round the sun(c) the earth and the constellations move in opposite

directions(d) the constellations move faster than the earth

7. The Pole Star does not seem to move because(a) it rotates very rapidly(b) it moves round the sun and not the earth(c) it is in line with the earth's axis of rotation(d) it does not move

8. The gases from which a star begins to be formedare(a) hydrogen and nitrogen(b) nitrogen and oxygen(c) oxygen and helium(d) hydrogen and helium

9. Light from the nearest star (other than the sun)reaches the earth in(a) 42 years (b) 42 seconds(c) 4.2 years (d) 4.2 seconds

10. Unlike the fluid core of the earth, the core of themoon is(a) plasma (b) volatile gas(c) viscous liquid (d) solid

11. The brightest star in the sky is(a) Sirius (b) Alpha Centauri(c) Proxima Centauri (d) Venus

12. The planet which shows phases is(a) Earth (b) Venus(c) Jupiter (d) none

13. Light from the sun reaches us in(a) 8 minutes (b) 8 seconds

(c) 8 hours (d) 1 year14. Stars of extremely high densities are called

(a) Supernova (b) Neutron stars(c) Binary stars (d) Asteroids

15. What is the source of electric energy in an artificialsatellite ?(a) A thermophile(b) Solar cells(c) A dynamo(d) A mini nuclear reactor

16. Innumerable small bodies revolving round the sunchiefly between Mars and Jupiter are called(a) meteors (b) planetoids(c) comets (d) galaxies

17. The moons of the planet 'Jupiter' were discoveredby(a) Newton (b) Galileo(c) Kepler (d) Copernicus

18. Which one of the following planets takes the longestperiod of time for one revolution round the sun?(a) Earth (b) Saturn(c) Jupiter (d) Mars

19. Which of the following theories has no connectionwith the origin of the earth?(a) Nebular hypothesis of Laplace(b) Tidal hypothesis of Jeans and Jeffreys(c) Binary star theory of Lyttleton(d) Convection current theory of Holmes

20. On re-entry of the space shuttle into earth'satmosphere, a situation of 'radio blackout' ariseswhich means(a) the sound cannot be heard on radio(b) a situation of no light(c) a situation of no communication(d) none of the above

21. The fact that the night sky is dark shows that theuniverse(a) is infinitely old(b) is not infinitely old(c) is infinite in extent(d) originated in a big bang

22. Which of the following statements are correct aboutthe Milky Way galaxy?

105


I. It contains two components, the disc and thespherical It is roughly 10,000 light years indiameter At the very centre is a radio source,Sagittarius A

IV. Many astronomers believe that the central objectin the Milky Way is a black hole

(a) I and II (b) I, II and III(c) II, III and IV (d) I, III and IV

23. Which of the following is/are the final states of theremains of a star?Black holeNeutron StarWhite DwarfBrown Dwarf(a) I, II and III (b) II, III and IV(c) I and II (d) I, II, III and IV

24. The apparent path of the sun around the sky iscalled(a) revolution (b) parallax(c) ecliptic (d) precession

25. Which of the following is/are true of earth'sprecession?1. Precession is caused by the gravitational pull

of the sun and moon2. In about 13,000 years, the north celestial will

be near the star Vega and not Polaris3. The direction of earth's axis of rotation changes

because of precession(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1 only

27. The New Moon(a) rises at dawn and sets at sunset(b) rises at sunset and sets at dawn(c) rises at noon anti sets at midnight(d) rises at midnight and sets at noon

28. Due to the moon's gravity,I. the rocky .surface of the near side is drawn up

into a bulge a few centimetres highII. sea water flows into a bulge of water on the

side of earth facing the moonIII. earth is pulled away from the oceans, which

flow into a bulge on the far side(a) II and III (b) II only(c) I and II (d) I, II and III

29. Nova is(a) a new star(b) the eruption of an old star(c) a pulsar(d) none of the above

30. The periodic flashing of pulsars is linked to(a) pulsation (b) rotation(c) orbit (d) age of star

31. On what does the escape velocity of a bodydepend?I. Mass of celestial bodyII. The distance from the centre of mass to the

escaping object(a) Only I (b) 011-1Y 11(c) Both I and II (d) Neither I nor H

32. Regarding Mercury, we may sayI. it is too small to retain a true atmosphereII. lack of atmosphere causes extreme highs of

temperature in direct sunlight and lows indarkness lack of atmosphere has allowed theplanet to retain the features since the last lavahardened

(a) I only (b) II only(c) III only (d) I, II and III

33. Although Venus is earth's twin in size, it is the mostinhospitable of planets. The present atmosphere ofVenus is mainly due to(a) its size(b) its shape(c) its proximity to the sun(d) volcanism

34. Aurorae are a result of the interaction of earth'smagnetosphere with(a) the solar wind(b) the ozone layer(c) radio waves(d) none of the above

35. The ring of Jupiter is(a) most likely composed of silicates(b) non-existent(c) very thick and opaque(d) all of the above

36. Oort Cloud Theory is connected with(a) comets (b) pulsars

106


(c) Jupiter (d) Saturn37. Hubble Law is associated chiefly with

(a) red shifts(b) sun(c) eclipses(d) magnetosphere

38. The more distant a galaxy is, the faster it recedesfrom us. This is the implication of the(a) Milankovitch theory(b) Olbers' paradox(c) Hubble 'taw(d) Titius-Bode rule

39. A rubber balloon is filled with hydrogen. Which ofthe following will be true when it goes up?1. Its volume increases2. Pressure within the balloon decreases3. There is no change in the volume of the balloon(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 only(c) 2 and 3 (d) 3 only

40. The fact that some salt can be added to a full glassof water without causing any overflow shows thatmatter(a) has weight (b) has energy(c) takes up space (d) is not continuous

41. The inertia of an object depends only on its(a) bulk (b) shape(c) mass (d) physical state

42. The mass of a body is different from its weightbecause(a) mass is constant but weight decreases as the

body moves from equator to the poles(b) mass is a variable quantity whereas weight is

constant(c) weight varies very little at different places

whereas mass varies a lot(d) mass is a measure of quantity of matter in a

body whereas weight is the force with whichthe earth attracts bodies

43. Match the following products and methods by whichthey can be obtained from their sources:

Products MethodI. Pure water 1. Sublimation

from seaII. Gasoline 2. Evaporation

from crude oilIII. Table salt 3. Distillation

from sea waterIV. Purified 4. Fractional

camphor distillation(a) I-2, II-3, III-4, IV-1(b) I-4, II-3, IV-1(c) I-3, II-4, IV-1(d) I-4, II-3, III-1, IV-2

44. An atom has 17 de toots, 17 protons, 18 neutrons.Therefore which of the follow:Ws/am true?I. Its atomic abet is 17II. Its mass number is 35(a) I (b) II(c) I and II (d) Neither I nor II

45. Choose the odd man out of the following:(a) Common salt (b) Epsom salts(c) Baking powder (d) Citric acid

46. Match the columns:Type of Mixture Method of SeparationI. Insoluble A. Distillation

solid and liquidII. Two immiscible - B. Evaporation

liquidsIII. Soluble solid C. Use of separating

and liquid funnelIV. Completely D. Decantation

miscible liquids(a) I-A, II-B, IV-D(b) I-B, II-C, III-D, IV-A(c) I-C, II-A, III-B, IV-D(d) I-D, II-C, III-B, IV-A

47. Of the following, the one representing a physicalchange is the(a) rusting of iron (b) freezing of water(c) burning of coat (d) souring of cream

48. Which type of chemical change is illustrated byboric acid or vinegar solution 'treating' a lye burnon the skin?(a) Double displacement(b) Replacement(c) Combination(d) Decomposition

49. A chemical equation does not tell us about

107


(a) which reactants are taking part in a reaction(b) the relative number of molecules and products(c) the relative masses of the reactants and

products(d) the concentration of the reactants and products

50. A deuterium nucleus consists of(a) one proton and two electrons(b) one proton and one neutron(c) one proton and three neutrons(d) one neutron and two. protons

51. Which of the following is/are matched wrongly?1. Washing soda-sodium carbonate2. Baking soda-sodium bicarbonate3. Caustic soda-sodium thiosulphate4. Lime-sodium hydroxide(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2(c) 2 and 3 (d) 3 and 4

52. Oxidation involves(a) gain in electrons (b) gain of hydrogen(c) loss of electrons (d) combustion

53. Dialysis is used for people with defective kidneys.It involves the process of(a) adsorption (b) osmosis(c) electropheresis (d) diffusion

54. Silver halides are used in photographic plates. Thechemical reaction is by influence of(a) contact (b) heat(c) light (d) water

55. In addition to the idea that matter consists ofmolecules, the kinetic theory of matter assumesthat these molecules(a) are perfectly stationary in solids(b) are always in motion(c) move only when struck by other molecules(d) are usually closer together in a gas than in a

liquid56. Absolute zero is

(a) a temperature(b) a point when matter ceases to exist(c) absence of matter(d) a number

57. Two solutions are isotonic when they

(a) are of the same concentration(b) have the same osmotic pressure(c) have the same number of isotopes(d) have the same substance saturating them

58. The noble gases do not react with any other atombecause(a) they are heavy elements(b) they are stable compounds(c) their outermost orbits contain eight electrons(d) of none of the above

59. The speed with which molecules move inside a gasdepends on(a) mass and pressure(b) pressure and temperature(c) mass and temperature(d) none of the above

60. The pressure exerted by a real gas is less than thepressure exerted by an ideal gas because the(a) molecules of a real gas possess more kinetic

energy(b) molecules of a real gas attract each other(c) molecules of a real gas have finite sizes(d) real gas is more viscous than an ideal gas

61. Which of the following gives the correct descendingorder of elasticity in the substances?(a) Rubber, silver, glass(b) Silver, rubber, steel(c) Steel, silver, rubber(d) All have equal elasticity

62. The vapour pressure of a liquid(a) increases with increase in temperature(b) decreases with increase in temperature(c) is independent of temperature(d) has none of the above features

63. When two mercury drops are brought into contact,they form a bigger drop because liquids have atendency to possess(a) minimum surface area(b) minimum volume(c) maximum size(d) maximum surface area

108


64. On a smooth glass surface, a drop of water spreadswhereas a drop of mercury remains almost sphericalbecause(a) mercury is metallic,(b) mercury is more viscous than water(c) cohesion of mercury is ggrlaesaster than its

adhesion with(d) cohesion of water is greater than its adhesion

with glass65. A drop of water is spherical due to

(a) surface tension(b) low temperature(c) air resistance(d) viscosity of water

66. A blotter and a towel work(a) by evaporation(b) by capillary action(c) by surface tension(d) by none of the above

67. Soap is used in washing because(a) it lowers the surface tension of water(b) it increases the surface tension of water(c) it increases the viscosity of water(d) it decreases the viscosity of water

68. When iron rusts, its weight(a) decreases(b) increases(c) shows no change(d) decreases and then increases

69. Cast iron is(a) elastic (b) plastic(c) brittle (d) none of the above

70. Which of the following is a homogeneous mixture?(a) Milk (b) Gasoline(c) Vegetable soup (d) Smog

71. Which of the following is most viscous?(a) Alcohol (b) Water(c) Honey (d) Gasoline

72. Match the following:Process Changes

A. Evaporation gas 1. Liquid intoB. Sublimation liquid 2. Gas intoC. Freezing gas 3. Solid intoD. Melting lquid 4. Solid into

5. Liquid into solid(a) A-3, B-4, C-5, D-2(b) A-3, B-1, C-4, D-5(c) A-1, B-3, C-5, D-4(d) A-1, B-5, C-3, D-4

73. If a body starts its motion from a point and comesback to its initial position after a certain time thensince,(a) its displacement is zero, average velocity is zero(b) its displacement is zero average speed is zero(c) total distance travelled is not zero, average

speed is not zero(d) total distance travelled is zero, average velocity

is not zero75. A jet engine works on the principle of

(a) conservation of energy(b) conservation of mass(c) conservation of linearMOmentum(d) conservation of angular 1110mentum

76. You are standing in a lift. The force on the floor ofthe lift due to your weight will(a) become zero when the lift moves up with an

acceleration of 9.8 in/s2(b) become zero when the lift moves down with

an acceleration of 9.8 m/s2(c) become zero when the lift moves with an

acceleration of 9.8 m/s' in any direction(d) remain unchanged whatever be the value of

acceleration of the lift77. A block of wood resting on a table is pulled by two

cords attached to it. One exerts a force of 100 gm,the other a force of 50 gm. In order to get thegreatest net force on the body, the two cords shouldbe pulled(a) in opposite directions(b) at right angles to each other(c) in nearly opposite directions(d) in the same direction

109


78. If the earth were 3 times as far from the sun as itis now, how would the gravitational attractioncompare with its present Value?(a) The gravitational attraction would be 9 times

its present amount(b) The gravitational attraction would be double its

present amount(c) The gravitational attraction would be 1/9 of its

present amount(d) None, of the above would be true

79. The sensation of weightlessness in a spacecraft inorbit is due to(a) the absence of gravity(b) the spacecraft in orbit having no energy(c) the presence of gravity outside but not inside

the spacecraft(d) the acceleration in orbit being equal to

acceleration of gravity outside80. Which one of the following describes the motion of

a bullet that has been fired horizontally by asupersonic jet fighter flying almost parallel to theground (neglect air resistance)?(a) Irregular motion(b) Motion along a straight line(c) Circular motion(d) Projectile motion

81. A body weighs less at the equator than at the polesbecause1. earth rotates about its axis2. the ice cap at the poles increase gravitational

pull equatorial diameter is greater than polardiameter

4. of some unknown factors(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1, 2 and 3(c) 1 and 3 (d) 4

82. When two bodies, a heavy one and a light one, areacted upon by the same force for the same timethen(a) the light body builds up a lower velocity than

the heavy one and the momentum gained isdifferent in both cases

(b) the light body builds up a higher velocity thanthe heavy one and the momentum gained isdifferent in both cases

(c) the light body builds up a higher velocity thanthe heavy one and the momentum gained is thesame in both cases

(d) none of the above is correct83. A ball tied with a string to a rotating shaft revolves

at uniform speed. As the shaft is suddenly broughtto rest, the string starts getting round the shaft withthe angular velocity of the ball(a) increasing (b) becoming zero(c) decreasing (d) remaining constant

84. The fall of a man due to a sudden break of therope while lifting water from a well is explained byNewton's(a) law of gravitation(b) first law of motion(c) second law 'of motion(d) third law of motion

85. A person riding a bicycle along a level road doesnot come to rest as soon as he stops pedalling. Thisis due to(a) inertia of motion(b) inertia of rest(c) Newton's second law of motion(d) Newton's third law of motion

86. For an electron circulating about an atomic nucleus,the centripetal force is provided by(a) electrostatic force of repulsion(b) electrostatic force of attraction(c) nuclear charge(d) none of the above

87. A liquid rises in a syringe when its piston is pulledup because(a) of the property of surface tension(b) of capillary action(c) of the action of atmospheric pressure(d) there is a force of cohesion between the liquid

molecules and the glass syringe88. A small weight is put on the pressure cooker. It

increases the pressure of the steam because(a) the weight is proportionate to the steam required(b) area of contact is small(c) the weight stops the steam from escaping

110


(d) of Bernoulli's principle89. In a barometer, mercury is pre ferred over water

because(a) mercury is a good conductor of heat(b) mercury shines and therefore its level can be

read easily(c) mercury has high density and low vapour

pressure(d) mercury is available in pure form

90. What happens to the level of mercury in thebarometer tube when it is taken down a coal mine?It(a) falls (b) remains unaltered(c) rases (d) rises and then falls

91. By keeping the barometer tube slanting, thebarometer reading will(a) increase(b) decrease(c) first increase and then decrease(d) remain the same

92. A body floating in oil always displaces its own(a) weight of oil(b) volume of oil(c) surface area of oil(d) depth ofoil

93. If a stone tied to a string is whirled in a verticalcircle at constant speed, the tension in the string(a) is minimum when the stone is at the lowest

point(b) is maximum when the stone is at the lowest

point(c) is same throughout(d) is indeterminate

94. The density of sea water decreases as(a) depth and salinity increase(b) depth increases and salinity decreases(c) depth and salinity decrease(d) depth decreases and salinity increases

95. When a ship enters a sea from a river, it(a) rises(b) remains at the same level

(c) sinks a little(d) rises or sinks depending on the material it is

made of96. A football bounces when it falls on the ground

because(a) it is hollow(b) it is made of rubber(c) of its property of elasticity(d) it is very light and is able to overcome theresistance of air

97. A steel ball floats on mercury because(a) the density of mercury is higher than that of

steel(b) mercury is a metal in theliquid form(c) mercury has a high surface tension(d) the density of mercury is higher than that of

water98. Rise of mercury in a barometer indicates

(a) fair weather(b) storm(c) rain(d) both (b) and (c)

99. Two cars, passing each other at high speed, are indanger of side swiping because(a) of the increase in air pressure in _the space

between them(b) of decrease in the velocity of air molecules

between them(c) of decrease in air pressure in the space between

them(d) of increase in the velocity of air molecules

between them100. A physical balance works on the

(a) principle of moments(b) law of conservation of momentum(c) law of parallelogram of forces(d) law of conservation of energy

101. A bullet is fired from a gun. The kinetic energy ofthe bullet is(a) more than that of the gun(b) equal to that of the gun

111


(c) less than that of the gun(d) none of the above

102. No work is done by a force applied(a) parallel to a motion(b) along the direction of motion(c) at right angles to a motion(d) in any of the above cases

103. The energy of the winds and the waves is(a) potential(b) kinetic(c) electrical(d) potential and kinetic

104. A porter carries a box from the ground floor to thefirst using a slanting staircase. The work he doesdepends onI. the weight of the boxII. the actual distance he traverses up the staircase

the vertical height of the first lfoor(a) I and II (b) I only(c) III only (d) I and III

105. A ball is floating on water. What kind of equilibriumdoes it possess?(a) Stable equilibrium(b) Unstable equilibrium(c) Neutral equilibrium(d) Both stable and unstable equilibrium

106. A nail extractor is an example of(a) a lever of the first kind(b) a lever of the second kind(c) a lever of the third kind(d) a combination of levers of the first and second

kinds107. The moment of a force is a measure of

(a) the capacity to turn a body(b) the stability of a body(c) the change in momentum of a body(d) the impulse of the force

108. Kinetic energy depends on(a) the mass of the moving body(b) the velocity or speed of the moving body(c) the pressure of the moving body(d) both mass and velocity of the moving body

109. All balls, cylinders and cones lying on their sidesroll because they are in(a) stable equilibrium

(b) unstable equilibrium(c) both stable and unstable equilibrium(d) neutral equilibrium

110. A body is stable if it has a(a) broad base and a high centre of gravity(b) broad base and a low centre of gravity(c) narrow base and a high centre of gravity(d) narrow base and a low centre of gravity

111. When the speed of a body is halved, its kineticenergy becomes(a) half (b) one-fourth(c) quadruple (d) double

112. A person climbing a hill tends to bend forward soas to(a) increase stability (b) reduce friction(c) increase speed (d) stop slipping

113. A man stands holding a weight of 10 kg at a distanceof 2m from the ground. The work done is(a) 20 J (b) 5 J(c) 200 J (d) zero

114. In an ideal machine,A. mechanical advantage is greater than velocity

ratioB. mechanical advantage is equal to velocity ratioC. mechanical advantage is less than velocity ratioD. efficiency is always less than 100%(a) A and B (b) A and C(c) A and D (d) Only B

115. Match the following:Energy Device/process conversion1. Heat to electric A. Car braking2. Electric to sound B. Nuclear reactor3. Mass to heat C. Loudspeaker4. Chemical to D. Solar cell

heat + light5. Kinetic to heat E. Fuel burning(a) I-A, II-B, IV-D, V-E(b) I-D,. II-C, IV-E, V-A(c) I-B, II-A, IV-E, V-D(d) I-B, II-C, III-A, IV-D, V-E

116. In which of the following objects does the centre ofgravity lie outside the material of the body?(a) A solid disc(b) A hollow ring

112


(c) A hollow sphere(d) In none of the above

117. Steam of 100 °C causes.more severe burns thanwater at the same temperature because(a) steam is highly combustible(b) steam cannot do more work(c) steam can provide more heat(d) steam is a gas

118. A silver spoon and a book are both at roomtemperature. The spoon feels colder to the touchbecause(a) of an illusory effect(b) silver is an almost pure material(c) silver is a very good heat conductor(d) it is made of a denser material

119. Every object at a temperature above absolute zero(a) radiates energy(b) occupies less space than it would at absolute

zero(c) is a good heat insulator(d) must receive heat by convection

120. The ice in glaciers always starts melting from(a) the top surface(b) the layers in the middle(c) the bottom layer(d) all over the surface simultaneously

121. Air is blown rapidly through some ether at roomtemperature_ The ether(a) becomes cold(b) condenses and latent heat is given out(c) dissolves in the air(d) boils

122. Energy we receive from the sun is not transportedby conduction or convection because(a) there are always some clouds in the atmosphere(b) air is less dense at high altitudes(c) interplanetary space is a good vacuum(d) the sun is gradually cooling off

123. If a saturated vapour is compressed to half itsvolume without changing the temperature the resultis that(a) the pressure doubles(b) the pressure remains unchanged but the vapour

condenses(c) all the vapour condenses to liquid(d) the pressure becomes half its initial value

124. Food is cooked faster in a pressure cooker because(a) high pressure increases the boiling point of water(b) heat cannot escape from the cooker(c) steam is hotter than boiling water(d) water starts boiling at a lower temperature

125. The source of our energy is basically the(a) ocean (b) sun(c) atmosphere (d) space

126. The quantity of water vapour the atmosphere canhold(a) decreases with increase of temperature(b) is independent of temperature(c) increases with increase of temperature(d) lfuctuates with increase of temperature

127. It takes much longer to cook things in the hills thanin the plains, because(a) atmospheric pressure is high in the hills and

water boils at a higher temperature(b) atmospheric pressure is lower in the hills and

water boils at a lower temperature(c) due to low atmospheric pressure in the hills the

boiling point of water is raised, and thereforewater takes longer to boil

(d) the humid atmosphere in the hills absorbs a lotof heat, leaving very little for the cooking

128. Perspiration is maximum when(a) temperature is low and air is dry(b) temperature is lovs, and air is humid(c) temperature is high and air is dry(d) temperature is high and-eir is humid

129. Mica is a(a) good conductor of heat and bad conductor of

electricity(b) good conductor of heat and good conductor of

electricity(c) bad conductor of heat and good conductor of

electricity(d) bad conductor of heat and bad conductor of

electricity130. A cup of hot tea on a metal table in a room loses

heat by(a) conduction and convection

113


(b) conduction, convection, radiation andevaporation

(c) conduction and evaporation(d) conduction and radiation

131. During summers, we feel cornfortable under a fanbecause it(a) produces convection currents(b) sets the air in motion, thereby increasing the

evaporation of sweat(c) circulates air which carries heat away from

the body(d) circulates cool air on us

132. Drinks remain hot or cold for a long time in athermos flask because of theI. vacuum between the double wallsII. presence of air, which is a bad conductor of

heat, in between the double wallsIII. silver coating on the inside of the double walls(a) I (b) II and III(c) III (d) I and III

133. The temperature at the top of a frozen lake is 15"C. What is the temperature of the water in thelake in contact with the ice layer?.(a) 0 °C (b) 4 °C(c) -4 "C (d) 1 °C

134. The ratio of the sizes of a Fahrenheit degree to aCelsius degree is(a) 9/5 (b) 5/9(c) 2/6 (d) 3/9

135. The quantity of heat energy taken up by a bodydepends on(a) density, mass and temperature of the body(b) mass, specific heat of the material and the

temperature change(c) density, volume and temperature change(d) surface area, volume and . temperature of the

body136. If water in a lake were to behave like other liquids,

then in extremely cold weather, it would freeze(a) from top to bottom(b) from bottom to top(c) 'simultaneously throughout the depth(d) first on the surface, bottom and sides and then

in the interior

137. In the process of fusion,I. the temperature does not changeII. the kinetic energy changesIII. the _potential energy increasesIV. the distance between molecules on an average

increases(a) I and IV (b) I, II and III(c) 11 and IV (d) I, III and IV

138. 'Arrange in descending order of wavelength (longto short) :I. InfraredII. UltravioletIII. Gairima raysIV. 'Microwaves(a) IV, I, II, III (b) I, IV, II, III(c) I, II, III, IV (d) III, II, I, IV

139. In'the visible spectrum, the lowest frequency is for(a) violet (b) blue(c) orange (d) red

140. Radio reception is adversely affected during daybecause of(a) the magnetic field of the earth(b) noise from traffic(c) sunlight(d) too many radio stations

142. broadcasting at the same time Television signalscan be received these days at any place on earthRadio signals are unaffected by earth's curvature(a) A and R are true and R explains A(b) A and R are true but R does not explain A(c) A is true but R is not true(d) A is not true but R is true

142. A wave in which the particles of the material moveup and down as the waves goes from left to rightis known as(a) longitudinal (b) transverse(c) sound (d) compressional

143. Which one of the following gives the correctascending order by energy content?(a) Radio, gamma, X-ray, infrared(b) Radio, micro, ultra-violet, X-ray

114


(c) Micro, radio, infra-red, X-ray(d) Infra-red, ultraviolet, X-ray, micro

144. The shadow of a cloud on the ground is the samesize and shape as the cloud itself because the sun'srays are(a) not very numerous(b) highly diverging(c) practically parallel(d) all coming to a single point

145. The sun and 'moon appear elliptical near the horizon.It is(a) because of refraction(b) an optical illusion(c) interference phenomenon(d) their actual shape

146. The length of time it takes for light to go from thesun to the earth is about(a) 173 hrs. (b) 8 min(c) 50 sec (d) 2 min

148. A person's spectacles have a power of -2.0. Thespectacles have and are1. converging lens2. diverging lens3. for short sight4. for long sight(a) 1 and 3 (b) 1 and 4(c) 2 and 3 (d) 2 and 4

150. A standard candle and an electric lamp are foundto produce equal illumination on a screen when thecandle is 1 ft away and the lamp is 5 ft away. Therating of the lamp, in candles, is(a) 0.2 (b) 0.04(c) 5 (d) 25

151. The working of optical fibres is based on theof electromagnetic waves.(a) refraction (b) reflection(c) total internal reflection (d) polarisation

152. A device for comparing the luminous intensities oftwo light sources is(a) photometer (b) projection lantern(c) camera (d) epidiascope

153. A small hole in the window of a closed room formsan inverted image of an outside tree on the opposite

wall of the room. This happens because(a) of the rectilinear propagation of-tight(b) the hole acts as a prism(c) the rays suffer refraction(d) the rays of light suffer lateral inversion on

entering the hole154. When a man walks directly towards a vertical plane

mirror at a speed of 4 ft/sec, he(a) approaches his image at the rate of 4 ft/sec(b) recedes from his image at the rate of 4 ft/sec(c) approaches his image at the rate of 8 ft/sec(d) stays at a constant distance from his image

155. Which part of the camera is analogous to the retinain the human eye?(a) Aperture (b) Lens(c) Films (d) Shutter

157. A convex mirror makes a good rear-view mirrorfor a car because(a) it does not form diminished images(b) it has no focal point(c) its images can be thrown on a screen(d) it forms erect, reduced images

158. The comic mirrors seen in amusement parks havereflecting surfaces that are(a) entirely concave(b) irregularly curved(c) convex and spherical(d) plane at all points

159. When a person enters a dark room from brightlight, he is not able to see clearly for a little whilebecause the(a) eye is unable to adjust itself immediately(b) his iris is unable to dilate the pupil immediately(c) distance between the lens and retina takes time

to adjust(d) retina becomes insensitivemomentarily

160. What is the principal difference in constructionbetween reflecting and refracting astronomicaltelescopes?(a) In the reflecting instrument, a concave mirror

replaces the objective lens (converging) of therefracting telescope

(b) In the reflecting instrument, a convex mirror

115


replaces the objective lens (converging) of therefracting telescope

(c) In the reflecting instrument, a convex lensreplaces the objective lens (converging) of therefracting telescope

(d) In the reflecting instrument, a concave lensreplaces the objective lens (converging) of therefracting telescope

161. The colour of the outer edge of the rainbow will be(a) purple (b) red(c) violet (d) yellow

162. The effect produced in the eye by a mixture ofpurple and yellow light will be(a) white (b) blue-violet(c) green (d) blue-green

163. To an astronaut, outer space appears(a) white (b) black(c) deep blue (d) crimson

164. A tailor, wishing to match thread for a blue overcoat,should do so(a) under a blue light (b) under a yellow light(c) near a window (d) in any light

165. A certain piece of paper looks red in red light butblack in blue light. When seen in daylight, it mayappear(a) colourless (b) white(c) blue (d) red

166. The sun appears deep orange-red before insetsbecause(a) it is hotter at the end of the day(b) red light is least scattered(c) it emits only orange-red light(d) the other colours get absorbed

167. When seen through a piece of red glass, the leavesof a plant(a) appear almost black(b) become nearly invisible(c) are seen in their natural\ colour(d) take on a bluish hue

168. The phenomenon of polarisation demonstrates thatlight waves are(a) transverse

(b) longitudinal(c) both longitudinal and transverse(d) none of the above

169. The sensation of colour is associated with the(a) frequency of light(b) wavelength of light(c) speed of light(d) amplitude of light wave

170. All the colours in a TV screen are produced from1. red 2. blue3. green 4. yellow(a) 1, 2, 3 and 4 (b) 2, 3 arid 4(c) 1, 2 and 3 (d) 1, 3 and 4

171. The factors responsible for the refraction of lightare(a) frequency of light(b) optical density(c) angle of incidence of the medium(d) mean density

172. At about 500°C, a body emits(a) white light(b) infra-red radiation(c) ultraviolet rays(d) all the above

173. The focal length of a lens is 50 cm. Its power is(a) 50 dioptres (b) 20 dioptres(c) 2 dioptres (d) 0.2 dioptre

174. If the angle of incidence is equal to the criticalangle, the angle of refraction will be(a) 45" (b) 180°(c) 90° (d) 250

175. Red light differs from blue light in(a) velocity (b) wavelength(c) intensity (d) pitch

176. The colour of light which is bent the least by theprism in a spectrum of white light is(a) red (h) green(c) violet (d) white

177. Which of the following statements are correct?1. In dim light, the pupils of the eye dilate to

116


admit more light2. The two sets of images of an object seen by

the two eyes are identical3. The lens in the eye can alter its focal length4. Stereoscopic vision helps one to judge vision(a) 1 and 3 (b) 1, 2 and 3(c) 1, 3 and 4 (d) 1, 2, 3 and 4

178. If the density of a matter is 80 kg/m3 then whatwill be its relative density?(a) 8 (b) 0.8(c) 0.08 (d) 0.008

179. An electric iron of 750 W is operated at 250 V. Itscurrent rating is(a) 3A (b) 5A(c) 7A (d) 10A

180. A lens acts as a divergent lens when placed inwater and as a convergent lens when placed in air.The refractive index of the lens could be(a) 1.01 (h) 1.3(c) 1.33 (d) 1.50

181. On which of the following factors does thetemperature of steam in a pressure cooker depend?(a) Material of which cooker is made(b) Temperature of the flame(c) Quantity of cooking material(d) Size of the pressure cooker

182. A bomb is dropped at a point from a movingaeroplane. The pilot observes that(a) the bomb traverses a curved path and falls

some distance behind that point(b) the bomb traverses a curved path and falls

some distance ahead(c) the bomb drops vertically downward(d) the bomb remains stationary in the air for some

time183. Consider the two statements given below, one

labelled the Assertion(A) and the other Reason (R).(A): Radio does not work in a moving train unless

aerial is put outside the window

(R): The train compartment acts as a hollow cylinderand charge is centred which does not allow aradio to work Which one of the followingstatements is correct?

(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correctexplanation of A

(b) Both A and R are true but R is not the correctexplanation of A

(c) A is true but R is false(d) A is false but R is true

184. Consider the two statements given below, onelabelled the Assertion(A) and the other Reason (R).(A): In a circular motion, linear velocity of object is

not constant.(R): In circular motion, direction of motion changesrapidly.Which one of the following statements is correct?(a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct

explanation of A(b) Both A and. R are true but R is not the correct

explanation of A(c) A is true but R is false(d) A is false but R is true

185. If a mirror is rotated through 20 degrees, then thereflected beam will get rotated through an angle of(a) 10° (b) 20"(c) 30" (d) 40"

186. Two columns of equal height and same thicknessare filled with mercury and water. The pressureexerted by the mercury column will be greater thanthe pressure exerted by the water column by(a) 13.6 times (b) 13600 times(c) 1/13600 times (d) 1/13.6 times

187. If the length of a simple pendulum is doubled whatwill happen to its period?(a) It will also be doubled(b) It will become one-fourth(c) It will be ji times(d) It will not change

188. Ultraviolet radiation of the sun does not reach the

117


earth extensively as the upper layers of theatmosphere contain(a) oxygen (b) ozone-(c) carbon monoxide (d) fluorocarbon

189. The density of ice is 900 kg m What fraction of thevolume of a piece of ice will be above water, whenfloating in fresh water of density 1000 kg m 1?(a) 0.09 (b) 0.10(c) 0.083 (d) 0.97

190. When the temperature of the liquid increases, thesurface tension of the liquid(a) increases(b) decreases(c) remains the same(d) first increases and then decreases

191. Which one of the following is the correctarrangement in the decreasing order of the refractiveindices of glass, diamond and water?(a) Glass, water, diamond(b) Water, glass, diamond(c) Diamond, water, glass(d) Diamond, glass, water

192. When light passes from air into glass, it experienceschange in(a) frequency and wavelength(b) frequency and speed(c) wavelength and speed(d) frequency, wavelength and speed

193. A laboratory instrument requires the use of a 6 volt,30 watt lamp, but the only potential source availableis 120 volt. In this connection, which of the followingare possible or should be done?1. It is possible to connect a esistor in such a way

as to permit the proper use of a lamp2. Resistor should be connected in series with the

lamp3. Resistor should have a resistance of 18 ohms

Select the correct answer from the codes givenbelow:

(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2(c) 1 and 3 (d) 2 and 3

194. The cathode in a vacuum tube is coated with oxide

of barium or thorium. The purpose of the coating isto(a) reduce space charge(b) protect the cathode from overheating(c) give a copious supply of thermo-electrons(d) control the flow of current in the tube

195. When milk is churned, the creamseparates from it due to the(a) cohesive force(b) centrifugal force(c) frictional force(d) gravitational force

196. During the fermentation of sugar, the enzyme whichconverts glucose into ethyl alcohol is(a) invertase (b) diastase(c) zymase (d) maltase

197. A spherical balloon carries a uniform distribution ofelectric charge over its surface. The electric fieldis maximum at a point(a) away from the surface(b) just on the surface(c) just inside the surface(d) very close to its centre

198. Which of the following compounds are responsiblefor "acid rain"?1. Nitrogen dioxide2. Silicon dioxide3. Sulphur dioxide4. Carbon monoxide(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 and 3(c) 2 and 4 (d) 3 and 4

199. Which one of the following is the most effectivecarrier of information?(a) Cables (b) Microwaves(c) Radiowaves (d) Optical fibres

200. Bionics is the science of(a) application of mathematics to the study of living

things(b) application of the knowledge of the living world

characteristic to the world of machines(c) study of relation of an organism to its

environment(d) study of laws of life

118


201. To avoid 'knocking' of the engine of a car, certaincompounds are added to petrol. Which of thefollowing is known as an antiknocking agent?(a) Ethyl alcohol (b) White petrol(c) Tetraethyl lead (d) Butane

202. Which one of the following compounds is used asa sedative ?(a) Potassium bromide(b) Calcium chloride(c) Ethyl alcohol(d) Phosphorus trichloride

203. Which one of the following statements about'Nuclear Fission' is not true?(a) A heavy nucleus breaks up into two smaller

nuclei(b) A large amount of energy is released in the

form of light and heat(c) More than one neutron is released in the process

of nuclear fission(d) Chemical energy is converted into heat and

light energy204. Match List I with List II and select the correct

answer using the codes given below the lists.List I (Device) List II (Conversion)A. Battery charger 1. Electrical energy

into mechanicalenergy

B. Battery 2. Mechanical energyinto electrical energy

C. Washing 3. Chemical enmachineergy into electricalenergy

D. Dynamo 4. Electrical energyinto chemical energy

A B C D(a) 4 3 1 2(b) 4 3 2 1(c) 1 2 3 4(d) 3 4 1 2

205. In certain amino acids, which one of the followingelements is found in addition to carbon, hydrogen,nitrogen and oxygen?

(a) Sulphur (b) Phosphorus(c) Zinc (d) Calcium

206. Which of the following statements is/are true?I. Sound is a form of energyIL Sound stops when vibration of an object stopsIII. Sound is a transverse waveIV. Sound travels better in a heavy gas than in a

light gas(a) I and II (b) I, II and III(c) I, II and IV (d) I and III

207. The quality of a sound depends upon the size of thevibrating body material of the vibrating bodyovertones produced shape of the vibrating bodyI, II and IIII, II, III and IVI and IIIII, III and IV(a) I, II and III (b) I, II, III and IV(c) I and III (d) II, III and IV

208. Ultrasonic waves can1. kill pests and insects2. clean clothes by shaking dirt out of them3. help in diagnosis of diseases4. operate automatic doors(a) 1 and 3 (b) 3 and 4(c) 1, 2 and 3 (d) 1, 2, 3 and 4

209. The speed of sound in Air with increase intemperature.(a) decreases(b) increases(c) increases or decreases depending upon the

medium(d) is unaffected

210. The throwing back of waves from an obstacle iscalled(a) refraction (b) reflection(c) dispersion (d) scattering

211. Sound is produced in a trumpet by the vibration ofthe(a) air column (b) reed(c) lips (d) metal casing

212. Moon has a gravitation force 6 that of earth. Thevelocity of sound waves on the surface of the moonwill be(a) 340 ms--1 (b) 340/0 ms'(c) 340 ¥ 6 ms-1 (d) 0

119


213. Sonar is mostly used by(a) doctors (b) astronauts(c) engineers (d) navigators

214. In a fire siren, a jet of air is directed against aseries of evenly spaced holes in a rotating disc. Asthe disc speeds up, the tone(a) maintains constant pitch(b) drops in pitch(c) increases in wavelength(d) increases in frequency

215. Put in ascending order of speed of sound in medium:I. 'waterII. steelIII. nitrogen(a) III, II, I (b) I, III, II(c) III, I, II (d) II, I, III

216. As a man moves directly away from a steady sourceof sound at constant speed, the sound he hears will(a) remain constant in both pitch and loudness(b) stay constant in pitch but decrease in loudness(c) increase in frequency and intensity(d) decrease in frequency and intensity

217. An apparent change in the frequency of receivedwaves due to relative motion of source and receiveris called(a) seeback effect (b) doppler effect(c) parallax (d) none of these

218. The main factor that determines the pitch of a toneis(a) frequency of sound waves(b) amplitude of sound waves(c) velocity of sound waves(d) intensity of sound waves

219. When the amplitude of a set of sound wavesincreases then the intensity of the sound(a) increases(b) decreases(c) first decreases and then increases(d) first increases and then decreases

220. The unit most commonly used to specify the intensityof a sound is(a) Newton (b) Candela(c) Hertz (d) Decibel

221. Two sound waves of the same amplitude can bedistinguished from each other by knowing their

(a) wavelength (b) time period(c) pitch (d) pitch and wavelength

222. Sound travels faster in air if(a) frequency is higher (b) pitch is smaller(c) humidity is high (d) wavelength is small

223. A concert hall has too long a reverberation time.Of the following, the best way to correct. thecondition would be to(a) hang large mirrors on the walls(b) lay heavy carpeting on the lfoor(c) install a curved ceiling(d) limit the size of the audience

224. The waves produced in the sea when an explosiontakes place at the bottom of the sea will be(a) transverse(b) stationary(c) longitudinal(d) transverse and longitudinal

225. Drums, bells, the, xylophone, marimba, etc., are allexamples of(a) string instruments(b) wind instruments(c) percussion instruments(d) None of the above

226. As the length of a vibrating column increases, itsfrequency(a) increases(b) decreases(c) remains the same(d) increases if the vibrating column is not air

227. Mach number is used in connection with the speedof(a) spacecraft (b) aircraft(c) sound (d) ships

228. The least distance between two walls before adistinct echo can be produced is about(a) 45 ft (b) 65 ft(c) 55 ft (d) 35 ft

229. Galton's whistle produces longitudinal waves offrequencies between(a) 10 KHz and 100 KHz(b) 3 KHz and 50 KHz(c) 50 KHz and .100 KHz

120


(d) none of the above230. An instrument constructed basically to study the

behaviour of the vibrating strings is(a) hydrometer (b) fathometer(c) sonometer (d) tachometer

231. A glass rod placed in a colourless liquid seems todisappear when the(a) liquid and the glass have the same colour(b) liquid wets the glass by capillarity .(c) glass and the liquid are of the same density(d) glass and the liquid have the same refractive

index232. Consider the following statement.

If there were no capillarity,1. it would be impossible to use a kerosene lamp2. one would not be able to use a straw to consume

a soft drink3. the blotting paper would fail to function4. there would have been no plants on earth(a) 1, 2 and 3 are correct(b) 2 and 4 are correct(c) 1, 2, 3 and 4 are correct(d) 1, 3 and 4 are correct

234. Which of the following are the conditions of SimpleHarmonic Motion?1. The motion is periodic2. The force is directed towards normal equilibrium

position3. The motion is linear4. Force is proportional to the velocity Select the

correct answer using the codes given below:(a) 2, 3 and 4 (b) 1, 3 and 4(c) 1, 2 and. 4 (d) 1, 2 and 3

235. A block of ice is floating in a beaker containing aliquid of specific gravity greater than one. Whenthe ice melts completely, the level of the liquid inthe beaker(a) remain the same as before the ice melted(b) will go down(c) will rise up(d) fnay or may not change depending upon the

size of beaker237. When sound waves travel from air to water, the

quantity that remains unchanged is(a) speed (b) frequency(c) wavelength (d) intensity

238. Two converging lenses of equal focal length 'f' areplaced in contact. The focal length of thecombination is(a) f/2 (b) f(c) 2f (d) 4f

239. Two bar magnets of equal length and magneticmoment are placed symmetrically one upon the otherwith their unlike poles in the same direction. Themagnetic moment of the combination is(a) zero (b) m/2(c) m (d) 2m

240. Two identical bar magnets are placed side by side,with like poles together. The combination will(a) repel iron nails(b) pick up bits of steel, but not iron(c) fail to attract a cobalt rod(d) pick up more iron filings than one such magnet

241. If one end of a soft iron rod is held close to the Spole of a strong magnet(a) the far end of the rod will not attract iron filings(b) i the rod will spring away as soon as it is

released(c) there will be, temporarily, a S pole near the

other end of the rod(d) the rod will be a strong magnet after the bar

magnet is removed242. The region near a magnet or magnets where the

(magnetic) effect is appreciable is the(a) magnetic intensity(b) magnetic pole(c) magnetic equator(d) magnetic field

243. The line joining the places of zero declination arecalled(a) isogonic lines(b) agonic lines(c) isoclinic lines(d) aclinic lines

244. At the magnetic poles, the angle of dip is(a) 90° (b) 0°(c) 180° (d) 270°

245. Which of the following statements is/are false?A. Iron is more easily magnetised than steelB. Steel is more easily demagnetised than iron

121


C. Steel produces a stronger magnet than ironD. Steel keeps its magnetism such longer than iron(a) A and B (b) A and C(c) B and C (d) C and D

246. A magnetised needle free to pivot in any directionwill come to rest in a horizontal position when at(a) the south magnetic pole(b) the north magnetic pole(c) a place about 1,500 miles from the north

magnetic pole(d) a place about midway between the north and

south magnetic poles247. Iron is used in electromagnets because it

(a) produces a stronger magnet(b) can be magnetised easily(c) can be demagnetised easily(d) keeps its magnetism for a longer time

248. A vertical wire carries a heavy current flowingfrom bottom to top. A compass needle placed on atable just east of the wire will point(a) north (b) east(c) south (d) west

249. In our houses, we get 220 V A.C.What does the value 220 represent?(a) Constant voltage (b) Effective voltage(c) Average voltage (d) Peak voltage

250. The function of fuse in an electrical circuit is(a) to regulate the flow of current(b) to avoid electric shocks(c) to break the circuit in case of overloading or

short circuiting(d) to increase the resistance to lfow of current

251. A spiral coil is wound on an upright post, with thecurrent going around it in a clockwise direction asseen from above. Then it is true that the lines offorce will(a) enter the coil at the top(b) concentrate most just beyond the ends of the

coil(c) begin and end on various turns of a wire(d) decrease in number if the current is increased

252. Commonly used safety fuse-wire is made of(a) tin(b) lead

(c) nickel(d) an alloy of tin and lead

253. The force between two parallel wires carryingcurrent has been used to define the(a) vole (b) coulomb(c) watt (d) ampere

254. In general, when the temperature of a metal israised, its conductance(a) increases(b) decreases(c) remains the same(d) first decreases, then increases

255. One should not connect a number of electricalappliances to the same power socket because(a) this can damage the appliances(b) the appliances will not get full voltage(c) the appliances will not get proper current(d) this can damage the domestic wiring due to

overheating256. When an electric bulb breaks, there is a mild bang

due to(a) the chemical reaction between the enclosed

gases(b) the compressed gases rushing out suddenly(c) the air rushing in to fill the evacuated space(d) none of the above

258. A common fluorescent tube contains(a) sodium vapour(b) argon at low pressure(c) mercury vapour at low pressure(d) mercuric oxide and neon

259. Three resistors of 4, -6 and 12 ohms respectivelyare connected in parallel. The equivalent resistanceis(a) 2 ohms (b) 22 ohms(c) 12 ohms (d) 4 ohms

260. In a circuit containing only pure resistive elements,what becomes of all the energy originally suppliedby the battery?(a) It is converted into mechanical energy(b) It is converted entirely into heat(c) It is converted into light energy(d) None of the above happens

122


261. Induced currents, flowing in small closed paths, inany conducting material placed in a varying mageticfield are(a) direct currents (b) indirect currents(c) eddy currents (d) lfow currents

262. What kind of current will be induced in a simple,rectangular coil rotating in a uniform magneticifeld?(a) An alternating current(b) A direct current(c) Both alternating and direct currents(d) Eddy currents

263. In which of the following cases does electromagneticinduction occur?(a) A current is started in a wire held near a loop

of wire(b) A current is stopped in a wire held near a loop

of wire(b) decreases the atomic number by one(c) increases the mass number by one(d) decreases the mass number by one

276. In a stable nucleus, the neutron/ proton ratio isapproximately(a) one(b) two(c) 1/2(d) none of the above

277. Which of the following are the discoveries ofEinsten?(a) Radioactivity and photoelectric effect(b) Radioactivity and theory of relativity(c) Theory of relativity and photoelectric effect(d) X-rays and photoelectric effect

267. Beta rays are(a) high-speed electrons(b) able to penetrate heavy armour plate(c) electromagnetic waves(d) fast protons

269. Radiocarbon dating technique is used to estimatethe age of(a) rocks (b) buildings(c) soil (d) fossils

270. The process by which energy is generated in thesun is

(a) fission of uranium(b) fusion of hydrogen(c) fusion of helium(d) None of the above

271. For every million atoms of radium in existence today,the number that will be left after 3,200 years will beabout (half-life of radium = 1590 yrs)(a) 125,000 (b) 500,000(c) 250,000 (d) 999,999

272. In any nuclear change, the quantities that remainthe same are(a) only the sum of the mass numbers on both

sides(b) only the total electrical charge on both sides(c) the sum of the mass numbers and the total

electrical charge on both sides(d) none

274. An isotope of ‘parent’ element is produced when itloses(a) one 0 particle(b) One a particle(c) two a and one p particle(d) one a and two particles

275. The emission of 0-particle(a) increases the atomic number by one(b) decreases the atomic number by one(c) increases the mass number by one(d) decreases the mass number by one

276. In a stable nucleus, the neutron/ proton ratio isapproximately(a) one (b) two(c) 1/2 (d) none of the above

279. The nuclides having the same number of neutronsbut different number of protons or mass numberare known as(a) isobars(b) isoelectronic(c) isotopes(d) isotones

280. A very high frequency wave originating in thenucleus of the atom and travelling with the speed oflight is the(a) alpha ray

123


(b) beta ray(c) X-ray(d) gamma rays

281. The change of atoms of one element into atoms ofanother element accomplished either by bombardingthe atoms with radioactive particles or by naturalradioactive particles or by natural radioactivitydecay-process is known as(a) transfusion(b) transformation(c) transmutation(d) none of the above

282. A device used to accelerate charged particles,protons, deuterons and alpha particles and the nucleiof several of the elements of low mass is a(a) nuclear reactor(b) cyclotron(c) Geiger counter(d) betatron

283. Which of the following statements is/are true?A. The products of fusion reaction are generally

not radioactive.B. Energy liberated in the fusion reaction is much

greater than fission.C. Energy liberated in the fission reaction is much

greater than fusion.D. Products and by-products of fission reactions

can be easily disposed off.(a) A and C (b) A and B(c) B and D (d) Only A

284. A minute amount of a radioisotope is called a/an(a) ounce (b) pint(c) tracer (d) dram

285. Radioactive sodium is used(a) in detecting leaks in water mains(b) in treating thyroid diseases(c) for destroying cancerous growth(d) in dating old archaeological finds

286. The smallest amount of fissionable material whichwill support a self-sustaining nuclear reaction is(a) critical volume(b) critical mass(c) critical weight

(d) none of these287. The fact that the paths of cathode rays can be bent

by both electric and magnetic fields shows that they(a) are small magnets(b) carry an electric charge(c) are electromagnetic waves(d) contain atoms

288. A metal plate located near a hot filament will acquirea negative charge because(a) the filament releases electrons(b) the filament gives off protons(c) the plate gives positive atoms(d) the plate loses electrons by thermionic emission

289. ‘IC chips’ for computers are usually made of(a) lead (b) chromium(c) silicon (d) gold

290. The betatron is a device for(a) giving electrons high speeds(b) rectifying AC(c) detecting weak radio signals(d) charging storage batteries

291. X-rays are produced when electrons are(a) suddenly stopped(b) sent through a wire(c) neutralised(d) made to leave a hot wire

292. A vacuum tube that contains a filament, a grid anda plate is called a(a) diode(b) cathode ray tube(c) triode(d) X-ray tube

293. Emission of electrons from a material by incidentradiation is called(a) thermionic emission(b) photoelectric effect(c) Thomson effect(d) Edison effect

294. A series of changes that the computer makes onthe basic facts we give to it ‘is called(a) input(b) output

124


(c) process(d) None of these

295. Which substance can be used as an anaesthetic?(a) Nitrous oxide(b) Carbon dioxide(c) Chlorine(d) Helium

296. Iron pipes are often coated with a layer of zinc toprevent corrosion. This process is termed(a) electroplating(b) galvanisation(c) annealing(d) vulcanisation

297. Chemically dry ice is(a) solid carbon dioxide(b) solid sulphur dioxide(c) ice formed from pure distilled water(d) a mixture of ice and common salt

298. Which of the following statements is not correct?(a) Phosphorus is an- element of the nitrogen family(b) Phosphorus exhibits allotropy(c) Phosphorus does not occur freely in nature(d) Calcium phosphate is used as a fertiliser

299. Of the following different forms of iron carbon ispresent in minimum amounts in(a) pig iron(b) cast iron(c) steel(d) wrought iron

300. Which substance is produced by fermentation?(a) Chlorine(b) Carbon dioxide(c) Nitrogen dioxide(d) Sulphur dioxide

301. ‘Gober gas’ contains mainly(a) carbon dioxide(b) acetylene(c) ethylene(d) methane

302. Rusting of iron is an example of(a) rapid oxidation(b) spontaneous combustion(c) slow oxidation

(d) reduction303. Chemically, vitamin C is

(a) ascorbic acid(b) acetic acid(c) tartaric acid(d) citric acid

304. The substance coated on plastictape-recorder tapes is(a) zinc oxide(b) manganese oxide(c) iron sulphate(d) iron oxide

305. The essential element in all organic compounds is(a) nitrogen (b) sulphur(c) carbon . (d) chlorine

306. The substance present in good amounts in the seaand adminis tered in certain deficiency diseases is(a) sodiun-t chloride(b) iodine(c) fluorine(d) iron

307. Excessive consumption of ethanol causes damageto the(a) lungs (b) liver(c) heart (d) kidneys

308. Proteins give a yellow coloration with(a) oxalic acid(b) nitric acid(c) phosphoric acid(d) hydrochloric acid

309. Acetyl salicyclic acid is commonly used as(a) a pain-killer(b) a sedative(c) a fertiliser(d) tear gas

310. The most abundant source of iron is(a) milk(b) green vegetables(c) beans(d) eggs

311. Starch gives a deep blue coloration with(a) bromine solution(b) chlorine solution(c) iodine solution

125


(d) None of the above312. Which of the following statements is false?

(a) Potatoes are an important source of starch(b) Paper is mainly cellulose(c) Egg protein is insoluble in water(d) Fats are lighter than water and insoluble in it

313. For rural electrification and domestic cooking in India,the most appropriate and economic source wouldbe(a) nuclear energy(b) electricity(c) wind mills(d) biogas

314. Which of the following statements is true?(a) The slag formed in the blast furnace consists

of calcium carbonate(b) Annealed steels are softer than untreated

steels(c) Steel contains a higher percentage of carbon

than pig iron(d) The main ore of iron is siderite

315. Enamelware has a coating of(a) red lead (b) borosilicates(c) tin (d) glass

316. The difference between explosion and combustionis that(a) combustion takes place only in air while an

explosion can occur even without air(b) combustion is accompanied by loss of heat while

an explosion is accompanied by absorption ofheat

(c) combustion is a chemical reaction while anexplosion is caused by physical factors

(d) there is rapid increase of pressure inconfined spaces in case of an explosion,but no such change occurs duringcombustion

317. A solution of washing soda in water is(a) acidic (b) neutral(c) bleaching (d) alkaline

318. Match the following metals and their ores:I. Aluminium A. CinnabarII. Iron B. BauxiteIII. Copper C. MagnetiteIV. Mercury D. Malachite

(a) I-D, II-A, IV-C(b) I-B, II-C, III-D, IV-A(c) I-C, II-A, III-B, IV-D(d) I-A, II-B, IV-D

319. All acids contain the element(a) hydrogen (b) chlorine(c) oxygen (d) sulphur

320. Match the following columns:A. Haber’s process I. SilverB. Ostwald’s process II. AmmoniaC. Solvay process III. Nitric acidD. Parke’s process IV. Sodium carbonate(a) A-I, B-II, D-IV(b) A-IV, B-III, C-II, D-I(c) A-II, C-IV, D-I(d) A-III, B-IV, C-II, D-I

321. Match the following columns:A. Liquid I. Nitrogenousoxygen fertiliserB. Ureaagent II. DehydratingC. Sulphuric acid III. Bleaching agentD. Hydrogen IV. Rocket fuel

peroxide(a) A-III, B-II, C-IV, D-I(b) A-IV, B-I, C-lI, D-III(c) A-I, B-11, C-III, D-IV(d) A-II, C-IV, D-I

322. In the manufacture of bread, the dough rises becauseof(a) the action of heat in the baking process(b) the releasing action of carbon dioxide

formed during the fermentation process(c) the capillary action of water in the dough(d) the evaporation’of water used in kneading the

dough323. A solution of a pH of 11 is

(a) more alkaline than a solution of pH 8(b) less alkaline than a solution of pH 8(c) more acidic than a solution of pH 8(d) neither acidic nor alkaline

324. An acid used to remove ink-spots is(a) oxalic acid (b) butyric acid(c) lactic acid (d) tartaric acid

126


325. Which of the following characterise a virus?1. Mutation2. Replication3. Production of energy4. Can be crystallised(a) 1 and 3 (b) 1, 2 and 3(c) 1 and 2 (d) 1, 2 and 4

326. Regarding bacteriophages, it is true to say that1. it is a virus which infects a bacterium2. it consists of protein and nucleic acid3. it has both DNA and RNA(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2(c) 1 and 3 (d) 2 only

327. Root nodules are formed by the symbioticrelationship between a leguminous plant and(a) bacteria (b) fungus(c) algae (d) retrovirus

328. Green sulphur bacteria and purple sulphur bacteriaobtain their food by(a) chemosynthesis(b) photosynthesis(c) parasitism(d) mutualism with fungi

329. Which of the following would come together in agroup ?1. Bat IL WhaleIII. Silver fish IV. Pigeon(a) I, III and IV(b) I and II(c) I and i4.7(d) II and III

330: The liverfluke could be a serious infection where(a) people eat raw fish(b) people walk barefoot in muddy places(c) there are swamps(d) polished rice is eaten

331. Segmented worms possess1. digestive tract2. circulatory system3. heart4. haemoglobin(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2(c) 2 and3 (d) 1, 2, 3 and 4

332. Which of the following is/are living fossil?1. Pinus 2. Dryoperis3. Ginkgo 4. Cycas(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1, 2 and 3(c) 3 and 4 (d) 2, 3 and 4

333. Chromosome number in a bacteria is(a) 1 (b) 2(c) none (d) variable

334. Where would the bacterium E. coli be readily found?(a) Soil(b) Ponds(c) Human intestine(d) Refuse dumps

335. ‘Sulphur’ shower is associated with(a) volcanic eruptions(b) pollen grains of pinus- forming yellow

clouds in air(c) sudden discharge of sulphur compounds in the

air from mines(d) acid rain

336. Which of the following is incorrectly matched?(a) Ephedrine, a drug for asthmaconifer(b) Dryopteris, a vermifuge-fern(c) Aspergillus, flavouring agent for candies-fungus(d) Irish moss, an ingredient of creams and

shampoos-bryophyte337. Which of the following is wrong?

(a) Bread mould - mucor(b) Thrush disease - yeast(c) Alga-fungal - lichen

symbiosis(d) Mildewing of - Powderymildew

clothing338. Which of the following is capable of flying?

(a) Cassowary (b) Emu(c) Ostrich (d) Albatross

339. The movement of mimosa (touchme-not) is sensitiveto touch. This is an example of(a) chemotropism(b) phototropism(c) turgor changes(d) geotropism

127


340. Which of the following groups has a misplaced item?(a) Sea-anemones, jelly-fish, hydra(b) Crayfish, lobsters, prawns, water-flea(c) Grasshoppers, flies, ants, ticks(d) Snails, oysters, slugs

341. Which of the following is/are not homoiothermic?1. Crocodiles 2. Seals3. Penguins 4. Frogs(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1, 2 and 4(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1 and 4

342. If a bottle cork is chemically analysed it will befound to contain mainly(a) lipids(b) carbohydrates(c) proteins(d) auxins

343. Which of the following are modifications of stems?1. Turmeric 2. Gingers3. Arrowroot 4. Garlic(a) 1, 2 and 4 (b) 1 and 2(c) 1, 3 and 4 (d) 1, 2, 3 and 4

344. If excess fertiliser is applied without water to aplant, the plant(a) will be stunted in growth(b) develops modifications(c) will die due to plasmolysis(d) will remain unaffected

345. A nail is driven into a 6-metre tall tree at a distanceof one metre from the ground. If the tree grows atthe rate of one metre a year at what height fromthe ground will the nail be in five years?(a) 5 metres (b) 6 metres(c) 9 metres (d) 1 metre

346. Which of the following statements regarding nitrogennutrition of plants is wrong?(a) Green plants can fix nitrogen from the

atmosphere into nitrates(b) Only a few prokaryotes can fix atmospheric

nitrogen into nitrates

(c) The problem of nitrogen fertilisers could bereduced if Rhizobium can be grown in the rootsof cereal plants

(d) Legumes do not require nitrogen fertilisers347. Which of the following micro organisms are involved

in nitrogen fixation?1. Blue green algae2. Rhizobium3. Azotobacter(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 and 3(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1, 2 and 3

348. During sleep, a man’s blood pressure(a) increases(b) decreases(c) remains constant(d) lfuctuates

349. Match List I with List II and select the correctanswer by using the codes given below the lists.

List I List IIA. Laws of Heredity 1. de VriesB. Mutation theory 2. MendelC. DNA double helix 3. DarwinD. Natural selection 4. Watson and Crick(a) A-1, B-3, C-4, D-2(b) A-4, B-2, C-1, D-3(c) A-2, B-1, C-4, D-3(d) A-4, B-1, C-3, D-2

350. Which of the following forms an irreversible complexwith haemoglobin of blood?(a) Carbon dioxide(b) Pure nitrogen gas(c) Carbon monoxide(d) A mixture of carbon dioxide

351. Roundworms can be removed from the intestine ofthe man by administering(a) tetracycline hydrochloride.(b) penicillin (intramuscular)(c) piperazine citrate(d) enteroquinol

352. Sugar syrup is used for the preservation of fruitsbecause it(a) kills the microorganisms present in them(b) helps to improve their taste and flavour

128


(c) drains moisture to inhibitg rowth ofmicroorganisms

(d) mixes well with the fruits353. One of the characters that distinguishes a frog from

a toad is(a) tail (b) warts skin(c) tongue (d) external ear

354. Which one of the following combinations ofchromosomes is present in males?(a) XXX (b) XX(c) XYX (d) XY

355. Match List I with List II and select the correctanswer by using the codes given below the lists.

List I List IIA. Vitamin C 1. RicketsB. Vitamin D 2. Blood

coagitationC. Vitamin E 3. ScurvyD. Vitamin K 4. Anti-sterility(a) A-1, B-3, C-4, D-2(b) A-3, B-1, C-2, D-4(c) A-3, B-1, C-4, D-2(d) A-1, B-3, C-2, D-4

356. In peas, tall plant habit is dominant over dwarf. Ifa homozygous for tall is crossed with onehomozygous for dwarf what will be the appearanceof the offspring of a cross 171 with its tall parent?(a) All tall(b) All dwarf(c) 50% tall and 50% dwarf(d) 75% tall and 25% dwarf

357. Which one of the following statements is correct?(a) All enzymes are proteins(b) All proteins are enzymes(c) Some enzymes are proteins(d) Only bacterial enzymes are not proteins

358. The red colour of ripe tomatoes is due to thepresence of(a) chlorophyll (b) carotenoids(c) vitamins (d) hormones

359. Which one of the following organisms is requiredfor the preparation of alcohol?(a) Protozoa (b) Fungi

(c) Bacteria (d) Viruses360. Triple antigen is administered to prevent the attack

of(a) diphtheria, tetanus and tuberculosis(b) tetanus, tuberculosis and malaria(c) diphtheria, tetanus and whooping cough(d) diphtheria, tetanus and malaria

361. The study of the interaction of antigens andantibodies is called(a) argiology(b) haematology(c) serology(d) cryobiology

362. A vein is a vessel that carries blood(a) with high concentration of oxygen(b) with high concentration of carbon dioxide(c) towards the heart(d) away from the heart

363. Pace-maker is also known as(a) A.V. Node(b) Bundle of His(c) S.A. Node(d) Chordae tendinae

365. Which one of the following is a ‘Pin worm’?(a) Ankyclostoma(b) Wucheria(c) Ascaris(d) Oxyuris

366. Which one of the following is known as the silentkiller?(a) Blood pressure(b) Tuberculosis(c) Cholera(d) Malaria

367. Protein in food is digested in living tissues in variousstages. An enzyme which helps in the digestion ofproteins is(a) crease (b) sulfatase(c) trypsin ‘ (d) protease

368. In biology, a change which occurs suddenly andwhich will be inherited later is known as(a) Linkage

129


(b) Crossing-over(c) Hybridisation(d) Mutation

369. Which of the following characteristics of virus bestdenote its unique nature?1. It can attack bacteria2. It can be crystallised3. It can replicate4. It can invade human body(a) 1, 2 and 4 (b) 2 and 3(c) 1, 3 and 4 (d) 3 and 4

370. A deficiency in the secretion of hormone from thethyroid gland leads to(a) sluggishness and growth retardation(b) high blood pressure(c) delayed development of secondary sex

characteristics(d) defective carbohydrate metabolism

371. Prolonged consumption of pigeon pea (arhar or turdal) adulterated with kesari dal (Lathyrus sativus)leads to(a) dropsy(b) glaucoma.(c) liver cirrhosis .(d) paralysis

372. Which of the following diseases is/are likely to spreadin the entire community if a leaky septic tankcontaminates the water supply?1. Cholera2. Typhoid3. Tuberculosis4. Leprosy(a) 1 (b) 1 and 2(c) 1, 2 and 4 (d) 2, 3 and 4

373. A scientist was treating pathogenic bacteria withdifferent chemicals to see which of them wouldstop the activity of their ribosomes. Which one ofthe following processes is the target?(a) DNA synthesis(b) Protein synthesis(c) Digestion of proteins(d) Production of adenosine triphosphate

374. The wavelength of light least effective inphotosynthesis is(a) red (b) green

(c) blue (d) violet375. In which of the following plants would metabolism

be hindered if the leaves are coated with wax ontheir upper surface?(a) Lotus (b) Cactus(c) Hydrilia (d) Banana

376. Chlorosis is(a) excess pigmentation in plants(b) the yellowing of leaves due to low

chlorophyll content(c) absence of chlorophyll(d) inability to use chlorophyll

377. Which of the following is the most appropriatereason for storing green coloured apples at lowtemperatures?(a) Inhibit photosynthesis(b) Reduce respiration(c) Ripe them quickly(d) None of the above

378. When the dark period of a short day plant isinterrupted’ by a brief exposure of light, the plant(a) grows taller(b) will not flower(c) will flower immaturely(d) will be unaffected

379. During seed germination, which of the followingtakes place ?(a) Synthesis of fat(b) Synthesis of starch(c) Liberation of heat(d) Absorption of light

380. Which of the following is/are wrongly matched?1. Thigmotropism - contact2. Nastic - chemicals movement3. Parthenocarpic - gibberellins fruits4. Ripening of - acetylene fruits(a) 1 and 4 (b) 2 and 3(c) 2 and 4 (d) 4 only

381. Malphigian tubules are excretory organs in(a) annelids (b) birds(c) amphibians (d) insects

382. Consider the following statements:1. The spider is an insect.2. The spider has eight legs.

130


3. The spider has no wings.Which of these statements is/are correct?(a) 1 and 5 (b) 2 and 3(c) 2 only (d) 3 only

383. Which of the following is not a characteristic of allarthropods?(a) Exoskeleton(b) Several pairs of jointed legs(c) Segmented bodies(d) Compound eyes

384. Insects need not have(a) three distinct regions in their bodies(b) compound eyes(c) antennae(d) wings

385. The caterpillar is the stage of the butterfly.(a) larval (b) pupal(c) nymph (d) imago

386. Taste-sensitive organs(a) are lacking in insects(b) are located on the lower segments of the

insect’s legs(c) are abundant on the insect’s body(d) are on the antennae of insects

387. Bees are particularly sensitive to(a) red colour(b) green colour(c) ultraviolet light(d) no colour

388. Which of the following statements is/are true aboutthe body temperature of fish?1. It is usually a few degrees above that of its

environment2. It varies with the temperature of its surroundings3. It remains at a constant low temperature(a) 1 and 3 (b) 1 only(c) 3 only (d) 1 and 2

389. There are groups of rings on fish scales. If therings lie close together, it indicates(a) a period when food was scarce(b) a period when food was plentiful a period when

the fish grew abruptly nothing special390. The main function of the fins in a fish is to

(a) propel the fish

(b) control the stability and direction of thefish’s movements

(c) provide buoyancy to the fish’s body(d) do all the above

391. A bird’s body has features adapting it for efficientflying. These include1. large and powerful pectoral muscles2. rigid skeleton3. hollow bones reducing the bird’s weight

arrangement of flight feathers(a) 1, 2 and 4 (b) 2, 3 and 4(c) 2 and 4 (d) 1, 2, 3 and 4

392. Birds have no(a) nerves(b) eyelid(c) sweat glands(d) solid bones

393. Which of the following is/are true of enzymes.1. Proteinaceous in nature2. Specific in nature3. Converted in chemical reactions4. Act on the substrate at any temperature(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1, 2 and 4(c) 1, 2 and 3 (d) 2 and 4

394. Which of the following is/are true of bile?1. It is an enzyme secreted by the liver2. It is a watery green fluid3. It is stored in the gall bladder4. It contains sodium chloride, sodium bicarbonate

and complex organic compounds(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 2, 3 and 4(c) 1, 3 and 4 (d) 3 and 4

395. The colour of bile pigments is largely derived from(a) breakdown of haemoglobin from worn-out

cells(b) bile salts(c) undigested food(d) xanthophylls 396. Serum is(a) another name for plasma(b) plasma without fibrinogen(c) purified blood(d) None of the above

397. After death, the1. arteries are usually empty of blood

131


2. blood in arteries clots3. veins are empty of blood4. veins are full of clots(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 only(c) 1 and 4 (d) 3 only

398. The blood enters the aorta from(a) left ventricle(b) left auricle(c) right ventricle(d) right auricle

399. The sympathetic nerves originate from cells in the(a) brain(b) spinal cord(c) brain and spinal cord(d) muscles

400. Co-enzymes are mostly derived from(a) vitamin A(h) vitamin K(c) haemoglobin(d) vitamin B complex

401. The vitamin which is generally excreted by humansin urine is(a) vitamin A (b) vitamin D(c) vitamin C (d) none

402. A person who lives exclusively on milk, egg andbread is likely to become a victim of(a) rickets(b) scurvy(c) xerophthalmia(d) none of these

403. Which of the following vitamins and deficiencydiseases is wrongly matched?(a) Vitamin D - Osteomalacia(b) Niacin - Pellagra(c) Cobalamin anaemia - Pernicious(d) Riboflavin - Beri-beri

404. In rabbit and horse, the appendix(a) is very small(b) helps in digestion of cellulose(c) has no use(d) stores food

405. Salivary amylase acts most effectively in(a) a neutral solution

(b) an acidic solution(c) an alkaline solution(d) any state

406. The blind spot in the eye1. is where the nerve fibres leave the eye2. has no light sensitive cells3. is part of the fovea4. is well-developed in aged people(a) 1 and 4 (b) 2 and ,4(c). 2 and 3 (d) 1 and 2

407. The adjustment of the pupil diameter in relation tointensity of light is(a) a reflex action(b) the work of rods(c) brought about by the ciliary muscle(d) not understood

408. Which of the following is/are true about stereoscopicvision ?1. It gives, a three-dimensional effect to the object

observed2. It helps one to judge distance3. It is well-developed in birds and animals with

eyes in the sides of their heads(a) 1 only (b) 1 and 2(c) 2 only (d) 1, 2 and 3

409. Which of the following statements is/are true abouttears secreted by the glands under the top eyelids?1. It contains sodium bicarbonate2. It contains sodium chloride3. It contains an enzyme lysozyme which can

destroy bacteria4. It supplies oxygen to the cornea and crystalline

lens(a) 1 and 3 (b) 2, 3 and 4(c) 2 and 4 (d) 1, 2 and 3

410. In blue-eyed people, the(a) iris has no pigment(b) iris has black pigment(c) iris has blue pigment(d) choroid has blue pigment

411. A popping sound is heard in the ear when yawningor swallowing. This is caused by

132


(a) air in the cochlea(b) the opening of the Eustachian tubes(c) air entering the perilymph(d) the moving of the jaws

412. Which of the following is wrongly matched part ofear and its function?(a) Pinna—help to concentrate and direct sound(b) Utriculus-sense of balance(c) Cochlea-sensory nerve endings which respond

to sound vibrations(d) Semicircular canalsequalising the air

pressure inside with atmospheric pressure413. Which of the following is not in the inner ear?

(a) Eustachian tube(b) Cochlea(c) Semicircular canals(d) Sacculus

414. The invok.ntary actions like breathing, heartbeat andbody temperature are controlled by the(a) cerebrum(b) cerebellum(c) medulla oblongata(d) hindbrain

415. A hormone1. passes directly into the bloodstream2. is catalytic in nature3. is manufactured in the endocrine glands4. is always a protein(a) 1 and 2 are true(b) 1, 2 and 3 are true(c) 1 and 3 are true(d) 1, 3 and 4 are true

416. The body’s thermostat is in the(a) pineal(b) hypothalamus(c) thyroid(d) pituitary

417. Which of the following is wrong regarding thedisease and day of rash appearance after incubation?(a) Chicken pox — 1st day(b) Measles - 1st day(c) German measles - 1st day(d) Scarlet fever - 2nd day

418. A woman exposed to rubella in the early weeks ofpregnancy may have a child who will be(a) blind(b) deaf and dumb(c) haemophilic(d) (a) or (b)

419. Which of the following has the shortest incubationperiod ?(a) Chicken pox(b) Mumps(c) Scarlet fever(d) Rubella

420. The period of isolation for chicken pox is(a) not less than 2 weeks(b) at least one week(c) until all the scabs have fallen off(d) ten days from appearance of rash

421. Which of the following has the shortest gestationperiod ?(a) Goat (b) Cow.(c) Buffalo (d) Camel

422. The kidney’s functions do not include(a) excretion of nitrogenous waste(b) osmoregu I a tion(c) re-absorption of bile salts(d) excretion of toxic materials

424. A victim of a road accident is unconscious. Put incorrect order the steps in first aid:1. Treating for cardiac arrest2. Treating for asphyxia3. Treating for shock4. Arrest haemorrhage5. Cleanse and cover wounds(a) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (b) 2, 1, 4, 3, 5(c) 2, 3, 1, 4, 5 (d) 5, 2, 1, 3, 4

425. Which of the following are involved in making up aDNA nucleotide?1. Phosphoric acid2. Deoxyribose sugar3. Nitrogenous base(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2 ,(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1 and 3

133


426. Which one of the following is an egg-layingmammal?(a) Spiny ant-eater(b) Scaly ant-eater(c) Bat(d) Whale

427. At which one of the following stages of mitosis dothe centromeres divide?(a) Beginning of anaphase(b) Beginning of telophase(c) End of metaphase(d) End of prophase

429. The hormone responsible for the secretion of milkin mothers is(a) Adrenalin(b) Lactogenic hormone(c) ACTH(d) Lentinizing hormone

430. Which of the following statements are true in relationto transpiration and water movements in plants?1. Removing all the leaves from a plant will reduce

the flow of water up the stem2. Covering both sides of leaf with a plastic film

will reduce both stomatal and cuticulartranspiration

3. Injecting detergents (which lower the surfacetension of water) into the xylem of treetrunkcould prevent water from reaching the upperbranches

4. Through most of its route in a plant, watermoves by diffusion either along cell walls oracross protoplasts

Select the correct answer using the codes givenbelow:(a) 2, 3 and 4 (b) 1, 3 and 4(c) 1, 2 and 4 (d) 1, 2 and 3

431. If algae suddenly disappear from the water bodiesthen all the other aquatic organisms like fish, prawnsand protozoans will die. This is because of(a) lack of food(b) lack of shelter(c) lack of food and oxygen(d) lack of algal mass increasing the oxygen demand

----------------

WORD ENGLISHDirections: Each of the following questions consists ofa word or phrase which is italicised bold in the sentencegiven. It is followed by certain words or phraSes: Selectthe word or Fiume which is closest to the opposite inmeaning of the italicised bold word or phrase.

7. Many people try to resist reforms in the Society.(a) repel (b) welcome(c) accept (d) fight

8. He was.always prepared to refute the idea .(a) agree (b) subscribe(c) recommend (d) endorse.

21. His appointment was confirmed last month(a) disappointment (b) discharge(c) suspension (d) dismissal

22. The Ganga is as deep in midstream as at the banks.(a) wide (b) narrow(c) hollow (d) shallow

23. Unsettled conditions in the land led to the exodusof hundreds of its citizens.(a) expulsion (b) invasion(c) immigration (d) entry

24. With the advent of Green. Revolution, India nowproduces sufficient quantity of food grains every year(a) short (b) inadequate(c) small (d) more

25. All his neighbours are aware of his acrimoniousnature.(a) informal (b) sympathetic(c) cooperative (d) charitable

26. Such a scene attracts the on lookers.(a) instigates (b) annoys(c) repels (d) revolts

39. He climbed up a stationary wagon.(a) moving (b) speeding(c) shunting (d) standing

40. He is in the habit of taking a casual leave quiteoften often.(a) futile (b) regular(c) formal (d) systematic

134


30. He urges to learn everything.(a) desires (b) denies(c) dislikes (d) recommends

31. He was found guilty(a) true (b) right(b) innocent (d) correct

32. Honesty is the best policy(a) Sobriety (b) Deceit(c) Upristhaaess (d) Rectitude

34. William Wordsworth is celebrated for hi lucid style (a) notorious (b) unpopular (c) unknown (d) renowned35. The king consolidated the empire in to a powerful

nation.(a) divided (b) isolated .(c) fragniented (d) weakened.

36. It used to be said that travel broadens one’s outlook.(a) restricts (b) contracts(c) shrinks (d) narrows

37. He has enrolled himself to anelementary course inComputer.(a) secondary (b) tough(c) advanced (d) simple

41. A serene mind can never be the pioneer of agreat revolution.(a) nervous (b) jocular(c) earnest (d) agitated

42. Of all.the company on s of our joyous ascent ,there were only the two of us left.(a) decent (b) descent(c) descant (d) descendant

44. You must quote examples to support you statement.(a) reveal (b) restrain(c) contradict (d) adduce

45. Only an agile person. Can be a successfulsportsman.(a) brisk (b) emaciated(c) feeble (d) sluggish

46. Such lofty dreams can never come true.(a) puny (b) humble(c) insignificant (d) casual

47. The dccisieri to stop firing cross the border was a.ohilateral one.(a) collective (b) bilateral(c) multilateral (d) multiple

49. You can’t work out this project with nebulous plansin mind.(a) useful (b) practical(c) clear (d) fundamental

50. Be abandoned his family.(a) saved (b) supported(c) pleased (d) encouraged

Directions: In each of the following questions, arelated pair of words or phrases isfollowed by five letters pairs of words or phrases. Selectthe lettered pair thatbest expresses a relationship similarto that expresses in the original pair.

06. PRECIS :: ELABORATIONA. comprehension:: understandingB. revision : correctionC. simplification : decorationD. accuracy : abnormalityE. expurgation : distortion

13. DISINTERESTED :: UNBIASEDA. indulgent : intolerant

B. exhausted : energetic C. languid : lethargic D. unconcerned : involved

E. profligate : flippant01. MUSICIAN : VIRTUOSO

A. poet:: bardB. empress : subject.C. explorer : embarkationD. opportunist.: politicianE. controller : actor

05. BEACON :: LIGHTA. precept : principleB. shroud: cloudC. contradiction : confusionD. command : orderE. dagger : weapon

135


06. PERENNIAL :: EPHEMERALA. volatile: evanescentB. mature : ripeC. diurnal : annualD. permanent temporaryE. majestic : mean

07. DIRECTORY :: ADDRESSA. list : numberB. catalogue : shopC. thesaurus : factD. dictionary : spellingE. encyclopedia : solecism

08. PRIMITIVE :: SOPHISTICATE .A. employee superiorB. socialite : recluseC. tyro : expert

09. TAP :: PUMMELA. tiptoe : stampB. hit : hurtC. lumber : stumbleD. talk : chatE. pump : water

10. TRAGEDY :: DRAMAA. farce : actorB. cartoon : filmC. prosody : poemD. accident : ambulanceE. epigram : anecdote

11. BOAST :: LANGUAGEA. glare : angerB. swagger :.gaitC. stare: sightD. groW : heightE. enrage : anger

15. DESECRATE :: HOLYA. despoil : beautifulB. beautify : uglyC. glamorize : richD. damage : corporealE. improve : dull

16. CONSPICUOUS :: VISIBLEA. sensual : audible

B. irrevocable : changedC. elastic : stretchedD. ignominious : denouncedE. sensitive : felt

17. PILOT :: SHIP A. surveyor : landscape

B. conductor : orchestraC. guard : stockadeD. actor : sceneE. philosopher : inspiration

12. BELITTLE : DISPARAGEA. jeopardize : protectB. efface : inscribeC. assuage : increaseD. deride : ridiculeE. decrease : augment

18. AUTHENTIC :: APOCRYPHALA. immune : dangerousB. conventional : unorthodoxC. pious : religiousD. eccentric : strangeE. reticent : chaotic19. TEMPER :: HARD

A. mitigate : severeB. provoke : angryC. endorse : toughD. infer : certainE. scrutinize : clear

20. STANZA :: POEMA. chapter : novelB. prose : verseC. stave : musicD. song : chorusE. overture : opera

03. PROLIFIC :: UNFRUITFULA. new : oldB. blooming : witheredC fertile : barrenD fresh : staleE fecund : fervid

05. NEEDLE :: PINEA. pin : cloth

136


B. trunk : treeC. flower:: leafD. spine :cactusE. stalk : root

06. DERIDE :: RIDICULEA: jeopardize : protectB. assuage : increaseC. efface : inscribeD. decrease : augmentE belittle : disparage

07: REPREHENSIBLE : : PRAISEWORTHYA. pretentious : harmfulB. virulent : innocuousC. epidemic : widespreadD antiseptic : medicinalE admirable : laudable

09. EXPEDITE : : HASTENA. consaript downB Error: nuke harderC facilitate : make easierD. Satirize : PraiseE stretch : shrink

10. DIFFIDENT::CONFIDENCEA. obscure : peculiarityB. faithful : securityC. submissive.: equanimityD. fervid : vigorE. unstable.: balance

11. ERUDITE :: LEARNINGA. whinisical : capriceB. elegant : diplomacyC. generous : stinginessD. conscientious objectionE. orthodox : opinion

12. GRANDILOQUENT :: SIMPLEA. palatial : sybariticB. salacious : rumoredC. soporific : sporadicD. circumlocutory.: straightforwardE. magnificent : peaceful

13. APOCRYPHAL :: CERTAINTYA. conventional : orthodoxy

B. religious : pietyC. strange : incongruityD. chaotic : orderE. reticent :.restraint

17. MONOLOGUE :: ACTORA. solo : singerB. performance : orchestraC. prologue :bookD. repertoire : choirE. drama : author

18. STOIC :: FORTITUDEA. benefactor: generosityB. heretic : faithC. eccentric : ineptitudeD. miser : charityE. soldier : bravery

19. PEERS :: UNEQUAL A. comrades : unfriendly

B. compatriots : hostileC. collaborators : helpfulD. kinsfolk : relatedE. inferiors : submissive

20. DIPLOMAT :: TACT A. novice : expertise

B. virtuoso : skillC. sybarite : energyD. philanderer : restraintE. dilettante : profundity

Synonym & Antonym

1. remotea. automatic b. distantc. savage d. mean

2. detesta. argue b. hatec. discover d. reveal

3. graciousa. pretty b. cleverc. pleasant d. present

4. predicta. foretell b. decide

137


c. prevent d. discover5. kin

a. exult b. twistc. friend d. relative

6. pensivea. oppressed b. cagedc. thoughtful d. happy

Which of these words is closest in meaning to theword provided?7. banish

a. exile b. hatec. fade d. clean

8. frauda. malcontent b. argumentc. imposter d. clown

9. saccharinea. leave b. sweetc. arid d. quit

10. draga. sleepy b. crushc. proud d. pull

11. joviala. incredulous b. merryc. revolting d. dizzy

12. indifferenta. neutral b. unkindc. precious d. mean

13. simulatea. excite b. imitatec. trick d. apelike

14. charismaa. ghost b. forcec. charm d. courage

15. apportiona. divide b. decidec. cut d. squabble

16. generica. general b. cheapc. fresh d. elderly

17. qualma. distress b. impunity

c. persevere d. scruple18. wary

a. calm b. curvedc. confused d. cautious

19. distorta. wrong b. evilc. deform d. harm

20. sumptuousa. delirious b. gorgeousc. perilous d. luxurious

21. reela. whirl b. ûshc. hit d. mistake

22. inscrutablea. difûcult b. mysteriousc. inûexible d. wary

23. appalla. delirious b. coveredc. dismay d. confuse

24. uprighta. honourable b. horizontalc. humble d. supine

25. reveriea. palimpsest b. phantomc. daydream d. curio

26. loota. destruction b. wastec. spoils d. cavort

27. loquaciousa. talkative b. thirstyc. beautiful d. complicated

28. chimeraa. chimney b. protestc. illusion d. panache

29. temeritya. audacity b. fearfulnessc. shyness d. stupidity

30. educea. demand b. elicitc. ideal d.unlawful

31. naboba. bigwig b. doubter

138


c. frolic d. converse32. pall

a. light b. satiatec. carry d. horror

33. sacrosancta. prayer b. sanctuaryc. pious d. sacred

34. louchea. gauche b. ûnec. brilliant d. indecent

35. stentoriana. violent b. misbegottenc. loud d. stealthy

36. withdrawa. reduce b. needc. advance d. want

37. secreta. friendly b. covertc. hidden d. overt

38. heartfelta. loving b. insincerec. unhealthy d. humorous

39. impartiala. hostile b. biasedc. dislike d. worried

40. luminousa. clear b. dimc. brittle d. clever

41. awea. borrow b. shallowc. low d. contempt

Which of these words is most nearly the opposite ofthe word provided?42. pit

a. group b. peakc. select d. marry

43. rotunda. round b. unimportantc. thin d. dull

44. talenta. ungrateful b. silent

c. show d. inability45. common

a. strange b. uneasyc. quick d. fast

46. brazena. bashful b. boisterousc. noisy d. heated

47. expecta. attend b. regretc. despair d. loathe

48. malodorousa. acrid b. pungentc. fragrant d. delicious

49. expounda. besmirch b. confusec. conûne d. condemn

50. piquea. value b. gullyc. smooth d. soothe

51. abatea. free b. augmentc. provoke d. wane

52. eartha. lack b. povertyc. abundance d. foreign

53. peakeda. tired b. arrogantc. pointy d. ruddy

54. abridgea. shorten b. extendc. stress d. easy

55. kindlea. smother b. detestc. enemy d. discourage

56. meagera. kind b. generousc. thoughtful d. copious

57. philistinea. novice b. intellectualc. pious d. debutante

58. zenitha. worst b. apex

139


c. nadir d. past59. germane

a. irrelevant b. indifferentc. impartial d. improvident

60. irasciblea. determined b. placid c.reasonable d. pliant

61. approbatea. ingratitude b. condemnc. dissatisfaction d. master

62. superciliousa. unimportant b. relevantc. serious d. meek

63. improvidenta. cautious b. fortunatec. proven d. intelligent

64. demura. embrace b. crudec. boisterous d. falter

65. fatuousa. crafty b. frugalc. sensible d. inane

66. quiescenta. lackadaisical b. activec. dull d. prescient

------

1. sartoriala. cheerful b. sincerec. inelegant d. homespun

2. sapienta. hunched b. strongc. simple d. simian

3. matutinala. paternal b. crepuscularc. maritime d. marsupial

4. impecuniousa. wealthy b. cautiousc. hungry d. tardy

5. modest most nearly meansa. attractive b. clever

c. current d. humble6. custom most nearly means

a. dessert b. habitc. ethic d. deliver

7. prolong most nearly meansa. extend b. inquirec. relax d. wait

8. hustle most nearly meansa. dance b. hurryc. busy d. clean

9. solemn most nearly meansa. amusing b. harmfulc. speech d. serious

10. imply most nearly meansa. suggest b. stabc. thick d. destroy

Select the word that most nearly means the wordprovided.11. ramble most nearly means

a. knot b. confusec. wander d. wonder

12. beneûcial most nearly meansa. help b. advantageousc. charity d. wise

13. ûare most nearly meansa. judicial b. temperc. style d. blaze

14. negligent most nearly meansa. pajamas b. morbidc. careless d. dark

15. aloof most nearly meansa. above b. tidyc. clever d. reserved

16. resolve most nearly meansa. turn b. puzzlec. decide d. want

17. congregate most nearly meansa. worship b. gatherc. disturb d. hurry

18. utter most nearly meansa. express b. defer

140


c. borrow d. laugh19. fearless most nearly means

a. powerful b. cowardlyc. brave d. careful

20. negligible most nearly meansa. insigniûcant b. arguablec. careless d. dark

21. placid most nearly meansa. calm b. lazyc. solemn d. devious

22. rake most nearly meansa. thin b. scoundrelc. gentleman d. shovel

23. dupe most nearly meansa. rancher b. trickc. simpleton d. drug

24. stigma most nearly meansa. stain b. trialc. difûculty d. holiness

25. reside most nearly meansa. remain b. homec. dwell d. sediment

26. covetous most nearly meansa. quiet b. sneakyc. lurking d. greedy

27. abide most nearly meansa. endure b. hatec. attendance d. live

28. shrewd most nearly meansa. intractable b. meanc. astute d. intelligent

29. fetter most nearly meansa. rancid b. praisec. hamper d. persist

30. ûagrant most nearly meansa. vibrant b. glaringc. vicious d. pleasant

31. mitigate most nearly meansa. relieve b. blendc. defend d. confuse

32. rail most nearly meansa. scold b. push

c. try d. punish33. meld most nearly means

a. character b. distinctionc. blend d. ûrmness

34. rally most nearly meansa. demonstrate b. musterc. course d. truly

35. abject most nearly meansa. indigent b. desirec. despondent d. extreme

36. bespoke most nearly meansa. gentle b. quietc. tailored d. handsome

37. difûdent most nearly meansa. apathetic b. shyc. arrogant d. quarrelsome

38. proffer most nearly meansa. mendicant b. wastrelc. predict d. tender

39. mordant most nearly meansa. dead b. ruesomec. fetid d. caustic

40. churlish most nearly meansa. childish b. boorishc. tempestuous d. disorderly

41. antediluvian most nearly meansa. antiquated b. parchedc. non-sectarian d. nonsensical

42. picayune most nearly meansa. petty b. spicyc. paltry d. southern

43. smite most nearly meansa. ûee b. speckc. dirt d. strike

44. winnow most nearly meansa. carve b. windc. weed d. carry

45. detain is most opposite toa. release b. silencec. forget d. prosper

46. famous is most opposite toa. boring b. poor

141


c. obscure d. untalented47. colossal is most opposite to

a. easy b. tinyc. graceful d. roof

48. ûuid is most opposite toa. solid b. liquidc. afraid d. decent

49. continue is most opposite toa. curve b. arguec. carry d. pause

50. labor is most opposite toa. amuse b. catc. rest d. strive

Select the word that is most opposite to the wordprovided.51. brawny is most opposite to

a. swift b. weakc. strong d. pale

52. ûckle is most opposite toa. steady b. kindc. please d. ûnagle

53. inept is most opposite toa. clumsy b. inferc. competent d. foolish

54. pivotal is most opposite toa. turning b. wavyc. unimportant d. clear

55 cursed is most opposite toa. swore b. piousc. unfortunate d. lucky

56. candid is most opposite toa. unkind b. bluntc. valid d. dishonest

57. ûaunt is most opposite toa. regard b. sinkc. hide d. propose

58 heal is most opposite toa. sew b. footc. good d. maim

59. pacify is most opposite to

a. excite b. landc. coddle d. unhand

60. sullen is most opposite toa. dirty b. cheerfulc. clean d. risen

61. assure is most opposite toa. alarm b. reassurec. quiet d. unsure

62. fallacious is most opposite toa. perfect b. truthfulc. accidental d. disarming

63. gumption is most opposite toa. seriousness b. apathyc. levity d. despair

64. ecstasy is most opposite toa. hate b. agonyc. languor d. fatigue

65. astute is most opposite toa. distraught b. carefulc. generous d. gullible

66. winsome is most opposite toa. dour b. attractivec. mysterious d. clever

67. droll is most opposite toa. forget b. charmc. sedate d. absurd

68. enigmatic is most opposite toa. healthy b. watchfulc. disastrous d. obvious

69. obtuse is most opposite toa. slim b. acutec. opaque d. thick

70. obsequious is most opposite toa. clear b. cleverc. domineering d. dandiûed

71. doleful is most opposite toa. empty b. richc. witty d. vivacious

72. wanton is most opposite toa. merciful b. repastc. brilliant d. vicious

73. banal is most opposite to

142


a. sincere b. wealthyc. extraordinary d. trustworthy

74. lugubrious is most opposite toa. quick b. cheerfulc. salubrious d. dry

75. perspicacious is most opposite toa. calm b. easyc. dull d. winsome

76. elan is most opposite toa. inelegance b. stupidityc. obscure d. despair

77. recondite is most opposite toa. manifest b. ûexiblec. provident d. sociable

78. gainsay is most opposite toa. regret b. ownc. prudent d. prude

79. efûuvium is most opposite toa. land b. essentialc. fragrance d. solid

80. parsimony is most opposite toa. generosity b. sinfulnessc. verbosity d. tenderness

81. truculent is most opposite toa. faltering b. gentlec. facile d. submissive

82. spurious is most opposite toa. disingenuous b. thoughtlessc. placid d. genuine

83. welter is most opposite toa. order b. freezec. atron d. sustain

84. eclat is most opposite toa. apathy b. dullnessc. silence d. disinterest

85. depletea. decorate b. begc. exhaust d. hurry

86. voluntarya. willing b. charityc. prisoner d. careless

87. refute

a. garbage b. denyc. offer d. difûcult

88. cheata. stingy b. arguec. freckle d. defraud

89. miserablea. cruel b. wrongc. unhappy d. miss

90. vintagea. classic b. alcoholicc. disease d. spoiled

Which of these words most nearly means the wordprovided?91. tart

a. law b. cidc. angry d. desirable

92. cornera. display b. trapc. paint d. hurry

93. zesta. gusto b. cramc. worry d. trial

94. hagglea. tired b. climbc. decrease d. bargain

95. impela. force b. blockc. hinder d. discredit

96. thronga. garment b. bellc. mass d. weight

97. imperiala. bratty b. oppressivec. regal d. beautiful

98. diffusea. difûcult b. scatterc. incomprehensible d. unplug

99. hindera. lose b. loosec. despair d. check

100. latent

143


a. dormant b. recentc. effeminate d. desirable

101. wretcheda. twisted b. forcedc. miserable d. increased

102. irksomea. outrageous b. fearsomec. impoverished d. annoying

103. regulatea. even b. policec. ûow d. position

104. warranta. justify b. burrowc. hide d. integrity

105. protracta. hire b. foldc. delay d. corner

106. laxa. ensure b. slackc. servant d. strive

107. rigora. austerity b. ropec. ûx d. excess

108. discretea. leave b. diminishc. squander d. distinct

109. lissomea. slow b. honestc. supple d. dull

110. misprizea. despise b. devaluec. erroneous d. covet

111. impugna. imply b. fretc. assail d. recalcitrant

112. supervenea. intervene b. overreachc. displace d. follow

113. exigenta. urgent b. treatisec. miser d. expedient

114. fervid

a. delightful b. difûcultc. obstinate d. ardent

115. ersatza. chaotic b. artiûcialc. impromptu d. vague

116. redolenta. ubiquitous b. odorousc. shy d. bellicose

117. turpitudea. lethargy b. honorc. belligerence d. depravity

118. propinquitya. habit b. nearnessc. capacity d. tendency

119. vociferousa. numerous b. bountifulc. strident d. garrulous

120. graciousa. cordial b. rudec. furious d. tactile

121. valora. cowardice b. falsec. drop d. heavy

122. severea. lenient b. cautiousc. join d. one

123. imaginativea. playful b. writtenc. small d. dull

124. knowinga. wasteful b. densec. clumsy d. fast

124. animositya. love b. plantlikec. barren d. tiny

Which word is most dissimilar in meaning to theword provided?125. exact

a. join b. sympatheticc. incorrect d. whole

126. extravagant

144


a. unknown b. homebodyc. punctual d. moderate

127. staminaa. weakness b. clearc. decisive d. calmness

128. rougha. tumble b. sleekc. fast d. distant

129. garnera. unravel b. marc. squander d. tarnish

130. prodigala. thrifty b. secondaryc. distant d. squalid

131. tacita. grand b. dictatedc. illicit d. messy

132. repudiatea. argue b. softenc. slander d. admit

133. pristinea. free b. sulliedc. wide d. thorough

134. concedea. sit b. withstandc. dismiss d. elaborate

135. placatea. appease b. stripc. tremendous d. enrage

136. populara. empty b. uncommonc. famous d. feisty

137. felicitousa. morbid b. boorishc. inopportune d. delightful

138. austerea. lavish b. unfavourablec. light d. devout

139. insipida. cold b. bravec. exciting d. bashful

140. wastrel

a. sober b. spendthriftc. mute d. miser

141. temperatea. Celsius b. inordinatec. lukewarm d. safely

142. nebulousa. cloudy b. dimc. distinct d. desirable

143. adroita. clumsy b. leftc. diplomatic d. unpersuasive

144. mitea. weakness b. tendc. bulk d. drive

145. supernala. nocturnal b. specialc. despicable d. hellish

146. reprobatea. sage b. elevatedc. possess d. dismiss

147. speciousa. genuine b. logicalc. common d. deliberate

148. effetea. conquer b. properc. prosperous d. civilized

149. rabblea. order b. clearc. open d. union

150. proteana. unformed b. unchangingc. elaborate d. selective

151. vertiginousa. horizontal b. litigiousc. constant d. lowly

152. parvenua. wallûower b. highwayc. melody d. plan

153. lapidariana. square b. secularc. pasture d. inelegant

154. delirious is most similar to

145


a. manic b. calmc. tasty d. suspicious

155. inûrm is most similar toa. hospital b. weakc. short d. fortitude

156. cautious is most dissimilar toa. reasonable b. carefulc. illogical d. reckless

157. lure is most similar toa. tickle b. decoyc. resist d. suspect

158. perilous is most dissimilar toa. disciplined b. similarc. safe d. honest

159. isolation is most similar toa. fear b. plentitudec. olitude d. disease

Read each question carefully and select the wordthat is most similar or dissimilar in meaning to theword provided.160. lull is most similar to

a. pause b. noisec. boring d. mark

161. outût is most similar toa. indoors b. strongc. special d. furnish

162. punctual is most dissimilar toa. close b. tardyc. sloppy d. precious

163. delude is most dissimilar toa. drought b. cleverc. enlighten d. enrage

164. omit is most similar toa. recluse b. neglectc. mistake d. destroy

165. resilient is most dissimilar toa. stubborn b. carelessc. substantial d. ûimsy

166. mutiny is most similar toa. rebellion b. currencyc. sailor d. hassle

167. naive is most similar toa. rural b. secularc. unsophisticated d. sultry

168. entice is most dissimilar toa. piece b. repulsec. attract d. repeat

169. solemnity is most similar toa. lightheartedness b. gravityc. diligence d. sleepiness

170. stingy is most dissimilar toa. wasteful b. democraticc. spiteful d. liberal

171. malign is most similar toa. evil b. maliciousc. slander d. grandiose

172. impudent is most similar toa. cautious b. haphazardc. gleeful d. insolent

173. vacillate is most dissimilar toa. decide b. teeterc. dilate d. please

174. kinetic is most dissimilar toa. cold b. staticc. lewd d. foolish

175. lambaste is most similar toa. marinade b. commotionc. censure d. tickle

176. kowtow is most dissimilar toa. snub b. pullc. fawn d. forage

177. rudimentary is most similar toa. crass b. graciousc. deliberate d. primitive

178. pitched is most similar toa. undone b. retractedc. heated d. lovely

179. tepid is most dissimilar toa. dispassionate b. scaldingc. crisp d. clever

180. largesse is most similar toa. greatness b. generosityc. miniscule d. clumsiness

146


181. insidious is most dissimilar toa. repellent b. purec. charming d. delicious

182. decorum is most similar toa. etiquette b. meritc. parliament d. slipshod

183. succor is most dissimilar toa. genius b. abetc. injure d. deciduous

-------------------------------

184. Principle of surveying followed to preventaccumulation of errors is(a) to work from whole to a part(b) to work from part to whole(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

185. The curvature of the earth’s surface is taken intoaccount only if the extent of survey is more than(a) 60 sq km (b) 160 sq km(c) 260 sq km (d) 500 sq km

186. Geodetic survey is different from plane surveyingbecause of(a) very large area is covered.(b) the curvature of the earth is considered.(c) undulations of the topography.(d) large difference of elevations

187. A scale representing either three units or only oneunit and its fractions upto second place of decimalpoint is(a) Diagonal scale (b) Comparative scale(c) Vernier scale (d) Shrunk scale

188. Difference in the length of an arc and its subtendedchord on earth’s surface for a distance of 18.5 kmis(a) 10 mm (b) 15 mm(c) 22 mm (d) 100 mm

189. Engineering survey is carried out to(a) determine quantities and for collection of

data for resorvoirs

(b) locate boundaries of fields and houses(c) lay out plots and water supply system and

sewers(d) all of these

190. If smallest division of a vernier is longer than thesmallest division of its primary scale, then vernier iscalled(a) direct vernier(b) double vernier(c) simple vernier(d) retrograde vernier.

191. Scale used to measure and to set out the angles is(a) Diagonal scale (b) Comparative scale(c) Vernier scale (d) Scale of chords

192. The smallest length that can be drawn on a map is(a) 0.2 mm (b) 0.6 mm(c) 1 cm (d) 1.2 cm

193. For a survey to be classed as plane, differencebetween sum of angles of spherical triangle andthat of plane triangle is only one second at theearth’s mean surface for an area of(a) 160 km2 (b) 195.5 km2

(c) 260 km2 (d) 282.5 km2

194. In chain survey(a) chainage is the distance of the object along the

chain-line from the zero end of the chain.(b) oblique offsets are used to locate building

corners(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

195. Chain surveying is most suitable when(a) ground is fairly level and open with simple details.(b) area is small in extent.(c) plans are required on a large scale.(d) all of these

196. A well conditioned triangle has angles not lessthan and more than respectively(a) 10° and 90° (b) 20° and 120°(c) 90° and 120° (d) none of these

197. Which of the following statements is/are correct?(a) It is easy to chain distances down the

slopes.(b) Incorrect holding of chain at arrow is

147


compensating error.(c) French cross-staff is used to set out 45° offset

with a chain.(d) All of these

198. A discrepancy is the difference between(a) true value and error(b) measured value and actual value(c) two measured values of the same quantity(d) none of these

199. A chain 33' feet long and consisting of 16 linkseach 21/16 feet long is(a) Engineer’s chain (b) Gunter’s chain(c) Bigha chain (d)Revenue chain

200. Every 20 m chain should be accurate to within(a) ± 2 mm (b) ± 5 mm(c) ±8 mm (d) none of these

201. Off sets are(a) chain lines out of alignment(b) small measurements from chain line(c) measurements taken in chain surveying(d) none of these

202. Method used for chaining on sloping ground is(a) Stepping method(b) Hypotenusal allowance method(c) Clinometor method(d) Both (a) and (b)

203. Compensating errors in chaining are(a) proportional to the length of the line(b) proportional to the square root of the

length of the line(c) inversely proportional to the square root of the

length of the line.(d) inversely proportional to the length of the line.

204. Error due to bad ranging is(a) compensating(b) cumulative positive(c) cumulative negative(d) both (b) and (c)

205. Negative errors are caused in chain, when its lengthis(a) more than the standard length(b) less than the standard length

(c) equal to the standard length(d) uncertain

206. An error under the same conditions always of thesame size and sign, is called(a) Systematic error (b) Cumulative error(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

207. Errors which remain after mistakes and systematicerros have been eliminated are called(a) Accidental errors (b) Latent errors(c) Imaginary errors (d) All of these

208. Theory of probability is applied to(a) Cumulative errors (b) Compensative errors(c) Accidental errors (d) None of these

209. Most probable value of an observed quantityavailable from a given set of observation is the onefor which the sum of the square of errors is aminimum. This statement is called(a) Principal of least square(b) Law of errors(c) Principle of square errors(d) None of the above

210. Maximum allowable limit upto that a measurementmay vary from the true value is called(a) Permissible error (b) residual error(c) Expected error (d) Safe error.

211. A 30m chain was found to be 20 cm too long afterchaining 1500 m. The correct length of the totaldistance chained will be(a) 1495 m (b) 1500 m(c) 1505 m (d) none of these

212. If n observations are taken, then accidental errorsare proportional to(a) n (b) n2(c) “n (d) 1 / n

213. The chain length which is not the standard metricchain length is(a) 10 m (b) 20 m(c) 25 m (d) 30 m

214. If a chain is found too short on testing, it can beadjusted by(a) straightening the links(b) inserting additional circular rings

148


(c) flattening the circular rings(d) all of these

215. Number of links in a 30 m metric chain is(a) 100 (b) 150(c) 180 (d) 200

216. Ranging is the process of(a) marking some intermediate points in a

straight line, joining the two end points inthe field

(b) fixing ranging rods on the extremities of thearea.

(c) taking offsets from a chain line(d) none of these

217. Important points selected at the ends of the chainlines to command the boundaries of the survey arecalled(a) Main stations(b) Subsidiary stations(c) Tie stations(d) None of the above.

218. The longest chain line passing through the centre ofthe area is called(a) Base line (b) Tie line(c) Check line (d) All of the above.

219. The tie line is run throught the survey to(a) take off sets for detailed surveying(b) take details of nearby objects(c) check accuracy of work(d) none of these

220. Permissible limits of error in chaining formeasurement on rough or hilly ground is(a) 1 : 2000 (b) 1 : 1000(c) 1 : 500 (d) 1 : 250

221. The position of point can be fixed more accuratelyby(a) perpendicular offset(b) optical square(c) prism square(d) oblique offsets.

222. Positive error is caused if(a) length of chain is shorter than the standard.(b) slope and sag corrections is not applied.

(c) measurements are made along the incorrectlyaligned line.

(d) all of these223. During chaining along a straight line, the leader of

the survey party has three arrows and while thefollower has five arrows, distance of the followerfrom the starting point will be(a) Three chains (b) Four chins(c) Five chains (d) None of these

224. The base line is measured with(a) metallic tape (b) steel tape(c) Invar tape (d) chain.

225. Invar tapes are made of an alloy of(a) nickel and steel(b) copper and steel(c) tin and steel -(d) aluminimum and steel

226. Metallic tapes are made of(a) steel (b) invar(c) cloth and wires (d) nickel.

227. Chain surveying is used for(a) small areas in open ground(b) small areas with crowded details(c) small areas with simple details(d) large areas with simple details

228. For accurate work, in comparison to chain, the steelband is used because it is(a) light in weight(b) easy to handle(c) practically inextensible.(d) all of these

229. Normal tension is that pull which(a) neutralizes the effect due to pull and sag.(b) makes sag correction zero.(c) makes pull correction zero.(d) none of these

230. An offset more than 15m in length is called(a) long offset (b) short offset(c) oblique offset (d) right—angled offset

231. Chainage is the distance measured(a) along a chain line(b) perpendicular to a chain line

149


(c) perpendicular to a tie line(d) none of these

232. Limiting length of offset depends upon(a) accuracy desired(b) scale of plotting(c) nature of the ground(d) all of these

233. Maximum angular error in laying the direction is 3°,if this maximum displacement of the point on paperis same for both sources of error, then accuracy inthe offset measurement will be(a) 1 in 18 (b) 1 in 19(c) 1 in 25 (d) 1 in 30

234. The angle that can be set by French cross staff is(a) 45° (b) 90°(c) 45° or 90° (d) none of these

235. Method of offset laying involving minimummeasurement on the ground is(a) perpendicular offset method(b) oblique offset method(c) tie offset method(d) none of these

236. The sag correction is always(a) potitive (b) negative(c) zero (d) none of these

237. Open cross staff is used for setting out(a) long offsets (b) short offsets(c) oblique offsets (d) none of these

238. The angle of inter-section of horizon mirror andindex mirror of an optical square is that(a) 30° (b) 45°(c) 105° (d) 120°

239. The main difference between optical square andprism square is(a) No adjustment is required in a prism square

as the angle between the reflecting mirrorsis fixed

(b) Optical square is more accurate(c) Principal of working is different(d) All of these

240. A river is an obstacle to(a) chaining but not ranging

(b) ranging but not chaining(c) both chaining and ranging(d) none of these

241. A building is an obstacel to(a) chaining but not ranging(b) ranging but not chaining(c) both chaining and raning(d) none of these

242. A field is measured with a 1.0 per cent too longchain is found to be 10000 acres. The correctedarea of the field will be(a) 90891 acres (b) 10201 acres(c) 10401 acres (d) none of these

243. In chain survey execution, this first step taken is(a) Reference sketches (b) Marking stations(c) Running survey line (d) Reconnaissance

244. Angles of 45° with chain line may be set out with(a) optical square (b) prismatic square(c) open cross staff (d) French cross staff

245. The optical square is based on the principal of optical(a) reflection (b) refraction(c) double reflection (d) double refraction.

246. In compass surveying(a) direction and lengths of survey line is measured

by compass(b) direction is measured by compass(c) length is measured by the chain or tape(d) both (b) and (c)

247. In a closed traverse(a) difference between fore bearing & back bearing

should be 90°(b) sum of included angles should be (2N —4)

right angle, where N is the number of sides(c) sum of inclined should be (2N — 1), where N

is number of sides(d) none of these

248. Graduations in a prismatic compass are(a) inverted and run clockewise having 0° at

north(b) inverted and run clockwise having 0° at south(c) erect(d) none of these

150


249. In a prismatic compass(a) magnetic needle moves with the box(b) magnetic needle and graduated circle do

not move with the box(c) line of sight does not move with box(d) graduated circle is fixed to the box and the

magnetic needle always remains in the N — Sdirection

250. True meridians(a) are parallel to each other(b) converge at a point called pole(c) converge near equator(d) none of these

251. In whole circle system, the bearings are measured(a) clockwise from the north point of the

reference meridian towards the line of sightround the circle

(b) anti-clockwise from the north point(c) with the notations of cardinal points N, E,

S & W(d) none of these

252. A negative declination shows the magnetic meridianto the(a) eastern side of the true meridian(b) western side of the true meridian(c) southern side of the true meridian(d) none of these

253. If magnetic bearing of sun at noon at a place insouthern hemisphere is 150°, then magneticdeclination at that place is(a) 30°E (b) 30°W(c) 20°E (d) 20°W

254. Isogonic lines are lines passing through(a) points having same declination at a given

point(b) point of zero declination(c) point having same dip(d) point having zero dip.

255. In survey works declinations varies from time totime and place to place. The most important variationis(a) Secular variation (b) Annual variation(c) Duirnal variation (d) Irregular variation

256. Angle of dip at pole is(a) 0° (b) 90°(c) 45° (d) 30°

257. Secular variation is important factor because(a) variatioin is due to sasonal changes(b) magnitude of variation is of high order and

the needle after coming to sandstill maymove in opposite direction.

(c) needle will stop(d) variation is less.

258. Duirnal variation depends upon(a) locality (b) time(c) seasons (d) all of these

259. True bearing of a line is qual to(a) magnetic bearing + magnetic declination(b) magnetic bearing — magnetic declination(c) magnetic declination — magnetic bearing(d) none of these where declination is to the east

230. If magnetic declination at a place is 7°20’w, andbearing given by the compass is 45°40’E, then truebearing of the place is(a) N 53°0’E (b) S 53°0’E(c) N 53°0’W (d) S 53°0’W

231. The value of magnetic declination if magnetic bearingof sun at noon is 350° is(a) 10°E (b) 10°W(c) 80°E (d) 80°W

232. While traversing anticlockwise a closed traverse ofn sides, theoretical sum of included angles shouldbe(a) (2n — 4) x 90 (b) (2n + 4) x 90(c) (2n ± 4) x 90 (d) 360°

233. With regards to traversing(a) South co-ordinate is an example of negative

co-ordinate.(b) In an open traverse the angular error is

determined by astronomical observations.(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

234. In Bowditch rule of traverse adjustment it, isassumed that errors in the linear measurements are(a) proportional to

151


(b) proportional to L(c) inversely proportional to VT,(d) inversely proportional to L

235. Quadrantal system confines the user to measurebearing from(a) north point clockwise(b) north point or south point whichever is

nearer(c) north point anti-clockwise(d) none of these

236. A bearing noted 45° NE represents(a) quadrantal system(b) whole circle system(c) reduced bearing system(d) none of these

237. Whole circle bearing 338°42' converted into quadrantform is given as(a) N 21°18’W (b) S 21°18’E(c) W 21°18’N (d) none of these

238. If quantrantal bearing of a line is 35°W, then wholecircle bearing is(a) 325° (b) 205°(c) 215° (d) 315°

239. Prismatic compass and surveyor’s compassrespectively give(a) whole circle bearing of a line and quadrantal

bearing of a line.(b) both quadrantal bearing of a line(c) both whole circle bearing of a line(d) quandrantal and whole circle bearing of a line

240. For a line AB, fore bearing(a) and back bearing of line AB differ by 180°(b) of AB and back bearing of line BA differ by

180°(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

241. Local attraction in a compass surveying may bedue to(a) faulty adjustment in compass(b) due to presence of magnetic materials(c) loss of magnetism in the needle(d) friction of the needle at the point.

241. The closing error in a traverse is adjusted by(a) elimination error and modifying the shape(b) error is distributed to all stations

proportionately by shifting the stationparallel to the direction of closing error

(c) error is distributed to all stations proportionatelyby shifting the stations perpndicular to thedirection of closing error.

(d) none of these242. Inclination of the needle to the horizontal towards

the pole is called(a) Dip (b) Declination(c) Azimuth (d) Bearing

243. Dip of the needle(a) is constant(b) varies from place to place and is zero at

the equator and maximum at the poles(c) is zero at the equator and poles(d) none of these

244. The angle which the true meridian makes withmagnetic meridian is called(a) magnetic dclination or declination(b) true declination(c) dip(d) azimuth

245. Magnetic declination(a) remains same at different places(b) varies from place to place(c) does not vary with temperature(d) none of these

246. If magnetic bearing of a line is 65° and the truebearing 45°, then magnetic declination is(a) 10°W (b) 20°W(c) 20°E (d) none of these

247. Foremost work to be executed while traversing witha compass is(a) marking and referencing of stations(b) running survey lines(c) picking up of details(d) reconnaissance(e) booking of fields notes.

248. If needle of the compass is sluggish, then error willbe

152


(a) Instrumental error (b) Personal error(c) Natural error (d) None of these

249. Difference between most probable value of aquantity and observed value is(a) conditional error (b) true error(c) resisdual error (d) safe error

250. For a station to be free of local attraction(a) fore and back bearings of line should be

measured accurately(b) fore and back bearings of line should differ

by exactly 180°(c) fore and back bearing of the line should be

exactly same but with opposite signs(d) None of these

251. Survey stations set up during traversing withcompass should be such that(a) they are visible from each other(b) chaining between them is easy(c) the lines joining them are near the objects

to be located(d) they are as long as possible

252. Maximum prmissible diffemce allowed while takingdown the fore bearing and back bearing of a line is(a) 15' (b) 15"(c) no such limit (d) 1°

253. Which one of the following may not be classified aspersonal error?(a) Inaccurate centring(b) Inaccurate levelling(c) Plane of sight not being vertical(d) Carelessness in reading and recording.

253. If needle is truly magnetic and is not sluggish,(a) it will be always oscillating and never stop(b) when it stops it will be exactly on magnetic

meridian(c) it will be always free from local attraction(d) all of these

254. If the sights are vertical, then(a) eye vane and object vane will be in same live(b) eye vane, object vane and string will be

parallel and in same line(c) there will be no local attraction

(d) none of these255. The nedle is adjested for

(a) sensitivity(b) balancing.(c) straightening vertically and horizontally(d) all of these

256. Temporary adjustment of a prismatic compass are(a) centring(b) adjustment of levels(c) adjustment of needle(d) adjustment of van.

257. True meridians are generally preferred over magnetimeridians because(a) they converge to a point(b) these change due to chang in time(c) these remain constant(d) none of these

258. A 10cm theodolite means that(a) length of its telescope is 10cm(b) height of the telescope is 10cm(c) diameter of the graduated circle of its lower

plate is 10cm(d) diameter of the graduated cirde of its vertical

cicle is 10cm259. The process of establishing intermediate points,

betwen two end points which are not intervisible,with the help of a theodolite is known as called(a) ranging (b) interpolation(c) lining-in (d) balancing-in

260. Spire test is used for adjustment of(a) line of sight(b) horizontal axis(c) vertical axis(d) adjustment of altitude bubble

261. In theodolites(a) telescop is said to be normal when its vertical

circle is to the left of the observer and bubbleis down.

(b) levelling is quicker if levelling head is providedwith there foot screws than that with four footscrews.

153


(c) error due to line of collimation not beingperpendicular to vertical axis of a theodolite iseliminated by changing face.

(d) repetition method of angle measurementeliminates the error due to displacementof station signals.

262. A level line is a(a) line parallel to the mean spheroidal surface of

earth(b) line normal to the plumb line at all points(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

263. Any arbitrarily assumed level line from whichvertical distances are measured is called(a) level line (b) vertical line(c) horizontal line (d) datum line.

264. Difference between a level line and a horizontalline is that(a) level line is normal to plumb line while horizontal

line is not necessarily.(b) level line is curved but horizontal line is a straight

line(c) both lines are same lines(d) none of these

265. A relatively fixed point of known elevation abovedatum is called(a) datum point (b) bench mark(c) reduced level (d) reference point

266. A staff reading taken on a bench mark or changepoint is called(a) Back sight (b) Fore sight(c) Intermediate sight (d) None of these

267. The observation is taken on a turning point is(a) fore sight(b) back sight(c) Both fore sight and back sight(d) none of these

268. The bench mark established by the survey of Indiadepartment with very high precision with referenceto mean sea level at Karanchi as the datum arecalled(a) G.T.S. Bench Marks.(b) Permanent Bench Marks.

(c) Arbitary Bench Marks.(d) Temporary Bench Marks.

269. An operation for determining relative elevations ofdifferent points on the surface of the earth is called(a) levelling(b) simple levelling(c) Differential levelling(d) longitudinal levelling

270. In a dumpy level, objective and eyepiece lenses aremade of two or more small lenses to obtain(a) distinct image(b) shorter focal length(c) reading even in less light(d) all of these

271. A diagonal eye piece is provided with a(a) reflecting prism(b) mirror fitted at 45° with the axis of telescope(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

272. Cross hairs in surveying telescope are fitted(a) at the centre of telescope(b) in the objective glass(c) in front of eyepiece(d) anywhere between objective and eye piece.

273. Image of the objctive formed should lie(a) at the eyepiece(b) in the plane of cross hairs(c) at the centre of the eyepiece.(d) at the optical centre of the eyepiece.

274. The absence of sphrical aberration in a telescope iscalled(a) Achromation (b) Chr omit ation(c) Aplanation (d) Ablation

275. Magnification of a telescope depends upon(a) focal length of eyepiece(b) focal length of objctive lens(c) ratio of (b) and (a)(d) ratio of inverse of (b) and (a)

276. In an interfocussing type of telescope, the lnsprovided is(a) convex lens(b) concave lens

154


(c) plano concave lens(d) convex concave lens.

277. An interfocussing type of telescope is focussed bythe movement of(a) convex lens (b) concave lens(c) plano-concvex lens (d) objective glass.

278. The sensitivity of a bubble tube can be increasedby(a) decreasing the radius of curvature of tube(b) decreasing the length of bubble(c) increasing the diameter of the tube(d) increasing the viscosity of liquid.

279. In a constant level tube, size of the bubble remainsconstant because upper wall of tube has(a) relativley small radius(b) relatively large radius(c) flat(d) none of these

280. If temperature increases, sensitivity of a bubble tube(a) increases (b) decreases(c) remains constant (d) none of these

281. Sensitivity of a level tube is expressed by(a) length of level tube(b) radius of level tube(c) length of bubble of level tube(d) all of these

282. Dummpy level is used when(a) number of observations to be taken are large

from one level position(b) number of observations to be taken are small

from one level position(c) fly levlling is to be done(d) none of these

283. Automatic level has advantage of(a) high precision and speed(b) freedom from errors and external influence(c) comfortable and has large range of application(d) all of these

284. In levelling height of instrument is(a) height of telescope above the ground at the

time of observation(b) height of levelling staff

(c) elevation of plant of collimation(d) sum of the reduced level of B.M. and foresight.

285. With regards to curvature and refraction in levelling(a) combined correction is 0.0673D2, where D isthe distance of staff from the instrument in km.(b) nature of combined correction is negative.(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

286. Sensitivity of the bubble tube increases with(a) increase in length of the vapour bubble(b) increase in diameter of bubble tube(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

287. The height of instrument method is(a) less tedious(b) more rapid(c) includes less calculations(d) all of these

288. Height of instrument method of levelling as comparedto rise and fall method is(a) more accurate(b) less accurate.(c) quicker and less tedious(d) none of these

289. The rise and fall method of levelling provides acomplete check on(a) back sight(b) fore sight(c) intermediate sight(d) all of these

290. The rise and fall method(a) provides a check on the intermediate(b) is preferable for differential and check levelling.(c) suitable for important works.(d) all of these

291. If observed reading of a level staff is 3.83m, and atthe point sighted the staff is 0.15m off the verticalthrough the bottom, then correct reading will be(a) 3.826m (b) 3.830m(c) 3.834m (d) 3.838m

292. The levelling of instrument is done such that(a) line of sight is truly horizontal

155


(b) optical axis is truly horizontal(c) vertical axis is truly vertical(d) line of collimation is truly horizontal.

293. Instrtumental error in levelling is error due to(a) imperfect adjustment(b) sluggish bubble(c) movement of objective slide(d) all of these

294. Natural error in levelling is caused due to(a) wind vibration(b) atmospheric refraction(c) temperature variation(d) all of these

295. Permanent adjustments are carried out to(a) set up of the level(b) establish a fixed relatinoship between its

fundamental axes(c) focus the eyepiece(d) focus the object glass.

296. The line of collimation should be parallel to(a) vertical axis (b) bubble axis(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

297. The refraction correction for a distance of 1km is(a) 0.0112m (b) 0.0673m(c) 1.12m (d) 6.73m

298. The type(s) of levelling is (are)(a) sectioning (b) hypsometry(c) cross-sectioning (d) all of these

299. Which is an odd instrument with regards to levelling ?(a) Altimeter (b) Clinometer(c) Abney hand level (d) Planimeter

300. For Y level, Cooke’s and Cushing levels, the line ofcollimation should coincide with(a) bubble tube axis (b) vertical axis(c) axis of telescope (d) none of these

301. For a dumpy level in perfect adjustment, thehorizontal cross hair should be in a plane(a) perpendicular to the vertical axis(b) parallel to the vertical axis(c) parallel to the axis of bubble tube(d) none of these

302. Two peg method is used to check the parallelismbetween(a) line of collimation and axis of bubble tube(b) line of collimation and axis of telescope(c) axis of the bubble tube and vertical axis(d) all of these

303. When it is not possible to set up the level, midwaybetween two points, then difference in elevationbetween them is measured by(a) Fly levelling(b) Precise levelling(c) Differential levelling(d) Reciprocal levelling

304. The method of levelling used to carry out thereconnaissance of area is(a) Check levelling (b) Fly levelling(c) Profile levelling (d) Simple levelling

305. The accuracy required in precise levelling is of theorder of(a) Ail< mm(b) 2A/K mm(c) 5’VK mm(d) none of these where K is distance levelled in

km306. The levels to which the earthwork will have to be

carried out is called(a) finish surface levels(b) original G.L.(c) formation level(d) depth of cutting.

307. If formation level is less than the ground level, thendifference between them at any pont will give(a) height of embankement(b) depth of cutting(c) proposed gradient(d) none of these

308. Reciprocal levelling eliminates(a) error due to curvature and refraction(b) collimation error(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

156


309. If distance betweeen two points A and B is 1km,thencombined correction for curvature and refractionwill be(a) 0.673m (b) 0.0673m(c) 1.0673m (d) 1.673m

310. Sensitivity of the bubble tube expressed is terms ofangular value of one division of the bubble is givenby(a) S/D radians (b) D/S(c) S/D seconds (d) none of thesewhere, S = difference between the two staff readingsD = distance between the staff and the instrument

311. Personal error in levelling occur due to(a) careless levelling of the instrument(b) bubble not centred(c) staff not held vertical(d) all of these

312. Levelling across a river is done by(a) fly levelling(b) reciprocal levelling(c) trigonometrical levelling(d) cross levelling.

313. The correction for refration in given by(a) 0.0785 d2 m (b) 0.0112 d2 m(c) 0.0673 d2 m (d) none of these

314. Bench marks are fixed by(a) trigonometric levelling(b) barometric levelling(c) spririt levelling(d) profile levelling.

315. The last reading of leavelling is always a(a) back sight (b) fore sight(c) intermediate sight (d) any of these

316. In levelling, a station is a point where(a) staff is placed(b) instrument is set up(c) bench mark is marked(d) none of these

317. Tilting levels are used for(a) fly levelling (b) precise levelling(c) profile levelling (d) none of these

318. The permissible closing error expressed by ± 641(in(a) precise levelling (b) accurate levelling(c) ordinary (d) rough levelling

319. In levelling across a hill, level should be set up on(a) side of the hill (b) its top(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

320. In diaphragm of techeometers(a) two horizontal stadia wires are provided.(b) graduations on stadia rod are spaced 0.01m

apart.(c) stadia rod may be kept vertical or normal to

the line of sight.(d) all of these

321. In a gradienter when screw is moved by onerevolution, the line of sight moves by(a) 1cm (b) 1mm(c) sin-1 0.01 (d) tan-10.01

322. Glass wedge is used in(a) Double image tacheometer(b) Szepessy tacheometer(c) Jeffcott tacheometer(d) Auto reduction tacheometer

323. In Beaman stadia arc, if V-scale readnig is 50, itindicates(a) depression(b) elevation(c) horizontal position of telescope(d) horizontal distance to be 50m

324. A gradienter is used to(a) determine horizontal distance(b) determine vertical distance(c) set out gradients(d) all of these

325. In Fergusson’s perecentage system of tacheometrythe circle is divided into(a) 4 parts (b) 8 parts(c) 10 parts (d) 100 parts

326. An imaginary line connecting points of equalelevation on the ground surface is called(a) contour line(b) contour interval

157


(c) horizontal equivalent(d) contour gradient.

327. The vertical distance between any two consecutivecontours is called(a) conmtour line (b) contour interval(c) contour gradient (d) horizontal equivalent

328. The contour interval depends upon(a) nature of the ground(b) scale of the map(c) purpose and extent of survey(d) all of these

329. Contour interval is proportional(a) directly to the scale of map(b) inversely to the scale of map(c) directly to the flatness of the ground(d) none of these

330. An imaginary line lying throughout the surface ofgound having a constant inclination to the horizontalis called(a) contour line (b) contour gradient(c) contour interval (d) horizontal equivalent.

331. A series of closed contour lines on the map withlower to higher values inside them represents a(a) hill (b) ridge(c) depression (d) steep slope.

332. The contour lines merge or cross one another onthe map in case of(a) vertical surfaces(b) overhang ground surfaces(c) cave(d) all of these

333. A series of closely spaced contour lines representsa(a) steep slope (b) uniform slope(c) horizontal surface (d) gentle slope

334. Contour lines are perpendicular to the(a) ridge line (b) valley line(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

335. Tacheometric method is more suitable method forpreparing the contour map of a(a) valley (b) hill(c) ridge (d) plain surface.

336. Direct method of contouring is(a) very slow method(b) most accurate method(c) suitable for contouring small areas(d) all of these

337. In direct method of coutouring, the process oflocating points lying on a coutour is called(a) horizontal control (b) vertical control(c) ranging (d) none of these

338. The spacing of cross-sections in indirect method ofcontouring depends upon(a) character of the ground(b) scale of map(c) contour intervals(d) all of these

339. Contours are used to determine(a) intervisibility of points on a contour map(b) area of the drainage basin and capacity of the

reservoir(c) quantities of earth work(d) all of these

340. Closed contours with higher value inside representsa(a) depression (b) hill(c) plain surface (d) none of these

341. A series of straight parallel and widely spacedcontours on a map represents a(a) valley(b) ridge(c) curved surface(d) inclined plane surface

342. Instrument used for measuring area on a contourmap is(a) Graphometer (b) Planimeter(c) Areameter (d) Clinometer.

343. The order of accuracy of elevation of points obtainedfrom a contour map is equal to(a) contour interval(b) x contour interval(c) 1/4 x contour interval(d) none of these

158


344. The best method of interpolation of contours in Directmethod of contouring is by(a) computations (b) interpolation(c) estimation (d) none of these

345. In double line river, contours are(a) stopped at the banks of the river(b) stopped at the edge of the river(c) drawn across the water(d) none of these

346. The limit of water level in a river represents a(a) contour line (b) horizontal surface(c) contour gradient (d) none of these

347. For any point on the surface with a given inclination,contour gradient possible is(a) one (b) two(c) infinite (d) none of these

348. For route survey of a contour map, method used is(a) square method(b) cross-profile method(c) trace—contour method(d) all of these

349. Plane table surveying is a graphical method ofsurveying in which(a) field work and plotting proceeds

simultaneously(b) plotting is done later while records are taken in

field book(c) only field work is done(d) none of these

350. Setting up the plane table consists of operations(a) levelling(b) centring(c) levelling and centring(d) orienting

351. Placing the table over the station such that thestation plotted on sheet is exactly above thecorresponding station on the ground is(a) centring (b) levelling(c) orienting (d) resection

352. Orientation is the operation of keeping the table atsuccessive stations such that

(a) position of the table at the station is parallelto the position it occupied at the previousstation

(b) position of station plotted on sheet is exactlyabove the corresponding station on ground

(c) table is brought in a horizontal plane(d) none of these

353. The method of plane tabling generally adopted toobtain details and plotting inaccessible points is(a) radiatio (b) intersection(c) resection (d) all of the above

354. In the inter-section method of plane tabling thenumber of stations needed to be set up are(a) 1 (b) 2(c) 3 (d) none of these

355. Resection is the method employed for(a) plotting the details(b) locating the instrument station(c) surveying mountaineous country(d) all of these

356. The two-point problem is(a) a case of resection method where no ray is

required to be drawn from the proceeding stationto the instrument station

(b) locating of position of plane table by means oftwo visible well defined points

(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of thse

357. Three-point problem can be solved by(a) tracing paper method(b) graphical method(c) trial and error method(d) all of these

358. Strength of fix of a plane table is(a) accuracy in centring(b) accuracy in locating the position of

instrument station by taking observationsto three stations

(c) fixity of table while solving two-point problem(d) none of these

359. Fix of table is good when(a) station is within the great triangle

159


(b) middle station is much nearer than other twostations

(c) angle subtended between two stations is notvery small

(d) all of these360. A poor ‘fix’ of the table is

(a) when station is within great triangle(b) when station is near the great circle(c) angle subtended is large(d) none of these

361. Two-point problem and three-point problems aremethod of(a) orientation(b) resection(c) orientation and resection(d) none of these

362. Resection by two-point problem as compared to thethree-point problem(a) gives more accurate results(b) takes less time(c) requires more labour(d) none of these

363. If plane table is not horizontal in a direction at rightangles to the alidade, then line of sight is parallel tofiducial edge only for(a) horizontal sights(b) inclined sights upwards(c) inclined sights downwards(d) none of these

364. To orient a plant table without two inaccessiblepoints, the method generally adopted is(a) inter-section (b) resection(c) radiation (d) two-point problem.

365. Which of the following is not a personal et ror ?(a) Lable not being perfectly levelled(b) Lable not being perfectly centred(c) Table not being perfectly clamped(d) None of these

366. The size of a plane table is(a) 600 x 750 mm (b) 450 x 750 mm(c) 450 x 800 mm (d) 350 x 500 mm

367. Detailed plotting is generally done by

(a) radiation (b) inter-section(c) resection (d) traversing.

368. The method most suitable for plotting in hilly areasis(a) radiation (b) inter-section(c) resection (d) traversing.

369. The instrument used for centring the plane tableaccurately is(a) spirit level (b) trough compass(c) plumbing fork (d) alidade.

370. Orientation of the table in done by(a) magnetic—needle (b) backsighting(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

371. In case of telescopic alidade, which of the followingadjustment is done?(a) The line of collimation should perpendicular to

the axis of telescope(b) The horizontal axis should be parallel to the

alidade rule(c) The bubble line of telescope level should be

parallel to the plane of collimation(d) All of these

372. Centring is not necessary when scale of plane isless than(a) 1 : 1000 (b) 1 :2000(c) 1 : 2400 (d) none of these

373. In plane table survey, error due to centring shouldnot exceed the scale divided by(a) 25 (b) 40(c) 50 (d) 80

374. In plane tabling.(a) sighting and plotting are done simultaneously.(b) in resection method, back rays are drawn.(c) table can be oriented by sighting the previous

station(d) all of these

375. An object situated on other side of a river andinaccessible from Plane table station canbe locatedby(a) radiation (b) intersection(c) traversing (d) resection

376. In Plane tabling

160


(a) exact orientation of plane table is moreimportant than centring for small scale maps

(b) three point problem fails if the Plane table stationlies on the great circle.

(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

377. In plane table survey(a) irregular objects can be plotted accurately(b) method of radiation is most suited when the

stations to be plotted are visible and accessible(c) method of inter-section is used to plot brokenboundaries.(d) all of these

378. A vernier theodolite consists of(a) levelling-head assembly(b) horizontal-circle assembly(c) alidade assembly(d) all of these

379. In theodolite(a) telescope is internal focussing type to facilitate

transiting.(b) by changing face, error due to line of collimation

not being parallel to the axis of altitude level iseliminated.

(c) error due to the horizontal axis not beingperpendicular to the vertical axis can beeliminated by changing face.

(d) all of these380. Shifting centre is an arrangement provided in

(a) surveyor compass (b) tilting level(c) theodolite (d) plane table

381. Consider the following :1. Cross-hair ring test2. Plate level test3. Collimation in azimuth test4. Spire testThe correct order of the tests for permanentadjustments of a theodolite is(a) 1,2, 3, 4 (b) 2,1,3, 4(c) 3, 1, 2, 4 (d) 4,3, 2,1

382. In plate level test of theodolite, vertical axis is madetruly vertical by manipulating(a) foot screws

(b) capstan screws(c) wing nuts(d) shifting centre arrangement

383. In optical theodolites, graduated circles are made of(a) brass (b) silver(c) glass (d) invar

384. Departure of a survey line is its(a) measured length corrected for chain/tape

correction(b) measured length(c) orthographic projection on E-W line(d) orthographic projection on N-S line

385. Theodolite is an instrument used for measuring(a) horizontal angles (b) vertical angles(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

386. Process of turning the telescope about the horizontalaxis in a vertical plane by a complete revolutionscalled(a) reversing (b) transiting(c) plunging (d) all of these

387. Process of turning the telescope about the verticalaxis in a horizontal plane is called(a) reversing (b) transiting(c) plunging (d) swinging.

388. The levelling head of to transit theodolite consistsof(a) parallel plates (b) a tribach plate(c) levelling screws (d) all of these

389. The function of levelling head is to(a) attach the theodolite to the tripod(b) provide a bearing for the outer hollow spindle(c) provide a mean of levelling the instrument(d) all of these

390. Size of a theodolite is specified by(a) diameter of lower plate(b) diameter of upper plate(c) length of telescope(d) diameter of vertical circle.

391. The outer spindle attached to the lower plate in atransit theodolite called(a) vernier plate (b) scale plate(c) alidade (d) none of these

161


392. In a theodolite, the line passing through the inter-section of the horizontal and vertical cross hairsand the optical centre of the object glass and itscontinuation is called(a) line of collimation (b) line of sight(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

393. The fundamental lines of transit are(a) horizontal axis and line of collimation(b) vertical axis(c) axes of plate levels and bubble line of telescope

of level(d) all of these

394. The upper plate(a) is attached to the inner spindle and is called

vernier plate(b) has two vernier 180° apart for reading the

horizontal angles(c) is also called alidade of theodolite(d) all of these

395. If image formed by the objective of the telescopeis not in the plane of cross hairs, it is called(a) indistinct focussing(b) parallax(c) aberration(d) none of these

396. A straight line tangential to the longitudinal curve ofthe level tube at its center, is called(a) Horizontal axis (b) Line of collimation(c) Bubble line (d) Line of right.

397. The trunnion axis or transverse axis is(a) the axis about which telescope can be

rotated in a vertical plane(b) the axis about wich telescope can be rotated in

a horizontal plane(c) is also called line of collimation(d) none of these

398. If lower clamp screw is tightened and upper clampscrew is loosened, then theodolite may rotate on its(a) outer spindle without relative motion between

vernier and graduated scale of lower plate(b) inner spindle with relative motion between

vernier and graduated scale on lower plate

(c) inner spindle without relative motion betweenvernier and graduated scale on lower plate

(d) none of these399. Telescope is said to be normal when the bubble of

the telescope is(a) down and face of the vertical circle is right(b) up and face of the vertical circle is left(c) up and the face of the vertical circle is right(d) none of these

400. The process of bringing vertical circle to the rightof the observer if it is originally to the left and vice-versa is called(a) face left (b) face right(c) changing face (d) all of these

401. Parallax may be eliminated by(a) focussing the eyepiece(b) focussing the objective(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

402. ‘SPIRE TEST’ is used in permanent adjustment oftheodolite for adjusting the(a) plate levels (b) line of sight(c) vertical axis (d) horizontal axis.

403. The error due to eccentricity of inner and outeraxis can be eliminated by(a) taking mean of both the face observations(b) reading both verniers and taking the mean

of the two observations(c) taking several readings distributed over different

positions of the graduated circle(d) none of these- —

404. Error eliminated by taking mean of both faceobservations is error due to(a) eccentricity of verniers(b) imperfect adjustment of levels(c) line of collimation not being perpendicular

to horizontal axis(d) all of these

405. By method ,of repetition of horizontal anglemeasurement, the error eliminated is the error dueto(a) eccentricity of vernier

162


(b) wrong adjustment of line of collimation andturnion axis

(c) inaccurate graduation(d) all of these

406. In the double application of principle of reversionused in the adjustment of vertical hairs, the apparenterror is(a) half the true error(b) equal to true error(c) double the true error(d) four times the true error.

407. Spire test used in the permanent adjustments oftheodiolite for the adjustment of(a) line of sight (b) horizontal axis(c) plate levels (d) altitude bubble.

408. Errors eliminated by taking both face observationsare error due to(a) horizontal axis not being perpendicular to the

veritcal axis(b) non-parallelism of the axis of telescope level

and line of collimation(c) imperfect adjustment of the vertical circle

vernier(d) all of these

409. If altitude bubble is provided both on index frameas well as on telescope of theodolite, then levellingof instrument is done with reference to(a) altitude bubble on index frame(b) altitude bubble on telescope(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

410. A traverse deflection angle is(a) less than 90°(b) between 90° and 180°(c) difference between included angle and 180°(d) none of these

411. The included angles of a theodolite traverse, aregenerally measured(a) clockwise from the back station(b) clockwise from the forward station(c) anticlock wise from the forward station(d) clockwise from the back station.

412. To observe an indluded angle with better accuracy,the method preferred will be(a) reiteration (b) repetition(c) double observation (d) none of these

413. An angle of deflection right, can be directly obtainedby setting the instrument to read(a) zero on the check station(b) zero on the back station(c) 90° on the back station(d) 180° on the back station.

414. In a closed traverse by included angles, the sum ofmeasured interior angles should be equal to(a) (N — 4) right angles(b) (2N — 4) right angles(c) (2N + 4) right angles(d) none of thesewhere N = number of sides of traverse

415. In a traverse, algebraic sum of the deflection angles,taking the right hand deflection angles as positiveand left hand deflection as negative, should be equalto(a) (N - 4) right angles (b) (2N - 4) right angles(c) 180° (d) 360°

416. Ratio of closing error to the permitter of the traverseis called(a) linear closing error(b) permissible closing error(c) relative closing error(d) none of these

417. The angular land linear measurement of the part ofthe traverse can be checked by(a) astronomical error (b) cut off lines(c) well defined objects (d) all of these

418. The distance between terminal points computed froma subsidary traverse run between them is called(a) traverse base (b) transverse base(c) corrected base (d) traverse length.

419. Bearing of the traverse line is calculated by(a) included angle method(b) deflection angle method(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

163


420. If included angle is greater than 180°, then deflectionangle is(a) right handed or positive(b) left handed or negative(c) 90°(d) none of these

421. Difference between sum of the measured angelesand theoretical sum of the angles of aclosed traverseis called(a) angular closing error(b) closing error in bearing(c) relative closing error(d) all of these

423. Difference between two bearings of the last line asobserved at the first and the last stations of a traverseis called(a) angular closing error(b) closing error in bearing(c) relative closing error(d) none of these

424. According to Bowditch’s rule, correction to latitudeor departure of any side is equal to(a) total error in latitude or departuer x length

of that side/perimeter of traverse(b) total error in latitude or departure x perimeter

of traverse/length of that side(c) total error in latitude /Periameter of traverse(d) none of these

425. Bowditch rule is applied to(a) an open traverse for graphical adjustment(b) determine effect of local attraction(c) a closed transverse for adjustment of

closing error(d) none of these

426. Transit rule of adjusting the consecutive coordinatesof a traverse is used where(a) linear and angular measurements of the

traverseare of equal accuracy(b) angular measurements are more accurate then

linear measurement(c) linear measurements are more accurate than

angular measurements(d) none.of these

427. If in a closed traverse, sum of the north latitudes ismore than the sum of south latitudes and also sumof west departures is more than the sum of eastdepartures, then bearing of closing line is in the(a) SW quadrant (b) NW quadrant(c) SE quadrant (d) NE quadrant.

428. Angle between prolongation of the preceding lineand the forward line of a traverse is called(a) indluded angle (b) exterior angle(c) deflection angle (d) direct angle.

429. For locating details distant from transit station,suitable method of theodolite traversing is bymeasuring(a) angles to the point from atleast two stations(b) angles and distances from one transit station(c) angle at an station and distance from other(d) distance from two points on traverse line.

430. The multiplying constant of a theodolite is(a) f/d(b) f/i(c) f/(i+d)(d) none of these where f is focal length of object

lens,i is stadia hair interval,d is distance between optical centre of the objectlens and axis of the telescope

431. Maximum number of omitted measurements thatcan be calculated from latitudes and departures ofa closed traverse is(a) one (b) two(c) three (d) four.

432. Axis method of traverse correction in used when(a) angles are measured very accurately(b) lengths are measured very accurately(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

433. If reduced bearing of line AB is N 30 W and lengthis 100 m, then latitude and departure respectively ofthe line AB will be(a) + 86.6 m,+ 50 m(b) + 50 m,+ 86.6m(c) + 86.6 m, — 50.0 m(d) — 86.6 m, + 50.0 m.

164


434. If sum of nothings of a traverse exceeds sum ofsouthings by 2m and sum of eastings exceeds sumof westings by 2m, then resulting closing error willbe(a) “2 m (b) 2.”2 m(c) 2 m (d) 4 m.

435. The perpendicular distance of the mid-point of theline from the reference meridian is called(a) double meriedian distance(b) meridian distance(c) departure of the line(d) latitude of the line.

436. If bearing of line AB is 200° and that of CB is270°, then included angle ABC, is(a) 70° (b) 80°(c) 90° (d) none of these

437. The intercept of a staff is(a) minimum if staff is held truly normal to the

line of sight(b) maximum if staff is helf truly normal to the line

of sight(c) decreases if staff is tilted away from normal(d) increases if staff is tilted away from normal.

438. If staff is held vertical and angle of elevation anddepression are kept same, then horizontal distancebetween instrument and staff station is computedby observations will be(a) greater at an angle of elevation(b) greater at an angle of depression(c) same in both case(d) none of these

439. In stadia method, if k is the multiplying factor, s isthe staff intercept, c is the additive constant ofinstruement, then distance equation is given by theexpression(a) D = k + cs (b) D = ks + c(c) D = k/s + c (d) none of these

440. Subtense bar is an instrument used for measurementof horizontal distance in(a) undulated areas (b) flat areas(c) mountains (d) all of these

441. Overturning of vehicles on a curve can be avoidedby using

(a) transition curve (b) vertical curve(c) compound curve (d) reverse curve.

442. A curve of varying radius introduced between twobranches of a compound curve is called(a) transition curve (b) mean curve(c) base curve (d) common curve

443. A transition curve introduced between the tangentand the circular curve should(a) have the same curvature at the junction with

the circular curve as that of the circular curve(b) have zero curvature at the junction.(c) meet the curve tangentially.(d) none of these

444. A curve consists of two areas of different radiibending in the same direction and lying on the sameside of their common tangent and their centers beingon the same side of the curve is called(a) simple curve (b) compound curve(c) reverse curve (d) transition curve.

445. Super elevation depends upon(a) width of the read (b) radius of the road(c) speed of vehicle (d) none of these

446. Different grades are joined together by a(a) compound curve (b) reverse curve(c) vertical curve (d) transition curve.

447. Cubic parabola is a type of(a) compound curve (b) simple curve(c) reverse curve (d) transition cuve.

448. If length of a transition curve is such that full super-elevation is attained at the junction with the circularcurve, then resultant curve is called(a) compound curve (b) combined curve(c) reverse curve (d) simple curve.

449. Angle subteded by the long chord of a simple curveat its centre is equal to(a) deflection angle(b) 2 x deflection angle(c) 21/ x deflection angle(d) none of these

450. A curve tangential to three straight lines andconsisting of areas of different radii is called(a) one centred compound curve(b) two centred compound curve

165


(c) three centred compound curve(d) four centred compound curve.

451. The chrod of curve less than peg interval is called(a) small chord (b) shord chord(c) long chord (d) sub chord.

452. The angle of intersection of a curve is the anglebetween(a) forward tangent and long chord(b) back tangent and long chord(c) back tangent and forward tangent(d) none of these

453. Radius of curvature of a 120 m long are is given bythe expression(a) R =1146/D metres(b) R = 540/D metres(c) R = 1/D metres(d) none of these where D is degree of curvature

454. Length of perpendicular offset from a tangent tothe juction of a transition curve and circular curveiE equal to(a) shift (b) 2 x shift(c) 3 x shift (d) 4 x shift

455. Total angle of deflection of transition curve is equalto(a) spiral angle(b) 1/2x spiral angle(c) 1/3 spiral angle(d) 1/4 spiral angle.

456. For ideal transition, distance from the begining ofthe transition curve to any point is(a) directly proportional to the radius of curvature

at that point(b) inversely proportional to the radius of

curvature at that point(c) inversely proportional to the square of the

curvature at that point(d) none of these

457. If radius of circular curve is five times the lengthof the transition curve, then spiral angle is given by(a) 1/5 radian (b) 1/10 radian(c) 1/20 radian (d) 1/25 radian

458. The difference in elevation of points between avertical and a tangent is proportional

(a) directly to the horizontly distance from the pointof tangency.

(b) inversely to the horizontly distance from thepoint of tangency

(c) inversely to the square of horizontaldistance

(d) directly to the square of horizontal distance.459. Two theodolie method of setting out a simple curve

does not include(a) linear measurements(b) angular measurements(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

460. The shift bisects(a) compound curve (b) reverse curve(c) tangential curve (d) none of these

461. Super elevation provided at the point of reversecurvature in a reverse curve is(a) maximum (b) minimum(c) 0 (d) none of these

462. A lemniscate curve will not be transitional throughoutif the deflection angle is(a) 30° (b) 45°(c) 60° (d) 90°

463. If long chord and tangent length of a circular curveof radius R are equal, then angle of deflection willbe(a) 60° (b) 120°(c) 180° (d) 90°

464. “Point of curve” of a simple circular curve, is(a) point of commencement(b) point of tengency(c) point of inter-section(d) all of these

465. The tape used for measuring base line is made ofNickle-iron alloy and nickel(a) 24% (b) 48%(c) 36% (d) 60%

466. The correction applied to base line having negativesign is(a) reduction to mean sea level(b) correction for horizontal alignment

166


(c) correction for sag and slope correction(d) all of these

467. Bench Mark is established by(a) trigonometric levelling(b) barometric levelling(c) spirit levelling(d) none of these

468. Due to curvature of earth, an object looks(a) lower than it is(b) higher than it is(c) at the same height(d) curved, concave towards the observer

469. Reduced level of a bench mark is(a) independent quantity(b) dependent quantity(c) conditioned quantity(d) reduced quanity.

470. When observed value is deducted from themeasurement from some related quantities, it iscalled(a) deduced observation(b) indirect observation(c) direct observation(d) none of these

471. The value of a quantity which is absolutely freefrom all types of errors is called(a) true value(b) observed value(c) most probable value(d) residual value

472. The value of a quantity which has more chances ofbeing true than any other is(a) true value(b) observed value(c) most probable value(d) average value.

473. Difference between the true value and observedvalue of a quantity is called(a) true error (b) most probable error(c) residual error (d) observed error.

474. Difference between any measured quantity and themost probable value of that quantity is called

(a) true error(b) most probable error(c) residual error(d) observed error.

475. A number giving an indication of its precision andtrustworthiness of an observation is called(a) observation. index(b) weight of the observation(c) trueness of the observation(d) none of these

476. The equation which gives the relation betweenobserved quantity and its numerical value is called(a) observation equation(b) conditioned equation(c) normal equation(d) derived equation

477. The equation which expreses the relation existingbetween several dependent quntities is called(a) observed equation(b) conditioned equation(c) normal equation(d) dependent equation

478. The law of weight applicable to the method of leastsquares errors is(a) weights of the sum of the quantities added

algebracically is equal to the sum of thereciprocals of the individual weights

(b) weight of the weighted arithmetic mean ofa number of observations is equal to thesum of the individual weights ofobservations is equal to the sum of theindividual weights of observations


479. In observations of equal precision, the most probablevalues of the observed quantities are those thatrender the sum of the squares of the redidual errorsas minimum. This is a fundamental principle of a(a) Gauss’ Mid Latitude formula(b) Least square method(c) Legendr’s method(d) None of these

167


480. The independent constants used for finding out mostprobable values of unknowns are called(a) correlates (b) Grace factor(c) adjustment factor (d) none of these

481. A curve between size of error and number of errors,is called(a) error curve (b) probability curve(c) polygraph (d) computation curve.

482. For computation of volumes, if effect of curvatureof the earth is taken into account, then volumeobtained is(a) straight volume (b) curved volume(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

483. Area of the multi-level sections are calculated by(a) cordinate method(b) prismoidal formula(c) trapezoidal formula(d) none of these

484. Volume of earth work computed by the prismoidalformula, as compared to that by the trapezoidalformula is(a) small (b) large(c) equal (d) none of these

485. Volume swept by a constant area rotating about afixed axis is equal to product of area and length ofthe path traced by the centroid of the area. Thisstatement is(a) cordinate theorem (b) Pappu’s theorem(c) prismoidal thorem (d) none of these

486. Reserviour volume is computed by(a) prismoidal formula(b) trapezoidal formula(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

487. While measuring horizontal angles by the method ofrepetition with a theodolite, readings are taken onboth the verniers. Which of the following errors willbe eliminated by reading both the verniers?(a) Error due to eccentricity of the centres(b) Error due to imperfect adjustment of the line of

collimation(c) Error due to imperfect adjustment of the

horizontal axis

(d) Error due to imperfect graduations488. An angle-measuring instrument reading upto one-

sixth of a degree on the main scale is equipped witha vernier having 19 main scale divisions divided into20 parts. The correct least count for the instrumentis(a) 60 seconds (b) 30 seconds(c) 20 seconds (d) 10 seconds

489. It is required to produce a small-scale map of anarea in a magnetic zone by directly plotting andchecking the work in the field itself. Which one ofthe following surveys will be most appropriate forthis purpose?(a) Chain (b) Theodolite(c) Plane Table (d) Compass

490. A 30 m metric chain is found to be 0.1 m too shortthroughout the measurement. If the distancemeasured is recorded as 300 m, then the actualdistance will be(a) 300.1 m (b) 301.0 m(c) 299.0 m (d) 310.0 m

491. Offsets are(a) lateral measurements made with respect

to main survey lines(b) perpendiculars erected from chain lines(c) taken to avoid unnecessary walking between

stations(d) measurements which are not made at right

angles to the chain line492. If “Force bearing” of a line is S 49° 52' E (assuming

there is no local attraction), the “Back bearing” ofthe line will be(a) S 52° 49' E (b) S 49° 52' E(c) N 49° 08' E (d) N 49° 52' W

493. To find the R.L. of a roof slab of a building, staffreading were taken from a particular set-up of thelevelling instrument. The readings were 1.050 mwith staff on the benchmark and 2.300 m with staffbelow the roof slab and held inverted. Taking theR.L. of the B.M. as 135.150 m, the R.L. of theroof slab will be(a) 129.800 (b)131.900(c) 134.400 (d) 138.500

494. Consider the following operations in a spire test :

168


1. Depress telescope and sight a point on theground nearer to the instrument.

2. Clamp horizontal plates.3. Sight a well-defined high point on a high building.4. Change face and repeat the procedure.

495. The correct sequence of these operations is(a) 1,2, 3, 4 (b) 3,1,2, 4(c) 3,2, 1, 4 (d) 2,1, 3, 4

496. The combined correction for curvature andrefraction for a distance of 1400 m is(a) 0.153 m (b)0.132 m(c) 0.094 m (d) 0.021 m

497. A lemniscate curve between the tangents istransitional throughout, if the polar deflection angleof its apex is equal to Ô is the deflection anglebetween the initial and final tangents)(a) Ô/2 (b) Ô /4(c) Ô/16 (d) Ô

498. In a closed traverse, the sum of south latitudeexceeds the sum of north latitudes and the sum ofeast departures exceeds the sum of west departures.The closing line will lie in the(a) N-W quadrant (b) N-E quadrant(c) S-E quadrant (d) S-W quadrant

499. An image of the top of the hill is 96 mm from theprincipal point of the photograph. The elevation ofthe top of the hill is 500 m and the flying height is4000 m above the datum. The relief displacementwill be(a) 768 mm (b) 88 mm(c) 12 mm (d) 8 mm

500. Which one of the following methods would giveaccurate results in determining the direction of theobserver’s meridian?(a) Observation of circumpolar stars on the

same vertical(b) Observation of circumpolar stars at culmination(c) Extra-meridian observation of a circumpolar star(d) Observation of the sun at equal altitudes

501. The direction of the magnetic meridian is establishedat each traverse station and the direction of the lineis determined with reference to the magneticmeridian. This method of traversing is called

(a) fast needle method(b) loose needle method(c) bearing method(d) fixed needle method

502. For a chord of 60 m, the mid-ordinate for a circularcurve of 50 m radius will be(a) 10 m (b) 12.5 m(c) 15 m (d) 18.75 m

503. If an overlapping pair of vertical photographs takenwith a 150 mm focal length camera has an air baseof 2100 m and the elevation of the control point“A” on it is 900 m above M.S.L. and the parallaxof the point is 75 mm, then the flying height aboveM.S.L. of the stereop air will be(a) 3000 m (b) 3150 m(c) 5100 m (d) 5250 m

504. The true length of a line is known to be 200 m.When this is measured with a 20 m tape, the lengthis 200.80 m. The correct length of the 20 m tapeis(a) 19.92 m (b) 19.98 m(c) 20.04 m (d) 20.08 m

505. An observer standing on the deck of a ship justsees the top of a lighthouse which is 30 m abovethe sea level. If the height of the observer’s eye is10 m above the sea level, then the distance of theobserver from the lighthouse will be nearly(a) 22.5 km (b) 24.3 km(c) 33.3 km (d) 59.7 km

506. If 8 denotes declination, 0 latitude of the place ofobservation and a altitude of a star at the primevertical, then(a) sin a = sin 8 cos 0(b) sin 0 = sin S cosec a(c) cos a = cos S sin 0(d) sin S = sin a cos 0

507. Which one of the following methods estimates bestthe area of an irregular and curved boundary?(a) Trapezoidal method(b) Simpson’s method(c) Average ordinate method(d) Mid-ordinate method

169


508. Two points A and B are 1530 m apart across ariver. The reciprocal levels measured are : Level atReadings on (in m)A BA 2.165 3.810B 0.910 2.355The true difference in levelbetween A and B wouldbe(a) 1.255 m (b) 1.455 m(c) 1.545 m (d) 1.645 m

509. A lighthouse is visible just above the horizon at acertain station at the sea level. The distance betweenthe station and the lighthouse is 40 km. The heightof the lighthouse is approximately(a) 187 m (b) 137.7 m(c) 107.7 m (d) 87.3 m

510. The true bearing of a line is 34° 20' 40" and themagnetic declination at the place of observation is2° 00' 20" W on the date of observation. Themagnetic bearing of the line is(a) 36° 21' 00" (b) 34° 20' 20"(c) 32° 20' 20" (d) 32° 00' 20"

511. Considering the following assumptions of Bowditchmethod1. Angular measurements are more precise than

linear measurements.2. Linear measurements are more precise than

angular measurements.3. Errors in linear measurements are proportional

to4. Correction to latitude or departure of any side

= Total error in L (or D) Lenght of that sidePerimeter of traverse

Which of these statements are correct?(a) 1 and 4 (b) 1, 2 and 3(c) 2, 3 and 4 (d) 3 and 4

512. To determine the length of a bridge proposed to bebuilt across a wide river, the surveying method ofchoice would be(a) tacheometry(b) chain surveying(c) hydrographic surveying(d) triangulation

513. Heliograph is a type of(a) instrument used for recording the movement of

sun(b) instrument used for contouring an area(c) electronic distance measuring device(d) sun signal used in triangulation work

514. A plot of land 60 m x 20 m is measured by a steeltape. If the standard error of length and widthmeasurements is taken as ± 1 cm, then the standarderror of the area of the plot would be(a) ± 0.1414 m2 (b) ± 0.566 m2

(c) ± 0.632 m2 (d) ± 0.8484 m2

515. If a 30 m length can be taped with a precision of± 0.01 m, then the standard error in measuring 1.08km with the same precision will be(a) ± 0.54 m (b) ± 0.45 m(c) ± 0.36 m (d) ± 0.06 m

516. A 30-m steel tape was standardized at 20°C andmeasurements of distances were taken at 15°C. Ifthe coefficient of linear expansion a of the materialof the tape were 0.00,00112 per degree Celsius,then the error, due to temperature, per tape lengthwould be(a) - 0.00,00560 m (b) + 0.00,00560 m(c) + 0.00,16800 m (d) - 0.00,16800 m

517. Which one of the following statements best definesa ‘level surface’?(a) A horizontal surface every element of which is

normal to plumb line.(b) A curved surface every element of which is

perpendicular to the spheroidal shape of theearth.

(c) A plane surface which is perpendicular at allpoints to the direction of gravity.

(d) A curved surface which is perpendicularto the direction of gravity at every point.

518. A 100 m tape is held 1 m out of line. The truelength is(a) 100.0050 m (b) 99.9950 m(c) 100.0100 m (d) 99.9800 m

519. The coordinate of two end-points A and B of atraverse line AB areXA = 1000.00 m, YA = 1000.00 m

170


XB = 2000.00 m, YB = 1000.00 mThe bearing of the line AB will be(a) 0° 0' 00" (b) 60° 0' 00'(c) 90° 0' 00" (d) 180° 0' 00"

520. Which of the following statements regarding planetable surveying is correct?(a) It is not necessary to do accurate centering of

plane table for small scale surveys.(b) Compass rule may be made use of for

adjusting the plane table traverse.(c) From the instrument station, resectors are drawn

to plot the position of objects in the field.(d) All of these

521. If gradient of a ground is — 3%, that of anotherground intersecting with the former is 5%, and thehorizontal length of the vertical curve to be drawnis 600 m, then vertical offset ‘e’ from the vertex ofthe vertical curve to the mid-point of the curve willbe(a) 1.5 m (b) 6 m(c) 15 m (d) 75 m

522. Consider the following statements regarding base-line measurements :1. Very precise measurement can be done only

on densely cloudy days or at nights.2. Error due to application of non-standardized pull

on the tape can be either cumulative orcompensating type.

3. Intermediate obstructions in the measurementon base-lines can be cleared by erecting towers.Of these statements

(a) 1, 2 and 3 are correct(b) 1 and 2 are correct(c) 1 and 3 are correct(d) 2 and 3 are correct

523. The following equipments can be used to lay outhorizontal angles in field1. Microptic theodolite2. Chain and metallic tape3. Vernier theodolite4. Prismatic compassThe correct sequence of the decreasing order oftheir accuracies is

(a) 2,4, 3, 1 (b) 2,3, 4, 1(c) 1,4, 3, 2 (d) 1,3, 4, 2

524. If downhill end of a 20 m tape is held 80 cm toolow, then its horizontal length will be(a) 19.894 m (b) 19.984 m(c) 20.016 m (d) 20.984 m

525. When a theodolite is in proper adjustment, which ofthe following conditions between fundamental linesare satisfied?(a) Axis of the plate level is perpendicular to the

vertical axis.(b) The line of collimation is at fight angles to the

vertical axis.(c) The axis of the altitude level is parallel to the

line of collimation when it is horizontal and thevertical circle reads zero.

(d) All of these526. The following bearings were taken in running a

closed compass traverse ABCDALineF.B. B.B.AB 124°30' 304°30'BC 68°15' 246°0'CD 310°30' 135°15'DA 200°15' 17°45'One would suspect local attraction at stations(a) A and B (b) B and C(c) C and D (d) D and A

527. ABCD is a regular parallelogram plot of land, whoseangle BAD is 60°. If the bearing of the line AB is30°, then the bearing of the line CD is(a) 90° (b) 120'(c) 210° (d) 270°

528. In theodolite traversing, for the calculation ofindependent rectangular co-ordinates from the fieldobservations, some of the computations are indicatedbelow1. Computation of reduced bearing of each

traverse leg2. Calculation of the closing error3. Balancing of consecutive co-ordinates4. Calculation of consecutive co-ordinatesThe correct sequence in which these computationsare to be made is

171


(a) 1,2, 3, 4 (b) 2,4, 3, 1(c) 1,4, 2, 3 (d) 3,1, 4, 2

529. Consider the following steps1. Using Lehmann’s rule, an improved position of

station point is obtained.2. Procedure is repeated till the triangle of error

is reduced to a point.3. ‘Triangle of error’ is obtained.4. The plane table is levelled over the station point.5. Three resection lines are drawn from three well-

defined station points.The correct sequence of the “Lehmann’s procedure”for solving the “three point problem” is(a) 4,5, 3,1, 2 (b) 1,2, 4, 3, 5(c) 5,4, 2, 3, 1 (d) 4,1, 3, 2, 5

530. Besides contours, relief on topographic maps isrepresented in general, by(a) hachures (b) hypsometric tints(c) hill shading (d) All of these

531. If in a triangle ABC, b = 300 m and angle ABC =60°, then radius of the circular curve passing throughthe points A, B and C will be(a) 86.6 m (b) 100.0 m(c) 173.2 m (d) 300.6 m

532. If difference in height of two points whose parallaxdifference is (+) 0.8 mm on a pair of stereo pairtaken from a flying height H and having mean photobase 95.2 m is (+) 100 m, then flying height H willbe(a) 8,000 m (b) 10,000 m(c) 12,000 m (d) 14,000 m

533. If staff intercept on a staff located at 100 m fromthe level for five division deviation of the bubble is0.050 m and if length of one division of the bubbleis 2 mm, then radius of curvature of the bubble tubeis(a) 2.02 m (b) 2.20 m(c) 20.00 m (d) 20.20 m

534. The “Back sight” reading on a vertically held staffat a point A on the floor along the centre line of arailway tunnel is 3.465 m, and the “Fore sight” onthe inverted staff held at the roof of the tunnel just

vertically above A is 1.155 m. The height of thetunnel along the centre line at floor point A is(a) 2.310 m (b) 3.465 m(c) 4.620 m (d) 6.930 m

535. A and B are two traverse stations free from localattraction errors. If the true bearing of a line AB is89°, and the magnetic declination at point A is 1°West, then the magnetic bearing of the line BAwould be(a) 88° (b) 90°(c) 268° (d) 270°

536. Which one of the following gives the correctdistance between the lighthouse and a ship, whenthe ilghthouse whose height is 100 m is visible justabove the horizon from the ship?(a) 30.68 km (b) 36.50 km(c) 38.54 km (d) 40.54 km

537. In a plane table survey, the plane table station positionwas to be fixed with respect to three referencepoints.It was found that one of the reference points wasnot visible due to some obstruction. It was, thereforedecided to make use of the other two points only.Which one of the following statements is trueregarding the determination of station position?(a) The work can be done faster.(b) Two settings of the plane table will be needed,

but the work will be accurate.(c) Only one setting of the table is needed, however

the work will be less accurate.(d) The work will be less accurate and time

consuming.538. Contour interval on a map sheet denotes

(a) vertical distance of contour lines above thedatum plane

(b) vertical distance between two successivecontour lines

(c) slope distance between two successive contourlines

(d) horizontal distance between two successivecontour lines

539. Radius of curvature of an ideal transition curveshould be

172


(a) inversely proportional to its length fromthe beginning

(b) directly proportional to its length from thebeginning

(c) proportional to the speed of the vehicle(d) proportional to the superelevation

540. For a simple circular curve, which one of thefollowing gives the correct relation between theradius, R and degree of curve D, for 20 m arclength?(a) R = 5729.6/D (b) R = 1718.9/D(c) R = 1145.9/D (d) R = 572.9/D

541. The number of independent conditions required tobe satisfied for the adjustment of a bracedquadrilateral in triangulation survey is(a) 2 (b) 4(c) 6 (d) 8

542. Following data refer to precise measurement of anangle A on the field(i) 2A = 20° 10' - weight 2(ii) 4A = 40° 10' - weight 3What is the most probable value of angle A?(a) 10° 01' 06" (b) 10° 02' 07"(c) 10° 02' 51" (d) 10° 22' 51"

543. In a trigonometric levelling, the height of the signalused is 4.62 m and the instrument height is 1.25 m.If horizontal distance of the target from theinstrument is 5780 m, then axis-signal correction is(a) 206265 x 3.37/5780 seconds(b) 5780 x 5.87/206265 seconds(c) 5780 x 206265/5.87 seconds(d) 206265 x 5780/3.37 seconds

544. The representative fraction 1/2500 means that thescale is 1 cm equal to(a) 0.25 in (b) 2.5 m(c) 25 m (d) 2.5 km

545. Which of the following are the fundamental lines ofa theodolite?(a) The vertical and horizontal axes(b) The line of collimation and axes of the plate

levels(c) The bubble line of the attitude level(d) All of these

546. Which of the following characteristic features maybe used while plotting a contour plan?1. Two contour lines having the same elevation

cannot unite and continue as one line.2. Contour lines close together indicate a gentle

slope.3. Contour lines cross a valley line at right angles.

Select the correct answer using the codes givenbelow.

Codes :(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 2(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1 and 3

547. Consider the following statements pertaining to planetable survey :1. Two-point problem is solved by mechanical

method.2. Three-point problem is solved by Bessel’s

method.3. In two-point problem, auxiliary station is

required. Of these statements(a) 1 and 2 are correct(b) 1 and 3 are correct(c) 2 and 3 are correct(d) 1, 2 and 3 are correct

548. Which one of the following specifications for lengthof base line refers to “Third Order Triangulationsystem?(a) 0.5 to 3 km (b) 1.5 to 5 km(c) 5 to 15 km (d) 10 to 20 km

549. Difference between sum of the angles of a planetriangle and sum of the angles of a spherical triangleis one second, when triangle on the earth surfacehas an area of about(a) 105 sq. km (b) 135 sq. km(c) 159 sq. km (d) 195 sq. km

550. A plan of an area drawn with the original scale of1 cm = 10 m, has shrunk such that a line, originally15 cm long on the plan, measures now 14.5 cm.Then shrunk scale is given by 1 cm equal to(a) 0.97 m (b) 9.70 m(c) 10.34 m (d) 10.97 m

551. Two-peg test in the adjustment of a dumpy levelemploys the principle that

173


(a) equal lengths at back sight and fore sight donot affect the difference in level.

(b) reciprocal levelling eliminates errors ofnon-parallel instrument and collimationaxes.

(c) two readings from the same station will minimizeerrors in bubble tube axis.

(d) correct is made for vertical axis at one peg andfor horizontal axis at the other peg.

552. Length of a transition curve for a circular curve ofradius 300 m and for a design speed of 15 m/s,when rate of change of centrifugal acceleration is0.3 m/s3, is(a) 30 m (b) 37.5 m(c) 45 m (d) 60 m

553. If line of sight between two stations A and B, onsea, and 80 km apart, makes tangent at point A,then minimum elevation of the signal required at B(consider coefficient of refraction, m = 0.08 andmean radius of earth as 6400 km) will be(a) 42 m (b) 210 m(c) 420 m (d) 840 m

554. In a closed theodolite traverse, sum of the latitudesis + 5.080 m and sum of the departures is - 51.406m, if sum of the traverse legs is 20.525 km, thenaccuracy of traverse is nearly equal to(a) 1 : 300 (b) 1 : 400(c) 1 : 500 (d) 1 : 1000

555. A sewer is laid from a manhole A to a manhole B,250 m apart along a downward gradient of 1 in125. If reduced level of the invert at A is 205.75 mand the height of the boning rod is 3 m, then reducedlevel of the sight rail at B, is(a) 202.75 m (b) 206.75 m(c) 208.75 m (d) 211.75 m

556. An imaginary line passing through the optical centreof the objective and optical centre of the eye-piecein the telescope or a surveying instrument is called(a) horizontal axis(b) line of collimation(c) optical axis of the telescope(d) reference axis

557. In an old map, line PQ was drawn to a magnetic

bearing of 6° 32', the magnetic declination at thattime being 1° East. The present magnetic declinationis 9° 42' East. The magnetic bearing to which theline is set at present is(a) 357°50' (b) 356°50'(c) 3°10' (d) 2°10'

558. The distance between two bench marks is 1000 m.If during levelling, total error due to collimation,curvature and refraction is found to be + 0.120 m,then magnitude of the collimation error is(a) 0.00527 m (b) 0.0527 m(c) 0.527 m (d) 0.673 m

559. When bubble of a level tube was moved by 10divisions, the change in staff intercept was 0.05 m.If distance between staff and the instrument was100 m, then sensitiveness of the bubble tube is givenby(a) 1.03 sec of arc (b) 10.3 sec of arc(c) 20.6 sec of arc (d) 103 sec of arc

560. In trigonometric levelling, if horizontal distancebetween the instrument and object is 3088 m, thecoefficient of refraction is 0.07 and R sin 1" =30.88 m, then refraction correction in angularmeasure would be(a) 0.07" (b) 0.70"(c) 7.0" (d) 1' 10"

561. A circle of radius 7 m has a standard error of 0.02m on the radius. The standard error of its area is(a) 0.04 m2 (b) 0.14 m2

(c) 0.28 m2 (d) 0.88 m2

562. Fore bearings (FB) and back bearings (BB) of linesPQ and QR have been measured asLineFB BBPQ 50° 0' 235° 0'QR 125° 30' 309° 30'The correct value of the interior angle PQR will be(a) 105° 00' (b) 109° 30'(c) 250° 00' (d) 255° 00'

563. Fix of a plane table from three known points isgood if(a) middle station is the nearest(b) middle station is farther than the other two

stations

174


(c) either of the extreme stations is the nearest(d) middle station is close to the great circle

564. Consider following statements associated with thelaws of weights in the theory of errors1. If an equation is multiplied by its own weight,

then the weight of the resulting equation is equalto the reciprocal of the weight of that equation.

2. The weight of the algebraic sum of two ormore quantities is equal to the reciprocal of thesum of the individual weights.

3. If the quantity of a given weight is mulftPliedby a factor, then the weight of the result isobtained by dividing its given weight by thesquare root of that factor.

4. If the quantity of a given weight is divided bya factor, then the weight of the result is obtainedby multiplying its given weight by the square ofthat factor. Of these statements

(a) 1 and 4 are correct(b) 2 and 3 are correct(c) 3 and 4 are correct(d) 1 and 3 are correct

565. A Dumpy level is set up with its eyepiece verticallyover a peg A. The height from the top of peg A tothe centre of the eyepiece is 1.540 m and the readingon peg B is 0.705 m. The level is then set up overpeg B. If height of the eyepiece above peg B is1.490 m and reading on A is 2.195 m, then differencein level between A and B is(a) 2.900 m (b) 3.030 m(c) 0.770 m (d) 0.785 m

566. If cross-sectional areas of an embankment at 30 mintervals are 20, 40, 60, 50, and 30 m2 respectively,then volume of the embankment on the basis ofprismoidal rule, is(a) 5300 m3 (b) 8300 m3

(c) 9300 m3 (d) 9400 m3

567. If bearing of a line AB is N 60° 30' and that of BCis 122° of a closed traverse ABCDE, then measureof the interior angle B is(a) 240° 30' (b) 122° 00'(c) 118° 30' ‘ (d) 154

568. If coordinates of A are 100 N and 200 E and thoseof C are 100 S and 200 E, then length AC is

(a) 400.00 (b) 282.84(c) 244.94 (d) 200.00

569. Deflection angle between tangents drawn at theends of a transition curve is 7°, then radius of thecurve at the end is 400 m. What is the length ofthe transition curve?(a) 60.00 m (b) 97.74 m(c) 120.00 m (d) 150.00 m

570. A transition curve is required for a circular curve of200 m radius, the gauge being 1.5 m and maximumsuper elevation restricted to 15 cm. The transitionis to be designed for a velocity such that no lateralpressure is imposed on the rails and the rate of gainof radial acceleration is 30 cm /s2. The requiredlength of transition curve will work out to be(a) 460 m (b) 46 m(c) 4.6 m (d) 0.46 m

571. A parabolic vertical curve is set out connecting a +0.7% grade to a - 0.6% grade. The chainage andR.L. of the point of intersection are 1000 m and250 m respectively. The admissible rate of changeof grade is 0.05% per 20 m. The chainage of thetangent points will be(a) 600 and 1400 (b) 650 and 1350(c) 700 and 1300 (d) 740 and 1260

572. Consider the following statements associated withtriangulation survey.1. In triangulation survey unknown distances

between stations are determined usingtacheometeric relations.

2. The triangulation station at which astronomicalobservations are made for azimuths are calledLaplace stations.

3. In tertiary triangulation, the length of the sidesis in the range of 10 to 25 km.

4. The length of the base line in primarytriangulation is 8 to 12 km. Of these statements

(a) 1 and 2 are correct (b) 3 and 4 are correct(c) 1 and 4 are correct (d) 2 and 4 are correct

273. The linear error in a 50 m long traverse is 0.01 m.The angular error (in seconds) considering equalprecision will be(a) 81 (b) 41(c) 21.5 (d) zero

175


574. Mean sea level-at any place is the average datumof hourly tide height observed over a period of nearly(a) 5 years (b) 10 years(c) 20 years (d) 50 years

575. Excavation is to be made for a reservoir measuring20 m long, 12 m wide at the bottom and 2 m deep.The side slopes are to be 1 : 1 and the top to theflush with the ground which is level in the vicinity.As per prismoidal formula, the volume of excavationwill be(a) 610.33 m3 (b) 618.66 m3

(c) 625.00 m3 (d) 633.66 m3

576. For a sight inclined at 0° with the horizontal and thestaff held normal to the line of sight, the staffintercept is S. The horizontal distance D betweentacheometer attached with an anallatic lens and staffstation will be equal to (other symbols have theusual meanings)(a) kS cos + r sin 0(b) kS sin 0 + r cos 0(c) (kS + c) cos 0 + r sin 0(d) (kS + c) sin 0 + r cos 0

577. Given that for a triangulation surveyD = distance in kmh = visible horizon from a station of known elevationabove the datum (in metres) If there is noobstruction due to intervening ground, then h is equalto(a) 0.6735 D2 (b) 6.735 D2

(c) 0.06735 D2 (d) 0.006735 D2

578. The given table shows the bearings observed whiletraversing with a compass :LineFB BBAB 45° 45' 226° 10'BC 96° 55' 277° 5'CD 29° 45' 209° 10'DA 324° 48' 144° 48'Which one of the following pairs of stations isaffected by local attraction?(a) A and B (b) B and C(c) D and A (d) None of these

-------------

579. The increase in metacentric height(a) increases stability(b) decreases stability(c) increases comfort for passengers(d) all of these

580. If a vessel containing liquid moves down-ward witha constant acceleration equal to ‘g’ then(a) the pressure throughout the liquid mass is

atmospheric(b) there will be vaccum in the liquid(c) the pressure in the liquid mass is greater than

hydrostatic pressure(d) none of these

581. If velocity is zero over half of the cross-sectionalarea and is uniform over the remaining half, thenmomentum correction factor is(a) 1 (b) 3(c) 2 (d) 4

582. The magnitude of the component of velocity at point(1,1) for a stream function ‘I’ = x2— y2is equal to(a) 2 (b) 2(c) 4 (d) 4 -5

583. A fluid is a substance that(a) is essentially incompressible(b) has a viscosity that always decreases with

temperature(c) can not remain at rest when subjected to

a shearing stress(d) can not be subjected to shear forces

584. The mean velocities at two ends of a stream tube10 cm apart are 2.5 m/s and 3 m/s. The convectionaltangential acceleration mid-way is(a) zero (b) 0.5 m/ s2

(c) 13.75 m/s2 (d) not determinable585. When a particular discharge is flowing in a horizontal

pipe, a mercury-water U-tube manometer connectedto the entrance and throat of a venturimeter fittedin the pipe recorded a deflection of 25 cm. If thesame discharge flowed through the same pipe keptat an inclination of 45° to the horizontal, then thecorresponding deflection by the U-tube manometerwill be

176


(a) 25,5 cm (b) 25 / -5 cm(c) 22/2 cm (d) 25 cm

586. A harbour model has a horizontal scale of 1/150and a vertical scale of 1/60. The interval betweensuccessive high tides in the model will be nearly(a) 90 mins. (b) 40 mins.(c) 15 mins. (d) 5 hours

587. Which one of the following pressure units representsthej p,st pressure ?(a) Millibar (b) mm of mercury(c) N/mm2 (d) kgf/cm2

588. Two small orifices A and B of diameters 1 cm and2 cm, respectively, are placed on the sides of a tankat depths of h1 and h2 below the open liquidsurface. If the discharges through A and B areequal, then the ratio of h1 and h2 (assuming equalCd values) will be(a) 16 : 1 (b) 8 : 1(c) 4 : 1 (d) 2 : 1

589. A ping-pong ball, having a diameter of 3.6 cm andweighing 2.4 g, is served with a horizontal velocityof 10 m/sec and a spin that gives rise to a co-efficient of lift of 0.2. Assuming the density of airto be 0.00129 gf /cc, the lift experienced by the ballis nearly(a) 13 gf (b) 1.3 gf(c) 0.13 gf (d) 0.013 gf

590. Flow net is drawn for a two-dimensional boundary.The velocity of unifrom flow at approach is 1.2 m/s. The size of the square is 1.2 cm side. The sizeof the square at another location in the stream tubeis 0.5 cm. The velocity at this point is(a) 1.44 m/s (b) 2.4 m/s(c) 2.88 m/s (d) 3.4 m/s

591. A circular surface area 200 cm2 is inclined to thex and y axis such that the unit vector normal to thesurface is given by n = 0.4i + 0.3j. If a force of2000 kg acts on the x-axis, then the normal stresson the surface will be(a) 10 kg/cm2 (b) 5 kg/cm2

(c) 4 kg/cm2 (d) 3 kg/cm2

592. Given the x-component of the velocity u = 6xy -2x2, the y-component of the flow v is given by(a) 6y2 - 4xy (b) - 6xy + 2x2

(c) 5x2 - 2xy (d) 4xy - 3y2

593. A jet of water issues from a 5 cm diameter nozzle,held vertically upwards, at a velocity of 20 m/sec.If air resistance consumes 10% of the inital energyof the jet, then it would reach a height; above thenozzle, of(a) 18.35 m (b) 19.14 m(c) 19.92 m (d) 20.00 m

594. A hollow cylinder made of wood (sp, gr. = 0.88)has an external diameter of 1.0 m and an internaldiameter of 0.6 m. It floats in water with its axisvertical and is in stable equilibrium. This is possibleonly when the length of the cylinderis equal to orless than(a) 0.72 m (b) 0.95 m(c) 1.03 m (d) 1.20 m

595. A velocity field with no components in the y and zdirection is given by V = 6 + 2xy + t2

The• acceleration along the x-direction at a point(3, 1, 2) at time 2, is(a) 8 units (b) 16 units(c) 28 units (d) 36 units

596. A racing car with a partially filled fuel tank movesin the horizontal direction at a uniform accelerationequal to g. The free surface of the liquid fuel in thetank will assume a slope of(a) 20° (b) 30°(c) 45° (d) 60°

597. For laminar flow in a pipe of circular cross-section,the Darcy’s friction factor f is(a) directly proportional to Reynolds number and

independent of pipe wall roughness(b) directly proportional to pipe wall roughness

and independent of Reynolds number(c) inversely proportional to Reynolds number and

directly proportional to pipe wall roughness(d) none of these

598. When time of closure tc = L/vo (where L is lengthof pipe and vo is speed of pressure wave), theportion of pipe length subjected to maximum headis(a) L/4 (b) L/3(c) L/2 (d) L

177


599. The Hardy Cross method of hydraulic analysis ofpipe networks, besides satisfying the continuity andenergy principles, must also satisfy the conditionthat the(a) algebraic sum of the head losses around any

closed loop is zero(b) flow into any junction equals the outflow

from it.(c) flow in each pipe has head loss according to

Darcy-Weisbach or any other pipe head lossequation

(d) momentum principle is followed600. A penstock is 3000 metres long. Pressure wave

travels in it with a velocity of 1500 m/s. If theturbine gates are closed uniformly and completelyin a period of 4.5 seconds, then it is called(a) rapidclosure (b) slow closure(c) sudden closure (d) uniform closure

601. Select the non-dimensional parameter of thefollowing(a) specific weight(b) Manning’s coefficient n(c) angular velocity(d) specific gravity

602. Which of the following is not a non-dimensionalparameter ?(a) Froude number(b) Darcy-Weisbach friction factor(c) Chezy’s co-efficient(d) Mach number

603. If the physical quantities involved in a fluid flowphenomenon are discharge Q, diameter D,acceleration due to gravity g, dynamic viscosity IAand density p, then the number of it arameters neededto express the function F (Q D, g, m, p) = 0 are(a) 2 (b) 3(c) 4 (d) 5

604. In a 1 : 100 scale model of a harbour, the timewhich will correspond to the prototypetidal periodof 12 hours will be(a) 0.12 hour (b) 1.2 hours(c) 12 hours (d) 120 hours

605. A ship’s model of scale 1:100 had a wave resistanceof 1 kg at its design speed. The corresponding waveresistance in prototype will be(a) 100 kg (b) 10000 kg(c) 1000000 kg (d) 1000 kg

606. A model of reservoir is emptied in 10 minutes. Ifthe model scale is 1:25, the time taken by theprototype to empty itself, would be(a) 250 minutes (b) 50 minutes(c) 6250 minutes (d) 2 minutes

607. Water having kinematic viscosity of 0.01 stoke flowsat a velocity of 2m/sec in a pipe of 15 cm diameter.For dynamic similarity, the velocity of oil ofkinematic viscosity 0.03 stoke in a pipe of samediameter will be(a) 0.33 m/sec (b) 0.66 m/sec(c) 2 m/sec (d) 6 m/sec

608. In the model of a highway bridge constructed to ascale of 1:25, the force of water on the pier wasmeasured to be 0.5 kg. The force on the prototypepier will be(a) 7501.5 kg (b) 7622.5 kg(c) 7812.5 kg (d) 7916.5 kg

609. The depth ‘d’ below the free surface at which thepoint velocity is equal to the average velocity offlow for a uniform laminar flow with a free surface,will be(a) 0.423 D(b) 0.577 D(c) 0.223 D(d) 0.707 D where D is the depth of flow.

610. The distance y from pipe boundary, at which thepoint velocity is equal to average velocity forturbulent flow, is(a) 0.223 R(b) 0.423 R(c) 0.577 R(d) 0.707 R where R is radius of pipe.

611. In a laminar flow through a circular pipe of diameter20 cm, the maximum velocity is found to be 1 m/s. The velocity at a radial distance of 5 cm fromthe axis of the pipe will be(a) 0.25 m/s (b) 0.50 m/s

178


(c) 0.75 m/s (d) 1.0 m/s612. For laminar flow between parallel plates separated

by a distance 2h, head loss varies(a) directly as h (b) inversely as h(c) directly as h2 (d) inversely as h3

613. If Si and 82 denote the boundary layer thicknessesat a point distance x from the leading edge on a flatplate when the Reynolds numbers are 100 and 256respectively, then the ratio of 81 to 62 will be(a) 0.625 (b) 1.6(c) 2.56 (d) 4.96

614. If the specific energy at the upstream section of arectangular channel is 3 m and minimum specificenergy is 2.5 m, the maximum height of jump withoutcausing afflux will be(a) 0.50 m (b) 1.20 m(c) 2.50 m (d) 5.50 m

615. In a 2m wide rectangulAr channel uniform flowoccurs at a depth of 2m, the velocity of flow beingm/sec. The height of jump which can be raisedwithout causing afflux will be(a) 0 (b) 1 m(c) 2m (d) 3m

616. For a steep slope profile Sy the type of flow will be(a) super critical (b) critical(c) subcritical (d) normal

617. Which one of the following is the correctrepresentation of the sequence of surface profilesif the channel slope changes from mild to steep ?(a) M1, S1 (b) M3, S2

(c) M2, S3 (d) M2, S2

618. A hydraulic turbine has a discharge of 5 m3/sec,when operating under a head of 20 m with a speedof 500 rpm. If it is to operate under a head of 15m, for the same discharge, the rotational speed inrpm will approximately be(a) 433 (b) 403(c) 627 (d) 388

619. A turbine works at 20 m head and 500 rpm speed.Its 1 : 2 scale model to be tested at a head of 20m should have a rotational speed of nearly(a) 1000 rpm (b) 700 rpm(c) 500 rpm (d) 250 rpm

620. Cavitations in caused by(a) high velocity (b) low pressure(c) high pressure (d) high temperature

621. If the pump head is 75m, discharge is 0.46m3/s andmotor speed is 1440 rpm at rated condition, thespecific speed of the pump is about(a) 4 (b) 26(c) 38 (d) 1440

622. Water flows at a depth of 0.1m with a velocity of6m/ s in a rectangular channel. The alternate depthis(a) 0.30 m (b) 0.40 m(c) 0.86 m (d) 0.81 m

623. Water flows at a rate of 10m3/s in a rectangularchannel 3 m wide. The critical depth of flow is(a) 1.13 m (b) 2 m(c) 1.45 m (d) 1.04 m

624. In the Bernoulli equation, used in pipe flow, eachterm represents(a) Energy per unit weight(b) Energy per unit mass(c) Energy per unit volume(d) Energy per unit flow length

625. A 15 cm length of steel rod with relative density of7.4 is submerged in a two layer fluid. The bottomlayer is mercury and the top layer is water. Theheight of top surface of the rod above the ilquidinterface in ‘cm’ is(a) 8.24 (b) 7.82(c) 7.64 (d) 7.38

626. A trapezoidal channel with bottom width of 3m andside slope of 1V:1:5H carries a discharge of 8.0m3/sec with the flow depth of 1.5m. The Froudenumber of the flow is(a) 0.066 (b) 0.132(c) 0.265 (d) 0.528

627. In a 1/50 model of a spillway, the discharge wasmeasured to be 0.3m3/sec. The correspondingprototype discharge in m3/sec is(a) 2.0 (b) 15.0(c) 106.0 (d) 5303.0

628. In a lined rectangular canal, the Froude number ofincoming flow is 3.0. A hydraulic jump forms when

179


it meets the pool of water. The depth of flow afterthe jump formation is 1.51 m. Froude number offlow after the hydraulic jump is:(a) 0.30 (b) 0.71(c) 0.41 (d) none of these

629. A pump can lift water at a discharge of 0.15 m3/s to a head of 25 m. The critical cavitation number(ad for the pump is found to be 0.144. The pumpis to be installed at a location where the barometricpressure is 9.8 m of water and the vapour pressureof water is 0.30 m of water. The intake pipe frictionloss is 0.40 m. Using the minimum value of NPSH(Net Positive Suction Head), the maximum allowableelevation above the sump water surface at whichthe pump can be located is:(a) 9.80 m (b) 6.20 m(c) 5.50 m (d) none of these

630. A laboratory model of a river is built to a geometricscale of 1:100. The fluid used in the model is oil ofmass denisty 900 kg/m3. The highest flood in theriver is 10,000 m3/s. The corresponding dischargein the model shall be(a) 0.095 m3/s. (b) 0.100 m3/s.(c) 0.105 m3/s. (d) 10.5 m3/s.

631. Water is pumped from a well tapping an uncomfinedaquifer at a certain discharge rate and the steadystate drawdown (X) in an observation well ismonitored. Subsequently, the pumping discharge isdoubled and the steady state drawdown in the sameobservation well is found to be more than double(i.e., more than 2X). This is proportonate drawdownis caused by(a) well losses(b) decrease in the saturated thickness of the

aquifer(c) nonlinear flow(d) delayed gravity yield

632. A solid sphere (diameter 6 mm) is rising through oil(mass density 900 kg /m3, dynamic viscosity 0.7 kg/ ms) at a constant velocity of 1 cm/s. What is thespecific weight of the material from which the sphereis made? (Take g = 9.81 m/s2)(a) 4.3 kN/m3 (b) 5.3 kN/m3

(c) 8.7 kN/m3 (d) 12.3 kN/m3

A very wide rectangular channel carries a dischargeof 8 m3/s per m width. The channel has a bed slopeof 0.004 and Manning’s roughness cofficient,n = 0.015. At a certain section of the channel, theflow depth is 1 m.

633. What Gradually Varied Flow profile exist at thissection ?(a) M2 (b) M3

(c) S2 (d) S3

A pipeline (diameter 0.3 m, length 3 km) carrieswater from point P to point R (see figure). Thepiezometric heads at P and R are to be maintainedat 100m and 80 m, respectively. To increase thedischarge, a second pipe is added in parallel to theexistig pipe from Q to R. The lenght of the additionalpipe is also 2 km. Assume the friction factor,f = 0.04 for all pipes and ignor minor losses.

634. What is the increase in discharge if the additionalpipe has same diameter (0.3 m) ?(a) 0% (b) 33%(c) 41% (d) 67%

634. If there is a no restriction on the diameter of theadditional pipe, what would be the maximumincrease in discharge theoretically possible from thisarrangement ?(a) 0% (b) 50%(c) 67% (d) 73%

636. below, the reservoir is large. Its surface may beassumed to remain at a fixed elevation. A isconnected to a gas pipeline and the deflection notedon the inclined glass tube is 100 mm . Assuming0 = 30° and the manometric fluid as oil with specificgravity of 0.86, the pressure at A is(a) 43 mm water (vacuum)(b) 43 mm water(c) 86 mm water(d) 100 mm water

637. The x component of velocity in a two dimensionalincompressible flow is given by u=1.5 x. At thepoint (x, y) = (1, 0), they component of velocityv = 0. The equation for they component of velocityis(a) v = 0 (b) v =1.5y(c) v = -1.5x (d) v = -1.5y

180


638. An aircraft is flying in level flight at a speed of 200km/hr through air (density, p = 1.2 kg/m2, andviscosity m = 1.6 x 10-5 N-s /m2). The lift co-efficient at this speed is 0.4 and the drag co-efficientis 0.0065.The mass of the aircraft is 800 kg. The effectivelift area of the aircraft is(a) 21.2 m2 (b) 10.6 m2

(c) 2.2 m2 (d) 1.1 m2

639. A wide channel is 1 m deep and has a velocity offlow, V, as 2.13 m/s. If disturbance is caused, anelementary wave can travel upstream with a velocityof(a) 1.00 m/s (b) 2.13 m/s(c) 3.13 m/s (d) 5.26 m/s

640. A velocity field is given as V = 2yi + 3xj where xand y are in metres. The acceleration of the a fluidparticle at (x, y) = (1,1) in the x direction is(a) 0 m/s2 (b) 5.00 m/s2

(c) 6.00 m/s2 (d) 8.48 m/s2

641. A thin flat plate 0.5 m x 0.7 m in size settles in alarge tank of water with a terminal velocity of 0.12m/s.The co-efficient of drag CD = 1.328 /4RL for alaminar boundary layer and CD = 0.072/(R01/5 fora turbulent boundary layer, where Rv is the plateReynolds number.Assume µ = 10-3N-s/m2 and p = 1000 kg/m3.The submerged weight of the plate is(a) 0.0115 N (b) 0.0118 N(c) 0.0231 N (d) 0.0376 N

641. A fire protection system is supplied from a watertower with a bent pipe as shown in the figure. Thepipe friction f is 0.03. Ignoring all minor losses, themaximum discharge, Q, in the pipe is(a) 31.7 lit/sec (b) 24.0 lit/sec(c) 15.9 lit/sec (d) 12.0 lit/sec

642. A steep wide rectangular channel takes off from areservoir having an elevation of 101.2 m. Attheentrance, the bottom elevation of the channel is100 m. If the slope of the channel is increased by4%, the discharge per unit length in the channel willbe(a) 2.24 m2/s

(b) higher than 2.24 m2/ s by 4%(c) higher than 2.24 m2/s by 2%(d) choked

643. The velocity in m/s at a point in a two-dimensionalflow is given as V = 2i + 3j. The equation of thestream line passing through the point is(a) 3dx - 2dy = 0 (b) 2x + 3y = 0(c) 3dx + 2dy = 0 (d) xy = 6

644. The allowable net positive suction head (NPSH)for a pump provided by the manufacturer for aflow of 0.05 m3/s is 3.3 m. The temperature ofwater is 30°C (vapour pressure head absolute =0.44m), atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa absoluteand the head loss from the reservoir to pump is 0.3N-m/N. The maximum height of the pump abovethe suction reservoir is(a) 10.19 m (b) 6.89 m(c) 6.15 m (d) 2.86 m

645. The height of a hydraulic jump in the stilling pool of1.25 scale model was observed to be 10 cm. Thecorresponding prototype height of the jump is(a) not determinable from the data given(b) 2.5m(c) 0.5 m(d) 0.1 m

646. An inert tracer is injected continuously from a pointin an unsteady flow field. The locus of locations ofall the tracer particles at an instance of timerepresents(a) Streamline (b) Pathline(c) Streamtube (d) Straldine

647. In a constant head permeameter with cross sectionarea of 10cm2, when the flow was taking placeunder a hydraulic gradient of 0.5, the amount ofwater collected in 60 seconds is 600 cc. Thepermeability of the soil is(a) 0.002 cm/s (b) 0.02 cm/s(c) 0.2 cm/s (d) 2.0 cm/s

648. Critical depth at a section of a rectangular channelis 1.5 m. The specific energy at that section is(a) 0.75 m (b) 1.0 m(c) 1.5 m (d) 2.25 m

181


649. A partially open sluice gate discharges water into arectangular channel. The tailwater depth in thechannel is 3 m and Froude number is 1/ 2\J2. If afree hydraulic jump is to be formed at downstreamof the sluice gate after the vena contracta of the jetcoming out from the sluice gate, the sluice gateopening should be (coefficient of contraction)Cc = 0.9(a) 0.3 m (b) 0.4 m(c) 0.69 m (d) 0.9 m

650. A stream function is given by41= 2 x2 y + (x + 1) y2

The flow rate across a line joining pointsA (3, 0) and B (0, 2) is(a) 0.4 units (b) 1.1 units(c) 4 units (d) 5 units

651. Two observation wells penetrated into a confinedaquifer and located 1.5 km apart in the direction offlow, indicate head of 45 m and 20 m. If thecoefficient of permeability of the aquifer is 30 m/day and porosity is 0.25, the time of travel of aninert tracer from one will to another is(a) 416.7 days (b) 500 days(c) 750 days (d) 3000 days

652. A river model is made to a length scale ratio of 1/100 and depth scale ratio of 1/16. A peak dischargeof 25,600 m3/s in the river will be simulated in themodel with a discharge of(a) 10 cumec. (b) 4 cumec.(c) 1.6 cumec. (d) 0.64 cumec.

653. A rectangular channel of 2.5 m width and 2 mdepth of water carries a flow of 10 m3/s. Thespecific energy for the flow is given by(a) 1.18 m (b) 3.4 m/s(c) 2.0 m/s (d) 2.2 m

654. The head over a 90° V-notch weir increases from0.15 m to 0.3 m. the ratio of new discharge to theoriginal discharge is, nearly equal to(a) 5.65 (b) 1.42(c) 4.0 (d) 2.62

655. The velocity distribution for the flow between twoparallel plates 0.3 m apart is parabolic and themaximum velocity at the centre is 0.5 m/s. The rateof flow per unit length is

(a) 1 m3/s (b) 0 .01m3 / s(c) 10 m3/s (d) 0.1 m3/s

656. If the capillary rise of water in a 1 mm diametertube is 3 cm, the height of capillary rise of waterin a 0.2 mm diameter tube in cm will be(a) 1.5 (b) 7.5(c) 15 (d) 75

657. A jet of water of corss-sectional area = 0.015 m2

and velocity 15 m/s impinges normally on a platemoving with a velocity of 5 m/s in the direction ofthe jet. The force on the plate is (mass density ofwater =1000 kg /m3)(a) 70 N (b) 1500 N(c) 2250 N (d) 3375 N

658. A fan operating at n =1800 rpm and a volume flowrate, of 4.5 m3/s develops a head of 15 cm, measuredon a U-tube manometer filled with water. For ageometrically similar fan that will produce the samehead at the same efficiency, but at a speed ofn = 1200 rpm, the flow rate will be(a) 10.12 m3/s (b) 6.75 m3/s(c) 15.18 m3/s (d) 8.27 m3/s

659. A 300 mm diameter pipe of mild steel having 6 mmthickness carries water with a velocity of 3 m/s.What will be the rise in pressure if the valve at thedownstream is closed instantaneously?(E = Volume modulus of elasticity ofwater = 2 x 109 N/m2, p =1000 kg/m3)(a) 2424 kN/m2 (b) 4141 kN /m2

(c) 4242 kN/m2 (d) 4441 kN/m2

660. It has been observed for critical depth Y„ in arectangular channel carrying a constant dischargethat1. specific energy is maximum2. Froude number = 1.03. specific energy =1.33Y„4. specific force is minimumWhich of the above observations are correct?(a) 1, 2 and 3 (b) 2, 3 and 4(c) 1 and 4 (d) 2 and 4

661 The sequent depth ratio in a hydraulic jump formedin a horizontal rectangular channel is 16.48. The

182


flow is supercritical. What is the value of the Froudenumber of flow?(a) 4.0 (b) 8.0(c) 12.0 (d) 120.0

662. What is the ratio of the lift coefficient to dragcoefficient of an aerofoil section at stall ?(a) 1.5 (b) 3(c) 15 (d) 30

663. A very tiny sphere is settling down in a viscousfluid at Reynolds number = 0.2. What is the valueof its drag coefficient ?(a) 320 (b) 120(c) 80 (d) 5

664. Which one of the following statements is correct ?As the depth of immersion of a vertical planesurface increases, the location of centre of pressure(a) comes closer to the centre of gravity of

the area(b) moves apart from the centre of gravity of the

area(c) ultimately coincides with the centre of gravity

of the area(d) remains unaffected

665. What is the discharge corresponding to a criticaldepth of 1.20 m in a 3.0 m wide rectangular channel?(a) 4.12 m3/s (b) 4.94 m3/s(c) 8.24 m3/s (d) 12.35 m3/s

666. When the water surface coincides with the top edgeof a rectangular vertical gate 40 m (wide) x 3 m(deep), then the depth of centre of pressure is(a) 1 m (b) 1.5 m(c) 2m (d) 2.5 m

667. If the error in the measurement of head in a ‘Vnotch is 1%, then the error in the measurement ofdischarge will be(a) 1% (b) 1.5%(c) 2% (d) 2.5%

668. A two-dimensional flow is described by velocitycomponents u = 2x and v = -2y. The dischargebetween points (1,1) and (2, 2) is equal to(a) 9 units (b) 8 units(c) 7 units (d) 6 units

669. Given that atmospheric pressure head = 9m, vapourpressure head (max.) = lm, failure head = 40m andcavitation coefficient a = 0.15, the height at whichthe turbine can be set above the tail race level is(a) 6 m (b) 4 m(c) 3 m (d) 2 m

670. If the radius of the centrifugal pump impeller isreduced from 10 cm to 9 cm, the hewl developedby the pump will change from 10m to(a) 9m of water (b) 8.1m of water(c) 9.487m of water (d) 11.111 m of water

371. A spillway of an irrigation project is to be studiedby means of a model constructed to a scale of 1:9.The prototype discharge is 1000 m3/s. Neglectingthe viscous and surface tension effects, the requiredlfow rate for the model is(a) 12.35 m3/s (b) 111.11 m3/s(c) 4.11 m3/s (d) 1.37 m3/s

372. Which of the following fluids can be classified asnon-Newtonian ?1. Kerosene oil2. Diesel oil3. Human blood4. Toothpaste5. WaterSelect the correct answer using the codes givenbelow:(a) 1 and 2 (b) 3 and 4(c) 2 and 5 (d) 1 and 5

673. Consider the following statements related tobuoyancy in fluid statics :1. Principle of buoyancy is applicable both to

lfoating bodies and to submerged bodies.2. Archimedes formulated the first theory of

buoyancy3. In analyzing buoyancy of a floating body it is

assumed that the resultant vertical force passesthroligh centre of pressure.

4. In a free-body diagram of a floating bodysummation of all horizontal forces is taken aszero.

Which of these statements are correct ?(a) 1,3 and 4 (b) 1,2 and 4

183


(c) 1, 2 and 3 (d) 2, 3 and 4674. A thin smooth piate 1 m wide and 2 m long is

towed through water at a velocity of 2 m/s. Assumingthat boundary remains laminar (kinematic viscosity= 10-6m2/s), then drag on both sides of the plate is(a) 5.3 N (b) 26.6 N(c) 53 N (d) 72.5 N

675. The specific speed of a turbine under a head of 150m to develop 2000 HP while running at 300 r.p.m.is(a) 10 - 35 (b) 35 - 60(c) 60 - 300 (d) 300 - 1000

676. Oil (u = 0.44 Pa.s, p = 888 kg/m3) is filled in thespace between two parallel plates which are 18mm apart. The upper plate is moving at a velocityof 4 m/s. What is the shear stress on the plate ?(a) 97.8 Pa (b) 48.9 Pa(c) 79.8 Pa (d) 87.9 Pa

677. The velocity distribution for flow over a 4. plate isgiven by u = 0.5 y - y2 where u is the velocity in!m/s at a distance y meter above the plate. If thedynamic viscosity of the fluid is 0.9 Ns/m2, thenwhat is the shear stress at 0.20 m from theboundary ?(a) 0.9 N/m2 (b) 1.8 Wm2

(c) 2.25 N/m2 (d) 0.09 N/m2

678. A channel with a mild slope is followed by ahorizontal channel and then by a steep channel.What gradually varied flow profiles will occur ?(a) M1, H1, S1 (b) M2, H2, S2

(c) M1, H2, S3 (d) M1, H2, S2

679. Identify the FALSE statement from the following:The specific speed of the pump increases with(a) increase in shaft speed(b) increase in discharge(c) decrease in gravitational acceleration(d) increase in head

680. A thin-walled long cylindrical tank of inside radiusr is subjected simultaneously to internal gas pressurep and axial compressive force F at its ends. Inorder to produce ‘pure shear’ state of stress in thewall of the cylinder, F should be equal to(a) TE pr2 (b) 2rc pr2

(c) 3.7c pr2 (d) 4rt pr2

681. The flow of glycerin (kinematic viscosity v = 5 x 10-4 m2/s) in an open channel is to be modeled in alaboratory flume using water (v = 10 -6 m2/s) asthe flowing fluid. If both gravity and viscosity areimportant, what should be the lenght scale (i.e. ratioof prototype to model dimensions) for maintainingdynamic similarity?(a) 1 (b) 22(c) 63 (d) 500

682. A flat plate of 0.15 m2 is pulled at 20 cm/s relativeto another plate, fixed at a distance of 0.02 cmfrom it with a fluid having = 0.0014 Ns/m2

separating them. What is the power required tomaintain the motion ?(a) 0.014 W (b) 0.021 W(c) 0.035 W (d) 0.042 W

683. A triangular lamina is immersed in water with itsapex downwards and base 1 meter below watersurface. If its base width and height are 1.5 m and1.8 m respectively, total pressure on the trianglewill be(a) 2090 N (b) 21190 N(c) 2290 N (d) 2450 N

Common Data Q . (149-150)A cylindrical gate 3 m in diameter rests on the crest of adam. Assume water level upto the top of gate684. Horizontal components of water pressure acting per

meter length of gate will be(a) 42145 N (b) 43145 N(c) 44145 N (d) 45145 N

685. Vertical component of water pressure acting permeter length of gate will be(a) 46671 N (b) 34671 N(c) 5464 N (d) None of these

Common Data Q. (151-152)A circular plate of 0.3 m diameter is immersed in waterat an water at an inclination of 60° to the free surfacewith its top edge lm below the water surface.151. Total pressure will be

184


(a) 962.23 N (b) 80.113 N(c) 783.5 N (d) 866.23 N

686. Centre of pressureon the plate will be(a) 4.69 m (b) 1.337 m(c) 6.496 m (d) 2.336 m

687. A closed cubical box 1 m on edge is made of uniformsheet and weighs 5.34 kN. What will be itsmetacentric height when placed in an oil of sp.gravity 0.90 with sides vertical ?(a) 0.06 m (b) 6.74m(c) 0.09 m (d) 0.674 m

688. An inclined rectangular sluice gate AB (1.2 m x 5m size) is installed to contrl the discharge of water.End A is hinged. What is the force normal to thegate applied at B to open it ? The angle of inclinationof plate is 45°.(a) 198.65 kN (b) 156.68 kN(c) 186.65 kN (d) 138.81 kN

689. Water flows at a velocity of 2m/sec through a 90cm diameter pipe at the rate of which there is areducer connected it to a 60 cm diameter pipe. Ifgauge pressure at the entrance to the reducer is 4.0kg/cm2, what is the resultant thrust assuming thatloss of head in the reducer is 1.5 m of water ?(a) 14451 kgf(b) 14461 kgf(c) 14471 kgf(d) 14481 kgfA 40 nun diameter jet of water strikes normallyagainst a plate held in position and causes a forceof 900 N on the plate.

690. The jet velocity will be(a) 29.854 m/s (b) 26.765 m/s(c) 559.64 m/s (d) 34.846 m/s

691. Discharge will be(a) 0.3964 m3/s (b) 0.0436 m3/s(c) 0.03371 m3/ s (d) 6.049 m3/s

692. Resultant force on the vane shown in figure, if awater jet of 50 mm. diameter and 20.0 m/s velocitystrikes the vane tangential and is deflected withoutfriction, will be(a) 1247 N

(b) 1347 N(c) 1447 N(d) 1547 N

393. For the sluice gate shown in the figure, forcerequired to hold the gate in place will be (assumegate width to be 2.0 m.)(a) 15.2 Nm(b) 16.2 Nm(c) 17.2 Nm(d) 18.2 Nm

394. Given figure indicates a platform which can rotateabout an axis through M (normal to the plane of thefigure). A jet of water is directed out from thecenter of the platform while it is stationary andstrikes a vane at the periphery which turns the jetthrough 90° as shown. The torque developed willbe(a) 1.51 Nm(b) 2.51 Nm(c) 3.51 Nm(d) 4.51 Nm

695. If = 2xy, then IF will be(a) (y2- x2) + C(b) (y2 + x2) + C(c) (x2- Y2) + C(d) none of theseHere C is a numerical constant.

696. Water is flowing through a 20 cm diameter pipewith friction factor, f = 0.04. The shear stress at apoint 4 cm from the pipe axis is 0.0098 N/cm2. Theshear stress at the pipe wall will be(a) 3.5648 N/cm2 (b) 0.0245 N/cm2

(c) 0.0946 N/cm2 (d) 9.620N/cm2

697. What is the velocity of flow of oil u = 0.5 poise,density 800 kg/m’ through a pipe of diameter 9 mmand 12 m long when the head lost is 0.75 m ?(a) 24.8 mm/s (b) 34.6 mm/s(c) 29.6 mrn/s (d) 39.6 mm/s

698. What is the critical velocity of water at 20 °Cflowing through a 20 cm diameter pipe ? Takekinematic viscosity of water at 20 °C = 0.0101stoke. Assume that the changes from laminar toturbulent at R = 2320.

185


(a) 1.946 cm/sec (b) 6.239 cm/sec(c) 2.934 cm/sec (d) 1.117 cm/sec

699. Crude oil of kinematic viscosity 2.25 stokes flowsthrough a 20cm diameter pipe, the rate of flowbeing 1.5 litres/sec. The Reynolds number will be(a) 624.29 (b) 742.9(c) 424.4 (d) 26.296

700. Water flows through a 8 mm diameter 350 m longpipe at a velocity of 25 cm per second. Maximumtemperature of water for laminar flow will be.Specific weight may be assumed to be constant.Take the flow to be laminar when the Reynoldsnumber does not exceed 2000.(a) 64.249° C (b) 20.32° C(c) 34.294° C (d) 24.96° C

701. A 0.20 m diameter pipe 20 km long transports oil ata flow rate of 0.01 m3/s. The power required tomaintain the flow if dynamic viscosity and densityof oil are 0.08P and 900 kg/m’, respectively, will be(a) 405 KW (b) 808 KW(c) 908 KW (d) 306 KW

702. A 400 m long horizontal pipe is to deliver 900 kg ofoil (S = 0.9, v = 0.002 m2/s) per minute. If headloss is not to exceeds 8 m of oil, the pipe diameterwill be (Friction factor in laminar flow, f = 64/Re).(a) 0.2728 m (b) 0.394 m(c) 0.7898 m (d) 2.648 m

703. Glycerine (u =1.5 Pas and p = 1260 kg /m3) flowsat a mean velocity of 5 m/s in a 100 mm diameterpipe.What is the power expended by the flow in adistance of 12 m ?(a) 1564.96 W (b) 124.94 W(c) 1409.43 W (d) 11309.73 W

Common Data Q.( 172-173)A rectangular plate lm long and 30 cm wide is draggedlengthwise in a stream with a velocity 4 m/s. Specificweight of liquid = 11.8N/m3 and kinematic viscosity= 1.49 x 10-5 m2s.704. What is the drage on both sides of plate?

(a) 1.649 x 10-3 (b) 1.494 x 10-9

(c) 1.62 x 10-2 (d) 1.94 x 10-6

705. What will be the drag if the plate is towed breadthwise?(a) 4.24 x 10-11 N (b) 6.24 x 10-6N(c) 2.94 x 10-9N (d) 2.94 x 10-2 N

706. A truck having a projected area of 6.5 m2 travellingat 80 km/h experiences a total resistance of 2 kN.Out of this, 25% is due to rolling friction, 15% dueto surface friction and the remaining 60% due toform drage. What is the coefficient of form drage?(assume specific weight of air as 12 N/m2).(a) 0.54 (b) 0.58(c) 0.74 (d) 0.82

Linked Answers Q. (175-176)A ping pong ball weighing 0.025 N and having a diameterof 3.5 cm is served in such a manner that it moves overthe net in a horizontal direction with a velocity of 15 m/s and a forward spin of 90 revolutions/second.707. What is instant acceleration?

(a)79.5 m/s2 (b) 69.5 m/s2

(c) 72.5 m/s2 (d) 62.5 m/s2

708. What is the upward force(a) 0.12 N (b) 0.15 N(c) 0.16 N (d) 0.24 N

Common Data Q. (177-178)Electric transmission towers, 10 m high are fixed 400 mapart to support 10 cables, each of 2 cm diameter,709. What is the moment acting at the base of each

tower when a wind flows with a velocity of 100km/h ?Pair = 1.2 kg/m3 and m(air) = 1.6x 10-5 kg/m s.(a) 29.62 KNm (b) 21.72 KNm(c) 19.6 KNm (d) 17.5 KNm

710. What frequency of vortex shedding?(a) 223 Hz (b) 243 Hz(c) 263 Hz (d) 273 Hz

711. An aeroplane weights 24 kh and has an area of 35m2. If coefficient of lift varies linearly from 0.3 to0.8 while the angle of attack varies from 0° to 8°,then angle of attack for the aeroplane speed of 150km/h, will be (Assume : pair =1.1 kg/m3)(a) 66.24° (b) 9.26°

186


(c) 7.24° (d) 6.67°712. A flat disc of 10 cm diameter rotates on a table

separated by an oil film of 1.5 mm thickness. If thetorque to rotate the disc at 50 RPM is 3 x 10-5 kg-m, What is viscosity of the oil in centipoise?(Assume suitable velociy profile).(a) 0.624 Poise (b) 0.0429 Poise(c) 0.468 Poise (d) 0.0926 Poise

713. What is the shear stress at a point in a glycerinemass in motion if velocity gradient is 0.25 metre persec/per metre? The density and kinematic viscosityof glycerine ate 129.3 slug/metre and 6.30 x 10-4

m2 per second respectively.(a) 0.06492 kgm2 (b) 7.246 kgm2

(c) 0.02036 kg/m2 (d) 2.248 kgm2

714. What power is needed per km length of pipe tomaintain a flow of 600 liters /s in a 60 cm diameterpipe (rough)? Take height of roughness protrusionsas 0.30 cms.(a) 64.5 H.P (b) 91.6 H.P(c) 93.6 H.P (d) 86.4 H.P

Common Data Q. (183-184)A 25 cm diameter pipe cerries air (p = 1.22 kg/m3,v = 1.5 x 10-5m2/s) at an average velocity of 8.0 m/s. Theequivalent and grain roughness on the pipe surface is 0.8mm. The flow is detected to be fully mesh turbulent.715. What is friction factor ?

(a) 0.0165 (b) 0.0195(c) 0.0265 (d) 0.0285

716. What is boundary shear stress ?(a) 0.2 pa (b) 0.24 pa(c) 0.25 pa (d) 0.26 Pa

717. The pipe wall roughness height k for a new castiron pipe is 0.26 mm. After three years of service,it becomes 0.41 mm. What will be its value after 18years ?(a) 1.06 mm (b) 1.16 mm(c) 1.26 mm (d) 1.46 mm

718. Given : Free stream velocity = 10 m/s Boundarylayer thickness = 25 mm Mass density of fluid =1.25 kg/m3; OM= 0.097. The loss of momentumdue to formation of boundary layer will be

(a) 0.1 N/m (b) 0.2 N/m(c) 0.3 N/m (d) 0.4 N/m

719. Water is flowing over a thin smooth plate of length5 m and width 2 m at a velocity if 1.0 m/s. Ifboundary layer flow changes from laminar toturbulent at a Reynolds number of 5 x105, thendistance from leading edge upto which boundarylayer is laminar, will be (Assume ,u = 0.01 poise).(a) 0.2 m (b) 0.4 m(c) 0.5 m (d) 0.6 m

720. The ratio of friction drag on the front half and rearhalf of the flat plate kept at zero incidence in astream of uniform velocity, if the boundary layer islaminar over the whole plate, will be(a) 1.414 (b) 1.824(c) 2.414 (d) 2.824

721. A rectangular channel is to carry 1.3 m3/s at aslope of 0.009. If the channel is lined with galvanizediron, n = 0.0011, what is the minimum of squaremeters of metal needed for each 100 m of channel ?Neglect free board.(a) 171.2 m2 (b) 192.2 m2

(c) 221.2 m2 (d) 326.2 m2

Common Data Q. (191-192)A certain stretch of a lined channel has one vertical sideand the other 45° sloping wall. It is to deliver water at 30m3/s with a velocity of 1 m/s722. Flow depth for minimum lining area will be

(a) 2.96 m (b) 3.24 m(c) 3.96 m (d) 4.38 m

723. Width for minimum lining area will be(a) 3.6 m (b) 3.9 m(c) 4.2 m (d) 5.6 m

724. Two depths having specific energy of 1.83 m for2.80 m3/s-m are(a) 1.69m, 0.516m (b) 1.69m, 0.624 m(c) 1.89m, 0.516m (d) 1.89m, 0.624 m

Common Data Q. (194-195)A rectangular channel is 4m wide and of water is 2 m.The bed slope is 1 in 1000, and water depth at the entranceis not changed

187


725. Minimum width of throat will be(a) 1.98 m (b) 2.98 m(c) 3.98 m (d) 4.28 m

726. Maximum height of hump to produce critical depthwill be (n = 0.015.)(a) 0.4 m (b) 0.3 m(c) 0.2 m (d) none of these

727. If width is reduced to 2.8 m, what will be the changein upstream water level ?(a) 10.7 cm (b) 11.7 cm(c) 12.7 cm (d) 14.7 cm

728. If hump is raised to 45 cm, then upstream depthwill increase by(a) 4.7 cm (b) 5.7 cm(c) 6.7 cm (d) 9.7 cm

729. For the same change in upstream flow depth of 6.7cm, what is the width of constriction will be ?(a) 2.675 m (b) 2.775 m(c) 2.875 m (d) 2.975 m

730. If = 1 and water to be flown is 16.865 m3/s, y1Minimum constricted width, for no changes inupstream flow depth, will be(a) 2.762 m (b) 3.232 m(c) 3.762 m (d) 3.922 m

731. If y1=1 and water to be flown in 16.865m3/s, thenbed slope will be(a) 1 in 15 (b) 1 in 25(c) 1 in 35 (d) 1 in 45

732. If width is reduced to 3.5 m, what will be the changein upstream flow depth?(a) 6 cm (b) 7 cm(c) 8 cm (d) 9 cm

733. If a rectangular cannel 4 m wide and depth ofwater is 1 m carries 16.865 m3/s. What is the slopeof the channel ? What is the type of flow andmaximum height of hump if upstream flow depthhas not to change ?(a) 6.1 cm (b) 7.1 cm(c) 8.1 cm (d) 9.1 cm

734. A rectangular channel has a width of 2 m andcaries a discharge of 4.8 m3/s with a depth of 1.6m. At a certain section, a small smooth hump witha flat top and of height 0.1 m is proposed to be

built. What w:II likely be the change in watersurface ? (Neglect the energy loss).(a) 1.20 m (b) 1.38 m(c) 1.48 m (d) 1.68 m

Linked Answers Q. (204-205)A rectangular 4 m wide carries discharge of 12 m3/s ata depth of 2 m. The flow is suddenly stopped by thecomplete closure gate at the downstream.735. Height of the surge produced will be

(a) 0.527 m (b) 0.627 m(c) 0.727 m (d) none of these

736. Velocity surge produced will be(a) 2.12 m/s (b) 3.12 m/s(c) 4.12 m/s (d) 5.12 m/s

737. What is the slope of free water surface of arectangular stream 15 m wide and 3 m deep, ifslope of the stream bed is 1 in 5000 and totaldischarge is 29 m3/s? Assume Chezy’s C = 65 ?(a) 1 in 3200 (b) 1 in 4800(c) 1 in 6400 (d) 1 in 9200

Linked Answers Q. (207-208)An overflow spilway is 40 m high. At the design energyhead 2 m over the spilway,738. Sequent depths will be

(a) 0.21m, 5.9 m (b) 0.3 m, 5.9 m(c) 0.21m, 6.9 m (d) 0.21m, 7.9 m

739. What is the energy loss in the hydraulic jump onthe horizontal apron at the toe of the spillway?(Neglect energy loss due to flow over spillway face.= 0.738).(a) 24 m (b) 30 m(c) 36 m (d) 48 m

740. The conjugate depths at a location in a horizontalretangular channel 4 m wide are 0.2. and 1.0 m.Discharge in the channel will be(a) 2.23 m3/s (b) 2.83 m3/s(c) 3.23 m3/s (d) 3.83 m3/s

741. A trapezoidal channel with base width 6 m and sideslope 2H to 1V conveys water as 16 m3/s with aflow depth of 1.5 m. Froude number will be(a) 0.18

188


(b) 0.28(c) 0.38(d) 0.48

742. A rectangular channel carrying a supercritical streamis to be provided with a hydraulic-jump type ofeneirtdissipator. If it is desired to have an energyloss of 5m in the jump when inlet Froude numberis 8.5, the sequent depths approximately will be(a) 0.2 m, 2.3 m(b) 0.3 m, 2.3 m(c) 0.2 m, 3.3 m(d) 0.3 m, 3.3 m

------------------

743. What is the safe stopping sight distance for designspeed of 50 kmph two way traffic on a two laneroad assuming co-efficient of friction as 0.37 andreaction time as 2.5 second?(a) 55.2 m (b) 61.4 m(c) 71.5 m (d) 65.6 m

744. What is the stopping sight distance for design speedof 80 kmph for two way traffic on a single laneroad. Assume co-efficient of friction as 0.35 andreaction time as 2 sec?(a) 116.47 m (b) 122 m(c) 232.94 m (d) 244 m

745. What is the minimum sight distance required to avoida head-on collision of two cars approaching fromthe opposite directions at 90 and 60 kmph? It isgiven that the reaction time in 2.5 second, co-efficientof friction is 0.7 and a break efficiency is 50 percentin either case.(a) 153.6 m (b) 82.2 m(c) 71.4 m (d) 235.8 m

746. What is the stopping sight distance on a highway ata ascending gradient of 5% for a design speed of70 kmph assuming co-efficient of friction as 0.35and reaction time as 2 sec ?(a) 80 m (b) 87.14 m(c) 95 m (d) 100 m

747. What is the value of intermediate sight distance fora highway with a design speed of 65 kmph?

Assuming the data for co-efficient of frictionf = 0.36 and for reaction time t = 2.5 sec.(a) 91.4 m (b) 182.8 m(c) 80 m (d) 160 m

748. The speed of overtaking and overtaken vehiclesare 70 and 40 kmph respectively on a two waytraffic road. If acceleration of overtaking vehicle is0.99 respectively, then safe overtaking sight distance,assuming reaction time of 2 sec, will be(a) 278 m (b) 250 m(c) 145 m (d) 160 m

749. What is the minimum length of overtaking zone fora design speed of 96 kmph assuming accelerationas 0.69 m/s2, reaction time as 2 sec and trafficroad as one way ?(a) 342 rn (b) 684 m(c) 1026 m (d) 1710 m

750. The radius of horizontal circular curve is 100 m. Ifdesign speed is 50 kmph and design co-efficient oflateral friction is 0.15, then super elevation requiredif full lateral friction is assumed to develop will be(a) 0.037 (b) 0.047(c) 0.057 (d) 0.067

751. What is the coefficient of friction needed if no superelevation is provided for a horizontal circular curveof radius 190 m and design speed of 65 kmph ?(a) 0.155 (b) 0.165(c) 0.175 (d) 0.185

752. What is the equilibrium superelevation if pressureon inner and outer wheels should be equal? Giventhat radius of the horizontal circular curve is 100 mand design speed is 50 kmph(a) 0.197 (b) 0.187(c) 0.177 (d) 0.207

753. Ruling minimum radius of horizontal curve of anational highway in plain terrain for a ruling designspeed of 100 kmph with e = 0.07. and f = 0.15, isclose to(a) 250 m (b) 360 m(c) 36 m (d) 300 m

754. Design rate of superelevation for horizontal highwaycurve of radius 450 m for a mixed traffic condition,having a speed of 125 km/hour, is

189


(a) 1.0 (b) 0.05(c) 0.07 (d) 0.154

755. The effect of grade on safe overtaking sight distanceis to(a) increase it on descending grades and to

decrease it on ascending grades(b) decrease it on descending grades and to

increase it on ascending grades(c) increase it on both descending and

ascending grades(d) increase it on both descending and ascending

grades756. Which of the following is taken into consideration

while determining overtaking sight distance in fourlane highway ?(a) Distance covered during reaction time(b) Distance covered during overtaking operation(c) Reaction distance plus overtaking distance(d) Distance covered during reaction time plus

distance covered during operation plusdistance covered by the opposing traffic

757. For a constant value of co-efficient of lateral friction,the value of required super elevation increases with(a) increase in both speed and radius of curve(b) decrease in both speed and radius of curve(c) increase in speed and with decrease in

radius of curve(d) decrease in speed and with increase in radius

of curve758. On a horizontal curve, if the pavement is kept

horizontal across the alignment, then the pressureon the outer wheels will be(a) more than the pressure on inner wheels(b) less than pressure on inner wheels(c) equal to the pressure on inner wheels(d) zero

759. What is the mechanical widening required for apavement of width 7 m on a horizontal curve ofradius 250 m if the longest wheel base of vehicleexpected on the road is 7.0 m ?(a) 0.166 m (b) 0.176 m(c) 0.186 m (d) 0.136 m

760. What is the psychological widening of a pavementon a horizontal curve of radius 230 m for rulingdesign speed 80 kmph ?(a) 0.455 m (b) 0.555 m(c) 0.655 m (d) 0.755 m

761. For design, that length of transition curve should betaken which is(a) based on allowable rate of change of centrifugal

acceleration(b) based on rate of change of super elevation(c) higher of (a) and (b)(d) smaller of (a) and (b)

762. Rate of change of centrifugal acceleration for thedesign speed of 65 kmph is(a) 0.67 m/sec3 (b) 0.57 m/sec3

(c) 0.77 m/sec3 (d) 0.60 m/sec3

763. Clearance distance or set back distance requiredfrom the centre line of a horizontal curve to anobstruction on the inner side of the curve dependsupon(a) required sight distance, S(b) radius of horizontal curve R(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

764. Shift of the transition curve of radius 300 m andlength 48 m is(a) 0.32 m (b) 0.42 m(c) 0.52 m (d) 0.62 m

765. In case of summit curve, deviation angle will bemaximum when a/an(a) ascending gradient meets with another

ascending gradient(b) ascending gradient meets with a

descending gradient(c) descending gradient meets with another

descending gradient(d) ascending gradient meets with a level surface

766. Length of a summit curve for a stopping sightdistance of 160 m on a National Highway at thejunction of a rising gradient of 1.5% and a fallinggradient of 2% is approximately(a) 204 m (b) 29 m(c) 13 m (d) 1.3 m

190


767. With increase in speed of the traffic stream, theminimum spacing of vehicles(a) increases(b) decreases(c) first decreases and then increases after reaching

a minimum value at optimum speed(d) first increases and then decreases after reaching

a maximum value at optimum speed768. Length of a vehicle affects

(a) width of traffic lanes(b) extra width of pavement and minimum

turning radius(c) width of shoulders and parking facilities(d) clearance to be provided under structures such

as overbridges, underbridges etc.769. Which of the followings statement (s) is/are correct?

(a) Traffic volume should always be more thantraffic capacity

(b) Traffic capacity should always be more thantraffic volume

(c) Spot speed is the average speed of a vehicle ata specified section

(d) 85th percentile speed is more than 98thpercentile speed

770. With increase in speed of the traffic stream, themaximum capacity of the lane(a) increases(b) decreases(c) first increases and then decreases after reaching

a maximum value at optimum speed(d) first decreases and then increases after reaching

a minimum value at optimum speed771. If stopping distance and average length of a vehicle

are 18 m and 6 m respectively, then theoreticalmaximum capacity of a traffic lane at a speed of10 m/sec is(a) 1500 vehicle per hour(b) 2000 vehicle per hour(c) 2500 vehicle per hour(d) 3000 vehicle per hour

772. When speed of traffic flow becomes zero, thentraffic density

(a) attains maximum value whereas trafficvolume becomes zero

(b) and traffic volume both attain maximum value(c) and traffic volume both becomes zero(d) becomes zero whereas traffic volume attains

maximum value773. If average centre to centre spacing of vehicle is 20

metre, then basic capacity of a traffic lane at aspeed of 50 kmph is(a) 2500 vehicles per day(b) 2000 vehicles per day(c) 2500 vehicles per hour(d) 1000 vehicles per hour

774. On a right angle road inter-section with two waytraffic, the total number of conflict points is(a) 6 (b) 11(c) 18 (d) 24

775. What is the off-tracking of a vehicle of wheel loose6.5 m while negotiating a curved path with a meanradius 32 m?(a) 0.56 m (b) 0.46 m(c) 0.66 m (d) 0.76 m

776. In a braking test, a vehicle travelling at a speed of80 kmph was stopped by applying brakes fully andthe skid marks were 5.8 m in length. Then averageskid resistance of the pavement surface is(a) 0.51 ( (b) 0.61(c) 0.41 ( (d) 0.71

777. If a vehicle travelling at 40 kmph was stopped wtihin1.8 seconds after the application of the brakes, thenaverage skid resistance is(a) 0.43 (b) 0.53(c) 0.63 (d) 0.73

778. A vehicle moving at 40 kmph speed was stoppedby applying the brake and the length of skid markwas 12.2 m. If average skid resistance of thepavement is known to be 0.70, then the brakeefficiency of test vehicle will be(a) 61.2% (b) 51.4%(c) 74% (d) 71.2%

779. In which of the following traffic signal systems,cycle length and cycle division automatically varied ?(a) Simultaneous system

191


(b) Alternate system(c) Simple progressive system(d) Flexible progressive system

780. Drive ways are(a) road connecting highways with commercial

establishments like fuel stations.(b) provided near public conveniences with guide

maps(c) provided along the roads to serve as an

emergency lane for vehicle compelled to betaken out of the road way

(d) also called expressways781. Which of the following pair is not correctly matched?

(a) Width of all vehicles - 2.50 m(b) Height of single-decked vehicle - 3.80 m(c) Height of double-decked vehicle - 7.5 m(d) Length of single unit truck with two or more

axles -11.00 m782. 30th highest hour volumes is

(a) average of the 30 peak hour volumes in a month(b) hourly volume which is exceeded by only 30

hours in a year(c) hourly volume which is exceeded by only

29 hours in a year(d) average of the 30 highest hourly volumes in a

year.783. Commutative speed distribution curve is usually

adopted for geometric design of highway. Thepercentile speed adopted for geometric design is(a) 85th percentile speed(b) 90th percentile speed(c) 98th percentile speed(d) 99.9th percentile speed

784. Which one of the following pair is not correctlymatched ?Vehicle class Equivalentry Factors (PCU)(a) Passenger car, tampo - 1(b) Bus, Truck - 3(c) Two wheeler automobile - 0.5(d) Small bullock cart - 4

785. If average space gap between vehicles to followthe relation

s = 0.278 Vt,where V = stream speed taken as 40 kmpht = average reaction time = 0.7 secthen theoretical capacity of a traffic lane with oneway traffic flow will be (assume average length ofvehicle = 5.0 m) in vehicle/hour/lane(a) 2520 (b) 3130(c) 3250 (d) 3740

786. If free mean speed on a roadway is found to be 80kmph under stopped condition and average spacingbetween vehicles is 6.9 m, then capacity flow willbe(a) 1500 vehicle /h/lane(b) 2000 vehicle/h/lane(c) 2900 vehicle /h/lane(d) 3200 vehicle/h/lane

787. On a right angled road inter-section with two lane,two-way traffic, total number of potential conflictpoints will be(a) 22 (b) 24(c) 16 (d) 32

788. Traffic conflicts that may occur in a rotary inter-section are(a) merging and diverging(b) crossing and merging(c) crossing and diverging(d) crossing, merging and diverging

789. Gravity model is used in transportation planningprocess for(a) model split (b) trip distribution(c) trip generation (d) trip assignment

790. In desire line diagram(a) width of desire line is proportional to the number

of trips in one direction(b) length of desire line is proportional to the number

of trips in both direction(c) width of desire line is proportional to the

number of trips in both directions(d) both length and width of desire line one

proportional to the number of trips in bothdirections

791. A traffic rotary is justified where

192


(a) number of interesting roads is between 4and 7

(b) space is limited and costly(c) when traffic volume is less than 500 vehicles

per hour(d) when traffic volume is more than 5000 vehicles

per hour792. Maximum number of vehicles can be parked with

(a) parallel parking (b) 30° angle parking(c) 45° angle parking (d) 90° angle parking

793. The entrance and exit curves of a rotary have(a) equal radii and equal width of pavement(b) equal radii but pavement width is more at

entrance than at exit curve(c) equal pavement widths but radius is more at

entrance curve than at exit curve(d) different radii and different widths of

pavements794. As per IRC-recommendations, the average level of

illumination on important roads carrying fast trafficis(a) 10 lux (b) 15 lux(c) 20 lux (d) 30 lux

795. A rotary will be more suitable than control by signalsin situations listed against(a) traffic volume entering from all roads is less

than 300 vehicle per hour(b) a road is in a hilly region(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

796. In soil stabilisation(a) sub-grade should be treated if it has a soaked

CBR of 5 or less(b) sub-bases, after treatment, should have plasticity

index not less than 5(c) Base courses after treatment should have

plasticity index of not more than 2 and a VBRin excess of 100

(d) none of these797. If in a Dorry abrasion test the loss in weight is 21

gms, then coefficient of hardness is(a) 9.5 (b) 13(c) 17 (d) 21

798. The best binder material to be used with stoneaggregates for patch repair work to patch pot holeson wet pavements during the rainy season whentraffic is also heavy, is(a) clay soil(b) rapid curing cutback bitumen(c) hot bitumen(d) bituminous emulsion

799. Which of the following statements is/are correct?(a) Float test is conducted to check the consistency

of the bitumen.(b) Pensky-Markens Test is conducted to determine

the fire point of the bitumen.(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

800. Which one of the following pair is not correctlymatched ?(a) Disintegration of aggregates — Soundness

due to weathering(b) The removal of material from—Abrasion the

surface of the road by grinding action(c) Mutual rubbing or grinding — Attrition

within the mass under the action of traffic(d) Breaking up of road surface —

Disintegration layer through cracking intoirregular shaped areas

801. For detecting whether a bitumen is cracked (overheated) or not, the test/(s) performed is/are(a) Spot test(b) Float Test(c) Ductility Test.(d) all of these

802. In which of the following types of bituminousconstructions is proportionating of materialsdetermined from laboratory tests ?(a) Grouted macadam(b) Premix carpet(c) Bituminous or asphaltic concrete(d) Bituminous macadam

803. Recommended grade of tar for grouting purpose is(a) RT - 1 (b) RT - 2(c) RT -3 (d) RT - 5

193


804. Correct order of the following layers from top tobottom is1. Sub-base course2. Base course3. Wearing course4. Sub-grade(a) 3,1, 4, 2 (b) 3,2,1, 4(c) 3,2, 4, 1 (d) 3,4,1, 2

805. Bankelman beam deflection method is used fordesign of(a) rigid overlay on rigid pavement(b) flexible overlay on flexible pavement(c) flexible overlay on rigid pavement(d) rigid overlay on flexible pavement

806. In the group index method of flexible pavementdesign, which of the following factors decidesthickness of the base and surface course ?(a) Percentage of sub-grade soil passing 75 micron

sieve(b) Type of surface and base course material(c) Daily volume of commercial vehicles(d) Percentage of liquid limit of sub-grade soil

807. CBR value of sub-grade soil is 5%. If 4100 kgwheel load and tyre pressure 6 kg/cm2, thenthickness of pavement will be (using U.S. corpsformula)(a) 35.5 cm (b) 45.5 cm(c) 55.5 cm (d) 65.5 cm

808. Traffic survey revealed the present ADTcommercial vehicles as 1200. The annual rate ofgrowth of traffic is 8%. If pavement is to becompleted in 3 years after the last traffic count,then number of vehicle / day for design will be(a) 4050 vehicle/day(b) 3260 vehicle/day(c) 2540 vehicle/day(d) 2820 vehicle/day

809. For a WBM base course, if C-value is 15, trafficindex value is 9.5, stabilometer resistance value as56 and numerical constant K is 0.166, thenpavement thickness will be(a) 25.5 cm(b) 30.2 cm

(c) 31.2 cm(d) 41.2 cm

810. If wheel load is 4100 kg, total sub-grade support is2100 kg and base course constant is 90, then totalthickness of the gravel base (in cm) by McLeodmethod will be(a) 26 cm (b) 30 cm(c) 34 cm (d) 38 cm

811. Average daily traffic on a stretch of road is 300commercial vehicle per lane per day. Design trafficrepetitions for 10 years, when vehicle damage factoris 2.5 and traffic growth rate is 7.5%, .is(a) 3.8 msa (b) 23.5 msa(c) 45.4 msa (d) 16 msa

812. Effect of impact on the design of rigid pavement isaccounted for by(a) increasing thickness as would be calculated with

static wheel load(b) prevailing a base course(c) adopting a reduced flexural strength of concrete

through a factor of safety(d) adopting an increased stress relative to

that produced by static wheel load813. If modulus of elasticity of cement concrete is 21 x

104 kg/cm2, Poisson’s ratio for concrete is 0.13 andmodulus of sub-grade reaction is 3.0 kg/cm3, thenradius of relative stiffness of 15 cm thick cementconcrete slab will be(a) 57.0 cm (b) 67.0 cm(c) 77.0 cm (d) 87.0 cm

814. Equivalent radius of resisting section of 20 cm slabfor radius of contact area of wheel load of 15 cmwill be(a) ‘9.5 cm(b) 10.21 cm(c) 14.07 cm(d) 16.02 cm

814. Spacing between contraction joints for 3.5 meterslab width having thickness of 20 cm and f = 1.5for reinforcement cement concrete,1.0 cm diameterbars at 0.30 m spacing will be(a) 6.51 m (b) 7.12 m(c) 8.72 m (d) 9.35 m

194


815. The function of an expansion joint in rigid pavementsis to(a) relieve warping stresses(b) relieve shrinkage stresses(c) resist stresses due to expansion(d) allow free expansion

816. The walls which are necessary on the hill side ofroadway where earth has to be retained fromslipping is called(a) retaining wall(b) breast wall(c) parapet wall(d) none of these

817. Which of the following represents a carpet of sand-bitumen mix without coarse aggregates ?(a) Mastic asphalt(b) Sheet asphalt(c) Bituminous carpet(d) Bituminous concrete

818. For a highway with design speed of 180 kmph, safeovertaking sight distance is (assume acceleration as0.53 m/sec2)(a) 300 m(b) 750 in(c) 320 m(d) 470 m

819. A horizontal curve of 480 in for 7.5 m two-laneroad is to be designed for a speed of 80 kmph. Theraising of the outer edge of the pavement withrespect to the inner edge to cater to the mixedtraffic condition to(a) 0.14 m (b) 0.22 m(c) 0.24 m (d) 0.27 m

820. For a circular curve of radius 200 m, co-efficient oflateral. friction of 0.15 and design speed is 40 kmph,then equilibrium super elevation (for equal pressureon inner and outer wheel) would be(a) 21.3 (b) 7(c) 6.3 (d) 4.6

821. If a descending gradient of 1 in 25 meets anascending gradient of 1 in 40, then length of valleycurve required for a headlight sight distance of 100m will be

(a) 30 m (b) 130 m(c) 310 m (d) 620 m

822. An ascending gradient of 1 in 100 meets adescending gradient of 1 in 50. The length of summitcurve required to provide overtaking sight distanceof 500 m will be(a) 938 m (b) 781 m(c) 470 m (d) 170 m

823. Brake is applied on a vehicle which then skids adistance of 16 m before coming to stop. If thedeveloped average co-efficient of friction betweentyres and the pavement is 0.4, then speed of thevehicle before skidding would have nearly(a) 20 kmph (b) 80 kmph(c) 40 kmph (d) 50 kmph

824. While driving at a speed of 30 kmph (with availablefriction 0.4) down the grade, the driver requires abraking distance twice that required for stoppingthe vehicle when he travels up the same grade.The grade is(a) 7% (b) 10.6%(c) 13.3% (d) 33.3%

825. An observer travelling at a constant speed of 70kmph with the traffic stream over a 5 km stretchis passed by 17 vehicles more than what he passed.When observer travels against the stream at thesame speed, number of vehicles he meets is 303.The flow of the traffic stream is(a) 4480 vph(b) 4161 vph(c) 2240 vph(d) 2002 vph

826. Modulus of sub-grade reaction using 30 cm diameterplate is obtained as 200 N/cm3. The value of thesame (in N/cm3) using the standard plate will be(a) 500 (b) 200(c) 85 (d) 80

827. If total seven day traffic volume for the week is3625 and the traffic volume for Monday is 650,then monthly expansion factor for Monday wouldbe(a) 5.6 (b) 1.25(c) 0.8 (d) 0.25

195


828. Equivalent C-value of a three layered pavementsection having individual C-values as given belowwill be Material Thickness, cm C-valueBituminous concrete 10 60Cement treated base 20 225Gravel sub-base 10 15(a) 93(b) 103(c) 113(d) 123

829. Ifannual value of equivalent wheel load (EWL) is10 x 106, then traffic index will be(a) 6.21 (b) 7.23(c) 7.949 (d) 8.595

830. Equivalent thickness of 7.5 cm bituminous concretein terms of WBM base course tb will be (C-valueof bituminous concrete Cc = 62 and C-value ofWBM base course C1 = 15)(a) 8 cm (b) 9 cm(c) 10 cm (d) 11 cm

831. If 7.5 cm bituminous concrete surface with Ec =1000 kg/cm2 is equivalent to thickness t1, of basecourse, then equivalent thickness tb of base coursehaving Eb = 400 kg/cm2 will be(a) 3.9 cm (b) 6.5 cm(c) 8.5 cm (d) 10.2 cm

832. What will be the pavement thickness of base courseby triaxial test method using following data ?Wheel locad = 4100 kgRadius of contact area = 15 cmTraffic co-efficient, X = 1.5Rainfall co-efficient, Y = 0.9Design deflection, A = 0.25 cmE-value of sub-grade soil, Es = 100 kg/cm2

E-value of base course material, Eb = 400 kg/cm2

(a) 55.9 cm(b) 65.9 cm(c) 75.9 cm(d) 85.9 cm

833. If width ofexpansion joint gap is 2.5 cm in a cementconcrete pavement, lying temperature is 10° C, andmaximum slab temperature in summer is 54°C, thenspacing between expansion joints will be (Assume

co-efficient of thermal expansion of concrete as10 x 10-6°C.)(a) 20.5 m(b) 28.5 m(c) 32.5 m(d) 35.5 m

834. For plain cement concrete, what is the spacingbetween contraction joints for 3.5 metre slab widthhaving thickness of 20 cm, f = 1.5 and allowablestress in tension in cement concrete Sc = 0.8 kg/cm2? (assume unit wt. of concrete as 2400 kg/m3)(a) 3.44 m (b) 3.80 m(c) 4.20 m (d) 4.44 m

835. For reinforcement cement concrete, 1.0 cm dia.barsat 0.30 m spacing. What is the spacing betweencontraction joints for 3.5 metre slab width havingthickness of 20 cm and f = 1.5. (assume allowabletensile stress in sted as 1400 kg/cm2and unit wt. ofcement concrete as 2400 kg/m3)(a) 6.25 m (b) 7.52 m(c) 8.72 m (d) 9.32 m

836. An index map used in highway project shows(a) proposed and existing roads and important

places to be connected(b) general topography of the area(c) details of various alternate alignments(d) general details of existing structures like

buildings, wells etc337. As per IRC, maximum load of axle of a vehicle

should not exceed(a) 8165 kg (b) 9500 kg(c) 800 kg (d) 7500 kg

838. Cumulative speed distribution curve is usuallyadopted for geometric design of highway. Thepercentile speed adopted for geometric design is(a) 85th percentile (b) 90th percentile(c) 98th percentile (d) 99.9 percentile speed

839. Conflict which may occur in a r6tary inter-sectionis(a) merging and diverging(b) crossing and merging(c) crossing merging and diverging(d) crossing and diverging

196


840. On a highway if velocity of moving vehicle is 560kmph, stopping distance is 25 mts and average lengthof a vehicle be 5 metre, then basic capacity of thelane will be(a) 2000 veh/sec(b) 1500 veh/sec(c) 3000 veh/sec(d) 3200 veh/sec

841. With two way, two lane right angled road inter-section, what are the total number of potentialconflict points ?(a) 7 (b) 24(c) 32 (d) 14

842. The mechanical widening of a single lane road at ahorizontal curve of radius 100 metres for vehiclewheel base of 3.0 nits, is(a) .025 m(b) 0.032 m(c) .045 m(d) 0.085 m

843. The psychological widening on a road of radius 81m and with design speed of 100 kmph will be(a) 10/9m(b) 6/7 m(c) 11/13 m(d) 9/8 m

844. If radius of horizontal curve is 80 mts, design speedis 40 kmph and design co-efficient of lateral frictionis 0.15, then rate of super elevation of full lateralfriction is will be(a) 0.30 (b) 0.48(c) 0.60 ( (d) 0.72

845. If rate of change of super elevation is specified as1 is 1/ 20 and road width 10m, then what will be theminimum length of the transition curve ? It is giventhat maximum super elevation on a road curve is 1is 15.(a) 30 m ( (b) 80 m(c) 125 m (d) 180 m

846. A summit curve is formed at the inter-section of5% upgradient and 50% down gradient. To providea stopping distance of 100m, the length of summitcurve needed will be

(a) 180 m (b) 163 m(c) 227 m (d) 327 m

847. In a parabolic vertical curve, if rising grade g1= +0.5%, falling grade is g2 = — 1.5% and rate ofchange of grade is 0.05 per chain, then length ofvertical curve will be(a) 40 m (b) 80 m(c) 70 m (d) 120 m

848. What will be the length of transition curve for amountaineous terrain road with radius of curvature50 m and design speed of 100 kmph according toIRC?(a) 80 m (b) 100 m(c) 150 m ( (d) 200 m

849. For the load on inner and outer wheels to be equalfor a vehicle moving with 60 kmph about a horizontalcircular curve of radius 100 m, super elevation willbe(a) 0.283 (b) 0.350(c) 0.725 (d) 0.863

850. A vehicle travelling on dry level pavement at 100kmph had the brakes applied. If vehicle travelled 10m before stopping, then coefficient of frictiondeveloped will be(a) 0.6 (b) 0.4(c) 0.7 (d) 0.16

851. If safe stopping distance for a vehicle moving at 60kmph is 50 m and average length of a vehicle is5.0m, then what will be the basic capacity of theroadway ?(a) 700 (b) 1200(c) 1090 (d) 1872

852. The critical condition of loading for combination ofstresses in cement concrete roads for corner regionis(a) load stress + frictional stress(b) load stress + warping stress(c) load stress + warping stress + frictional

stress(d) load stress + warping stress - frictional stress

853. The aggregate required for one kilometre length ofwater bound macadam road per metre width andfor 10 mm thickness will be

197


(a) 15 m3 (b) 12 m3

(c) 10 m3 (d) 8 m3

854. If stopping distance and average length of a vehicleare 20 m and 4 m respectively, then what will bethe theoretical maximum capacity of a traffic laneat a speed of 10 m /sec ?(a) 3000 vehicles /how(b) 2500 vehicles/hour(c) 1500 vehicles/hour(d) 2000 vehicles/hour

855. For sandy soils, most common method of stabilizationis(a) soil cement stabilization(b) mechanical stabilization(c) soil lime stabilization(d) soil bitumen stabilization

856. While aligning a hill road with a ruling gradient of1 in 20, a horizontal curve of radius 80 m isencountered. The compensated gradient on thecurve will be(a) 1 in 15(b) 1 in 17(c) 1 in 25(d) 1 in 27

857. In the group index method of flexible pavementdesign, which one of the following factors decidesthe thickness of base and surface course ?(a) Percentage of sub-grade soil passing 75 micron

sieve(b) Type of surface and base course materials(c) Daily volume of commercial vehicles(d) Percentage of liquid limit of sub-grade soil

858. The drain which is provided parallel to roadway tointercept and divert the water from hill slopes iscalled(a) sloping drain(b) ea tchwater drain(c) side drain(d) cross drain

859. In a bituminous pavement, alligator cracking ismainly due to(a) inadequate wearing course

(b) inadequate thickness of sub-base course ofpavement(c) use of excessive bituminous material(d) fatigue arising from repeated stress

applications860. Expansion joints in cement concrete pavements are

provided at an interval of(a) 10 m(b) 15 m(c) 18 m to 21 m(d) 25 m to 30 m

861. Reflection cracking is observed in(a) flexible pavement(b) rigid pavement(c) rigid overlay over flexible pavement(d) bituminous overlay over cement concretepavement

862. In the revised CBR design method recommendedby the IRC for the design of flexible pavement,total thickness depends upon(a) CBR value of soil only(b) CBR value of soil and magnitude of wheel load(c) CBR value of soil and number of

commercial vehicles per day(d) CBR value of soil and cumulative standard axle

loads863. Which of the following statements is correct with

regard to the radius of curvature of an ideal transitioncurve ?(a) It is inversely proportional to the radius of

the main circular curve(b) It is inversely proportional to its distance from

point of tangency(c) It is constant through out the length of the curve(d) It is directly proportional to the longitudinal

section of the curved portion of the road.864. Bankelman beam deflection method is used for

design of(a) rigid overlay on rigid pavement(b) flexible overlay on flexible pavement(c) flexible overlay on rigid pavement(d) rigid overlay on flexible pavement

198


865. While designing super elevation of a highway itsmaximum value is fixed considering the need to(a) avoid toppling of slow moving vehicles in

mixed traffic flow(b) avoid transverse skidding(c) provide drainage(d) counteract centrifugal force due to 75% of

design speed866. Assuming safe stopping sight distance to be 80 m

on a flat highway section and with a set backdistance of 10 m, what would be the radius of thenegotiable horizontal curve ?(a) 800 m (b) 160 m(c) 80 m (d) 70 m

867. It is a common practice to design a highway toaccommodate traffic volume corresponding to(a) 30th hr(b) peak hr(c) ADT(d) 15 min peak period

868. Number of load cycles (Nf) to cause failure of apavement is proportional to (P is respective appliedload)(a) P4 (b) P-4

(c) P2 (d) 1/P869. If in a Dorry abrasion test, loss in weight is 27 gms,

then coefficient of hardness will be(a) 11(b) 12(c) 13(d) 14

870. The ratio of width of car parking area required atkerb for 30° parking relative to 60° parking isapproximately(a) 0.72(b) 0.57(c) 0.83(d) 2.0

871. The stopping sight distance depends upon(a) total reaction time of driver(b) speed of vehicle(c) efficiency of brakes(d) all of these

872. When the path travelled along the road surface ismore than the circumferential movement of thewheels due to rotation, then it results in(a) slipping(b) skidding(c) turning(d) revolving

--------

873. Strength and quality of concrete depends on(a) aggregate shape(b) aggregate grading(c) surface area of the aggregate(d) all of these

874. The lower water-cement ratio in concrete produces(a) more density(b) small creep and shrinkage(c) more bond(d) all of these

875. The entrained air in concrete(a) increases workability(b) decreases workability(c) increases strength(d) none of these

876. The property of fresh concrete, in which the waterin the mix rends to rise to the surface while placingand compaction is called(a) Bleeding (b) Creep(c) Segregation (d) Shrinkage

877. Separation of ingredients from concrete duringtransportation is called(a) Bleeding (b) Creep(c) Segregation (d) Shrinkage

878. For making impermeable concrete, the processcontains(a) through mixing (b) proper compaction(c) proper curing (d) all of these

879. After casting, an ordinary cement concrete on drying(a) shrinks (b) expands(c) remains unchanged (d) can expand or shrink

199


880. Approximate ratio of strength of cement concreteat 3 months to that at 28 days of curing is(a) 1.15 (b) 1.30(c) 1.0 (d) 0.75

881. Workability of concrete can be improved by addition(a) Iron (b) Sodium(c) Zinc (d) Sulphur

882. Split strength of concrete can be determined by(a) Brazilion test (b) Vicat’s apparatus(c) Cube test (d) Briquettes test

883. Workability of concrete can be improved by(a) more sand(b) more cement(c) more fine aggregate(d) fineness of coarse aggregate

884. Workability of concrete can be improved by(a) increasing size of aggregate(b) decreasing aggregate(c) increasing fine aggregate(d) increasing flaky aggregate

885. Compound that helps in obtaining early strength ofcement concrete is(a) Tricalcium silicate (b) Dicalcium silicate(c) Tri aluminate (d) Dicalcium silicate

886. Workability of concrete is directly proportional to(a) grading of the aggregate(b) time of transit(c) aggregate cement ratio(d) none of these

887. Workability of concrete is inversely proportional to(a) water cement ratio (b) size of aggregate(c) time of transit (d) none of these

888. An air entraining agent when added in concreteimproves(a) strength (b) workability(c) density (d) durability

889. Strength of concrete is directly proportional to(a) cement water ratio(b) water cement ratio(c) sand cement ratio(d) water aggregate ratio

890. Strength of concrete increase with increase in

(a) water cement ratio(b) size of aggregate(c) aggregate cement ratio(d) moisture content

891. Strength of concrete increase with(a) increase in water cement ratio(b) increase in fineness of cement(c) decrease in curing time(d) decrease in size of aggregate

892. Strength of concrete increases with(a) increase in water cement ratio(b) -decrease in water cement ratio(c) decrease in size of aggregate(d) decrease in curing time

893. Approx ratio of the strength of the cement cone of7 days to that of 28 days(a) 0.56(b) 0.85(c) 1.0(d) 1.15

894. Approximate ratio of the direct tensile strength todirect compressive strength test is(a) 0.33(b) 0.25(c) 0.10(d) 0.05

895. Approximate ratio of direct tensile strength tolfexural strength is(a) 0.25(b) 0.33(c) 0.5(d) 0.90

896. Approximate ratio of strength of the 30 cm cube tothat of 15 cm cube is(a) 1.10(b) 1.00(c) 0.90(d) 0.75

897. Stress-strain curve for cement concrete is almostlinear upto(a) 0.25 times ultimate stress(b) 0.35 times ultimate stress

200


(c) 0.5 times ultimate stress(d) none of these

898. Strength of concrete show an increase with(a) decrease in rate of loading(b) increase in rate of loading(c) unaffected by rate of loading(d) depends on application of load

899. Durability of concrete is proportional to(a) sand content(b) water cement ratio(c) aggregate ratio(d) cement aggregate ratio

900. Poisson’s ratio for concrete ranges between(a) 0.10 and 0.15 (b) 0.15 and 0.25(c) 0.25 and 0.30 (d) 0.30 and 0.35

901. Fineness modulus of aggregate is between(a) 2- 3.5 (b) 3.5 - 5.0(c) 5 - 6.0 (d) 6 - 7.5

902. Density of concrete(a) increases with a decrease in size of

aggregate(b) is independent of size of aggregate(c) increases with increase in size of aggregate(d) none of these

903. If slump of concrete mix is 60 mm, then itsworkability is(a) low (b) medium(c) high (d) very high

904. Workability of concrete mix with low water cementratio is determined by(a) slump test(b) tensile strength test(c) compaction factor test,(d) flexural strength test

905. Segregation is responsible for(a) honey comb concrete(b) porous layers in concrete(c) sand streaks in concrete(d) all of these

905. If compaction factor is 0.95, then workability ofconcrete is(a) very low (b) low

(c) medium (d) high906. Grade of concrete not recommended by IS : 456 is

(a) M 150 (b) M 200(c) M 250 (d) M 500

907. Durability of concrete is affected by(a) cider (b) vineagar(c) alcohol (d) both (a) and (b)

908. M100 grade of concrete approximates(a) 1:2:4 mix (b) 1:3:4mix(c) 1: 3 : 6 mix (d) both (a) and (b)

909. Slump test is a measure of(a) tensile strength(b) compressive strength(c) impact value(d) consistency

910. Concrete gains strength due to(a) chemical action of cement with coarse

aggregate(b) hydration of cement(c) evaporation of water(d) all of these

911. Size of fine aggregates should not exceed(a) 2.0 (b) 3.0(c) 3.75 (d) 4.75

912. Shrinkage of concrete is directly proportional to(a) water content in the mix(b) sand content(c) aggregate content(d) aggregate to cement ratio

913. Shrinkage of concrete is directly proportional to(a) cement content(b) sand content(c) aggregate content(d) temperature of water

914. Maximum shrinkage takes place in concrete afterdrying for(a) 28 days (b) three months(c) six month (d) one year

915. Shrinkage in cement concrete decreases with(a) addition of load(b) removal of load(c) removal of moisture

201


(d) addition of moisture916. Approximate value of shrinkage strain in concrete

is(a) 0.03 (b) 0.003(c) 0.0003 (d) 0.00003

917. According to Water Cement ratio law, strength ofworkable plastic concrete(a) depends on amount of water used in the mix(b) does not depend on the quantity of cement

mixed(c) does not depend on the quality of cement(d) all of these

918. Placing of concrete should preferably be done at atemperature of(a) 10°c (b) 20°c(c) 27 ± 2°c (d) 32°c

919. For a thick and heavily reinforced structure,workability of concrete should be(a) high (b) medium(c) low (d) zero

920. Under constant load, creep strain in concrete is(a) time dependent(b) temperature dependent(c) moisture dependent(d) none of these

921. Creep in concrete increases with(a) increase in cement content(b) decrease in curing time(c) decrease in age of conc at the time of loading(d) all of these

922. Total creep strain in concrete is directly proportionalto(a) elastic strain (b) time of loading(c) duration of loading (d) moisture content

923. Low temperature during concrete laying(a) increases strength(b) decreases strength(c) has no effect on strength(d) depends on other factors

924. Light weight concrete is used in(a) heat resistance(b) air conditioning of buildings

(c) non load bearing wall(d) reducing thickness

925. Light weight concrete is prepared by(a) using light aggregate(b) formation of air voids in cement by omitting

sand(c) formation of air voids in cement paste bythe substances causing foam(d) all of these

926. A concrete in which dry coarse aggregate are firstpacked to have least voids and then cement sandmortar is injected under pressure to fill all the voids,resulting in a very dense concrete, is called(a) pre—packet concrete(b) vacuum concrete(c) no fines concrete (d) aerate concrete

927. Addition of calcium chloride in concrete results in(a) increased strength(b) reduction in curing period(c) retardation of loss of moisture(d) all of these

928. Addition of 1-2% sodium hydroxide in concrete(a) reduces setting time(b) reduces voids(c) gives smooth surface finish(d) gives wear resistant surface

929. For protection from frost, concrete should(a) be dense(b) be free from cracks(c) have adhesion between mortar and aggregate(d) all of these

930. A setting of cement or concrete which occurssuddenly while being mixed and placed, and preventsfurther working of the materials is called(a) Quick set (b) Initial setting(c) Flash set (d) Knocking

931. Adding a thin layer of cement mortar to the surfaceof concrete is called(a) rendering (b) admixing(c) rodding (d) punning

932. The breaking up and remixing of concrete that haslayers to set is called(a) resetting (b) double setting

202


(c) knocking (d) time setting933. A concrete mix that causes difficulty in obtaining a

smooth or good contact with forms which may bedue to excess of middle sized particles or adeficiency of fine materials is called(a) uneven mix (b) harsh mix(c) heterogenous mix (d) none of these

934. A watery scum that is formed on top of concretedue to excessive water or excessive use of trowelor float is called(a) laitance (b) flashing(b) punning (d) water facing

935. Inert material of cement concrete mix is(a) water (b) cement(c) aggregate (d) none of these

936. An aggregate is called cylopean aggregate if itssize is more than(a) 4.75 mm (b) 30 mm(c) 60 mm (d) 75 mm

937. An aggregate is called flaky, if its least dimensionis less than(a) 2/3 mean dimension(b) 3/4 mean dimension(c) 3/5 mean dimension(d) 5/8 mean dimension

938. Water cement ratio is generally expressed in volumeof water require per(a) 10 kg (b) 20 kg(c) 30 kg (d) 50 kg

939. ISI has specified full strength of concrete after(a) 7 days (b) 15 days(c) 21 days (d) 28 days

940. High temperature(a) increases the strength of concrete(b) decreases the strength of concrete(c) no effect on the strength of concrete(d) low effect on the strength of concrete

941. Method of voids for determination of the quantityof cement paste assumes(a) voids in coarse aggregate are filled by fine

aggregates(b) voids in fine aggregate are filled by cement

paste

(c) volume of fine aggregate is equal to total voidsin coarse aggregate plus 10% extra

(d) volume of cement paste required is equal tototal volume of voids in fine aggregate plus15% extra

942. Expansion joints are provided if length of theconcrete exceeds(a) 20 m (b) 45 m(c) 60 m (d) 75 m

943. Behaviour of concrete under instantaneous loads is(a) elastic (b) plastic(c) brittle (d) visco-elastic

944. Average value of creep coefficient for concrete is(a) 5.0 (b) 4.0(c) 3.0 (d) 2.0

945. If variation in strength of the cube of concrete duringtesting is +5% of the average, then representativevalue is taken as(a) average value(b) lowest value(c) test is repeated(d) average after highest and lowest is discarded

946. Resonant frequency method is based on theassumption that(a) strength of concrete increases with age(b) richer mix give more stronger concrete(c) resonant frequency is directly proportional

to square of the strength of concrete(d) modulus of elasticity of concrete goes ondecreasing as the concrete quality deteriorates dueto weathering

947. In pulse technique for testing concrete it is assumedthat(a) frequency of pulse is proportional to

compressive strength of concrete(b) time taken by pulse is proportional to modulus

of elasticity(c) amplitude of pulse is proportional to

compressive strength(d) none of these

948. Workability may be defined as the amount of appliedwork required to compact the concrete to itsmaximum density. This principle is used in

203


(a) slum test(b) compaction factor test(c) vee Bee consistometer test(d) none of these

949. If 50 kg of fine aggregate and 100 kg of coarseaggregate are mixed in a concrete whose W.0 ratiois 0.6, then weight of water required for a harshmix is(a) 8 kg (b) 10 kg(c) 12 kg (d) 15 kg

950. Water cement ratio by weight is(a) higher as compared to that by volume(b) lower as that compared to volume(c) same as that by volume(d) none of these

951. Modulus of elasticity for concrete improves by(a) shorter curing period(b) age(c) higher W.C. ratio(d) all of these

952. In order to have segregation in concrete droppingheight should not be less than(a) 25 cm (b) 50 cm(c) 100 cm (d) 250 cm

953. Minimum number of test specimens required forfinding the compressive strength of concrete are(a) 3 (b) 5(c) 6 (d) 9

954. At freezing point of water, concrete(a) sets freely (b) sets slowing(c) set rapidly (d) does not set

955. Steam curing is used in(a) columns only(b) long slabs and columns(c) mass production of precast concrete(d) all of these

956. If sea water is used for preparing concrete, it(a) will cause efflorescence(b) may corrode the reinforcement(c) will cause dampness(d) all of these

957. With rise in temperature of atomspheric air, settingtime of cement(a) increases (b) decreases(c) remains affected (d) none of these

958. Coefficient of thermal expansion of cement concreteis(a) 3 x 10-4 per C (b) 3 x 10-5 per C(c) 3 x 10-6 per *C (d) 3 x 10-8 per°C

959. While designing an air entrained concrete(a) W.0 ratio is reduced(b) proportion of aggregates is reduced(c) an allowance for the entrained air is made(d) strength,of concrete is reduced

960. Main object of compaction of concrete is to(a) eliminate air holes(b) achieve maximum density(c) get intimate contact between concrete and

embeded material(d) all of these

961. Too wet concrete may cause(a) segregation (b) lower density(c) weakness of cone (d) all of these

962. Non uniform compaction of the concrete may cause(a) porosity (b) reduced strength(c) non-homogeneous (d) all of these

963. For a constant WC ratio, decrease in aggregatecement ratio causes(a) increase in workability(b) decrease in workability(c) no change in workability(d) none of these

964. Test most suitable for concrete of very lowworkability is(a) Slum test(b) Compaction factor test(c) Vee—Bee test(d) All of these

965. Minimum water-cement ratio required for fullhydration of cement is(a) 0.18 (b) 0.36(c) 0.54 (d) 0.60

966. Presence of entrained air in air’results in

204


(a) reduced bleeding(b) lower density(c) decreased strength at all gases(d) all of these

967. Calcium chloride as accelerating admixture is notrecommanded for use with(a) ordinary portland cement(b) high alumina cement(c) rapid hardening cement(d) none of these

968. Reduction in the quantity of mixing water which ispossible by the use of plasticizers and admixturesvaries from(a) 1% to 5% (b) 5% to 15%(c) 15% to 30% (d) 30% to 35%

969. Steam curing is not used with(a) ordinary portland cement(b) rapid hardening cement(c) high alumina cement(d) all of these

970. Curing period is minimum for concrete using(a) rapid hardening cement(b) low heat cement(c) ordinary portland cement(d) slag cement

971. For a satisfactory workable concrete with a constantWC ratio increase in aggregate-cement ratio(a) increases strength of concrete(b) decreases strength of concrete(c) no effect on strength of concrete(d) none of these

972. As compared to moist cured concrete, permeabilityof steam-cued concrete is(a) more (b) less(c) same (d) none of these

973. For a given degree of hydration, the effect ofincreasing w /c ratio in concrete(a) is to increase permeability(b) is to decrease permeability(c) no change in permeability(d) none of these

974. Compressive strength of concrete determined from150 mm x 150 mm cylinders as compared to thatdetermined from 150 mm cube is(a) more (b) less(c) equal (d) none of these

975. Uniformity of stress-distribution over the cross-section of a cylinder as compared to cube is(a) more (b) less(c) same (d) none of these

976. Addition of sugar in concrete results in an(a) increase in setting time by about 1 hr(b) increase in setting time by about 4 hr(c) decrease in setting time by about 1 hr(d) decrease in setting time by about 4 hr

977. In a mix, if desired slump is not obtained, thenadjustment for each concrete slump difference ismade by adjusting water content by(a) 0.25% (b) 0.5%(c) 0.75% (d) 1%

978. Aggregate impact value of the aggregate used in(a) building concrete is less then 45(b) road pavement concrete is less then 30(c) runway concrete is less then 30(d) all of these

979. Permissible compressive strength of M150 concretegrade is(a) 150 kg/cm (b) 200 kg/cm2(c) 250 kg/cm2 (d) none of these

980. For ensuring quality of concrete, we use(a) single sized aggregates(b) two sized aggregates(c) graded aggregates(d) coarsed aggregates

981. In case of hand mixing of concrete, extra cementto be added is(a) 5% (b) 10%(c) 15% (d) 20%

982. Two main basic materials are(a) lime stone and silica (b) lime and alumina(c) lime and clay (d) lime and chalk

983. Three main raw material for used for portlandcement are

205


(a) lime stone, sandstone clay(b) lime, silica and clay(c) lime, clay and gypsum(d) silica, alumina, gypsum

984. Three main raw material for the manufacture ofcement are(a) sand stone, limestone (b) chalk, clay(c) chalk, limestone (d) shale, clay

985. Approximate temprature in kiln in which the granulesof cement mmaterial are exposed to is(a) 800°C-1000° C (b) 1000°C-1300°C(c) 1300° C-1500° C (d) 1500°C-1800°C

986. Gypsum is added in cement for(a) setting(b) cementing(c) retarding the setting(d) heat of hydration

987. Two main compounds of portland cement are(a) tricalcuim silicate and dicalcium silicate(b) dicalcuim silicate and aluminate(c) tricalcium aluminate and silicate(d) tricalcium silicate and tricalcium aluminate

988. Appropriate percentage of tricalcium silicate inportland cement is(a) 70 (b) 60(c) 50 (d) 25

989. If contributions of tricalcuim silicate, dicalciumsilicate, tricalcuim aluminate, tetracalcium- aluminoferrite to the 28 days strength of hydrated ordinaryportland cement are respectively W, X, Y and Zthen(a) X>W>Y>Z (b) W>X>Y>Z(c) Y>W>X>Z (d) W>Y>Z>X

990. Early strength of cement is caused by(a) tricalcuim silicate (b) dicalcuim silicate(c) tricalcuim aluminate (d) gypsum

991. Later stage strength of cement is caused by(a) tricalcuim silicate (b) dicalcuim silicate(c) tricalcuim aluminate (d) gypsum aluminate

992. Initial and final setting times for ordinary portlandcement are approximately related by(a) T = 540 + t (b) T=270 +t

(c) T = 90 + 1.2t (d) T=90 +twhere T, t are final and initial setting time in minutes

993. Development of strength of cement and its finenessare(a) directly proportional(b) inversely proportional(c) not related(d) randomly related

994. Flash set of ordinary portland cement paste is(a) premature hardening(b) surface hardening only(c) hardening without development of heat of

hydration(d) all of these

995. Flash set of portland cement is(a) hardening of silicate content(b) flash hardening of calcuim(c) flash hardening of gypsum(d) reaction of tricalcuim aluminate with water

996 Flash set of portland cement can be prevented bythe addition of(a) gypsum (b) pozzolana(c) calcium chloride (d) calcium aluminate

997 Fineness of cement is tested by(a) Le-Chatelier’s apparatus(b) Sieve analysis(c) Vicat’s needle(d) Specific surface air permeability method

998. Rxpansion of portland cement is indicated by itssoundness. It can be tested by(a) Le-Chatelier’s apparatus(b) Vicat’s needle(c) Specific surface air permeability method(d) Normal consistency

999. Soundness test of cement by Le-Chatelier’sapparatus gives unsoundness due to(a) free lime only (b) magnesuim only(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

--------------

206


1. Unsoundness of cement due to magnesia can bedetermined by(a) Autoclave test(b) Vicat’s needle(c) Le-Chatelier’s apparatus(d) Normal consistency

2. Maximum permissible unit of magnesiaconcentration in ordinary portland cement is(a) 2% (b) 4%(c) 6% (d) 8%

3. Expansion of portland cement is caused by(a) free lime (b) magnesia(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

4. Normal consistency of portland cement is about(a) 50 % (b) 30 %(c) 25 % (d) 15%

5. Specific gravity of portland cement is(a) 3.50 (b) 3.30(c) 3.15 (d) 3.00

6. Density of portland cement is about in N/m3(a) 25,000 (b) 23,000(c) 20,000 (d) 18,000

7. Percentage void ration of cement is(a) 50 (b) 40(c) 30 (d) 20

8. Soundness of portland cement can be improved by(a) fine grinding(b) addition of gypsum(c) addition of lime(d) addition of calcium chloride

8. Rapid hardening cement can be obtained by(a) fine grinding of clinker(b) addition of gypsum(c) addition of calcium sulphate(d) higher content of lime

10. White cement is produced in(a) flyash kiln (b) coal kiln(c) oil fired kiln (d) electrical form kiln

11. If cement is very fine, then(a) more is the surface area(b) more is the separation of water at top of

concrete

(c) the reaction with water gets retarded(d) less shrinkage and cracking of concrete

12. Insoluble residue in cement should be less than(a) 10% (b) 5%(c) 3% (d) 1.5%

13. During test of portland cement for “loss on ignition”,the sample is heated to(a) 800°C (b) 1000° C(c) 1200° C (d) 1500° C

14. When water is added to cement(a) heat is generated(b) heat is absorbed(c) chemical reaction is started(d) impurities are washed out

15. During test of portland cement for “loss of ignition”the loss in weight occurs due to(a) chemical of reactions(b) burning of ingredients(c) evaporation of moisture and CO2(d) melting of tricacuim aluminate

16. For ordinary portland cement, initial setting timeshould not be less than and final setting should bemore than(a) 5inin and 10 days (b) 30 min and 10 hr(c) 10 hr and 30. hr (d) none of these

17. Heat generated with the setting and hardening ofcement is called(a) heat of hydration(b) heat of vaporisation(c) heat of humidity(d) latent heat

18. Heat of hydration of cement can be reduced by(a) reducing proportion of C3A and C3S(b) increasing proportion of C3A and C3S(c) increasing the fineness of cement(d) both (a) and (b)

19. Increase in the fineness of cement results in(a) increase in the rate of heat of hydration

without changing total amount of heat liberated(b) decrease in the rate of heat of hydration without

changing total amount of heat liberated

207


(c) increase in the rate of heat of hydration withan increase in the total amount of heat liberated

(d) decrease in the rate of heat of hydration witha reduced amount of total heat liberated

20. Setting time of cement increases by adding(a) gypsum (b) calcuim chloride(c) calcium sulphate (d) none of these

21. Vicat’s apparatus is used for(a) fineness test (b) consistency test(c) soundness test (d) final setting time

22. Diameter of ‘vicat’ plunge is 10 mm and lengthvanes from(a) 10 nun - 20 mm (b) 20 mm - 30 mm(c) 30 mm - 40 mm (d) 40 mm - 50 mm

23. A warehouse set cement is(a) cement which absorbs moisture in warehouse(b) cement which gets compressed due to load of

several bags of cement above it(c) cement which sets due to being adjacent to

wall(d) there is no such setting

24. Main component of puzzolana is(a) Siliceous (b) Calcium chloride(c) Calcium sulphate (d) Tricalcium sulphate

25. Addition of puzzolana to cement causes(a) increased curing time(b) less heat of hydration(c) reduced permeability(d) all of these

26. The addition of puzzolana to cement causes(a) reduction in bleeding(b) increase in shrinkage(c) less reaction with sulphates(d) None of the above

27. Addition of puzzolana to ordinary cement may cause(a) increase in early strength(b) decrease in early strength(c) decrease in early curing time(d) increase in permeability

28. Material containing puzzolanic property is(a) Shales (b) Fly ash(c) Diatomaceous clay (d) All of these

29. Material containing puzzolanic property is(a) Pumicite (b) Lime(c) Sandstone (d) Dolomite

30. According to Indian Standards, puzzolana contentin portland pozzolana cement is(a) 5 to 10% (b) 10 to 25%(c) 25 to 35% (d) 35 to 50 %

31. The limit of “loss on ignition” for ordinary portlandcement is(a) 4% ( (b) 5%(c) 6% (d) 7%

32. In Vicat’s apparatus, the paste is said to be ofnormal consistency if rod penetrates by(a) 10-15 mm (b) 23-25 mm(c) 33-35 mm (d) 43-45 mm

33. Aerated cement is produced by the addition of(a) sodium silicate(b) powdered aluminium(c) copper sulphate(d) none of these

34. For quality control of portland cement, the testessentially done is(a) setting time(b) tensile strength(c) soundness and consistency(d) all of these

35. Cement becomes useless if it adsorbs moisture morethan(a) 1% (b) 2%(c) 4% (d) 5%

36. Gypsum contains(a) carbon dioxide and calcium(b) water and calcium sulphate(c) hydrogen sulphide and calcium(d) lime

37. Gypsum is a(a) slow setting material(b) quick setting material(c) setting agent(d) heat resisting material

38. A good aggregate should be(a) coloured

208


(b) hard and durable(c) strong and chemically inert(d) all of these

39. An aggregate is called cyclopean aggregate if itssize is more than(a) 30 mm (b) 54 mm(c) 60 min (d) 75 mm

40. An aggregate is called elongated aggregate if itslength is not less than(a) 91.5 mm (b) 101.5 mm(c) 11.5 mm (d) 121.5 mm

41. Flakiness of aggregate has which of the followingeffect on the strength of the concrete in which it isused ?(a) Increased strength(b) Decreased strength(c) Decreased Soudness(d) No effect on strength

42. Bulking of aggregates is due to(a) moisture content (b) absorbed water(c) voids (d) less compaction

43. Moisture content and percentage absorption of waterassociated with aggregates are(a) same (b) related(c) unrelated (d) can be related

44. If angularity number of a aggregate is increased,then workability of concrete will(a) increase (b) decrease(c) no change (d) none of these

45. Di-calcium silicate(a) generates high heat of hydration when water is

added(b) is responsible for 28 days strength of concrete(c) hydrates rapidly(d) has resistance to chemical attack

46. Percentage of gypsum added in cement is(a) 0.25 (b) 1(c) 2 (d) 8

47. Quantity of free magnesia in portland cement shouldnot be more than(a) 1% (b) 2.75%(c) 5% (d) none of these

48. Sieve number used in the fineness modulus test ofcement is(a) 1 (b) 5(c) 7 (d) 9

49. Unit weight of cement in kg /m3 is(a) 1600 (b) 2000(c) 2400 (d) 2500

50. Cement is packed in gunny bags of capacity (m3)(a) 0.035(b) 0.05(c) 0.5(d) None of these

51. A compaction factor of 0.85 for a cement concretesample indicates(a) low workability(b) medium workability(c) good workability(d) very good workability

52. A concrete is said to be workable if(a) its consistency is of a paste(b) it can be easily mixed, placed and

compacted(c) bleeding and segregation is there(d) laitance is formed

53. If water/cement ratio is reduced from 0.45 to 3.38,then(a) strength of concrete will decrease(b) strength of concrete will increase(c) shrinkage cracks will develop(d) both (b) and (c)

54. Ratio of tensile to compressive strength of concreteis(a) 0.025 (b) 0.04(c) 0.1 (d) 0.4

55. With 4 per cent of water content, bulking of sandmay be of the order of(a) 5% (b) 10%(c) 15% (d) 20%

56. If air is entrained in cement concrete(a) workability is decreased(b) workability is increased(c) strength is increased

209


(d) permeability of concrete is increased57. Which one of the following does not react with

cement concrete ?(a) Sulphuric acid (b) Vegetable oils(c) Alcohol (d) Sewage water

58. The behaviour of cement concrete underinstantaneous loads is(a) elastic (b) plastic(c) visco-elastic (d) brittle

59. The ratio of Young’s modulus of elasticity for steelto that of concrete is called(a) Poisson’s ratio (b) Modular ratio(c) Bulk modulus (d) Elasticity

60. A concrete mix using OPC takes abOut 2 minutesmixing time in a mixer. If hydrophobic cement isused, then mixing time(a) remains the same(b) decreases(c) increases(d) in not effected by the type of cement

61. For making a good concrete, aggregate should be in(a) saturated condition(b) surface dry condition(c) bone dry condition(d) all of these

62. Pick up the correct statement(a) Water/cement ratio by weight is higher as to

that by volume(b) Modulus of elasticity for concrete improves with

age(c) Shrinkage in concrete can be reduced by using

presaturated aggregates(d) Low heat cement is used for mass concrete

63. For reinforced cement concrete, the slump shouldbe(a) 0 to 5 cm (b) 2.5 to 7.5 cm(c) 7.5 to 10 cm (d) 5 to 12.5 cm

64. As per I.S. specifications, size of cube forcompressive strength of cement is approximately(a) 7 cm (b) 10 cm(c) 15 cm (d) none of these

65. Low heat cement is preferred for(a) slabs (b) columns

(c) dams (d) foundations66. If water/cement ratio is 0.5, then quantity of water

required for making concrete using one have cement,two bags sand and four bags properly graded coarseaggregate will be(a) 15 kg (b) 25 kg(c) 35 kg (d) None of these

67. In cold weather countries, cement preferred is(a) ordinary portland cement(b) puzzolana cement(c) calcium chloride cement(d) low heat cement

68. Steam curing is preferably used for(a) columns(b) beams(c) mass concreting(d) mass production of precast units

69. Autoclave method is used to test unsoudness ofcement because of free(a) lime (b) gypsum(c) magnesia (d) all of these

70. Air permeability test of cement is conducted to find(a) unsoundness (b) ignition loss(c) specific gravity (d) fineness

71. Water/cement ratio law was suggested by(a) Power (b) Brownian(c) Duff Abrahm (d) Feret

72. Water/cement ratio does not depend upon(a) aggregate/cement ratio(b) saturation condition of aggregate(c) gel-space ratio(d) both (a) and (c)

73. Strength of any water/cement ratio is a function of(a) temperature at which hydration of cement takes

place(b) air content in case of air entrained concrete(c) formation of cracks due to bleeding shrinkage(d) all of these

74. Workability of concrete is defined as(a) the ease with which concrete can be compacted

100 per cent

210


(b) property of concrete which determines theamount of useful internal work necessary toproduce full compaction

(c) the optimum lubrication required for handling,placing, compacting and finishing

(d) all of these75. Segregation means separation of

(a) water from aggregates and cement(b) fine aggregate from coarse aggregate(c) cement paste from coarse aggregate(d) all of these

76. Bleeding in cement concrete can be checked byadding(a) puzzolana, since it breaks the continuous water

channels(b) air entraining agents(c) by using low alkali cement(d) all of these

77. Slump value for mass concrete should rangebetween(a) 0 - 25 mm (b) 25 - 50 mm(c) 50 -100 mm (d) 100 -175 mm

78. For R.C.C. sections with congested reinforcementcompaction factor is(a) 0.8 (b) 0.87(c) 0.92 (d) 0.95

79. Workability can be measured by(a) K-slump tester(b) Compacting factor test(c) Vee-Bee test(d) all of these

80. High alumina cement mixed with portland cementis used(a) when setting time is to be reduced(b) for underwater constructions(c) when pumping time of cement is to be reduced(d) all of these

81. Age factor for permissible compressive stress inconcrete after six months is(a) 1.1 (b) 1.15(c) 1.2 (d) none of these

82. Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxidein ordinary cement should not be less than(a) 0.55 ( (b) 0.66(c) 1.02 (d) 2.75

83. Which of the following is matched correctly ?Type of Vibrator R.C.C. member(a) Form work - Column(b) Needle -Prefabricated(c) Surface Beams(d) Platform Floors

84. Fineness of medium sand ranges between(a) 1.7 to 2.1 (b) 2.2 to 2.5(c) 2.6 to 2.9 (d) 2.7 to 3.2

85. Flash set in OPC is due to(a) tri-calcium aluminate(b) tetra-calcium aluminoferrite(c) gypsum(d) di-calcium silicate

86. Gypsum is added to OPC during its manufacturingwhich in turn acts primarily as(a) flux(b) set retarder(c) ant-flash setting ingredient(d) water absorbent

87. Gangetic sand having fineness modulus less thanunity can be classified under(a) Zone I of I.S classification for mix design(b) Zone II of I.S classification for mix design(c) Zone III of I.S classification for mix design(d) Zone IV of I.S classification for mix design

88. Effect of the shape of the coarse aggregate onstrength of concretes is(a) significant(b) no effect at all(c) not considerable and hence coarse aggregate

can broadly be classified as crushed anduncrushed

(d) is in combination with w/c ratio by weight89. Admixture in ordinary concrete is

(a) Expoxy resin (b) Fly ash(c) CaO (d) quartzite

211


90. The ratio of 28 day strength of cube to that of astandard cylinder is(a) 0.8 (b) 1.25(c) 0.67 (d) 1.00

91. Normal curing period for lime mortar is(a) 3 days (b) 7 days(c) 10 days (d) 14 days

92. In making concrete, maximum density is achievedby(a) using sufficient cement to fill all the voids(b) controlling the particle size of the ingredient(c) controlling the particle size distribution of

the ingredient(d) reducing the quantity of mixing water

93. Curing of concrete at high temperature results in(a) increase in ultimate strength(b) cracking of concrete(c) decrease in ultimate strength(d) early development of ultimate strength

94. Lime mortar mixing is done in(a) Pug mill (b) Hoffmann’s mill(c) Pan mill (d) None of these

95. Use of relatively weak mortar will(a) accommodate movements due to loads and,

cracking if any, and will be distributed as thinhair cracks which are less noticeable orharmful.

(b) result in reduction of stresses due to differentialexpansion of masonry units.

(c) both (a) and (b) are correct(d) none of these

96. Sand in mortar is needed for(a) decreasing the quantity of cement.(b) reducing shrinkage.(c) increasing the strength(d) all of these

97. A high lime content in composite cement-lime mortarresults in(a) slow hardending(b) quick setting(c) both (a) and (b) are correct(d) none of these

98. Compacting factor test of cement concretedetermines its(a) strength(b) porosity(c) degree of compacting under loads(d) workability

99. The effect of sea water hardened concrete is to(a) reduce its strength(b) decrease its durability(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

100. Which of the following is not a mortar ?(a) Lime mortar(b) Surki mortar(c) Surki sand mortar(d) Fire resistant mortar

101. Void ratio of graded coarse aggregate is about(a) 0.66 (b) 0.60(c) 0.40 (d) 0.30

102. Fineness modulus and the bulking of fine sand bears(a) inverse relationship(b) direct linear relationship(c) direct exponential relationship(d) no relationship

103. For all in aggregate designated 20 mm, thepercentage passing 20 mm sieve is(a) 100% (b) 95-100%(c) 80-95% (d) 60-80%

104. Standard sand should be(a) of quartz (b) of light grey colour(c) free from silt (d) all of these

105. Aggregate abrasion value should not exceed A%for concretes for wearing surface and B% for otherconcrete. When A and B are respectively(a) 20 and 25 (b) 30 and 30(c) 30 and 40 (d) 30 and 50

106. Aggregate cushing value of coarse aggregate whichis used for making concrete, which in turn is usedfor purposes exceed(a) 30% (b) 40%(c) 45% (d) 50%

107. Lignosulphonic acids and their salts act as

212


(a) Superplasticizers (b) Foaming agents(c) Set retardeners (d) Accelerators

108. Improved workability may be achieved due to useof(a) spherical large size particles(b) spherical small size particles(c) angular large size particles(d) flaky small size particles

109. Maturity of concrete relates compressive Strengthwith(a) age and temperature(b) compaction(c) creep(d) target strength

110. During hydration, the space originally occupied bywater in the concrete is filled with(a) lime(b) calcium silicate hydrate(c) C 4AF(d) none of these

111. Segregation in cement concrete is defined as(a) separation of coarser particles of mix

causing nonhomogenity(b) appearance of cement and water slurry over

surface of finished, concrete(c) formation of capillary pores in fresh cement

concrete(4) none of these

112. Bleeding in cement concrete is caused because of(a) vibrating fresh concrete for long time(b) ifpinishpag hard the fresh concrete(c) transporting concrete by belt conveyor system(d) both (a) and (b)

113. When cement content in cement mortar is reduced,then(a) slump increases(b) consistency decreases(c) compreskve strength decreases(d) none of these

114. An addition of lime to cement concrete(a) is required for the manufacture of cement(b) increases its imperviousness

(c) increases workability(d) all of these

115. Superplasticizer in cement concrete(a) imparts extreme workability(b) reduces amount of water to be added(c) improves bonding properties(d) both (a) and (b)

116. Compressive strength of cement concrete(a) increases as specimen size in increased(b) decreases as specimen size is decreased(c) increases as specimen size is decreased(d) none of these

117. Age factor for gain in strength of concrete withage after 6 months is(a) 1 (b) 1.1(c) 1.15 (d) 1.2

118. Workability of cement concrete is more for(a) big size aggregate(b) round shape aggregate(c) properly graded aggregate(d) all of these

119. Relation between strength of concrete (S) in kg/cm2 and gel space ratio (x) is given by(a) S = 600x (b) S = 1200x2(c) S = 2400x3 (d) none of these

120. Strength of cement concrete decreases(a) if w/c ratio is less than 0.38(b) if w/c ratio is less than 0.6(c) with entrapped air(d) if cement is increased

121. Water cement ratio of cement concrete is dependentof(a) type of cement(b) cement aggregate ratio(c) entrapped air(d) all of these

122. Fly ash when added to cement concrete(a) requires a little more water for maintenance of

slump(b) lowers 28 days strength(c) reduces permeability of concrete at later ages(d) all of these

213


123. If aggregate in concrete passes through a sieve of75 mm and is retained on 60 mm sieve, thisaggregate will be flaky if its minimum dimension isless than(a) 10.5 mm (b) 20.5 mm(c) 30.5 mm (d) 40.5 mm

124. Ordinate of grading curveof an aggregaterepresents(a) cumulative ‘)/0 passing through each sieve

plotted on normal scale(b) cumulative % passing each sieve plotted on

logarithmic scale(c) sieve size plotted on normal scale(d) sieve size plotted on logarithmic scale

125. Bulk density of aggregates does not depend on(a) shape and size(b) specific gravity(c) grading(d) size and shape of container

126. Bulk density of aggregates is expressed as(a) kg/litre (b) kg/m3

(c) T/m3 (d) None of these127. The aggregate having moisture in pores and dry

surface is called(a) moist aggregate(b) dry aggregate(c) saturated surface dry aggregate(d) none of these

128. The aggregated of same nominal size which containless void, when compacted, are(a) irregular (b) flaky(c) rounded spherical (d) none of these

129. Increase in finesness modulus of aggregate indicates(a) finer grading(b) irregular grading(c) gap grading(d) none of these

130. Bulking of sand due to formation of thin film of asurface moisture is caused by(a) absorbed moisture(b) moisture content(c) voids

(d) angularity131. Maximum bulking factor of sand is

(a) 1.00 (b) 1.10(c) 1.2 (d) 1.4

132. Maximum bulking of sand generally occurs at apercentage content of(a) 5 (b) 8(c) 11 (d) 14

133. Fineness modulus of sand is 2.5 and is graded as(a) fine sand(b) medium sand(c) coarse sand(d) very coarse sand

134. Los Angeles machine is used to test aggregate for(a) crushing strength(b) abrasion resistance(c) water absorption(d) none of these

135. The aggregate possessing well defined ,edges formedat’the intersection of roughly planar faces are called(a) flaky aggregate(b) elongated aggregate(c) angular aggregate(d) rounded aggregates

136. Percentage of aggregate of fineness modulus 2.6 tobe combined with coarse aggregate of finenessmodulues 6.8 for obtaining the aggregate of finenessmodulues 5.4 is(a) 30%(b) 40%(c) 50%(d) 60%

137. Size of fine aggregate should not exceed(a) 2.75 mm(b) 3.75 mm(c) 4.75 mm(d) 5.75 mm

138. Factor of safety for steel as compared to concreteis(a) same(b) lower(c) higher

214


(c) none of these139. Factor of safety for steel is based on its

(a) yield stress(b) ultimate stress(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

140. Factor of safety of concrete is based on its(a) yield stress(b) ultimate stress(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

141. Design mix concrete is preferred over nominal mixconcrete because(a) strength of former is more(b) cement content of latter is more(c) it is easy to prepare former at site(d) none of these

142. Which of the following grades of concrete isrecommended to prepare the base for a foundationof a masonry wall ?(a) M 7.5 (b) M 15(c) M 20 (d) M 30

143. In a M 7.5 nominal mix concrete, if quantity ofwater used per 50 kg of cement is 45 kg, then thatused for M 15 will be(a) < 45(b) > 45(c) 45(d) Quantity of water has no relation to the grade

of concretes144. In a concrete mix, if maximum size of coarse

aggregate is increased,. then proportion of fine tocoarse aggregate should be(a) increased(b) decreased(c) kept the same(d) proportion does not depend on size of the

aggregate145. If a nominal mix prepared at site for M-10 gives a

testing strength of 17.5 MPa, then mix may begraded as(a) M 15 (b) M 20(c) M 10 (d) none of these

146. Batching of fine sand is not done by volume because(a) containers to measure large volumes are not

easily available(b) it is easy to weigh fine sand(c) volume of sand changes depending on site

conditions,(d) none of the above

147. The most significant change that occurs in concreteafter initial set, is that(a) it starts hardening(b) it starts gaining strength(c) it can not be rehandled(d) none of these

148. pH value of water for quality concrete shall not beless than(a) 2(b) 4(c) 6(d) 12

149. Which of the following does not cause unsoudnessin cement ?(a) Free lime(b) Mangesia(c) Calcium sulphate(d) Silica

150. According to IS: 456-1978, maximum compressivelistress in concrete for design purpose is taken as(a) 0.370 fck

(b) 0.416 fck,(c) 0.446 fck

(d) 0.670 fck

151. Maximum compressive stress in concrete for designpurposes is based on a partial safety factor of(a) 1.15(b) 1.50(c) 1.85(d) 2.20

152. According to IS: 456-1978, maximum strain inconcrete at the outermost compression fibre in thelimit state design of flexural member is(a) 0.0020(b) 0.0035

215


(c) 0.0050(d) 0.0065

153. For plain concrete used in underground works ofmoderate exposure condition, minimum cementcontent (in kg /m3) of the concrete mix would be(a) 220 (b) 250(c) 290 (d) 310

154. If compaction factor of a concrete is 0.90, thenworkability is(a) very low(b) low(c) medium(d) high

------

155. A soil sample is having a specific gravity of 2.60and a void ratio of 0.78. The water contact inpercentage required to fully saturate the soil at thatvoid ratio would be(a) 10 (b) 30(c) 50 (d) 70

156. A loose uniform sand with rounded grains haseffective grain size of 0.05 cm. Co-efficient ofpermeability of the sand is(a) 0.25 cm/sec (b) 0.50 cm/sec(c) 1.00 cm/sec (d) 1.25 cm/sec

157. A horizontal stratified soil deposit consists of threelayers each uniform in itself. The permeabilities ofthe layers are 8 x 10-4, 50 x 10-4 and 15 x 10 cm/sec; and their thicknesses are 6, 3 and 12 mrespectively. Then the average permeability of thedeposit in horizontal and vertical directionsrespectively are(a) 15 x 10-4 cm/sec and 13.04 x 10-4 cm/sec(b) 13.04 x 10-1 cm/sec and 18 x 10-4 cm/sec(c) 18 x 10 cm/sec and 13.04 x 10-4 cm/sec(d) 13.04 x 10-4 cm/sec and 15 x 10-4 cm/sec

158. If the flow net of a coffer dam foundation had 6numbers of flow channels and 16 numbers ofequipotential drops, with the head of water lost duringseepage being 6 m through the foundation having k

= 4 x 10-5 m/minute, the seepage loss (in m3/day)per metre length of the dam will be(a) 2.16 x 10-3 (b) 6.48 x 10-3

(c) 12.96 x 10-2 (d) 25.92 x 10-2

159. Properties of flow net is /are(a) Flow lines are perpendicular to equipotential

lines.(b) No two flow lines or equipotential lines start

from the same point(c) No two flow lines cross each other(d) all of these

160. A flownet is drawn for a weir, the total head lossis 6 m, number of potential drops is 10 and thelength of the flow path for the last square is 1m.The exit gradient is(a) 0.6 (b) 0.7(c) 1.0 (d) 1.6

161. In a saturated soil deposit having a density of 22kN/m3 the effective normal stress on a horizontalplane at 5 m depth will be(a) 22 kN/m2 (b) 50 kN/m2

(c) 60 kN/m2 (d) 110 kN/m2

162. Average pore water pressure in a fully saturatedclay specimen, which was subjected to a pressureof 20 N/cm2 initially, was measured to be 7 N/cm2after a period of time. Degree of consolidationreached at that time is(a) 35% (b) 70%(c) 45% (d) 65%

163. Water is flowing at the rate of 0.1 cc/sec in anupward direction through a sand sample with k = 2x 10 cm/sec. The thickness of sand sample is 10 mand sectional area is 50 cm2. The effective stressat middle of sample if Ysat = 2t/m3 is(a) zero (b) 1.0 t/m2(c) 2.0 t/m2 (d) 1.5 t/m2

164. In a drained triaxial compression test, a saturatedspecimen of a cohesionless sand fails under adeviating stress of 3 kg/cm2 when cell pressure is1 kgf/cm2. The effective angle of shearing resistanceof sand is about(a) 37° (b) 45°(c) 53° (d) 20°

216


165. A undrained triaxial compression test is carried outon a saturated clay sample under a cell pressure of100 kN/m2. The sample failed at a deviator stressof 200 IN/m2. The cohension of the given sampleof clay is(a) 50 kN / m2

(b) 100 kN/m2

(c) 200 kN/m2

(d) 300 kN/m2

166. In an undrained triaxial test, a deviator stress of20 kN/m2 was applied and the corresponding changein pore water pressure measured was 10 kN /m2,then the Skempton’s pore pressure parameter A is(a) 2.0 (b) 3.0(c) 1.0 (d) 0.5

167. A slope of infinite extent is made in dense and layerat an angle of 30° to horizontal. The factor of safetyof the slope against shear failure, if the angle ofinternal friction of the sand is 36°, is(a) 1.000 (b) 1.258(c) 1.500 (d) 1.558

168. For a clay slope of height 10 m, the stability numberis 0.05, bulk density = 20 kN/m2, cohesion = 25 kN/m2, the critical height of the slope in this soil is(a) 4.0 m (b) 12.5 m(c) 25.0 m (d) 15.0 m

169. A strip footing of width 1.0 m is resting on a softclay strata at a depth of 1.0 m. The angle of internalfriction is zero, and cohesion is 20 kN/m2. The watertable is at a great depth. The ultimate bearingcapacity of soil according to Terzaghi’s equation is(a) 120 IcN/m2 (b) 114 kN/m2

(c) 571cN/m2 (d) None of these170. A deep cut is made in a soft clay having c= 20 kN/

m2. The depth of the cut is 7 m and width is 3.2 m.The length is fairly long. The factor of safety againstthe heave of the bottom of the cut. Assume the unitweight of the saturated clay as 20 kN/m3(a) 2 (b) 3(c) 1.03 (d) 1.07

171. A rectangular footing 1 m x 2 m is placed at adepth of 2 m in a saturated clay having anunconfined compressive strength of 100 kN/m2.

According to Skempton, the net ultimate bearingcapacity is(a) 420 kN/m2 (b) 412.5 IN /m2

(c) 385 kN/m2 (d) 350 kN/m2

172. The gross bearing capacity of a footing is 450 IcN/m2. if the footing is 1.5 m wide at a depth of 1 min clayey soil with unit weight of 20 kN/m3, thenthe net bearing capacity (in kN/m3) will be(a) 400 (b) 430(c) 435 (d) 440

173. A 30 cm diameter friction pile is embedded 10 minto a homogeneous consolidated deposit. Unitadhesion developed between clay and pile shaft is4 t/m2 and adhesion factor is 0.7. The safe load forfactor of safety 2.5 will be(a) 21.50 t (b) 11.57 t(c) 10.55 t (d) 6.35 t

174. A single acting steam hammer weighing 82.5 kNand falling through a height of 1.2 m drives a pile.If the final set is 12.5 mm, then according toEngineering News formula(a) allowable load for the pile is 300 kN(b) ultimate bearing capacity of the pile is 300 kN(c) allowable load for the pile is 120 kN(d) ultimate bearing capacity of the pile is 120 kN

175. The bearing capacity of a strip footing on a saturatedclay is 120 kN/m2. The bearing capacity of acircular footing (diameter = width) will be(a) more than 120 kN/m2

(b) equal to 120 kN/m2

(c) less than 120 kN/m2

(d) any of the above176. The ratio of total passive earth pressure to the total

active earth pressure for saturated clay deposit ona retaining wall of 10 m height willbe [given unitweight of clay soil = 2 t/m3, cohesion of clay =10112](a) 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 2(c) 3 : 2 (d) 2 : 1

177. If a flownet of a coffer dam foundation had 6number of flow channels and 12 number ofequipotential drops, with the head of water being 6

217


m, through a foundation having k = 4 x 10-5 m/min.,then seepage loss /m length of dam will be(a) 24 x 10-5 m3/min(b) 18 x 10-5 m3/min(c) 12 x 10-5 m3/min(d) 9 x 10-5 m3/min

178. The-relative density of a soil having maximum drydensity yd (max) = 2, minimum dry density 1.2 andnormal dry density 1.6, is(a) 75% (b) 62.50(c) 66.67 (d) 50%

179. The correct increasing order of specific surface i.e.surface area per mass of the given soils is(a) silt, sand, colloids, clay(b) sand, silt, clay, colloids(c) sand, silt, colloids, clay(d) clay, silt, sand, colloid

180. A soil sample is having porosity 40% and degree ofsaturation 80%, then its percentage air voids is(a) 5 (b) 6(c) 7 (d) 8

181. An undisturbed soil sample has a plastic limit 25%,a natural moisture content of 40% and a liquidityindex of 50%. Its liquid limit is(a) 50% (b) 55%(c) 65% (d) 75%

182. A soil sample has been found to have naturalmoisture content of 40% and liquid limit 60% andplastic limit of 30%. It can be said to possess.(a) stiff consistency (b) medium consistency(c) very soft consistency (d) soft consistency

183. Soil are arranged in face to face orientation. Thistype of soil structure is(a) dispersed (b) cohesive matrix(c) honey comb (d) flocculent

184. If in a soil sample piping phenomenon occurs, whatis the most prominent condition to be satisfied ?(a) Soil is fine grained(b) Hydraulic gradient is close to unity(c) Void ratio is more than 2.0(d) Specific gravity of soil solids is more than 2.8

185. Water is flowing in an upward direction throughstructure of sand 5 m thick under a total head

difference of 3m. The sand has a specific gracityof 2.65 and void ratio 0.65. The factor of safetyagainst quick condition would be(a) 2 (b) 1(c) 3 (d) 1.5

186. A soil sample has a shrinkage limit of 15% andspecific gravity of soil solids 2.5. The porosity ofthe soil at shrinkage limit is(a) 27% (b) 36%(c) 20% ( (d) 18%

187. The liquid limit and plastic limit of a soil sample is45% and 25%. In the liquid limit test of the soilsample its water content varied from 5% to 25%when the number of blows increased from 10 to100. The toughness index of the soil is(a) 2 (b) 0.5(c) 0.75 (d) 1.0

188. If during a permeability test on a soil sample witha falling head permeameter equal time intervals arenoted for a drop of head from L1 and L2 and againstfrom L2 to L3, then which of the following relationwill hold good ?(a) L3

2 = L1L2 (b) L22 = L1L3

(c) L12 = L2L3 (d) (L1 - L2) = L2- L3

189. The ratio of specific yield to specific retention of anaquifer with porosity 50% is 1.5, the specific yieldfrom it is(a) 20% (b) 37.5%(c) 30% (d) 25%

190. Water is flowing at the rate of 0.2 cc/sec in anupward direction through a sand sample with k =1x 10-3 cm/sec. The thickness of sand sample is10m and sectional area is 50 cm2. The effectivestress at middle of sample if y sat = 2t/m3 is(a) 75 t/m2 (b) 0 t/m2

(c) 0.025 t/m3 (d) 1.6 t/m2

191. A flownet is drawn in a weir. The total head lossis 8m. Number of potential drop is 8 and the lengthof flow path of last square is 1m. The exit gradientis(a) 1 (b) 1.6(c) 2.3 (d) 2.4

192. The deflection of flow line at the interface of twodissimilar soils having co-efficient of permeability ka

218


and kb occurs as the flow line makes 01 and 02angles to the normal to the interface before andafter deflection. If 01= 60° and 02 = 30° then(a) ka = 3 kb (b) ka = 0.5 kb

(c) ka = kb (d) kb = ka

193. In a pumping in test, an open ended pipe with 0.2m diameter is drive into a soil to a depth of 30 m,and water is pumped in the pipe under a pressureof 7.0 m(head) at a steady rate of 5.5 x 10-3 m3/min, then the co-efficient of permeability based onelectrical analogy expression will be(a) 2 x 10-3 m/min (b) 1 x 10-3 m/min(c) 5.5 x 10-3 m/min (d) 2 x 10-3 m/min

194. A concentrated load acting on the surface of a soilproduces a stress 20/kPa at a depth of lm below.The stress at 2m depth will be what whenBoussinesq’s expression is to be taken(a) 3 kPa (b) 5 kPa(c) 61(Pa (d) 8 kPa

195. If Boussinesq’s equation is applied for computationof stress, then the ratio of vertical stresses at depths3m and 5m respectively below and the point ofapplication of load, will be what ? Given that Aconcentrated load of 50t acts vertically at a pointon the soil surface.(a) 1.66 (b) 0.60(c) 0.36 (d) 2.77

196. The vertical stress at failure of soil sample in anunconfined compression test was found to be 1 kg/cm2. The angle between horizontal phase and failureplane was 50° . This would indicate cohesion andangle of internal friction as Cohesion Angle ofinternal friction(a) < 0.5 kg. /cm2 zero(b) < 0.5 kg/cm2 not zero(c) 0.5 kg/cm2 not zero(d) 0.5 kg/cm2 zero

197. A = 0.5 and B = 1.0 (pore pressure parameters ofan embankment). The height of an embankmentwas raised from 2m to 4m. Given y s =18 kN/m3

and and lateral pressure at any point is one third ofvertical pressure, then the value of change in porewater pressure due to increase in height of anembankment is

(a) 12 kN/m2 (b) 48 kN/m2

(c) 36 kN/m2 (d) 24 kN/m2

198. A piezometer inserted under a fill at a point wherepressure due to overlying p material was 300 gm/cm2 should 2m, head of water after a certain intervalof time. The degree of consolidation at that point atthat instant of time is(a) 50% (b) 33%(c) 25% (d) 66%

199. During a laboratory consolidation test on 3cm thickclay specimen 50% consolidation was compelete in15 minutes. The sample was free to drain fromboth sides. If the soil sample was taken from a claystratum 3m thick sandwiched between sand layers,the time to reach 50% consolidation will be(a) 12000 hours (b) 2500 hours(c) 1200 hours (d) 250 hours

200. Two specimen of clay A and B are tested onconsolidation operative if (mv)A = 3.6 x 10-4 m2/kN and (mV)B = 1.8 x 10-4 m2/kV (Cv )A = 3.8x 10-4 cm2/sec (CV )B = 1.9 x 10-4 cm2/sec, thenthe ratio kA/kB is equal to(a) 4.0 (b) 1.0(c) 0.25 (d) 0.0625

201. Stiff clay which is saturated has unit weight 2 gm/cm2 and unconfined compressive strength of 2 kg/cm2. The depth of tension crack that would developis this clay is(a) 10 m ( (b) 20 m(c) 5 m (d) 2 m

202. A residual factor is important in the investigation ofstops. If the peak, residual and in situ shear strengthof a clay are 1.0 kg/cm2 and 0.6 kg/cm2respectively, then the residual factor of the clay willbe(a) 0.60 (b) 0.40(c) 0.67 (d) 1.50

203. A retaining wall retains a sand strat with 0 = 30°upto its top. If a uniform surcharge of 9t/m2 issubsequently put on the sand strata, then the increasefor the lateral earth pressure intensity on an wallwill be(a) 3 t /m2 (b) 8 t /m2

(c) 4 t/m2 (d) 1 t / m2

219


204. Taylors stability number curves are used for theanalysis of stability of slopes. The angle of shearingresistance used in the chart is the(a) mobilised angle(b) weighted angle(c) effective angle(d) apparent angle

204. The unconfined compressive strength of a clay inundisturbed and remoulded state are 4.5 kg /cm2

and 1.5 kg/cm2 respectively, the sensitivity of claywill be(a) 2.0 (b) 4.5(c) 0.5 (d) 5.0

205. The ratio of total passive earth pressure to the totalactive earth pressure for saturated clay deposits ona retaining wall of 12 m height will be [given unitweight of clay soil = 2t/m3, cohessionof soil = It/m3].(a) 1.14 (b) 2.23(c) 1.36 (d) 1.8

206. A gravity retaining wall of top width lm, base width3m and total height of 10m is retaining drycohesionless backfill of unit weight 20 kN/m3 andangle of shearing resistance 30°. Then the factor ofsafety against sliding will be (7 wall = 22 kN/m3)(a) 2.5 (b) 3.3(c) 1.3 (d) 2.3

207. A sample of clay failed in anunconfined compressionmachine at a stress of 30 t/m2. The safe value forthe bearing capacity of the clay consuming a factorof safety 3 would be(a) 24 t/m2

(b) 42 t/m2(c) 19 t/m2

(d) 10 t/m2

208. Negative skin friction on a pile under verticalcompressive load acts(a) downward and increases the load carrying

capacity of the pile.(b) downward and reduces the load carrying

capacity of the pile.(c) upwards and increases the load carrying

capacity of the pile.

(d) downwards and maintains the same loadcarrying capacity of the pile.

209. Which one of the following statement is valid forarriving at a standardized value of N is a standardpenetration test ?(a) For a constant density index, the N value

increases with increase in overburdenpressure.

(b) Density index decreases with depth.(c) Density index increases with depth.(d) Angle of shearing resistance decreases with

depth.210. Pile caps are used on a group of piles to

(a) increase the load bearing capacity of each pile.(b) protect the piles from lateral displacement.(c) protect in case of offshore structure.(d) spread the vertical and horizontal loads to

all the piles.211. For a sandy soil, the angle of internal friction is 45°.

If the major principal stress is 60 kN/m2 at failure,then corresponding minor principal stress in (kN/m2) will be(a) 15.4 kN/m2 (b) 17.6 kN/m2

(c) 18.2 kN/m2 (d) 19.8 kN/m2

212. A soil sample has void ratio of 0.5 and its porositywill be close to(a) 50% (b) 66%(c) 100% (d) 33%

213. A borrow pit soil has a dry density of 17 kN/m3.How many cubic meters of this soil will be requiredto construct an embankment of 100 m3 volume witha dry density of 16 kN/m3.(a) 94 m3 (b) 106 m3

(c) 100 m3 (d) 90 m3

214. The group efficiency of a pile group(a) will be always less than 100%(b) will be always greater than 100%(c) may be less than 100% or more than 100%(d) will be more than 100% for pile groups in

cohesionless soil and less than 100% for thosein cohesive soils.

215. The two criteria for the determination of allowablebearing capacity of a foundation are

220


(a) tensile failure and compression failure.(b) tensile failure and settlement.(c) bond failure and shear failure.(d) shear failure and settlement.

216. The ultimate bearing capacity of a soil is 3001(N/m2. The depth of foundation is lm and unit weightof soil is 201(1\1/m3. Choosing a factor of safety of2.5, the net safe bearing capacity is(a) 100 kN / m2 (b) 112 kN/m2

(c) 80 kN / m2 (d) 100.5 kN/m2

217. A deep cut of 7 m has to be made in a clay withweight 16kN/m3 and a cohesion of 251(N/m2. Whatwill be the factor of safety if one has to gave aslope angle of 30°? Stability number is given to be0.178 (from Taylor’s chart) for a depth factor of 3.(a) 0.80 (b) 1.1(c) 1.25 (d) 1.0

218. In a drained triaxial compression test, a saturatedspecimen of a cohesionless sand fails under adeviatoric stress of 3 kg/cm2 when the cell pressureis 1 kg/cm2. The effective angle of shearingresistance of sand is about(a) 37° (b) 45°(c) 53° (d) 20°

219. Two footings, one circular and the other square, arefounded on the surface of a purely cohesionlesssoil. The diameter of the circular footing is same asthat of the side of the square footing. The ratio oftheir ultimate bearing capacities is(a) 3/4 (b) 4/3(c) 1.0 (d) 1.3

220. To have zero active pressure intensity at the tip ofa wall in cohesive sail, one should apply a uniformsurcharge intensity of(a) 2 c tan a (b) 2 c cot a(c) —2 c tan a (d) -2 c cot a

221. In an area of 200 hectare, water table drops by 4m.If the porosity is 0.35 and the specific retention is0.15, change in volume of storage in the aquifer is(a) 160 m3 (b) 1.6 x 106 m3

(c) 8 x 106 m3 (d) 1.6 x 103 m3

223. The following two statements are made with respect

to different sand samples having the same relativedensity. Identify if they are TRUE or FALSE.I. Poorly graded sands will have lower frictionangle than the well graded sands. IL The particlesize has no influence on the friction angle of sand(a) II is TURE but I is FALSE(b) Both are FALSE statements(c) Both are TRUE statements.(d) I is TRUE but II is false.

224. The following tow statements are made withreference to the calculation of net bearing capacitytheory. Identify if they are TRUE or FALSE.I. Increase in footing width will result in increase

in bearing capacity.II. Increase in depth of foundation will result in

higher bearing capacity.(a) Both statements are TRUE(b) Both statements are FALSE(c) I is TRUE but II is FALSE(d) I is FALSE but II is TRUE

225. The width and depth of a footing are 2 and 1.5 mrespectively. The water table at the site is at adepth of 3 m below the ground level. The watertable correction factor for the calculation of thebearing capacity of soil is(a) 0.875 (b) 1.000(c) 0.925 (d) 0.500

226. The void ratio and specific gravity of a soil are 0.65and 2.72 respectively. The degree of saturation (inpercent) corresponding to water content of 20% is(a) 65.3 (b) 20.9(c) 83.7 (d) 54.4

227. With respect to a c-4 soil in an infinite slope, identifyif the following two statements are TRUE orFALSE.I. The stable slope angle can be greater than 4)II The factor of safety of the slope does not depend

on the height of soil in the slope.(a) Both statements are FALSE(b) I is TRUE but II is FALSE(c) I is FALSE but II is TRUE(d) Both statements are TRUE

221


228. Identify the two FALSE statements from thefollowing four statements.I. The consolidation of soil happens due to the

change in total stress.II When Standard Penetration Tests are performed

in fine sands below the water table, the dilationcorrection is applied after the overburdencorrection is applied. Over consolidated clayswill have predominantly cohesive strength ascompared to the frictional strength.

IV. Compaction of soils is due to expulsion of water.(a) II & III (b) I & IV(c) I & III (d) II &IV

228. The co-efficients of permeability of a soil in horizontaland vertical directions are 3.46 and 1.5m/dayrespectively. The base length of a concrete damresting in this soil is 100 m. When the flow net isdeveloped for this soil with 1:25 scale factor in thevertical direction, the reduced base length of thedam will be(a) 2.63 m (b) 4.00 m(c) 6.08 m (d) 5.43 m

229. A plate load test was conducted in sand on a 300mm diameter plate. If the plate settlement was 5mm at a pressure of 100 kPa, the settlement (inmm) of a 5 mx 8 m rectangular footing at the samepressure will be(a) 9.4 mm (b) 18.6 mm(c) 12.7 mm (d) 17.8 mm

230. Identify the two TRUE statement from the followingfour statements.I. Negative skin friction is higher on floating piles

than on end bearing piles.II. All other things being the same in footing on

sand, the footing with smaller width will havelower settlement at the same net pressure.

III. The void ratio of soils is always less than 1.0.IV. For determining the depth of embedment of

anchored sheet piles, net moment at the anchorelevation is set to zero.

(a) I &IV (b) I & III(c) II & IV (d)II&III

231. Identify the two TRUE statement from the followingfour statements

I. Negative skin friction is higher on floating pilesthan on end bearing piles.

II. All other things being the same in footing onsand, the footing with smaller width will havelower settlement at the same net pressure.

III The void ratio of soils is always less than 1.0.IV. For determining the depth of embedment of

anchored sheet piles, net moment at the anchorelevation is set to zero.

(a) I & IV (b) I &III(c) II & IV (d) II &III

232. Data from a sieve analysis conducted on a givensample of soil showed that 67% of the particlespassed through 75 micron IS sieve. The liquid limitand plastic limit of the finer fraction was found tobe 45 and 33 percents respectively. The groupsymbol of the given soil as per IS:1498-1970 is:(a) SC (b) M I(c) CH (d) M H

233. The void ratios at the densest, loosest andnaturalstates of a sand deposit are 0.2, 0.6 and 0.4,respectively. The relative density of the deposit is :(a) 100% (b) 75%(c) 50% (d) 25%

234. The following data were obtained from a liquid limittest conducted on a soil sample.Number of blows 17 22 25 28 34Water contents (%) 63.8 63.1 61.9 60.6 60.5The liquid limit of the soil is :(a) 63.1% (b) 62.8%(c) 61.9% (d) 60.6%

235. The specific gravity and insitu void of a soil depositare 2.71and 0.85 respectively. The value of thecritical hydraulic gradient is:(a) 0.82 (b) 0.85(c) 0.92 (d) 0.95

236. The observed value of the standard penetrationnumber (N) at 10m depth of a silty sand deposit is13. The unit weight of the soil is 16 kN/m3. The Nvalue after correcting for the presence of fines willbe:(a) 12 (b) 13(c) 14 (d) 15

222


237. An infinite slope is to be constructed in a soil. Theeffec tive stress strength parameters of the soil areC=0 and = 30°. The saturated unit weight of theslope is 20 kN/m3 and the unit weight of water is10kN /m3. Assuming that seepage is occurringparallel to the slope, the maximum slope angle fora factor of safety of 1.5 would be:(a) 10.89° (b) 11.30°(c) 12.48° (d) 14.73°

238. If the effective stress strength parameters of a soilare c-= 10 kPa and o’=30°, the shear strength ona plane within the saturated soil mass at a pointwhere the total normal stress is 300 kPa and porewater pressure is 150 kPa will be:(a) 90.5 kPa (b) 96.6 kPa(c) 101.5 kPa (d) 105.5 kPa

239. The time for a clay layer to achieve 85%consolidation is 10 years. If the layer was half asthick, 10 times more compressible then the timethat would be required to achieve the same degreeof consolidation is(a) 1 year (b) 5 years(c) 12 years (d) 16 years

240. In a triaxial test carried out on a cohesionless soilsample with a cell pressure of 20 kPa, the observedvalue of applied stress at the point of failure was 4kPa. The angle of internal friction on the soil is:(a) 10° (b) 15°(c) 25° (d) 30°

241. In a falling head permeability test the initial head of1.0 m dropped to 0.35 m in 3 hours, the diameterof the stand pipe being 5 mm. The soil specimenwas 200 mm long and of 100 mm diameter. Thecoefficient of permeability of the soil is(a) 4.86 X 10-5cm/s(b) 4.86 x 10-6 cm/s(c) 4.86 x 10-7 cm/s(d) 4.86 x 10-8 cm/s

242. A masonry dam is founded on previous sand havingporosity equal to 45% and specific gravity of sandparticles is 2.65. For a desired factor of safety of3 against sand boiling, the maximum permissibleupwrd gradient will be(a) 0.225 (b) 0.302

(c) 1.0 (d) None of these243. A double draining clay layer, 6m thick, settles by

30mm in three years under the influence of a certainloads. Its final consolidation settlement has beenestimated to be 120mm. If a thin layer of sandhaving negligible thickness is introduced at a depthof 1.5m below the top surface, the final consolidationsettlement of clay layer will be(a) 60 mm (b) 120 mm(c) 240 mm (d) None of these

244. A granular soil possesses saturated density of 20kN/m2. Its effective angle of internal friction is 35degrees. If the desired factor of safety is 1.5, thesafe angle of slope for this soil, when seepageoccures at and parallel to the slope surface, will be(a) 25° (b) 23°(c) 20° (d) 13°

245. In a plate load test conducted on cohesionless soil,a 600 mm square test plate settles by 15mm undera load intensity of 0.2 N/mm2. All conditionsremaining the same, settlement of a lm square footingwill be(a) less than 15 mm(b) greater than 25 mm(c) 15.60 mm(d) 20.50 mm

246. A 25 kN point load acts on the surface of an infiniteelastic medium. The vertical pressure intensity inkN/m2 at a point 6.0 m below and 4.0 m awayfrom the load will be:(a) 132 (b) 13.2(c) 1.32 (d) 0.132

247. Compaction of an embankment is carried out in 500mm thick layers. The hammer used for compactionhas a foot area of 0.05 sq. m and the energy impartedin every drop of hammer is 400 Nm. Assuming50% more energy in each pass over the compactedarea due to overlap, the number of passes requiredto develop compactive energy equivalent to IndianStan-dard light compaction for each layer would be(a) 10 (b) 16(c) 20 (d) 26144.A braced cut, 5m wide and 7.5m deep isproposed in a soil deposit having effective cohesion

223


c’= 0 and effective friction angle, (I) ‘= 36°. Thefirst row of struts is to be installed at a depth of 0.5m below ground sur-face and spacing between thestruts should be 1.5m. If horizontal spacing of sturtsis 3m and unit weight of the deposit is 20 kN/m3,the maximum strut load will be(a) 70.871(N (b) 98.72 kN(c) 113.90kN (d) 151.861 kN

248. If Taylor’s Stability Number, Sn is 0.08 and if thecanal flows full, the factor of safety with respect tocohesion a ‘,,ainst failure of the canal bank sloperswill be(a) 3.7 (b) 1.85(c) 1.0 (d) None of these

249. 1f there is a sudden drawdown of water in thecanal and if Taylor’s Number for the reduced valueof (I), is 0.16, the factor of safety with respect tocohesion against the failure of bank slopes will be(a) 1.85 (b) 1.18(c) 0.84 (d) 0.53

250. If the elastic modulus and the Poisson’s ratio of theclay layer are respectiviely 50 x 103 kPa and 0.4and if the influence factor for the strip footing is1.75, the elastic settlement of the footing will be(a) 0.41 mm (b) 1.41 nun(c) 14.1 mm (d) None of these

250. The ratio of saturated unit weight too dry unit weightof a soil is 1.25. If the specific gravity of solids(Gs)) is 2.56, the void ratio of the soil is(a) 0.625 (b) 0.663(c) 0.944 (d) 1.325

251. An unsupported excavation is made to the maximumpossible depth in a clay soil havingYt = 18 kN/m3, c = 100 kN/m3, = 30° .The active earth pressure, according to Rankine’stheory at the base level of the excavation is(a) 115.47 kN/m2 (b) 54.36 kN/m2

(c) 27.18 kN/m2 (d) 13. kN/m2

252. A retaining wall of height 8 m retain dry sand. Inthe intial state, soil is loose and has a void ratio of0.5, yd = 17.8 kN/m3 and cp = 30°. Subsequently,the backfill is campacted to a state where void ratiois 0.4,yd = 18.8 kN/m3 and cp = 35°. The ratio of

initial passive thrust to the final passive, accordingto Rankine’s earth pressure theory, is(a) 0.38 (b) 0.64(c) 0.77 (d) 1.55(In the given below two questions)A group of 16 piles of 10 m length and 0.5 mdiameter is installed in a 10m thick stiff clay layerunderlain by rock. The pile-soil adhesion factor is0.4; average shear strength of soil on the side is100 kPa; undrained shear strength of the soil at thebase is also 100 kPa.

253. The base resistance of a single pile is(a) 40.00 kN (b) 88.35 kN(c) 100.00 kN (d) 176.71 kN

254. Assuming 100% efficiency, the group side resistanceis(a) 5026.5 kN (b) 10000.0 kN(c) 10053.1 kN (d) 20106.0 kN

255. A clayey soil has a maximum dry density of 16 kN/m3 and optimum moisture content of 12%. Acontractor during the construction of core of anearth dam obtained the dry density 15.2 kN/m3 andwater content 11%. This construction is acceptablebecause(a) the density is less than the maximum dry density

and water content is on dry side of optimum(b) the compaction density is very low and water

content is less than 12%(c) the compaction is done on the dry side of the

optimum(d) both the dry density and water content of

the com-pacted soil are within the desirablelimits

256. Root time method is used to determine(a) T, time factor(b) s, co-efficient of consolidation(c) ay, co-efficient of compressibility(d) my, co-efficient of volume compressibility

257. Negative skin friction in a soil is considered whenthe pile is constructed through a(a) fill material(b) dense coarse sand(c) over consolidated stiff clay

224


(d) dense fine sand258. There are two footings resting on the ground surface.

One footing is square of dimension ‘B’. The otheris strip footing of width ‘B’. Both of them aresubjectedto loading intensity of ‘q’. The pressureintensity at any depth below the base of the footingalong the centerline would be(a) equal in both footings(b) large for square footing and small for strip

footing(c) large for strip footing and small for square

footing(d) more for strip footing at shallow depth (B) and

more for square footing at large depth (>B)259. A soil mass contains 40% gravel, 50% sand and

10% silt. This soil can be classified as(a) silty sandy gravel having co-efficient of

uniformity less than 60(b) silty gravely sand having co-efficient of

uniformity equal to 10(c) gravelly silty sand having co-efficient of

uniformity greater than 60(d) gravelly silty sand and its co-efficient of

uniformity cannot be determined260. A saturated soil mass has a total density 22 kN/m3

and a water content of 10%. The bulk density anddry density of this soil are(a) 12 kN/3 and 20 kN/m3 respectively(b) 22 kN/3 and 20 kN/m3 respectively(c) 19.8 kN/3 and 19.8 kN/m3 respectively(d) 23.2 kN/3 and 19.8 kN/m3 respectively

261. Assuing that a river bed level dooes not change andthe depth of water in river was 10m, 15 m and 8m during the months of February, July andDecember respectively of a particular year. Theaverage bulk density of the soil is 20 kN /m3. Thedensity of water is 10 kN/m3. The effective stressat a depth of 10 m below the river bed during thesemonths would be(a) 300 kN/m2 in February, 350 kN/m2 in July and

320 kN/m2 in December(b) 100 kN/m2 in February, 100 kN/m2 in July

and 100 kN/m2 in December

(c) 200 kN/m2 in February, 250 kN/m2 in July and180 kN/m2 in December

(d) 300 kN/m2 in February, 350 kN/m2 in July and280kN/m2 in December

262. During the subsurface investigations for design offoundations a standard penetration test wasconducted at 4.5 m below the ground surface. Therecord of number of blows is given belowPenetration depth (cm)0-7.5 7.5-15 15-22.5 22.5-30 30-37.5 37.5-45

No. of blows3 3 6 6 8 7

Assuming the water table at ground level, soil asfine sand and correction factor for overburden as1.0, the corrected ‘N’ value for the soil would be(a) 18 (b) 19(c) 21 (d) 33

263. For two infinite slopes (one in dry condition andother in submerged condition) in a sand deposithaving the angle of shearing resistance 30°, factorof safety was determined as 1.5 (for both slopes).The slope angles would have been(a) 21.05° for dry slope and 21.05° for

submerged slope(b) 19.47° for dry slope and 18.40° for submerged

slope(c) 18.4° for dry slope and 21.05° for submerged

slope(d) 22.6° for dry slope and 19.47° for submerged

slope264. A strip footing (8 m wide) is designed for a total

settlement of 40 mm. The safe bearing capacity(shear) was 150 kN/m2 and safe allowable soilpressure was 100 kN/m2. Due to importance of thestructure, now the footing is to be redesigned for atotal settlement of 25mm. The new width of thefooting willbe(a) 5 m (b) 8 m(c) 12 m (d) 12.8 m

265. A 3 m high retaining wall is supporting a saturatedsank (saturated due to capillary action) of bulkdensity 18 kN/m3 and angle of shearing resistance30°. The change in magnitude of active earthpressure at the basedue to rise in ground water

225


table from the base of the footing to the groundsurface shall (y w = 10 kN/m3)(a) increase by 20 kN/m2

(b) decrease by 20 kN/m2

(c) increase by 30 kN/m2

(d) decrease by 30 kN/m2

266. Which of the following tatement is/are correct?(a) Culmann’s graphical method of determining the

earth pressure is based on Coulomb’s wedgetheory.

(b) Rankine’s theory of lateral earth pressure ismore versatile than Coulomb’s theory.

(c) A gravity retaining wall together with theretained backfill and supporting soil is anindeterminate system.

(d) All of these267. Which of these corrections are required while using

standard penetration test values ?(a) Overburden pressure(b) Dilatancy(c) Ground water(d) All of these

268. Which of these are taken into consideration in thefriction ciircle method for the equilibrium of slidingsector in the stability analysis of slope ?(a) Weight of the sliding wedge of slope(b) Resultant reaction ‘R’ of the slip(c) Critical height of slope(d) All of these

269. Active earth pressure will be developed in thebackfill when1. horzontal strain is Lc. 0.5%2. horizontal strain is 1%3. mobilised shearing resistance along the failure

plane is a minimum.4. mobilised shearing resistance along the failure

plane is a maximum. Which of these statementsare correct?

(a) 1 and 3 (b) 1 and 4(c) 2 and 3 (d) 2 and 4

270. Which of the statements given are correct ?(a) Hansen’s equation accounts for influence of

depth, shape and inclination of load.

(b) Local shear failure takes place in dense and/orvery dense sand and also in stiff and hard clays.

(c) The region of failure of soil below foundationsconsists of three different zones.

(d) All of these271. A soil has a liquid limit of 40% and plasticity index

of 20%. The plastic limit of the soil will be(a) 20% (b) 30%(c) 40% (d) 60%

272. A strata of 3.5 m thick fine sand has a void ratioof 0.7 and G of 2.7. For a quicks and condition tt3 develop in this strata, the water flowing in upwarddirection wouldrequire a head of(a) 7 m (b) 5.56 m(c) 5 m (d) 3.5 m

273. Aflownet of a Coffer dam foundation has flowchcnnels and 18 equipotential drops. The head ofwater lost during seepage is 6m. If the co-efficientof permeability of foundation is 4x10-5 m/min., thenthe seepage loss per m length of dam will be(a) 2.16 x 10-2 m3/clay(b) 6.48 x 10-2 m3 day(c) 11.52 x 10-2 m3 day(d) 34.56 x 10-2 m3 day

274. A sample of saturated sand has a dry unit weightof 18 kN/m3 and a specific gravity of 2.7. If 7water is 10 kN/m3, the void ratio of the soil samplewill be kN /m3 and a specifi gravity of 2.7. If 7water is 10 kl\l/m3, the void ratio of the soil samplewill be(a) 0.5 (b) 0.6(c) 0.4 (d) 0.9

275. The disadvantages of direct shear test is/are(a) Failure takes place on the predetermined plane.(b) Drainage conditions cannot be changed.(c) Failure of the sample is progressive.(d) All of these

276. Which of the following statements associated withstability of slope is/are correct.1. Stability number is inversely proportional to

cohesion and directly proportional to height.2. Swedish method of analysis is based on circular

failure surfaces.

226


3. The Culmann method assumes that rupture willoccur in a plane. Which of these statementsare correct ?

(a) 2 and 3 (b) 1 and 3(c) 1 and (d) 1, 2 and 3

277. The settlement analysis for a clay layer drainingfrom top and bottom shows a settlement of 2.5 cmin 4 years and an ultimate settlement of 10 cm.However detailed subsurface investigation revealsthat there is no drainage at the bottom. The ultimatesettlement in this condition will be(a) 2.5 cm (b) 5 cm(c) 10 cm (d) 20 cm

278. A machine foundation weighs 39.24 kN and has aspring constant k = 10000 kN/m. The system willbe critically damped if the damping co-efficient is(acceleration due to gravity, g = 9.81 m2/s)(a) 100 kN.s/m(b) 200 kN.s/m(c) 400kN.s/m(d) 800 kN.s/m

279. A dry soil sample has equal amounts of solids andvoids by volume. Its void ratio and porosity will beVoid ratio Porosity (%)(a) 1.0 100% (b) 0.5 50%(c) 0.5 100% (d) 1.0 50%

280. The plasticity index and the percentage of grainsize finer than 2 microns of a clay sample are 25and 15, respectively. Its activity ratio is(a) 2.5 (b) 1.67(c) 1.0 (d) 0.6

281. The natural void ratio of a sand sample is 0.6 andits density index is 0.6. If its void ratio in the looseststate is 0.9, then the void ratio in the densest statewill be(a) 0.2 (b) 0.3(c) 0.4 (d) 0.5

282. The following data were obtained when a sampleof medium sand was tested in a constant headpermeameter :Cross-section area of sample : 100 cm2

Hydraulic gradient : 10Discharge collected : 10 cc/s

The co-efficient of permeability of the sand is(a) 0.1 m/s (b) 0.01 m/s(c) 1 x 10-4 m/s (d) 1 x 10-8 m/s

283. A soil sample tested in a triaxial compressionapparatus failed when the total maximum andminimum principal stresses were 100 kPa and 40kPa, respectively. The pore pressure measured atfailure was 10 kPa. The effective principal stressratio at failure is(a) 2.5 (b) 3.0(c) 2.75 (d) 2.0

284. Which of the following statements regarding soilstabilisation is/are correct?(a) Subgrade should be treated if it has a

soaked CBR of 5 or less.(b) Sub-bases, after treatment, should have

plasticity index not less than 5.(c) Both (a) and (b)(d) None of these

285. Which one of the following represents relativedensity of saturated sand deposit having moisturecontent of 25%, if maximum and minimum voidratio of sand are 0.95 and 0.45 respectively andspecific gravity of sand particles is 2.6 ?(a) 40% (b) 50%(c) 60% (d) 70%

286. Theory of consolidation predicts settlement due toprimary consolidation; it cannot include settlementdue to initial compression nor due to secondaryconsolidation.This happens because of which of thefollowing assumptions made by the theory?(a) Soil grains and water are incompressible.(b) Soil is fully saturated.(c) Time lag in consolidation is entirely due to low

permeability of soil.(d) All of these

287. Which of the following statements is/are correct?(a) Quick condition and liquefaction of

saturated sands are based on similarphenomenon.

(b) Quick condition is associated with only earthdams.

(c) Liquefaction is possible in dry sand also.(d) All of these

227


288. A well development(a) involves reversal of flow through the well screen(b) increases permeability towards the well(c) is continued till sand/silt free water is pumped

out(d) all of these

289. 0n which of the following factors, does thepopulation growth in a town normally depend?(a) Birth and death rates(b) Migrations(c) Probabilistic growth(d) All of these

290. The collapsible soil is associated with(a) Dune sands(b) Laterite soils(c) Loess(d) Black cotton soils

291. While computing the values of limits of consistencyand consistency indices, it is found that liquidityindex has a negative value because(a) Liquidity index cannot have a negative value

and should be taken as zero.(b) Liquidity index can have a negative value.(c) The soil tested is in medium soft state.(d) All of these

292. A stratified soil ,deposit has three layers ofthicknesses: Z1 = 4, Z2 = 1, Z3 = 2 units and thecorresponding permeabilities of K1 = 2, K2 = 1 andK3 = 4 units, respectively. The average permeabilityperpendicular to the bedding planes will be(a) 4 (b) 2(c) 8 (d) 16

293. A dispersed structure is formed in clay when(a) the net electrical forces between adjacent soil

particles at the time of deposition are repulsive(b) there is concentration of dissolved minerals in

water(c) platelets have face to face contact in more or

less parallel arrays(d) all of these

294. A CD triaxial test was conducted on a granular’soil. At failure all& was 3.0. The effective minor

principal stress of failure was 75 kPa. The principal,stress difference at failure will be(a) 75 kPa (b) 150 kPa(c) 225 kPa (d) 300 kPa

295. Which of the following statements is/are correct?(a) Liquefaction is generally associated with sandy

soils.(b) Liquefaction is not possible in normal clays.(c) Highly sensitive clays may undergo liquefaction

under vibrations.(d) All of these

296. 0n which of the following factors does the behaviourof sand mass to cause liquefaction during aneartquake depend largely ?(a) The number of stress cycles(b) The frequency and amplitude of vibrations of

the earthquake shock(c) Angle of internal friction of sand(d) Relative density of sand

297. Two soil samples A and B have porosities nA =40% and% = 60 % respectively. What is the ratioof void ratios eA:eB?(a) 2: 3 (b) 3: 2(c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4

298. What are the respective values of void ratio, porosityratio and saturated density (in kN/m3) for a soilsample which has saturation moisture content of20% and specific gravity of grains as 2.6 ? (Takedensity of water 10 kNkn3)(a) 0.52, 1.08, 18.07 (b) 0.52, 0.34, 18.07(c) 0.77, 1.08, 16.64 (d) 0.52, 0.34, 20.14

299. Which of the following statements is/are correct?(a) Coarse sand is more than a million times

permeable than a high plasticity clay.(b) The permeability depends on the nature

of soil and not on properties of liquidflowing through soil.

(c) Permeability of soil decreases as the effectivestress acting on the soil increases.

(d) None of these 242.For a certain loadingcondition, a saturated clay layer undergoes 40%consolidation in a period of 178 days.

300. What would be the additional time required forfurther 20%, consolidation to occur ?

228


(a) 89 days (b) 222.5 days(c) 329.5 days (d) 400.5 days

301. Which of the following statements is/are correct?(a) Pile foundations are usually provided when loads

coming on the foundation are quite large. Suchpiles may often extend up to a large depthbelow ground level.

(b) Precast piles inserted into the holes bored atthe site do not get damaged while they aredriven into the ground.

(c) Both (a) and (b)(d) None of these

302. . Prevention or elimination of swelling can be broughtby(a) providing an impervious apron around the

structure(b) making downward loads large enough to exceed

swelling pressures.(c) chemically stabilizing the soil with lime(d) all of these

303. A clay sample has a void ratio of 0.54 dry state.The specific gravity of soil solid is 2.7. What is theshrinkage limit of the soil ?(a) 8.5% (b) 10.0%(c) 17.0% (d) 20.0%

304. A soil deposit has three layers having same thicknesseach but the permeabilities of the layers are in theratio of 1:2:4 from top to bottom. What is the ratioof average permeability in the horizontal directionto that in the vertical direction ?(a) 7:2 (b) 14:6(c) 28:24 (d) 49:36

305. If the time required for 60% consolidation of aremoulded soil sample of clay with single drainageis t, then what is the time required to consolidatethe same sample of clay with the same degree ofconsolidation but with double drainage ?(a) 4/t (b) 2 t(c) t/2 (d) t/4

306. Which of the following statements is/are correct?(a) Obtaining reliable properties of soil isvery

important in geotechnical engineering. Chunk

samples obtained from the field are the bestfor this purpose.

(b) Chunk samples may easily be obtained at alldepths below ground level and for all types ofsoils.

(c) Undisturbed soil samples are enclosed inrug- ged containers. As such, they do notget disturbed easily during transportationand handling.

(d) All of these307. Which of the following statement is/are correct?

(a) A recovery ratio of less than 1 implies thatthe soil has compressed.

(b) A recovery ratio of less than 1 implies that thesoil has swelled.

(c) A recovery ratio greater than 1 implies that thesoil has compressed.

(d) All of these308. Which of the following statements is/are correct?

(a) The standard penetration test is a reliablemethod for measuring the relative density ofgranular soils.

(b) For a sand having the same relative density,N- values are different at different depths.

(c) Both (a) and (b)(d) None of these

309. The load carrying capacity of an individual frictionpile is 200 kN. What is the total load carryingcapacity of a group of 9 such piles with groupefficiency factor of 0.8 ?(a) 1800 kN (b) 1640 kN(c) 1440 kN (d) 900 kN

310. Which of the following factors are associated withthe behaviour of sand mass during earthquake tocause liquefaction ?(a) Number of stress cycles(b) The frequency and amplitude of vibration of

waves generated by an earthquake(c) Characteristics of sand and Relative density(d) All of these

311. The laboratory tests on a sample yielded thefollowing results :Plasticity index : 32%,

229


Liquidity index : — 0.15,Activity number :1.58.Which of the following inferences can be drawn ?(a) The soil is very stiff.(b) The soil is highly plastic.(c) The soil is active.(d) All of these

312. A point load of 650 kN is applied on the surface ofa thick layer of clay. Using Boussinesq’s elasticanalysis, what is approximate value of the estimatedvertical stress at a depth 2m and a radial distanceof 1.0 m from the point of application of load?(a) 55 kN/m2 (b) 44 kN/m2

(c) 41 kN/m2 (d) 37 kN/m2

313. In a braced vertical excavation of 5m height and2.50m width in a cohesive soil having undrainedcohesion equal to 20 kN /m2 and bulk unit weightof 20 kN /m3, what is the factor of safety againstheave failure at its base ?(a) 1.0 (b) 1.20(c) 1.40 (d) 2.0

314. Factor of safety for(a) steel should be based on its yield stress.(b) concrete should be based on its ultimatestress.(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

315. For a reinforced concrete section, the shape of shearstress diagram is(a) wholly parabolic(b) wholly rectangular(c) parabolic above neutral axis and rectangular

below neutral axis(d) rectangular above neutral axis and parabolic

below neutral axis316. Diagonal tension in beam

(a) is maximum at neutral axis(b) decreases below the neutral axis and increases

above the neutrz,1(c) increases below the neutral axis and decreases

above the neutral axis(d) remains same

317. If a beam fails in bond, then its bond strength canbe increased most economically by(a) increasing depth of beam(b) using thinner bars but more in number(c) using thiciker bars but less in number(d) providing vertical stirrups

318. Ratio of the diameter of reinforcing bars and theslab thickness is(a) 1/4 (b) 1/5(c) 1/6 (d) 1/8

319. Which of the following statements is incorrect ?(a) Minimum cross-sectional area of longitudinal

reinforcement in a column is 0.8%.(b) Spacing of longitudinal bars measured along the

periphery of column should not exceed 300 mm.(c) Reinforcing bars in a column should not be less

than 12 mm in diameter.(d) The number of longitudinal bars provided

in a circular column should not be lessthan four.

320. Minimum pitch of transverse reinforcement in acolumn is(a) the least lateral dimension of the member(b) sixteen times the smallest diameter of

longitudinal reinforcement bar to be tied(c) forty-eight times the diameter of transverse

reinforcement(d) lesser of the above three values

321. The main reason for providing number of, reinforcingbars at a support in a simply supported beam is toresist in that zone(a) compressive stress (b) shear stress(c) bond stress (d) tensile stress

322. The limits of percentage p of the longitudinalreinforce-ment in a column is given by(a) 0.15% to 2% (b) 0.8% to 4%(c) 0.8% to 6% (d) 0.8% to 8%

323. In symmetrically reinforced sections, shrinkagestresses in concrete and steel are respectively(a) compressive and tensile(b) tensile and compressive(c) both compressive(d) both tensile

230


324. The purpose of reinforcement in prestressed concreteis to(a) provide adequate bond stress(b) resist tensile stresses(c) impart initial compressive stress in

concrete(d) all of these

325. Select the incrorrect statement(a) The loss of prestress is more in pretensioning

sys-tem than in posttensioning system.(b) Pretensioning system has greater certainty about

its durability(c) For heavy loads and large spans in buildings or

bridges, post-tensioning system is cheaper thanpretensioning system

(d) none of these326. Cube strength of controlled concrete to be used for

pretensioned and post-tensioned work respectivelyshould not be less than(a) 35 MPa and 42 MPa(b) 42 MPa and 35 MPa(c) 42 MPa and 53 Mpa(d) 53 MPa and 42 MPa

327. Prestressing losses in post-tensioned andpre-tensioned beams are respectively(a) 15% and 20% (b) 20% and 15%(c) 15% and 15% (d) 20°A and 20%

328. Bond strength between steel reinforcement and con-crete is affected by(a) steel properties (b) concrete properties(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

329. Bond strength between steel and concrete is due to(a) friction(b) adhesion(c) both friction and adhesion(d) none of these

330. In limit state design, the maximum‘limit imposed byIS : 456-1978 on the redistribution of moments instatically indeterminate beams is(a) 10% (b) 15%(c) 20% (d) 30%

331. Percentage of steel for balanced design of a singlyreinforced rectangular section by limit state methoddepends on(a) characteristic strength of concrete(b) yield strength of steel(c) modulus of elasticity of steel(d) all of these

332. In reinforced concrete, pedestal is defined as acompression member, whose effective length doesnot exceed its least lateral dimension by(a) 12 times (b) 3 times(c) 16 times (d) 8 times

333. Flexural shear failure in a reinforced concrete beam(a) occurs under large bending moment and

less shear force(b) results in cracks which are normally at 90°

with the horizontal(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

334. The following two statements are made withreference to a simply supported under- reinforcedRCC beam:L Failure takes place by crushing of concrete beforethe steel has yielded.II. The neutral axis moves up as the load isincreased. With reference to the above statements,which of the follwoing aplies?(a) Both the statements are false.(b) I is true but II is false.(c) Both the statements are ture.(d) I is false but II9is true.

335. Read the following two statements L Maximum strainin concrete at the outermost compression fibre istaken to be 0.0035 in bending.II. The maximum compressive strain in concrete in

axial compression is taken as 0.002. Keepingthe provisions of IS 456-2000 on limit state inmind, which of the following is true :

(a) Statement I is true but II is false(b) Statement I is false but II is true(c) Both Statement I and II are true(d) Both Statement I and II are false

231


336. As per the provisions of IS 456-2000, the (shortterm) modulus of elasticity of M25 grade concrete(in N/mm2) can be assumed to be,(a) 25000 (b) 28500(c) 30000 (d) 36000

337. As per the provisions of IS 456-2000, in the limitstate method for, design of beams the limiting valUeof the depth of neutral axis in a reinforced concretebeam of effective depth ‘d’ is given as:(a) 0.53d(b) 0.48d(c) 0.46d(d) any of the above depending on the different

grades of steel338. The effective length of a column in a reinforced

concrete building frame, as per IS: 456 2000, isindependent of the(a) frame type, i.e., braced (no sway) )r un-braced

(with sway)(b) span of the beam(c) height of the column(d) loads acting on the frame

339. The working stress method of design specifies thevalue of modular ratio, m = 280/(3 act)), wherecythc is the allowable stress in bending compressionin concrete. to what extent does the above value ofm make any allowance for the creep of concrete ?GATE(a) No compensation(b) Full compensation(c) Partial compensation(d) The two are unrelated

340. Maximum strains in an extreme fibre in concreteand in the tension reinforcement (Fe.415 grade andEs = 200 kN/mm2) in a balanced section at limitstate of flexure are repectively(a) 0.0035 and 0.0038 (b) 0.002 and 0.0018(c) 0.0035 and 0.0041 (d) 0.002 and 0.0031

341. Top ring beam of an Intze tank carries a hooptension of 120 kN. The beam crosssection is 250mm wide and 400 mm ,deep and it is reinforcedwith 4 bars of 20 mm diameter of Fe 415 grade.

Modular ratio of the concrete is 10. The tensilestress in N/mm2 in the concrete is(a) 1.02 (b) 1.07(c) 1.20 (d) 1.32

342. The state of the two dimensional stresses acting ona concrete lamina consists of a direct tensile stress,1.5 N/mm2, and shear stress ‘T = 1.20 N/mm2,which cause cracking of concrete. Then the tensilestrength ofthe concrete in N/mm2 is(a) 1.50 (b) 2.08(c) 2.17 (d) 2.29

343. A concrete column carries an axial load of 450 kNand a bending moment of 60 kN m at its base. Anisolated footing of size 2m by 3m, with 3m sidealong the plane of the bending moment, is providedunder the column Centres of gravity of column andfooting coincide. The net maximum and the minimumpressures in kN/m2 on soil under the footing arerespectively,(a) 95 and 55 (b) 95 and 75(c) 75 and 55 (d) 75 and 75(In below two questions)A reinforced concrete beam, size 200 mm wide and300 mm deep overall is simply supported over aspan of 3 m. It is subjected to two point loads P ofequal magnitude placed at middle third points. Thetwo loads are gradually increased simultaneously.Beam is rein forced with 2 HYSD bars of 16 mmdiameter placed at an effective cover of 40 mm onbottom face and nominal shear reinforcement. Thecharacteristic compressive strength and the bendingtensile strength of the concrete are 20.0 N/mm2

and 2.2 N/mm2respectivey344. Ignoring the presence of tension reinforcement, find

the value of load P in kN when the first flexurecrack will develop in the beam.(a) 4.5 (b) 5.0(c) 6.6 (d) 7.5

345. The theoretical failure load of the beam forattainment of limit state of collapse in flexure is(a) 23.71 kN (b) 25.6 kN(c) 28.71 kN (d) 31.6 kN

232


346. In the limit state design method of concretestructures4 the recommended partial material safetyfactor (7m) for steel according to IS : 456-2000 is(a) 1.5 (b) 1.15(c) 1.00 (d) 0.87

347. For avoiding the limit state of collapse, the safety ofR.C. structures is checked for appropriatedcombinations of dead load (DL), imposed load orlive load (IL), wind load (WL) and earthqualde load(EL). Which of the following load combinations isNOT considered ?(a) 0.9 DL + 1.5 WL(b) 1.5 DL + 1.5 WL(c) 1.5 DL + 1.5 WL + 1.5 EL(d) 1.2 DL + 1.2IL + 1.2 WL

348. An R.C.short column with 300 mm x 300 mm squarecross-section is made of M20 grade concrete andhas 4 numbers, 20 mm diameter longitudinal bars ofFe 415steel. It is under th action of a concentricaxial compressive load. Ignoring the reduction inthe area of concrete due to steel bars, the ultimateaxial load carrying capacity of the column is(a) 1659 kN (b) 1548 kN(c) 1198 kN (d) 1069 kN

349. An R.0 square footing of side length 2 m and uniformeffective depth 200rnm is provided for a 300 mm X300mm columm. The line of action of the verticalcompressive load passes through the centroid ofthe footing as well as of the column. If the magnitudeof the load is 320 kN, the nominal transverse (oneway) shear stress in the footing is(a) 0.26 N/mm2 (b) 0.30 N/mm2

(c) 0.34 N/mm2 (d) 0.75 N/mm2

350. The propagation of a shear crak in aprestressedconcrete member depends on(a) tensile reinforCement(b) compression reinforcement(c) shear reinforcement(d) shape of the cross-section of the beam

351. As compared to working stress method of design,limit state method takes concrete to(a) a higher stress level(b) a lower stress level

(c) the same stress level(d) sometimes higher but generally lower stress level

352. For the purpose of design as per IS: 456, deflectionof RC slab or beam is limited to(a) 0.2% ofspan (b) 0.25% of span(c) 0.4% of span (d) 0.45% of span

353. As per IS: 456, side face reinforcement, not lessthan 0.05% of web area, is provided on each sidewhen the depth of web is not less than(a) 300mm (b) 400mm(c) 500mm (d) 750mm

354. The yield line theory is a(a) lower bound method of design of over-

reinforced slabs(b) lower bound method of design of under-

reinforced slabs(c) upper bound method of analysis of under-

reinforced slabs(d) upper bound method of analysis of over-

reinforced slabs355. For a reinforced concrete beam section the shape

of the shear stress diagram is(a) parabolic over the whole section with maximum

value at the neutral axis(b) parabolic above the neutral axis and

rectangular below the neutral axis(c) linearly varying as the distance fromthe neutral

axis(d) dependent on the magnitude of shear

reinforcement provided356. In a reinforced concrete T-beam (in which the flange

is in compression). The position of neutral axis will(a) be within the flange(b) be within the web(c) depend on the thickness of flange in

relation to total depth and percentage ofreinforcement

(d) at the junction of flange and web357. The reinforcement in reinforced concrete shall have

concrete cover, the thickness of such cover shall benot less than(a) 25 mm(b) the diameter of bar

233



358. In an axially loaded spirally reinforced short column,the concrete inside the core is subjected to(a) bending and compression(b) biaxial compression(c) triaxial compression(d) uniaxial compression

359. The maximum permissible shear stress Tmax givenin BIS 456-1978 is based on(a) diagonal tension failure(b) diagonal compression failure(c) flexural tension failure(d) flexural compression failure

360. The design for the limit stateof collapse in flexureis based on which of the following assumptions ?(a) Plane sections normal to the axis remain

plane after bending.(b) The relationship between the compressive stress

distribution in concrete and the strain in concretemay be assumed to the rectangular, trapezoidal,parabolic orany other shape which results inprediction of strength in substantial agreementwith the results of tests.


361. In case of deep beam or in thin webbed R.C.C,members, the first crack form is(a) flexural crack(b) diagonal crack due to compression(c) diagonal crack due to tension(d) shear crack

362. The stress block in concrete for an estimate ofultimate strength in flexure of a prestressed beam(a) should be parabolic(b) should be parabolic-rectangular(c) should be rectangular(d) may be of ary shape which provides

agreement with the test data363. The chances of diagonal tension cracks in R.C.C.

member reduce when(a) axial compression and shear force act

simultaneously

(b) axial tension and shear force actsimultaneously

(c) only shear force act(d) flexural and shear force act simultaneously

364. The probability of failure implied in limit state designis of the order of(a) 10-2 (b) 10-3

(c) 10-4 (d) 10-5

365. Which of the following deformations are importantin case of deep beams when compared to flexurealone ?(a) shear (b) axial(c) torsional (d) bearing

366. The maximum depth of neutral axis for a beamwith d as the effective depth, in limit state methodof design for Fe 415 steel is(a) 0.46 d (b) 0.48 d(c) 0.50 d (d) 0.53 d

367. A compression member has a centre to centre lengthof 4.0 m. It is fixed at one end and hinged at theother end. The effective length of the column is(a) 4.0 m (b) 3.2 m(c) 2.8 m (d) 2.6 m

368. Losses in prestress in pre-tensioning system aredue to(a) elastic deformation of concrete when wires are

tensioned successively(b) friction(c) shrinkage and creep of concrete(d) all of these

369. The maximum deflection in timber beams or jointshould not be greater than(a) span/300 (b) span/325(c) span/360 (d) span/380

370. A simply supported rectangular beam of span 20.0m is subjected to u.d.l. The minimum effective depthrequired to check deflection of this beam, whenmodification factor for tension and compression are0.9 and 1.1 respectively, will be(a) 2.0 m (b) 1.8 m(c) 1.3 m (d) 1.0 m

371. Prestressing of indeterminate structures should takecare of

234


(a) High strength concrete and High tensile steel(b) Load balancing(c) Partial safety factors(d) All of these

372. A trapezoidal combined footing for two axiaily loadedcolumns is provided when(a) Width of the footing near the heavier column is

restricted.(b) Projections of the footing beyond the

heavier columns are restricted.(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

373. In case of two-way slab, deflection of the slab is(a) primarily a function of the long span(b) primarily a function of the short span(c) independent of the span, long or short(d) mostly long span but sometimes short span

374. A reinforced concrete beam of 10 m effective spanand 1 m effective depth is supported on 500 mm x500 mm columns. If (oral uniformly distributedload on the beam is 10 MN/ m, the design shearforce for the beam is(a) 50 MN (b) 47.5 MN(c) 37.5 MN (d) 43 MN

375. In pre-tensioning process of pre-stressing, thetendons are(a) bonded to the concrete(b) partially bonded to the concrete(c) not bonded to the concrete(d) generally bonded but sometimes remainunbonded to the concrete

376. A reinforced concrete beam is to be post-tensionedin such a way that no tensile stress develops at thetime of post-tensioning. The distance of tendon fromthe nearest face must be(a) between d/5 and d/4(b) < d / 6(c) between d/4 and d/3(d) > d/3 (where d is depth of the beam)

377. A simply supported RC beam carries UDL and isreferred to as beam A. A similar beam is pre-stressed and carries the same UDL as the beam A.

This beam is referred to as beam B. The mid-spandeflection of beam A will be(a) more than that of beam B(b) less than that of beam B(c) same as that of beam B(d) generally less but sometimes more depending

upon the magnitude of UDL378. In pre-stressed concrete, high grade concrete is

used for(a) controlling the pre-stress loss(b) having concrete of low,ductility(c) having concrete of high brittleness(d) having low creep

379: In the Limit state design of pre-stressed concretestructures, strain distribution is assumed to be(a) linear:(b) non-linear(c) parabolic(d) parabolic and rectangular

380. Under-reinforced concrete flexural members(a) are deeper(b) can undergo larger deflection(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

381. A simply supported post-tensioned pre- stressedconcrete beam of span L is prestressed by astraighttendon at a uniform eccentricity ‘e’ below thecentroidal axis. If magnitude of prestressing forceis P and flexural rigidity of beam is El, then maximumcentral deflection of the beam is(a) PeL2/EI (downwards)(b) PeL2/481 (upwards)(c) PeL2/8El (upwards)(d) PeL2/8 El (downwards)

382. Minimum tension steel in RC beam needs to beprovided to(a) prevent sudden failure(b) arrest crack width(c) control excessive deflection(d) prevent surface hair cracks

383. In the limit state design method(a) it ensures adequate safety of structure against

collapse

235


(b) actual stresses developed at collapse differconsiderably from the theoretical values


384. Temperature and shrinkage steel is provided inreinforced concrete slabs because(a) it occupies larger area(b) its thickness is less(c) it is a main structural element(d) it is a flexural member

385. Minimum shear reinforcement in beams is providedin the form of stirrups to resist(a) extra shear force due to live load(b) the effect of shrinkage of concrete(c) principal tension(d) shear cracks at the bottom of beam

386. Diagonal tension reinforcement is provided in abeamas(a) longitudinal bars(b) bent up bars(c) helical reinforcement(d) 90° bend at the bends of main bars

387. The critical sectioin for computing design shear forcein an R.C. beam where the supports exert acompressive reaction is at(a) the centre of support(b) the face of support(c) a distance of half of effective depth from

the face of support(d) a distance of effective depth from the face of

support388. Doubly reinforced beams are recommended when

(a) depth of the beam is restricted(b) breadth of the beam is restricted(c) both depth and breadth are restricted(d) shear is high

389. In a reinforced concrete member, the best way toensure adequate bond is to(a) provide minimum number of large diameter bars(b) provide large number of smaller diameter

bars(c) increase the cover for reinforcement(d) provide additional stirrups

390. M 40 concrete is preferred to M 20 concrete forprestressed concrete to(a) overcome bursting stresses at the ends(b) avoid brittle failure of concrete(c) eliminate the effect of shrinkage(d) economise the use of cement

391. Minimum shear reinforcement is provided to(a) resist shear force at the support(b) resist shear on account of accidental torsion(c) arrest the longitudinal cracks on side faces

due to shrinkage and temperature variation(d) resist shear in concrete developing on account

of non-homogeneity of concrete392. In a cantilever beam carrying gravity load, main

reinforcement is provided(a) above the neutral axis(b) as vertical stirrups(c) as a helical reinforcement(d) below the neutral axis

393. Characteristic strength of concrete is(a) higher than the average cube strength(b) lower than the average cube strength(c) the same as the average cube strength(d) higher than 90% of the average cube strength

394. What is the value of minimum reinforcement (incase of Fe 415) in a slab ?(a) 0.1% (b) 0.12%(c) 0.15% (d) 0.2%

395. What is the value of flexural strength of % M25 concrete ?(a) 4.0 MPa (b) 3.5 MPa(c) 3.0 MPa (d) 1.75 MPa

396. What should be the minimum grade of reinforcedconcrete in and around sea coast construction ?(a) M 35 (b) M 30(c) M 25 (d). M 20

397. Which one of the following sections performsbetter on the ductility criterion ?(a) Balanced section(b) Over-reinforced section(c) Under-reinforced section(d) Non-prismatic section

236


398. On which of the following concepts is the basicprinciple of structural design based ?(a) Weak column strong beam(b) Strong column and weak beam(c) Equally strong column-beam(d) Partial weak column-beam

399. Which of the following systems of pre-stressingis suitable for pretensioned members ?(a) Freyssinet system(b) Magnel-Blaton system(c) Hoyer system(d) Gifford-Udall system

400. What is the minimum number of longtudinalbarsprovided in a reinforced concrete column of circularcross-section ?(a) 4 (b) 5(c) 6 (d) 8

401. In an under-reinforced concrete beam(a) actual depth of neutral axis is less than the

critical depth of neutral axis.(b) moment of resistance is less than that of

balanced sections.(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

402. Which of the following method is employed tomanufacture pre-stressed concrete sleepers forthe railways ?(a) Post-tensioning(b) Pre-tensioning(c) Pre-tensioning followed by posttension ing(d) Partial pre-stressing

403. As per IS : 456-2000,(a) There is an upper limit on the nominal shearstress in beams (ever withshear reinforcement)due to the possibility of crushing of concrete indiagonal compression.(b) A rectangular slab whose length is equal

to its width may not be a two-way slabforsome

(b) support conditions.(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

404. The distance between theoretical cut-off point andactual cut-off point in respect of the curtailment ofreinforcement of reinforced concrete beams shouldnot be less than(a) Development length(b) 12 x dia of bar or effective depth whichever

is greater(c) 24 x dia of bar or effective depth whichever is

greater(d) 30 x dia of bar or effective depth whichever is

greater405. Shear strength of concrete in a reinforced concrete

beam is a function of(a) compressive strength of concrete(b) percentage of longitudinal reinforcement intension in the section(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

406. An axially loaded column is of 300 x 300 mm size.Effective length of column is 3 m. What is theminimum ecentricity of the axial load for thecolumn ?(a) 0 (b) 10 mm(c) 16 mm (d) 20 mm

407. A beam is designed for uniformly distributed loadscausing compression in the supporting columns.Where is the critical section for shear ? (d iseffective depth of beam and Ld is developmentlength)(a) A distance Ld/3 from the face of the support(b) A distanced from the face of the support(c) At the centre of the support(d) At the mid span of the beam

408. A T-beam behaves as a rectangular beam of widthequal to its flange if its neutral axis(a) coincides with centroid of reinforcement(b) coincides with centroid of T-section(c) remains within the flange(d) remains in the web

409. An ordinary mild steel bar has been prestressed toa working stress of 200 MPa. Young’s modulus ofsteel is 200 GPa. Permanent negative strain due to

237


shrinkage and creep is 0.0008. How much is theeffective stress left in steel ?(a) 184 MPa (b) 160 MPa(c) 40 MPa (d) 16 MPa

410. The limits of percentage p of the longitudinalreinforcement in a column is given by(a) 0.15% to 2% (b) 0.8% to 4%(c) 0.8% to 6% (d) 0.8% to 8%

411. In a spherical dome subjected to concentrated loadat crown or uniformly distributed load, the meridionalforce is always(a) zero(b) tensile(c) compressive(d) tensile or compressive

412. In reinforced concrete, pedestal is defined as acompression member, whose effective length doesnot exceed its least lateral dimension by(a) 12 times (b) 3 times(c) 16 times (d) 8 times

413. The purpose of lateral ties in short RC columns isto(a) avoid buckling of longitudinal bars.(b) facilitate construction.(c) facilitate compaction of concrete.(d) increase the load carrying capacity of the

columns.414. In a doubly reinforced rectangular beam, the

allowable stress in compression steel is(a) equal to the permissible stress in tension in steel(b) more than the permissible stress in tension in

steel(c) less than the permissible stress in tension

in steel(d) not related to the permissible concrete

compression stress.415. The side face reinforcement, if required, in a

T-beam will be(a) 0.1% of the web area(b) 0.15% of the web area(c) 0.2% to 0.3% of the web area depending upon

the breadth of the web(d) half the longitudinal reinforcement.

416. In working stress design of under reinforced RCsections(a) The stress in steel in tension will reach its

maximum permissible value first.(b) The moment of resistance will be less than that

of the balanced section.(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

417. Which one of the following sections of equal cross-sectional area can resist the torsional moment ofRCC beam section more efficiently when workingstress design is being adopted?(a) An unsymmetrical I-section(b) A box section(c) A•solid rectangular section(d) A symmetrical I-section

418. Loss of stress with time at constant strain in steelis called(a) relaxation (b) creep(c) shrinkage (d) ductility

419. Deep beams are designed for(a) shear force only(b) bending moment only(c) both shear force and bending moment(d) bearing

420. Hoop stress in a dome subjected to uniformlydistributed load is(a) always compressive(b) tensile at sections whose radius vectors are at

angles less than 51°51' with the vertical.(c) tensile at sections whose radius vectors

are at angles greater than 51°51' with thevertical.

(d) always tensile.421. For normally used values of material properties and

curing conditions, maximum percentage of loss ofprestress in post-tensioned concrete occurs due to(a) elastic shortening and creep of concrete(b) creep and shrinkage of concrete(c) shrinkage of concrete and relaxation of steel(d) relaxation of steel and elastic shortening of

concrete.

238


422. Concordant profile represents, for a certain set ofexternal loads to some scale,(a) bending moment diagram(b) Williot-Mohr diagram(c) shear force diagram(d) influence line diagram

423. Loss of prestress due to shrinkage of concrete isthe product of(a) modular ratio and percentage of steel(b) modulus of elasticity of concrete and shrinkage

of concrete(c) modulus of elasticity of steel and shrinkage

of concrete(d) modular ratio and modulus of elasticity of steel

424. Minimum clear cover (in mm) to the main steelbars in slab, beam, column and footing respectivelyare(a) 10, 15, 20, 25 (b) 15, 25, 40, 75(c) 20, 25, 30, 40 (d) 20, 35, 40, 75

425. Which one of the following statements is correct?(a) Maximum longitudinal reinforcement in an

axially loaded short column is 6% of grosssectional area

(b) Columns with circular section are providedtransverse reinforcement of helical type only

(c) Spacing of lateral ties can not be more than 16times the diameter of tie bar,

(d) Longitudinal reinforcement bar need not be incontact with lateral ties

426. Torsion resisting capacity of a given RC section(a) decreases with decrease in stirrup spacing.(b) decreases with increase in longitudinal bars.(c) does not depend upon stirrup and longitudihal

steels.(d) increases with the increase in stirrup and

longitudinal steels.427. If a simply supported concrete beam, prestressed

with a force of 2500 kN, is designed by loadbalancing concept for an effective span of 10 mand , to carry a total load of 40 kN/m, then centraldip of the cable profile should be(a) 100 mm (b) 200 mm(c) 300 mm (d) 400 mm

428. In case of pre-tensioned RC beams(a) shrinkage of concrete is of the order of3 x 10-4.(b) relaxation of steel can be ignored.(c) only one wire can be stretched at a time.(d) even mild steel can be used for prestressing.

429. For prestressed structural elements, high strengthconcrete is used primarily because(a) both shrinkage and creep are more.(b) shrinkage is less but creep is more(c) modulus of elasticity and creep values are

higher.(d) of high modulus of elasticity and low creep.

430. Prestressed, concrete is more desirable in case ofcylindrical pipe subjected to(a) internal fluid pressure(b) external fluid pressure(c) equal internal and external fluid pressure(d) end pressures.

431. Yield line theory results in(a) elastic solution(b) lower bound solution(c) upper bound solution(d) unique solution

432. If nominal shear stress (r ) at a section does notexceed permissible shear stress (re ), then(a) minimum shear reinforcement is still

provided.(b) shear reinforcement is provided to resist the

nominal shear stress.(c) no shear reinforcement is provided.(d) shear reinforcement is provided for the

difference of the two.433. In working stress design and ultimate strength design

of reinforced concrete, it is assumed that(a) plane section before bending remains plane after

bending(b) tensile strength of concrete is ignored(c) both (a) and (b)(d) none of these

434. In limit state design, permissible bond stress in thecase of deformed bars is more than that in plainbars by

239


(a) 60% (b) 50%(c) 40% (d) 25%

435. Limit state of serviceability for deflection includingthe effects due to creep, shrinkage and temperatureoccurring after erection of partitions and applicationof finishes as applicable to floors and roofs isrestricted to(a) Span/150 (b) Span/200(c) Span/250 (d) Span/350

436. Shrinkage deflections in case of rectangular beamsand slabs can be eliminated by putting compressionsteel(a) equal to tensile steel(b) more than tensile steel(c) less than tensile steel(d) 25% greater than tensile steel

437. In case of 2-way slab, limiting deflection of the slabis(a) primarily a function of the long span(b) primarily a function of the short span(c) independent of long or short span(d) dependent on both long and short spans

438. From limiting deflection point of view, use of highstrength steel in RC beam results in(a) reduction in depth(b) no change in depth(c) increase in depth(d) increase in width

439. For maximum sagging bending moment at supportin a continuous RC beam, live load should be placedon(a) spans adjacent: to the support plus alternate

spans(b) all the spans except the spans adjacent to the

support(c) spans next to the adjacent spans of the

support plus alternate spans(d) spans adjacent to supports only.

440. Design of one-way RC slabs for concentrated loadis done by(a) using Pigeaud’s moment coefficients(b) taking slab strip of unit width containing the

load

(c) taking slab strip of width effective inresisting the load

(d) taking orthogonal slab strips of unit widthcontaining the load.

441. In Pigeaud’s coefficient method for the analysis ofan interior panel of a T-beam bridge(a) notation for coefficients as ax4 and ay4 includes

suffix 4 since the panel is continuous on all thefour edges.

(b) Poisson’s ratio of concrete has no contri-bution.(c) applicability is restricted, to the case when

wheel load is centrally placed.(d) dispersion of load is considered through wearing

coat only.442. A T-beam roof section has the following particulars :

Thickness of slab = 100 mmWidth of rib = 300 mmDepth of beam = 500 mmCentre to centre distance of beams = 3.0 mEffective span of beams = 6.0 mDistance between points of contraflexure is = 3.60mThe effective width of flange of the beam is(a) 3000 mm(b) 1900 mm(c) 1600 mm(d) 1500 mm

443. In a load balanced prestressed concrete beam underself load, the cross-section is subjected to(a) axial stress(b) bending stress(c) axial and shear stress(d) axial and bending stress

444. A prestressed concrete beam 150 mm x 300 mmsupports a live load of 5 kN/m over a simple spanof 8 m. It has a parabolic cable having aneccentricity of 75 mm at mid span and zero at theends. The prestressing force required to maintainthe net resultant stress at the bottom fibre at midspan as zero under the action of D.L. + L.L. +prestress is(a) 239 kN (b) 293 kN(c) 302 kN (d) 392 kN

240


445. A partially prestressed member is one in which(a) tensile stresses and cracking are permitted

under service loads.(b) no tensile stresses are permitted under service

loads.(c) mild steel is used in addition to prestressing

steel.(d) tensile stresses are permitted but not cracking

at service loads.446. If load carrying capacity of a column designed by

working stress method is 500 kN, then collapseload of the column is(a) 500.0 kN (b) 662.5 kN(c) 750.0 kN (d) 1100.0 kN

447. Shear span is defined as the zone where(a) bending moment is zero(b) shear force is zero(c) shear force is constant(d) bending moment is constant.

448. Which one of the following statements is correct?(a) Shear cracks start due to high diagonal

tension in case of beams with their websand high prestressing force.

(b) Shear design for a prestressed concrete beamis based on elastic theory.

(c) In the zone where bending moment is dominantand shear is insignificant, cracks occur at 20°to 30°.

(d) After diagonal cracking, the mechanics of sheartransfer in a prestressed concrete member isvery much different from that in reinforcedconcrete members.

449. For ultimate load design of prestressed concretegirders used for bridges, combination of load factorsused is (here DL and LL are dead and live loadsrespectively)(a) 1.5 D.L. + 2.5 L.L.(b) 1.0 D.L. + 2.5 L.L.(c) 1.0 D.L. + 2.0 L.L.(d) 2.0 D.L. + 2.0 L.L.

450. Deflection can be controlled by using appropriate(a) aspect ratio (b) modular ratio(c) span/depth ratio (d) water/cement ratio

451. In limit state approach, spacing of mainreinforcement controls primarily.(a) collapse (b) cracking(c) deflection (d) durability

452. Unequal top and bottom reinforcement in areinforced concrete section leads to(a) creep deflection(b) shrinkage deflectiOn(c) long term deflection(d) large, deflection.

453. Reduction co-efficient of a reinforced concretecolumn with an effective length of 4.8 m and size250 x 300 mm is(a) 0.80 (b) 0.85(c) 0.90 (d) 0.95

454. If d is effective depth, b is width and D is overalldepth, then maximum area of compressionreinforcement in a beam is(a) 0.04 bd (b) 0.04 bD(c) 0.12 bd (d) 0.12 bD

455. Final deflection due to all loads including the effectsof temperature, creep and shrinkage and measuredfrom as-cast level of supports of floors, roofs andall other horizontal members should not exceed(a) span/350(b) span/300(c) span/250(d) span/200

456. A reinforced concrete slab is 75 mm thick. Themaximum size of reinforcement bar that can beused is(a) 12 mm diameter(b) 10 mm diameter(c) 8 mm diameter(d) 6 mm diameter

457. At the time of initial tensioning, The maximum tensilestress in tendon immediately behind the anchorageshall not exceed.(a) 50% of the ultimate tensile strength of the wire

or bar or strand(b) 80% of the ultimate tensile strength of the

wire or bar or strand

241


(c) 40% of the ultimate tensile strength of the wireor bar or strand

(d) 60% of the ultimate tensile strength of the wireor bar or strand.

458. The cable for a prestressed concrete simplysupported beam subjected to uniformly distributedload over the entire span should ideally be(a) placed at the centre of cross-section over the

entire span.(b) placed at some eccentricity over the entire span.(c) varying linearly from the centre of cross-section

at the ends to maximum eccentricity at themiddle section.

(d) parabolic with zero eccentricity at the ends-and maximum eccentricity at the centre ofthe span.

459. For a prestressed concrete bridge beam, minimumclear spacing of the cable or group of cables shouldbe(a) 25 nun(b) 25 mm or 6 aim plus the largest size of the

aggregate(c) 40 mm(d) 50 mm

460. Drops are provided in flat slab to resist(a) bending moment(b) thrust(c) shear(d) torsion

461. Flexural collapse in over reinforced beams is due to(a) primary compression failure(b) secondary compression failure(c) primary tension failure(d) bond failure

462. A reinforced cantilever beam of span 4 m, has across-section of 150 x 500 mm. If checked forlateral stability and deflection, the beam will(a) fail in deflection only(b) fail in lateral stability only(c) fail in both deflection and lateral stability(d) satisfy requirements of deflection and lateral

stability.

463. In an RCC beam, side face reinforcement isprovided if its depth exceeds(a) 300 mm (b) 500 mm(c) 700 mm (d) 750 mm

464. Maximum spacing of vertical reinforcement in RCCwall should not exceed(a) the thickness of wall(b) 1.5 times the thickness of wall(c) 2 times the thickness of wall(d) 3 times the thickness of wall.

465. In a reinforced concrete retaining wall, a shear keyis provided, if(a) shear stress in the vertical stem is excessive.(b) shear force in the toe slab is more than that in

the heel slab.(c) retaining wall is not safe against sliding.(d) retaining wall is not safe against over turning.

466. Magnitude of loss of prestress due to relaxation ofsteel is in the range of(a) zero to 1% (b) 2 to 8%(c) 8 to 12% (d) 12 to 14%

467. In the limit state method of design, the failurecriterion for reinforced concrete beams and columnsis(a) Maximum principal stress theory(b) Maximum principal Strain theory(c) Maximum shear stress theory(d) Maximum strain energy theory

468. Combination of partial safety factors for loads underlimit state of collapse and limit state of serviceabilitywill be(a) 1.5 (D.L + L.L) or 1.5 (D.L. + W.L) or1.2

(D.L. + L.L. + W.L) and D.L. + 0.8 (L.L +W.L.)

(b) 1.5 (D.L. + L.L) and D.L + 0.8 (L.L + W.L)(c) 1.5 (D.L + L.L) or 1.5 (D.L. + W.L) or 1.2

+ L.L. + W.L) and 1.0 + L. L) or 1.0(D.L. + W.L) or D.L + 0.8 (L.L + W.L.)

(d) 1.2 (D.L + L.L + W. L) and 1.0 (D.L. + L.L)or 1.0 (D.L + W.L) or D.L. + 0.8 (L.L + W.L)

469. Bending moment coefficients for continuous RCslabs in IS 456-1978 code is based on(a) Pigeaud’s method

242


(b) Marcus’s method(c) Yield-line theory(d) Westerguard’s mathematical analysis

470. Sum of nodal forces at any yield line intersectionina slab is(a) zero(b) infinity(c) independent of the reinforcement(d) indeterminate

471. Ratio of the lateral pressure of the bulk storagematerial at the time of emptying to that at the timeof filling is(a) less than one(b) equal to or less than one(c) equal to one(d) greater than one

472. In the design of prestressed concrete structures,which of the following limit states will come underthe limit states of serviceability?(a) Deflection (b) Cracking(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of these

473. In a RCC beam of breadth b and overall depth Dexceeding 750 mm, side face reinforcement requiredand the allowable area of maximum tension ireinforcement shall be respectively(a) 0.2% and 0.02 bD(b) 0.3% and 0.03(c) 0.1% and 0.04 bD(d) 0.4% and 0.01 bD

474. As per IS : 456-1978 the vertical deflection limit forbeams may generally be assumed to be satisfiedprovided that ratio of span to effective depth of acontinuous beam of span up to 10 m is not to begreater than(a) 35 (b) 26(c) 20 (d) 18

475. Negative moment in reinforced concrete beams atthe location of supports is generally much higherthan the positive span moment. This is primarilydue to curvature at the supports being(a) very high (b) very low(c) zero (d) of reversing nature

476. In the conventional prestressing, the diagonal tensionin concrete(a) Increases(b) Decreases(c) does not change(d) may increase or decrease

477. Beam sections of reinforced concrete designed inaccordance with ultimate strength or limit statedesign approach, as compared to section designedby working stress method for the same conditio ofload and span, and the same width, usually hav(a) a larger depth and smaller amoun reinforcement(b) the same depth and same reinforcement(c) smaller depth and more reinforcement(d) same depth as that of a deep beam

------------------

Documents

Gadhvai sir Engginearing English. pmd. proof-1 Dt. 11-11 ...gadhaviscurrentaffairsmagazine.com/RecruitmentsPDF/GPSC ENGIN… · E:\Manish\Gadhavi Sir\Gadhvai sir Engginearing English